Shock and Vibration Damping Components

CATALOG vibrationmounts.com V100 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Shock and Vibration Damping Components

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

Catalog V100 Table of Contents PAGE

Introduction...... ii Unique Features of This Catalog ...... iii Sales Conditions ...... iv Pictorial Index ...... v Part Number Index...... x Listing of Additional Cylindrical Mounts ...... xi Selection Procedure for Rubber Mounts ...... xii

SECTION PRODUCTS PAGE

1 Stud & Nut Type Mounts ...... 1-1 2 Base Plate Fastened Mounts ...... 2-1 3 Wheels, Leveling & Foot Mounts...... 3-1 4 Suspension Mount...... 4-1 5 Spring, Steel Mesh & Cable Mounts ...... 5-1 6 Bumpers, Shock Absorbers & Channel Mounts ...... 6-1 7 Bushings & Grommets...... 7-1 8 Pads & Tapes ...... 8-1 9 Couplings ...... 9-1

TECHNICAL SECTION

T1 Vibration and Shock Isolation ...... T1-1 T2 Shaft Couplings ...... T2-1

Alphabetical Index ...... A-0

Advanced Antivibration Components 2101 Jericho Turnpike, Box 5416, New Hyde Park, NY 11042-5416 Phone: 516-328-3662 FAX: 516-328-3365 www.vibrationmounts.com

NOTE: We reserve the right to make changes and corrections without notice. Every effort has been made to provide accurate technical & product information. The company disclaims responsibility for any error or omission regarding technical & product information published. © 2004 Advanced Antivibration Components / Division of Designatronics, Inc. All rights reserved herein and no portion of this catalog may be reproduced without the prior consent in writing of the company. Printed in Canada by Webcom Ltd.

i ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Introduction

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

Designatronics, Inc., with its divisions and subsidiaries, has been involved since 1960 in the manu- facture and distribution of different mechanical and electronic components.

Advanced Antivibration Components (AAC) is the division of Designatronics devoted to marketing products exclusively related to elimination of vibration, energy absorption and protection of components and devices from shock and possible destruction.

This is, today, an extremely important field, since instrumentation and recording devices are playing more and more important roles in our daily lives. These devices are becoming miniaturized and portable and, as a result, are becoming exposed to unexpected hazards.

In addition, different rotating machinery, moving vehicles, machine tools, household appliances, etc. all require vibration control to eliminate undesirable effects that they may cause to their surroundings.

The understanding of the subject of Vibration and Shock requires some amount of theoretical knowl- edge of the theories which govern its causes and subsequent propagation. For this reason, an extensive Technical Section, which includes solved problems, is included in this publication.

This handbook contains the broadest offering available from a single source related to antivibration products. In order to facilitate the selection of the proper product, an attempt was made to classify and present the products in an especially organized sequence.

Furthermore, since our company is continuously providing services to the Design, Engineering and Manufacturing segments for the last 44 years, we are keenly aware of the fact that immediate availability of components is usually required. Therefore, all items shown in this catalog are available from stock.

I wish to acknowledge and to congratulate our Engineering staff and our Graphic Communications Department for organizing and producing this handbook in such an extensive, attractive and explicit manner.

Martin Hoffman President DESIGNATRONICS INC.

ii ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Unique Features of This Catalog

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

1) Our sister division, SDP, started marketing Vibration Laboratory at Wayne State University, Detroit, Michigan. Mounts in its first catalog published in 1971. It contained He is a Fellow of the American Society of Mechanical only 24 pages of this type of product. Subsequently, in Engineers and of the Society of Manufacturing Engineers, 1978, a special separate volume: Handbook of Vibration and an Active Member of the International Institution for Mounts was published. It contained a brief Technical Production Engineering Research (CIRP). He is the Section, but it reached a 55-product page size. The holder of 21 US patents and has authored many books importance of this product line kept growing and, as a and technical articles, some of which are listed below. result of it, in 1990 the Vibration and Shock Mount Handbook was published. It contained a 52-page 4) Our previous catalogs included only conventionally known Technical Section and 89 pages of products. More vibration elimination components. This catalog also than 15,000 copies were distributed. Subsequently, the features shock absorbers and shaft couplings capable of Vibration Mount product line became section 8 in the elimination of shock and vibration from shaft to shaft. joint SDP/SI inch and metric catalogs. 5) There are catalogs of this type of product circulated; 2) Feedback from our Engineering, as well as Marketing however, the uniqueness of this catalog is its breadth and Departments, indicated that for proper marketing of this versatility. In addition to this, all products featured are product line an extensive Technical Section is needed, available from stock for immediate delivery. This feature which was not available in the joint SDP/SI Catalogs. In is extremely important for new designs where prototype addition to this, many new product lines related to testing is an imperative. vibration elimination became available worldwide. These facts gave rise to the publishing of this catalog in order to 6) In addition to the listed stock items, tooling is available for provide proper support and marketing capabilities, and many types and sizes of cylindrical vibration mounts. ADVANCED ANTIVIBRATION COMPONENTS Company These are available with metric or inch size studs. In spite was created as a separate Division of Designatronics Inc. of the fact that only small prototype quantities may be required, specially low setup charges will be made for this 3) In order to provide a revised and broadened Technical type of order. For quote requests for these "out of stock " Section, we availed ourselves of the services of Eugene type mounts, please use the numbering system and Rivin, Professor and Director of the Machine Tool procedure shown on the next page.

Publisher Pages ISBN Number Title Publication Mechanical Design of Robots McGraw Hill, August, 1987 325 70529922

Stiffness and Damping in Marcel Dekker, May, 1999 512 Mechanical Design 824717228

Passive Vibration Isolation ASME Press, July, 2003 432 079180187X

The Science of Innovation TRIZ Group, 1997 80 0965835901

iii ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Sales Conditions

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 Ordering by phone: 516-328-3662 Ordering by fax: 516-328-3365 Please call our sales department Monday to Friday between 9 am and 5 pm Eastern time to place an order. Ordering by e-mail: Our staff will also be able to provide you with price and [email protected] stock status for all catalog items. For larger production Please specify part numbers, quantities, desired method quantities, we can fax you a written quote of price and of shipment and delivery dates in your request when delivery. using the ordering methods above. Orders are promptly processed by our Sales Department. Ordering by mail: 2101 Jericho Turnpike, Box 5416 New Hyde Park, NY 11042-5416

Domestic Sales Conditions International Sales Conditions

Open Account Orders: Minimun Order: A minimum order is $50 plus shipping charges. Orders $75 with a $10 charge for our standard export handling; requiring any type of special handling or certification are i.e., $85 minimum billing. If the order exceeds $100, there subject to additional charge. Terms: Net 30 days, is no export handling charge made. F.O.B. New Hyde Park Large Quantity Order: Credit Card Orders: Considerable discounts are made available for large For your convenience, we accept VISA®, Mastercard®, quantity orders. Please request a quote for price and American Express®, Optima®, Discover® and Diners Club®. delivery. You will be billed for merchandise and freight when parts are shipped, subject to credit card approval. A minimum Open Account Orders: order is $50 plus shipping charges. If you have an open account, we will ship and bill you, net 30 days, F.O.B. New Hyde Park, NY. Credit: New accounts having a satisfactory rating will Credit Card Orders: receive open credit terms; otherwise, initial orders may For your convenience, we accept VISA®, Mastercard®, be on a credit card or a C.O.D. basis pending credit ap- American Express®, Optima®, Discover® and Diners Club®. proval. C.O.D. orders are subject to an additional han- You will be billed for merchandise and freight when parts dling charge. are shipped, subject to credit card approval. A minimum order is $85 plus shipping charges. Methods of Shipment: U.P.S., FedEx, DHL, or as specified by customer. Credit: Purchase orders accompanied by Bank References will Returns and Exchanges: be shipped on open credit terms. Otherwise, an irrevo- All returns and exchanges must have prior written ap- cable letter of credit or prepayment is requested. proval. Returns must be made within 15 days after receipt of material. Returned merchandise will be inspected Methods of Shipment: and a charge will be made for restocking. No credit will U.P.S., FedEx, DHL, or as specified by customer. be allowed on used or modified parts, or catalog parts purchased on a quantity basis. Notification of any short- Returns and Exchanges: ages must be reported within 10 days after receipt of All returns and exchanges must have prior written ap- goods. proval. Returns must be made within 15 days after receipt of material. Returned merchandise will be inspected and a charge will be made for restocking. No credit will be allowed on used or modified parts, or catalog parts purchased on a quantity basis. Notification of any short- ages must be reported within 10 days after receipt of goods. Note: Price and specifications are subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made to provide accurate technical and product information. The company disclaims responsibility for any error or omission in the accuracy of the technical and product information published.

iv ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Pictorial Index

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

Square Cylindrical Silicone Gel Ring Pages 1-2 thru 1-4 Pages 1-5 thru 1-32 Page 1-36 Pages 1-37 & 1-38

Base-Flange Base-Silicone Gel Plate Finger-Flex Assemblies Page 2-2 Page 2-3 Page 2-4 thru 2-8 Page 2-9 & 2-10

Cup Base-Cylindrical Base-Dome Base-Neoprene Page 2-11 Pages 2-12 & 2-13 Page 2-14 Pages 2-15 & 2-16

M-Style V-Style Rectangular Page 2-18 Pages 2-19 & 2-20 Pages 2-21 thru 2-23 Mounts v ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Pictorial Index (continued)

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

Level Leveling-ISO Pad Leveling-Conical Leveling-Carry Pages 3-2 thru 3-4 Page 3-5 Page 3-6 Pages 3-7 & 3-8

Suspension-Spring Suspension-Rubber Spring-Elliptic Leaf Spring-Foam Page 4-2 Page 4-3 Pages 5-3 thru 5-5 Pages 5-7 & 5-8

Spring-Damped Spring-Silicone Gel Steel Spring & Mesh Steel Mesh Pages 5-9 thru 5-13 Page 5-14 Pages 5-15 & 5-16 Pages 5-17 thru 5-19

Spring-Suspension Spring-Pedestal Spring-Single Hole Cable Isolators Page 5-20 Page 5-21 Page 5-22 Pages 5-24 thru 5-30 Mounts & Isolators vi ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Pictorial Index (continued)

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

Bumpers–Axial Bumpers–Radial Bumpers–Conical Channel Pages 6-5 & 6-7 Page 6-6 Page 6-8 Page 6-10

Bumpers–Rectangular Shock Absorbers Finger-Flex Bolt–Solo Page 6-11 Pages 6-14 thru 6-21 Pages 7-3 thru 7-7 Page 7-8

Bolt–Tandem Bolt–Ring & Bushing Vinyl Elastomer Grommets Page 7-9 Pages 7-10 thru 7-13 Page 7-14

Bolt–Silicone Gel Bolt Washer Page 7-15 Page 7-16 Mounts, Bumpers, & Shock Absorbers vii ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Pictorial Index (continued)

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

ISO-Pad ISO-Pad Sheets ISO-Pad Page 8-2 Page 8-3 Page 8-4

Square–Rubber Pads–Single Ribbed Pads–Paired Ribbed Page 8-5 Page 8-6 Page 8-7

Pads–Silicone Foam Pads–Silicone Gel Silicone Gel Tape & Chip Page 8-8 Page 8-9 Page 8-10

Pads viii ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Pictorial Index (continued)

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

Couplings–Neo-Flex Couplings–Spline Pages 9-2 thru 9-5 Page 9-6

Couplings–Spider Couplings–Geargrip Page 9-8 Page 9-10

Couplings–Jaw Couplings–"K" Type Page 9-11 Page 9-12

Couplings–One-Piece Couplings–Bantam Page 9-14 Page 9-14 Shaft Couplings ix ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Part Number Index

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

V 5A27-… 9-8 V10R 9-.. 8-4 V10Z 6-500B 2-22 V10Z59MMF… 1-32 V21S01M...12 6-15 V 5A27M… 9-9 V10R10-.. 8-2 V10Z 6-520B 2-23 V10Z59MMM… 1-32 V21S01M...14 6-16 V 5D 1-… 9-11 V10R11-… 8-3 V10Z 6-530C 2-21 V10Z60-FB… 1-29 V21S01M...20 6-17 V 5D 3-… 9-10 V10R12-… 3-5 V10Z 7-1001 6-11 V10Z60-MB… 1-30 V21S01M...25 6-18 V 5D25-… 9-14 V10R14-… 7-14 V10Z 7-1011 6-11 V10Z60-MF… 1-29 V21S01M...33 6-19 V 5D28-… 9-6 V10R78MD… 8-7 V10Z 7-1020.. 6-8 V10Z60-MM… 1-30 V21S01M...45 6-20 V 5D28M… 9-7 V10R78MS… 8-6 V10Z 7M1020.. 6-9 V10Z61M.. 7-15 V21S02M16045 6-14 V 5R 1-.. 9-11 V10R79M… 8-5 V10Z 8-… 1-37 V10Z61MBG.. 5-14 V21S02M18054 6-15 V 5R 3-… 9-10 V10R82-F… 7-14 V10Z12-M… 3-2 V10Z61MMN.. 1-36 V21S02M20063 6-16 V 5R 5-… 9-14 V10R82-M… 7-14 V10Z14-0… 7-16 V10Z61MSF.. 2-3 V21S02M25077 6-17 V 5R25-1 9-14 V10Y15-… 5-3 V10Z14-1… 7-16 V10Z61MTH.. 1-36 V21S02M33103 6-18 V 5R27-… 9-8 V10Y15-…M… 5-5 V10Z19-… 5-15 V10Z62MGC.. 8-10 V21S02M45130 6-19 V 5R27M… 9-9 V10Y15-39210013 5-4 V10Z22-… 5-16 V10Z62MGT.. 8-10 V21S03MCN10100 6-14 V 5R28-.. 9-6 V10Z 1-321.. 1-2 V10Z22M… 5-16 V10Z62MNP… 8-8 V21S03MCN12100 6-15 V 5R28M.. 9-7 V10Z 1-322.. 1-3 V10Z25-0… 3-3 V10Z62MSN.. 8-9 V21S03MCN14… 6-16 V 5R29-.. 9-6 V10Z 1-323.. 1-4 V10Z25-LM.. 3-4 V10Z70-06… 5-24 V21S03MCN20150 6-17 V 5R29M.. 9-7 V10Z 2-300.. 1-9 V10Z27-… 5-18 V10Z70-09… 5-24 V21S03MCN25150 6-18 V 5Z 1-… 9-11 V10Z 2-301.. 1-6 V10Z28-… 5-17 V10Z70-12… 5-25 V21S03MCN33150 6-19 V 5Z 3-… 9-10 V10Z 2-302.. 1-5 V10Z30-… 5-9 V10Z70-15… 5-25 V21S03MCN45150.. 6-20 V 5Z 7-… 9-12 V10Z 2-304.. 1-24 V10Z31-… 5-10 V10Z70-18… 5-26 V21S04MSS10100 6-14 V 5Z 7M… 9-13 V10Z 2-305.. 1-8 V10Z32-… 5-12 V10Z70-25… 5-28 V21S04MSS12100 6-15 V 5Z25-… 9-14 V10Z 2-306.. 1-25 V10Z33-… 5-19 V10Z70-37… 5-29 V21S04MSS14… 6-16 V 5Z27-… 9-8 V10Z 2-307.. 1-7 V10Z34-1139 5-19 V10Z70-50… 5-30 V21S04MSS20150 6-17 V 5Z27M… 9-9 V10Z 2-308.. 1-26 V10Z40-1210.. 2-4 V10Z71MTM… 4-2 V21S04MSS25150 6-18 V 5Z28-… 9-6 V10Z 2-310.. 1-12 V10Z40-1215… 2-5 V10Z72MTG… 4-3 V21S04MSS33150 6-19 V 5Z28M… 9-7 V10Z 2-311.. 1-11 V10Z40-1220… 2-7 V10Z73MAM… 5-7 V21S04MSS45150 6-20 V 5Z29-… 9-6 V10Z 2-312.. 1-15 V10Z40-1240.. 2-11 V10Z74MMG… 2-12 V50FLR-… 9-4 V 5Z29M… 9-7 V10Z 2-314.. 1-14 V10Z40-1260… 2-6 V10Z75MBM… 2-14 V50FLRM… 9-5 V 9C20-… 7-13 V10Z 2-315.. 1-13 V10Z40-1280.. 2-8 V10Z76MSG-.. 3-6 V50FLS-… 9-4 V10C16-… 5-20 V10Z 2-316.. 1-10 V10Z42-… 7-8 V10Z77MAGB… 2-2 V50FLSM… 9-5 V10C17-… 5-21 V10Z 2-317.. 1-9 V10Z42-A… 7-9 V10Z82-R2… 7-11 V50FSR-… 9-2 V10C18-… 5-22 V10Z 2-319.. 1-28 V10Z43MCM… 3-8 V10Z82-R3… 7-11 V50FSRM… 9-3 V10P80-A.. 6-5 V10Z 2-330.. 1-16 V10Z44MCM… 3-7 V10Z82-R4… 7-11 V50FSS-… 9-2 V10P80-AS… 6-7 V10Z 2M300… 1-19 V10Z45MKC… 2-20 V10Z82-R5… 7-12 V50FSSM… 9-3 V10P81-R.. 6-6 V10Z 2M302… 1-17 V10Z46MKD… 2-18 V10Z82-R7… 7-12 V50PLR-… 9-4 V10R 4-1500.. 7-3 V10Z 2M305… 1-18 V10Z47MRM… 1-38 V10Z82-RX303… 7-10 V50PLRM… 9-5 V10R 4-1501.. 7-3 V10Z 2M308… 1-27 V10Z52-F… 2-15 V20S10M… 6-14 V50PLS-… 9-4 V10R 4-1502.. 7-4 V10Z 2M310… 1-21 V10Z53-F… 2-16 V20S12M… 6-15 V50PLSM… 9-5 V10R 4-1503.. 7-4 V10Z 2M311… 1-20 V10Z55MT… 2-13 V20S14M… 6-16 V50PSR-… 9-2 V10R 4-1504.. 7-5 V10Z 2M312… 1-23 V10Z59-FB… 1-31 V20S20M… 6-17 V50PSRM… 9-3 V10R 4-1505.. 7-5 V10Z 2M314… 1-22 V10Z59-MB… 1-31 V20S25M… 6-18 V50PSS-… 9-2 V10R 4-1506.. 7-6 V10Z 4-1550.. 2-9 V10Z59-MF… 1-31 V20S33M… 6-19 V50PSSM… 9-3 V10R 4-1507.. 7-6 V10Z 4-1552.. 2-10 V10Z59MFB… 1-32 V20S45M150.. 6-20 V10R 4-1508.. 7-7 V10Z 4-1553.. 2-10 V10Z59-MM… 1-31 V20S45M150L.. 6-21 V10R 4-1509.. 7-7 V10Z 5-110C 6-10 V10Z59MMB… 1-32 V21S01M...10 6-14

x ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Listing of Additional Cylindrical Mounts

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

HOW TO CREATE AN INQUIRY If you don't see the sizes you want in the product section of this catalog, please send us a request for quote using the coding system shown below to specify the size. Please Note: 1) If any inquiry is received for a size combination for which exact tooling is not available, the next closest size will be quoted. 2) D and H dimensions remain metric irrespective of the studs being inch or metric. 3) For metric studs use letter G for thread size and letter L for length whereas for inch size studs, use letter I for thread size and letter N for length.

TYPE D H THREAD LENGTH DIAMETER WIDTH CODE CODE CODE CODE G or I L or N

Type Description Standard Dimensions Available LENGTH D H G I L N IN 1/16" N H N mm DIA. mm WIDTH mm THREAD INCH THREAD mm LENGTH INCH LENGTH or or CODE CODE CODE CODE CODE CODE L L 6 060 6 060 M3 03 #4-40 03 5 05 3/16 03 MM 8 080 7 070 M4 04 #6-32 04 6 06 1/4 04 D 10 100 7.5 075 M5 05 #8-32 05 10 10 5/16 05 10.5 105 8 080 M6 06 #10-32 06 12 12 3/8 06 I or G 11 110 8.5 085 M8 08 1/4-20 08 15 15 1/2 08 13 130 9 090 M10 10 5/16-16 10 16 16 9/16 09 14.3 143 9.5 095 M12 12 1/2-12 11 20 20 5/8 10 N H or 15 150 9.6 096 M16 16 5/8-11 12 23 23 3/4 12 L 16 160 10 100 M20 20 3/4-10 16 28 28 1 16 18 180 11 110 3/8-16 20 37 37 1-1/4 20 MF D 19 190 12 120 38 38 1-1/2 28 20 200 12.3 123 47 47 2 32 23 230 12.7 127 I or G I or G 25 250 13 130 30 300 15 150 H 32 320 16 160 35 350 17 170 38 380 18 180 EXAMPLE DEPICTED FF 40 400 20 200 D 45 450 22 220 12 33 48 480 25 250 I or G 50 500 26 260 60 600 27 270 65 650 29 290 23 H N 75 750 30 300 or 80 800 33 330 L 100 A00 35 350 PM 38 380 M6 M6 D 40 400 45 450 50 500 55 550 60 600 H 65 650 70 700 EXAMPLE 80 800 MF 230 33 0 G0612 L PF D 85 850 90 900 95 950 I or G 105 A05

xi ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Selection Procedure for Rubber Mounts

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

1. Determine the load that each mount will bear when supporting constraints on allowable deflection, attachment re- the equipment weight. Total weight divided by the number of quirements, etc. However, in the absence of any mounting positions is the load for each mount. This is only true overriding consideration, usually the mount that when having even weight distribution. Otherwise, distribute is selected has its curve closest to the point of weight accordingly. intersection (Step 6c); i.e., the mount with the minimum de- 2. Determine the lowest forcing frequency of the vibration source flection at the applied load. to be supported by the mounts. This is usually equal to the operating speed in revolutions per minute. 7. Select the mount that is designed to operate in your temperature range and environment. 3. Choose the percent isolation that will be satisfactory for the purpose. Except for special cases, 81% isolation is generally considered satisfactory.

4. Referring to the Basic Vibration Chart below, find the Vibration Frequency vs Static Deflection vs Isolation Efficiency static deflection for the forcing frequency (Step 2, above) at the chosen percent isolation (Step 3). Note VIBRATION FREQUENCY (Hz) 11.7 15 10.0 2.5 3.3 5.0 6.7 8.3 10 13.3 16.7 25 33 50 67 that a mount must give at least this minimum static 10.0 25 deflection, with the specific load applied,to provide 9.0 23 8.0 20 the desired isolation. 7.0 18 6.0 15 5. Select the mount series with the physical features 5.0 12.7

(shape, attachment facilities,“fail-safe" safety feature, 4.0 10 load range, etc.) required by the application. 3.0 7.6 6. a) Having selected the mount series, refer to the in

dividual styles, and note the styles whose maxi- 2.0 5.1 mum loads are greater than the load each mount 1.5 3.8 is to carry. 60 8080 9095 99 7085 8593 93 97 ISOLATIONISisIOLATION b) Referring to the load deflection graphs of the styles 1.0 EFFICIENCYEFFICIENCY % % 2.5 .9 2.3 likely to be chosen, locate the applied load value .8 2.0 (Step 1, above) on the appropriate graph; i.e., .7 1.8 .6 1.5 compression and/or shear. .5 1.27

c) Moving horizontally to the right on the graph, lo- .4 1.0 cate the point of intersection with the minimum .3 0.76 static deflection found in step 4. RESONANCERESONANCE NATURALNATURAL d) Mounts with curves above this point of intersec- .2 FREQUENCYFREQUENCY 0.5 tion cannot be used, as the load (Step 1) is not .15 0.38 DEFLECTION (CM) STATIC

sufficient to produce the required minimum de- DEFLECTION (INCHES) STATIC

flection (Step4). .10 0.25 .09 0.23 e) Mounts with curves below the point of intersec- .08 0.2 tion can be used as, at the given load, the deflec- .07 0.18 tion will be greater than the minimum required. .06 0.15 .05 0.13 Note, however, that if the applied load is above REGIONREGION .04 OFOF 0.1 the line x--x on a curve, the mount is not recom- AMPLIFICATIONAMPLIFICATION mended for this static load. .03 0.076 f) More than one style may have load-deflection .02 0.05 curvesthat are suitable. The final selection can depend on other requirements such as the cost .015 0.038 of the mounts, possible in-creased load requirements in the future, relative advantage of addi .01 0.025 100 150 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 tional isolation, space available for the mounts, 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 VIBRATION FREQUENCY (CYCLES PER MINUTE)

xii SECTION 1 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Square Mounts – To 13.8 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 5.1 TO 13.8 POUNDS (2.3 TO 6.3 kgf) Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 2.6 TO 7.1 POUNDS(1.2 TO 3.2 kgf)

S E C T I O N 1 T S E C

3/8 1/2 (9.5) (12.7)

3/8 (9.5)

#8-32 NC (TYP) 3/8 (9.5)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

18 12

16 D D 10 x 14 NOTE: Maximum unthreaded C x C portion of stud does not 12 x COMPRESSION 8 exceed 1/16 inch (1.59 mm). SHEAR x x 10 x x 6 LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS 8 A x x B x

Deflections below the line x–x are LOAD (lb.) LOAD (lb.) B 6 x considered safe practice for static x x 4 x loads; data above that line are useful x A 4 for calculating deflections under 2 x dynamic loads. 2

0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 DEFLECTION (in.) DEFLECTION (in.)

Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum Catalog Number Mode 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3600 Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf)

Compression 5.1 (2.3) — — — 5.1 (2.3) 3.9 (1.8) 3.1 (1.4) 2.6 (1.2) 2.1 (1) 1.8 (0.8) — V10Z 1-321A 2.4 (1.1) 1.8 (0.8) 1.3 (0.6) .9 (0.4) .7 (0.3) Shear 2.6 (1.2) .6 (0.27) * * * * Compression 6.4 (2.9) — — — — 5.5 (2.5) 4.3 (2) 3.4 (1.5) 2.8 (1.3) 2.4 (1.1) 1.8 (0.8) V10Z 1-321B 3.4 (1.5) 2.8 (1.3) 1.9 (0.9) 1.4 (0.6) 1.0 (0.5) Shear 3.6 (1.6) .8 (0.4) .7 (0.3) .6 (0.27) * * Compression 11.1 (5) — — — — 11.0 (5) 8.7 (3.9) 7.1 (3.2) 6.0 (2.7) 5.1 (2.3) 3.8 (1.7) V10Z 1-321C Shear 5.7 (2.6) — 4.9 (2.2) 3.6 (1.6) 2.9 (1.3) 2.2 (1) 1.8 (0.8) 1.5 (0.7) 1.3 (0.6) 1.1 (0.5) .9 (0.4)

Compression 13.8 (6.3) — — — — — 12.3 (5.6) 10.3 (4.7) 8.9 (4) 7.7 (3.5) 5.9 (2.7) V10Z 1-321D Shear 7.1 (3.2) — 7.0 (3.18) 5.1 (2.3) 3.9 (1.8) 3.1 (1.4) 2.6 (1.2) 2.1 (1) 1.8 (0.8) 1.6 (0.7) 1.2 (0.54) *At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation.

1-2 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Square Mounts – To 15.4 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 6.6 TO 15.4 POUNDS (3 TO 7 kgf) Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 4.4 TO 9.9 POUNDS (2 TO 4.5 kgf)

S E C T I O N 1 T S E C

7/32 5/16 (5.6) (7.9)

3/8 (9.5)

#8-32 NC (TYP) 3/8 (9.5)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

18 12 D x D 16 x NOTE: Maximum unthreaded x 10 14 x portion of stud does not C C exceed 1/16 inch (1.59 mm). x x 12 COMPRESSION 8 SHEAR x x B 10 x B x LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS A 6 Deflections below the line x–x are 8 x x x x A considered safe practice for static LOAD (lb.) LOAD (lb.) 6 4 x loads; data above that line are useful x

for calculating deflections under 4 dynamic loads. 2 2

00.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 DEFLECTION (in.) DEFLECTION (in.)

Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum Catalog Number Mode 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3600 Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) Compression 6.6 (3) — — — — — 5.4 (2.5) 4.5 (2) 3.2 (1.5) V10Z 1-322A Shear 4.4 (2) 3.3 (1.5) 2.4 (1.1) 1.9 (0.9) 1.5 (0.7) 1.3 (0.6) 1.1 (0.5) * * Compression 8.7 (4) — — — — — 8.5 (3.9) 6.9 (3.1) 4.8 (2.2) V10Z 1-322B Shear 5.5 (2.5) 4.8 (2.2) 3.6 (1.6) 2.8 (1.3) 2.2 (1) 1.9 (0.9) 1.6 (0.8) * * Compression 12.0 (5.4) — — — — — — 11.5 (5.2) 8.0 (3.6) V10Z 1-322C Shear 7.8 (3.54) 7.7 (3.5) 6.0 (2.7) 4.9 (2.2) 4.0 (1.8) 3.5 (1.6) 3.1 (1.4) * * Compression 15.4 (7) — — — — — — — 11.8 (5.4) V10Z 1-322D Shear 9.9 (4.5) — 8.2 (3.7) 6.7 (3) 5.6 (2.5) 4.7 (2.1) 4.1 (2.1) * * *At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation.

1-3 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Square Mounts – To 14.5 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 6.8 TO 14.5 POUNDS (3 TO 6.6 kgf) Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 2.8 TO 7.3 POUNDS (1.3 TO 3.3 kgf)

S E C T I O N 1 T S E C 9/16 9/16 (14.3) (14.3)

1/2 (12.7)

3/8 #8-32 NC (TYP) 1/2 (9.5) (12.7)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

40 10 D D NOTE: Maximum unthreaded 35 portion of stud does not 8 30 x exceed 1/16 inch (1.59 mm). C x 25 COMPRESSION SHEAR C 6 x 20 LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS x B B x Deflections below the line x–x are 15 4 x LOAD (lb.) x LOAD (lb.) considered safe practice for static x A x A loads; data above that line are useful x x 10 x for calculating deflections under x 2 x x dynamic loads. 5 x

00.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 DEFLECTION (in.) DEFLECTION (in.)

Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum Catalog Number Mode 950 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) Compression 6.8 (3.1) — — — — 5.5 (2.5) 3.8 (1.7) 3.0 (1.4) 2.5 (1.1) V10Z 1-323A Shear 2.8 (1.3) 2.8 (1.3) 2.2 (1) 1.6 (0.7) 1.1 (0.5) .9 (0.4) .7 (0.3) * * Compression 8.5 (3.9) — — — — 8.0 (3.6) 6.0 (2.7) 4.5 (2) 3.5 (1.6) V10Z 1-323B Shear 3.3 (1.5) — 2.8 (1.3) 2.1 (0.9) 1.6 (0.7) 1.2 (0.5) .9 (0.4) * * Compression 12.0 (5.4) — — — — — 10.1 (4.6) 8.5 (3.9) 6.5 (2.9) V10Z 1-323C Shear 5.3 (2.4) — 5.0 (2.3) 4.0 (1.8) 2.9 (1.3) 2.3 (1) 1.9 (0.9) 1.6 (0.7) * Compression 14.5 (6.6) — — — — — 14.5 (6.6) 11.5 (5.2) 9.0 (4.1) V10Z 1-323D Shear 7.3 (3.3) — — 6.2 (2.8) 4.6 (2.1) 3.6 (1.6) 2.9 (1.3) 2.5 (1.1) 2.2 (1) *At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation.

1-4 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cylindrical Mounts – To 13.3 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 4.9 TO 13.3 POUNDS (2.2 TO 6 kgf) Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 2.7 TO 6.4 POUNDS (1.2 TO 2.9 kgf)

S E C T I O N 1 T S E C

3/8 1/2 (9.5) (12.7)

#8-32 NC (TYP) 7/16 (11.1)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

14 8 x D C D x C 12 7 NOTE: x Maximum unthreaded portion of x 6 xx stud does not exceed 1/16 inch 10 x SHEAR (1.59 mm). B 5 x 8 A B LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS x 4 x A Deflections below the line x–x 6 x x 3 x x are considered safe practice for LOAD (lb.) LOAD (lb.)

static loads; data above that line 4 x are useful for calculating 2 x deflections under dynamic loads. 2 1 COMPRESSION

00.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 DEFLECTION (in.) DEFLECTION (in.)

Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum Catalog Number Mode 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3600 Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf)

Compression 4.9 (2.2) — — — — 3.9 (1.8) 3.0 (1.4) 2.4 (1.1) 2.0 (0.9) 1.8 (0.8) 1.0 (0.5) V10Z 2-302A Shear 2.7 (1.22) 2.6 (1.2) 1.7 (0.8) 1.2 (0.54) 1.0 (0.5) .7 (0.3) .5 (0.2) * * * * Compression 6.4 (2.9) — — — — 5.3 (2.4) 4.2 (1.9) 3.4 (1.5) 2.9 (1.3) 2.5 (1.1) 1.5 (0.7) V10Z 2-302B Shear 3.6 (1.6) — 2.6 (1.2) 1.9 (0.9) 1.4 (0.6) 1.1 (0.5) .8 (0.4) .7 (0.3) .6 (0.27) * * Compression 10.4 (4.7) — — — — 9.8 (4.4) 7.7 (3.5) 6.3 (2.9) 5.2 (2.4) 4.3 (1.9) 2.6 (1.2) V10Z 2-302C Shear 5.6 (2.5) — 4.7 (2.1) 3.2 (1.5) 2.5 (1.1) 1.9 (0.9) 1.5 (0.7) 1.3 (0.6) 1.1 (0.5) .9 (0.4) .7 (0.3)

Compression 13.3 (6) — — — — 13.1 (5.9) 10.4 (4.7) 8.5 (3.9) 7.0 (3.2) 5.8 (2.6) 4.2 (1.9) V10Z 2-302D Shear 6.4 (2.9) — 6.1 (2.8) 4.4 (2) 3.4 (1.5) 2.7 (1.2) 2.2 (1) 1.8 (0.8) 1.6 (0.7) 1.4 (0.6) 1.0 (0.45) *At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation.

1-5 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cylindrical Mounts – To 25 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Hardened Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 8 TO 25 POUNDS (3.6 TO 11.3 kgf) Isolater – Natural Rubber • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 4.4 TO 12.5 POUNDS (2 TO 5.7 kgf)

S E C T I O N 1 T S E C 3/8 1/2 (9.5) (12.7)

#8-32 NC (TYP) 9/16 (14.3)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

28 D x C D x x NOTE: 24 x Maximum unthreaded portion of C SHEAR 10 stud does not exceed 1/16 inch 20 COMPRESSION x (1.59 mm). B x x 16 x x LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS x B A Deflections below the line x–x 12 x x LOAD (lb.) x LOAD (lb.) are considered safe practice for x A 5 8 static loads; data above that line x are useful for calculating x deflections under dynamic loads. 4

00.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0 0.10 0.20 0.30 DEFLECTION (in.) DEFLECTION (in.)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3600 Catalog Number Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf)

8.0 6.2 4.8 4.0 3.2 2.7 2.0 — — — V10Z 2-301A (3.6) — (2.8) (2.2) (1.8) (1.5) (1.2) (0.9) 12.0 — 10.2 8.0 6.5 5.4 4.5 3.2 V10Z 2-301B (5.4) — — — (4.6) (3.6) (2.9) (2.4) (2) (1.5) 16.0 — 14.0 11.6 9.6 6.8 V10Z 2-301C (7.3) — — — — — (6.4) (5.3) (4.4) (3.1) 25.0 — — — — — 22.0 18.2 15.2 10.4 V10Z 2-301D (11.3) — (10) (8.3) (6.9) (4.7)

Shear Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3600 Catalog Number Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 4.4 4.0 3.1 2.2 1.7 1.3 V10Z 2-301A (2) (1.8) (1.4) (1) (0.77) (0.6) * * * * * 6.7 6.5 5.2 3.7 2.8 2.3 1.8 V10Z 2-301B (3) (2.9) (2.4) (1.7) (1.27) (1.04) (0.82) * * * * 9.0 9.0 6.3 4.6 3.6 2.9 2.3 1.9 — V10Z 2-301C (4.1) (4.1) (2.9) (2.1) (1.6) (1.32) (1.04) (0.9) * * 12.5 11.2 8.2 6.3 4.0 4.0 3.3 2.8 2.0 — V10Z 2-301D (5.7) — (5.1) (3.7) (2.9) (1.8) (1.8) (1.5) (1.3) (0.9) *At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation.

1-6 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cylindrical Mounts – To 28.5 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 22 TO 28.5 POUNDS (10 TO 12.9 kgf) Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 8.4 TO 11.9 POUNDS (3.8 TO 5.4 kgf)

.410 3/8 I O N 1 T S E C (10.4) (9.5)

#1/4-20 NC (TYP) 3/4 (19.1)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

35 NOTE: B B 30 x Maximum unthreaded portion of x 12 stud does not exceed 1/16 inch SHEAR x x (1.59 mm). 25 COMPRESSION x A x A LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS 20 x 8 Deflections below the line x–x x

are considered safe practice for LOAD (lb.) 15 LOAD (lb.) static loads; data above that line 4 are useful for calculating 10 deflections under dynamic loads. 5

00.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.50 0 0.05 0.10 0.15 DEFLECTION (in.) DEFLECTION (in.)

Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum Catalog Number Mode 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 3000 3600 Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) Compression 22.0 (10) — — — 21.5 (9.8) 16.5 (7.5) 10.5 (4.8) 6.5 (2.9) V10Z 2-307A Shear 8.4 (3.8) 6.2 (2.8) 4.7 (2.1) 3.7 (1.7) 3.0 (1.4) 2.4 (1.09) 2.5 (1.13) * Compression 28.5 (12.9) — — — — 25.5 (11.6) 17.0 (7.7) 12.0 (5.4) V10Z 2-307B Shear 11.9 (5.4) 9.9 (4.5) 7.3 (3.3) 5.6 (2.5) 4.4 (2) 3.6 (1.6) * * *At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation.

1-7 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cylindrical Mounts – To 75 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 40 TO 75 POUNDS (18.1 TO 34 kgf) Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 19 TO 42 POUNDS (8.6 TO 19.1 kgf)

1/2 17/32 I O N 1 T S E C (12.7) (13.5)

1/4-20 NC (TYP) 1 (25.4)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

200 80 D D 180 70 NOTE: C Maximum unthreaded portion of 160 60 C stud does not exceed 1/16 inch 140 COMPRESSION (1.59 mm). 50 120 SHEAR x LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS 100 40 x Deflections below the line x–x x x x B are considered safe practice for 80 x B LOAD (lb.) LOAD (lb.) 30 static loads; data above that line x x A 60 A are useful for calculating x x 20 40 deflections under dynamic loads. x x x x 20 10 x x

00.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 DEFLECTION (in.) DEFLECTION (in.)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum Load 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3600 Catalog Number lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 40 30.5 24.0 19.5 16.0 13.5 10.0 — — — — V10Z 2-305A (18.1) (13.8) (10.9) (8.8) (7.3) (6.1) (4.5) 43 38.0 30.0 24.8 20.5 17.5 12.5 — — — — V10Z 2-305B (19.5) (17.2) (13.6) (11.2) (9.3) (7.9) (5.7) 74 74.0 58.5 47.5 39.5 33.0 23.5 — — — — V10Z 2-305C (33.6) (33.6) (26.5) (21.5) (17.9) (15) (10.7) 75 67.5 55.5 45.5 38.5 27.5 — — — — — V10Z 2-305D (34) (30.6) (25.2) (20.6) (17.5) (12.5)

Shear Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum Load 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3600 Catalog Number lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 19 15.7 12.5 8.3 6.3 V10Z 2-305A (8.6) (7.1) (5.7) (3.8) (2.9) * * * * * * 21 19.0 15.5 10.6 8.0 6.3 5.0 V10Z 2-305B (9.5) (8.6) (7) (4.8) (3.6) (2.9) (2.3) * * * * 37 31.5 22.5 17.0 14.0 11.5 9.5 — V10Z 2-305C (16.8) (14.3) (10.2) (7.7) (6.4) (5.2) (4.3) * * * 42 40.0 29.5 22.0 18.5 15.8 13.0 11.0 9.5 — V10Z 2-305D (19.1) (18.1) (13.4) (10) (8.4) (7.2) (5.9) (5) (4.3) *

*At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation.

1-8 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cylindrical Mounts – To 79 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 33 TO 79 POUNDS (15 TO 35.8 kgf) Isolater – Natural Rubber • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 18 TO 40 POUNDS (8.2 TO 18.1 kgf)

3/4 I O N 1 T S E C (19.1)

SEE TABLE 1 (25.4)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are in mm.

90 x D x D 80 40 LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS x x x C Deflections below the line x–x 70 35 x C x are considered safe practice for 60 COMPRESSION 30 static loads; data above that line x SHEAR 50 25 are useful for calculating B x B deflections under dynamic loads. x 4 x x 2 x x A A LOAD (lb.) LOAD (lb.) 30 x 15 x

2 Catalog Number Thread Thread 10 Length 10 5 V10Z 2-300 Δ 1/4–20 NC 1/2 (12.7) Δ 00.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 V10Z 2-317 5/16–18 NC 9/16 (14.3) DEFLECTION (in.) DEFLECTION (in.) NOTE: Maximum unthreaded portion of stud does not exceed 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). Δ Load Rating A, B, C, or D, see table below. Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 850 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 3000 3600 Load Rating Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 33 29.0 21.0 16.0 12.5 10.5 7.0 5.0 — — — A (15) (13.2) (9.5) (7.3) (5.7) (4.8) (3.2) (2.3) 40 39.5 28.5 21.5 17.0 14.0 9.5 7.0 — — — B (18.1) (18) (12.9) (9.8) (7.7) (6.4) (4.3) (3.2) 60 49.0 37.0 29.5 24.0 17.0 11.5 — — — — C (27.2) (22.2) (16.8) (13.4) (10.9) (7.7) (5.2) 79 72.5 55.0 43.5 36.0 24.5 17.0 — — — — D (35.8) (32.9) (24.9) (19.7) (16.3) (11.1) (7.7)

Shear Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 850 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 3000 3600 Load Rating Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 18 16.0 9.3 7.2 5.0 3.8 2.8 2.3 1.8 1.2 A (8.2) (7.3) (4.2) (3.3) (2.3) (1.7) (1.3) (1) (0.8) (0.5) * 21 13.0 10.2 7.0 5.3 4.0 3.2 2.6 1.8 B (9.5) — (5.9) (4.6) (3.2) (2.4) (1.8) (1.5) (1.2) (0.8) * 34 24.5 20.0 14.7 11.2 9.0 7.5 6.2 4.5 11.5 — C (15.4) (11.1) (9.1) (6.7) (5.1) (4.1) (3.4) (2.8) (2) (1.6) 40 32.0 26.0 19.0 14.8 12.0 10.0 8.3 6.0 17.0 — D (18.1) (14.5) (11.8) (8.6) (6.7) (5.4) (4.5) (3.8) (2.7) (2.3) *At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation.

1-9 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cylindrical Mounts – To 86 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 37 TO 86 POUNDS (16.8 TO 39 kgf) Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 16 TO 43 POUNDS (7.3 TO 19.5 kgf)

9/16 1 I O N 1 T S E C (14.3) (25.4)

5/16-18 NC (TYP) 1 (25.4)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

NOTE: 120 D D Maximum unthreaded portion of 45 x stud does not exceed 1/16 inch 100 40 x x C (1.59 mm). x 35 x 80 COMPRESSION x LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS 30 SHEAR Deflections below the line x–x C x 25 are considered safe practice for 60 x static loads; data above that line x B B x 20 x are useful for calculating LOAD (lb.) x A LOAD (lb.) x A 40 x deflections under dynamic loads. 15 x x 10 20 5

00.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 DEFLECTION (in.) DEFLECTION (in.)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum Load 700 950 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 3000 Catalog Number lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 37 35.0 24.0 18.0 13.5 11.0 V10Z 2-316A (16.8) — — — (15.9) (10.9) (8.2) (6.1) (5) — — 48 34.0 26.0 20.5 16.0 13.0 V10Z 2-316B (21.8) — — — — (15.4) (11.8) (9.3) (7.3) (5.9) — 57 46.0 32.5 26.5 20.0 16.0 V10Z 2-316C (25.9) — — — — (20.9) (14.8) (12) (9.1) (7.3) — 29.0 86 — 80.0 59.0 48.0 38.0 30.0 V10Z 2-316D (39) — — — (36.3) (26.8) (21.8) (17.2) (13.6) (9.5)

Shear Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum Load 700 950 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 3000 Catalog Number lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 16 16 8 6.5 5.0 3.5 V10Z 2-316A (7.3) (7.3) (3.6) (2.9) (2.3) (1.6) * * * * * 21 12 9.5 7.5 5.5 4.0 V10Z 2-316B (9.5) — (5.7) (4.3) (3.4) (2.5) (1.8) * * * * 35 23.5 18.0 14.0 10.0 7.5 6.0 V10Z 2-316C (15.9) — (10.7) (8.2) (6.4) (4.5) (3.4) (2.7) * * * 43 32.0 24.5 19.0 13.0 9.5 7.5 V10Z 2-316D (19.5) — (14.5) (11.1) (8.6) (5.9) (4.3) (3.4) * * * *At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation.

1-10 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cylindrical Mounts – To 105 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 47 TO 105 POUNDS (21.3 TO 47.6 kgf) Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 27 TO 66 POUNDS (12.2 TO 29.9 kgf)

9/16 1 (14.3) (25.4) I O N 1 T S E C

5/16-18 NC (TYP) 1-3/8 (34.9)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

200 80 D C D 180 C 70 x x 160 B x x 60 140 COMPRESSION LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS 50 SHEAR 120 B Deflections below the line x–x x x A are considered safe practice for 100 x 40 x x static loads; data above that line x 80 x are useful for calculating LOAD (lb.) LOAD (lb.) 30 x x deflections under dynamic loads. 60 x A 20 x 40 x 10 20

00.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 DEFLECTION (in.) DEFLECTION (in.)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 700 950 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 3000 Catalog Number Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 47 44.5 30.0 22.0 18.0 13.5 11.0 V10Z 2-311A — — — — (21.3) (20.2) (13.6) (10) (8.2) (6.1) (5) 74 72.5 48.5 35.5 27.0 21.0 17.5 12.5 V10Z 2-311B — — — (33.6) (32.9) (22) (16.1) (12.2) (9.5) (7.9) (5.7) 96 75.7 55.5 43.0 34.0 28.0 19.5 V10Z 2-311C (43.5) — — — — (34.3) (25.2) (19.5) (15.4) (12.7) (8.8) 105 100.0 73.0 56.5 45.0 38.0 25.5 V10Z 2-311D — — — (47.6) — (45.4) (33.1) (25.6) (20.4) (17.2) (11.6)

Shear Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 700 950 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 3000 Catalog Number Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 27 27.0 19.5 11.5 9.0 6.0 V10Z 2-311A (12.2) (12.2) (8.8) (5.2) (4.1) (2.7) * * * * * 41 31.0 19.0 14.5 10.5 8.0 V10Z 2-311B (18.6) — (14.1) (8.6) (6.6) (4.8) (3.6) * * * * 66 53.5 33.0 26.5 19.0 14.0 11.5 9.0 V10Z 2-311C (29.9) — (24.3) (15) (12) (8.6) (6.4) (5.2) (4.1) * * 66 61.0 38.0 30.5 22.0 19.5 13.0 10.5 8.5 — V10Z 2-311D (29.9) (27.7) (17.2) (13.8) (10) (8.8) (5.9) (4.8) (3.9) * *At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation. 1-11 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cylindrical Mounts – To 120 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 41 TO 120 POUNDS (18.6 TO 54.4 kgf) Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 21 TO 63 POUNDS (9.5 TO 28.6 kgf)

9/16 1-1/4 I O N 1 T S E C (14.3) (31.8)

5/16-18 NC (TYP) 1-1/4 (31.8)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

80 D C 160 D 70 x 140 C 60 LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS x B x 120 COMPRESSION Deflections below the line x–x x 50 SHEAR x are considered safe practice for 100 x x static loads; data above that line 40 80 x are useful for calculating x A x B LOAD (lb.) deflections under dynamic loads. x LOAD (lb.) 30 60 x x A x 40 20 x x

20 10

00.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 DEFLECTION (in.) DEFLECTION (in.)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 600 850 950 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2500 3000 Catalog Number Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 41 34.5 27.5 19.0 14.0 10.0 7.0 — — — — V10Z 2-310A (18.6) (15.6) (12.5) (8.6) (6.4) (4.5) (3.2) 64 48.0 32.0 24.0 17.5 12.0 8.5 V10Z 2-310B (29) — — — — (21.8) (14.5) (10.9) (7.9) (5.4) (3.9) 90 80.0 55.0 41.5 30.0 20.0 14.0 V10Z 2-310C (40.8) — — — — (36.3) (24.9) (18.8) (13.6) (9.1) (6.4) 120 89.0 70.5 53.0 38.5 26.5 V10Z 2-310D (54.4) — — — — — (40.4) (32) (24) (17.5) (12)

Shear Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 600 850 950 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2500 3000 Catalog Number Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 21 20.0 11.0 8.5 6.7 5.5 V10Z 2-310A (9.5) (9.1) (5) (3.9) (3) (2.5) * * * * * 31 18.0 14.0 10.5 8.0 5.5 V10Z 2-310B (14.1) — (8.2) (6.4) (4.8) (3.6) (2.5) * * * * 48 31.5 25.0 19.5 15.5 11.0 8.5 V10Z 2-310C (21.8) — (14.3) (11.3) (8.8) (7) (5) (3.9) * * * 63 50.0 41.0 32.6 27.5 20.5 16.0 14.0 8.0 V10Z 2-310D (28.6) — (22.7) (18.6) (14.8) (12.5) (9.3) (7.3) (6.4) (3.6) * *At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation.

1-112 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cylindrical Mounts – To 123 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 56 TO 123 POUNDS (25.4 TO 55.8 kgf) Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 32 TO 63 POUNDS (14.5 TO 28.6 kgf)

9/16 7/8 I O N 1 T S E C (14.3) (22.2)

5/16-18 NC (TYP) 1-1/4 (31.8)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. 350

D 80 325 D

300 C 70 275 x C COMPRESSION 250 60 x LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS SHEAR B 225 Deflections below the line x–x x 50 are considered safe practice for 200 A static loads; data above that line B x 175 are useful for calculating 40 x 150 x deflections under dynamic loads. x LOAD (lb.)

x LOAD (lb.) 30 125 x A x 100 x 20 75 x x 50 x 10 25

00.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 DEFLECTION (in.) DEFLECTION (in.)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 750 850 950 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2500 3000 Catalog Number Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 56 — — — — — 40.0 28.0 21.0 13.0 — V10Z 2-315A (25.4) (18.1) (12.7) (9.5) (5.9) 82 68.5 50.0 35.0 23.0 17.0 — — — — — V10Z 2-315B (37.2) (31.1) (22.7) (15.9) (10.4) (7.7) 115 107.0 77.5 57.0 27.5 22.0 — — — — — V10Z 2-315C (52.2) (48.5) (35.2) (25.9) (12.5) (10) 123 92.0 67.5 43.0 32.0 — — — — — — V10Z 2-315D (55.8) (41.7) (30.6) (19.5) (14.5)

Shear Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 750 850 950 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2500 3000 Catalog Number Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 32 31.0 24.0 19.0 14.0 11.0 8.0 5.6 V10Z 2-315A (14.5) (14.1) (10.9) (8.6) (6.4) (5) (3.6) (2.5) * * * 37 32.0 26.0 19.0 15.0 10.0 7.6 5.1 — V10Z 2-315B (16.8) (14.5) (11.8) (8.6) (6.8) (4.5) (3.4) (2.3) * * 48 45.0 38.0 29.0 24.0 17.0 13.0 10.0 6.5 — V10Z 2-315C (21.8) (20.4) (17.2) (13.2) (10.9) (7.7) (5.9) (4.5) (2.9) * 63 56.0 45.0 38.0 27.0 21.0 17.0 11.0 8.0 — — V10Z 2-315D (28.6) (25.4) (20.4) (17.2) (12.2) (9.5) (7.7) (5) (3.6) *At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation.

1-13 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cylindrical Mounts – To 142 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 56 TO 142 POUNDS (25.4 TO 64.4 kgf) Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 32 TO 64 POUNDS (14.5 TO 29 kgf)

9/16 3/4 I O N 1 T S E C (14.3) (19.1)

5/16-18 NC (TYP) 1-1/4 (31.8)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

80 x D D 140 70 x x C C 120 x x 60 x LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS COMPRESSION x 100 50 SHEAR Deflections below the line x-x are x B x B considered safe practice for static 80 x 40 loads; data above that line are x x x x A A LOAD (lb.) useful for calculating deflections LOAD (lb.) 60 30 under dynamic loads. x x 40 20

20 10

00.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 DEFLECTION (in.) DEFLECTION (in.)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 950 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 3000 3600 Catalog Number Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 56 — — — 50.0 38.0 28.5 22.5 18.0 12.5 — V10Z 2-314A (24.4) (22.7) (17.2) (12.9) (10.2) (8.2) (5.7) 73 73.0 51.0 39.0 30.5 24.5 16.5 12.0 V10Z 2-314B (33.1) — — — (33.1) (23.1) (17.7) (13.8) (11.1) (7.5) (5.4) 109 85.0 63.5 50.0 41.0 28.0 20.0 — — — — V10Z 2-314C (49.5) (38.6) (28.8) (22.7) (18.6) (12.7) (9.1) 142 129.0 99.0 78.0 64.0 44.0 30.0 V10Z 2-314D — — — — (64.4) (58.5) (44.9) (35.4) (29) (20) (13.6)

Shear Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 950 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 3000 3600 Catalog Number Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 32 23.0 18.0 14.5 10.0 7.5 V10Z 2-314A (14.5) (10.4) (8.2) (6.6) (4.5) (3.4) * * * * * 38 32.0 24.5 19.0 13.0 9.5 7.0 V10Z 2-314B (17.2) (14.5) (11.1) (8.6) (5.9) (4.3) (3.2) * * * * 51 44.5 36.0 26.0 19.5 14.0 12.0 10.0 — V10Z 2-314C (23.1) (20.2) (16.3) (11.8) (8.8) (6.4) (5.4) (4.5) * * 64 58.0 46.5 34.0 27.0 20.5 17.0 14.0 9.5 V10Z 2-314D — (29) (26.3) (21.1) (15.4) (12.2) (9.3) (7.7) (6.4) (4.3) * *At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation.

1-14 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cylindrical Mounts – To 185 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 93 TO 185 POUNDS (42.2 TO 83.9 kgf) Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 36 TO 67 POUNDS (16.3 TO 30.4 kgf)

9/16 5/8 I O N 1 T S E C (14.3) (15.9)

5/16-18 NC (TYP) 1-3/8 (34.9)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

200 100 x D C D 180 90 x x C 160 80 B x x 140 70 LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS COMPRESSION x SHEAR x x 120 60 Deflections below the line x–x A x B are considered safe practice for 100 x 50 x x static loads; data above that line x x A are useful for calculating 80 40 x LOAD (lb.) LOAD (lb.) deflections under dynamic loads. 60 30 x

40 20

20 10

00.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.10 0.11 0 0.02 0.06 0.10 0.14 0.18 0.20 0.24 0.28 DEFLECTION (in.) DEFLECTION (in.)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 950 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 Catalog Number Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf)

93 — — — — 71.0 51.0 39.0 31.0 25.0 — V10Z 2-312A (42.2) (32.2) (23.1) (17.7) (14.1) (11.3) 118 106.0 81.0 64.0 52.0 43.0 35.0 — — — — V10Z 2-312B (53.5) (48.1) (36.7) (29) (23.6) (19.5) (15.9) 158 121.0 96.0 79.0 65.0 54.0 — — — — — V10Z 2-312C (71.7) (54.9) (43.5) (35.8) (29.5) (24.5) 185 164.0 131.0 109.0 90.0 74.0 — — — — — V10Z 2-312D (83.9) (74.4) (59.4) (49.4) (40.8) (33.6)

Shear Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 950 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 Catalog Number Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 36 34.0 25.0 19.0 13.5 10.0 V10Z 2-312A (16.3) (15.4) (11.3) (8.6) (6.1) (4.5) * * * * * 46 30.0 21.0 16.0 12.0 9.5 — 38.0 V10Z 2-312B (20.9) (17.2) (13.6) (9.5) (7.3) (5.4) (4.3) * * * 57 50.0 35.0 26.0 20.0 16.0 13.0 — V10Z 2-312C (25.9) — (22.7) (15.9) (11.8) (9.1) (7.3) (5.9) * * 67 66.0 46.0 34.0 26.0 21.0 18.0 14.0 — — V10Z 2-312D (30.4) (29.9) (20.9) (15.4) (11.8) (9.5) (8.2) (6.4) * *At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation.

1-15 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cylindrical Mounts – To 330 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS TO 330 POUNDS (149.7 kgf) Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR SHEAR LOADS TO 140 POUNDS (63.5 kgf)

X 1/2-20 NF (TYP) I O N 1 T S E C

2 (50.8)

X 29/32 (23) 1-1/32 (26.2) 2-3/4 DIA. (69.9) SECTION X-X

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

400

COMPRESSION 350 x x 300 COMPRESSION LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS Deflections below the line x---x are 250 considered safe practice for static

loads; data above that line are 200 useful for calculating deflections SHEAR

under dynamic loads. LOAD (lb.) 150 x

100 SHEAR

0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 DEFLECTION (in.)

Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum Catalog Number Mode 700 850 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) Compression 330 (149.7) — — — — 255 (115.7) 190 (86.2) 150 (68) 120 (54.4) 90 (40.8) V10Z 2-330B Shear 140 (63.5) 140 (63.5) 105 (47.6) 65 (29.5) 52 (23.6) 38 (17.2) 32 (14.5) * * * *At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation.

1-16 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cylindrical Mounts – To 6 kgf

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fastener – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 2 TO 6 kgf (4.9 TO 13.3 lb.) Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 1 TO 3 kgf (2.7 TO 6.4 lb.)

New I O N 1 T S E C 12.5 L (.49)

11 M4 (.43) NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch. Metric 6.4 3.6 x D C D x C 5.5 3.2 NOTE: Maximum unthreaded x portion of stud does not x 2.7 xx exceed 1.59 mm (.06 in.). 4.5 x SHEAR B 2.3 x 3.6 A B LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS x 1.8 x Deflections below the line x–x are A 2.7 x considered safe practice for static x 1.4 x x loads; data above that line are useful LOAD (kgf) LOAD (kgf) 1.8 x for calculating deflections under 0.9 x dynamic loads. 0.9 0.5 COMPRESSION

00.51 1.02 1.52 2.03 2.54 3.05 0 1.27 2.54 3.81 5.08 6.35 7.62 DEFLECTION (mm) DEFLECTION (mm)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3600 Catalog Number Maximum Load kgf (lb.) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation kgf (lb.) 2.2 1.8 1.4 1.1 0.9 0.8 0.5 V10Z 2M302AM4 — — — — (4.9) (3.9) (3.0) (2.4) (2.0) (1.8) (1.0) 2.9 2.4 1.9 1.5 1.3 1.1 0.7 V10Z 2M302BM4 — — — — (6.4) (5.3) (4.2) (3.4) (2.9) (2.5) (1.5) 4.7 4.5 3.5 2.9 2.4 2 1.2 V10Z 2M302CM4 — — — — (10.4) (9.8) (7.7) (6.3) (5.2) (4.3) (2.6) 6 5.9 4.7 3.9 3.2 2.6 1.9 V10Z 2M302DM4 — — — — (13.3) (13.1) (10.4) (8.5) (7.0) (5.8) (4.2)

Shear Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3600 Catalog Number Maximum Load kgf (lb.) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation kgf (lb.) 1.2 1.18 0.77 0.54 0.45 0.32 0.22 V10Z 2M302AM4 (2.7) (2.6) (1.7) (1.2) (1.0) (.7) (.5) * * * * 1.6 1.18 0.87 0.63 0.5 0.37 0.32 0.28 V10Z 2M302BM4 — (3.6) (2.6) (1.9) (1.4) (1.1) (.8) (.7) (.6) * * 2.5 2.14 1.45 1.13 0.87 0.68 0.59 0.5 2 0.32 V10Z 2M302CM4 — (5.6) (4.7) (3.2) (2.5) (1.9) (1.5) (1.3) (1.1) (.9) (.7) 2.9 2.76 2 1.54 1.22 1 0.82 0.72 2.6 0.45 V10Z 2M302DM4 — (6.4) (6.1) (4.4) (3.4) (2.7) (2.2) (1.8) (1.6) (1.4) (1.0) ◊ Length, L 07 = 7 mm (.275) 10 = 10mm (.394) *At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation. 1-17 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cylindrical Mounts – To 34 kgf

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fastener – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 18 TO 34 kgf (40 TO 75 lb.) Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 9 TO 18 kgf (19 TO 42 lb.)

New I O N 1 T S E C 12 13.5 (.47) (.53)

M6 25 (.98) NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch. Metric

91 36 NOTE: Maximum unthreaded D D 82 portion of stud does not 32 C exceed 1.59 mm (.06 in.). 73 C 27 64 COMPRESSION LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS 23 54 SHEAR Deflections below the line x–x are x considered safe practice for static 45 18 x x loads; data above that line are useful x x B x B 36 14

for calculating deflections under LOAD (kgf) LOAD (kgf) x x A dynamic loads. 27 A x x 9 18 x x x x 9 5 x x

00.51 1.02 1.52 2.03 2.54 3.05 0 1.27 2.54 3.81 5.08 6.35 7.62 DEFLECTION (mm) DEFLECTION (mm)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3600 Catalog Number Load kgf (lb.) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation kgf (lb.) 18.2 13.8 10.9 8.8 4.8 3.2 2.3 V10Z 2M305AM06 — — — — (40.1) (30.4) (24.0) (19.4) (10.6) (7.1) (5.1) 19.5 17.2 13.6 11.3 6.4 4.3 3.2 V10Z 2M305BM06 — — — — (43.0) (37.9) (30.0) (24.9) (14.1) (9.5) (7.1) 33.6 33.6 26.5 21.6 10.9 7.7 5.2 V10Z 2M305CM06 — — — — (74.1) (74.1) (58.4) (47.6) (24.0) (17.0) (11.5) 34 30.6 25.2 16.3 11.1 7.7 V10Z 2M305DM06 — — — — — (75.0) (67.5) (55.6) (35.9) (24.5) (17.0)

Shear Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3600 Catalog Number Load kgf (lb.) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation kgf (lb.) 8.6 7.1 5.7 3.8 2.9 1 1 V10Z 2M305AM06 (19.0) (15.7) (12.6) (8.4) (6.4) * * * (2.2) (2.2) * 9.5 8.6 7 4.8 3.6 2.9 2.3 1.2 1 V10Z 2M305BM06 (20.9) (19.0) (15.4) (10.6) (7.9) (6.4) (5.1) * (2.6) (2.2) * 16.8 14.3 10.2 7.7 6.4 5.2 4.3 2.8 2 1.6 V10Z 2M305CM06 — (37.0) (31.5) (22.5) (17.0) (14.1) (11.5) (9.5) (6.2) (4.4) (3.5) 19 18.1 13.3 10 8.4 7.2 5.9 3.8 2.7 2.3 V10Z 2M305DM06 — (41.9) (40.0) (29.3) (22.0) (18.5) (15.9) (13.0) (8.4) (6.0) (5.1) *At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation.

1-18 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cylindrical Mounts – To 36 kgf

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fastener – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 15 TO 36 kgf (33 TO 79 lb.) Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 8 TO 18 kgf (18 TO 40 lb.)

12 19 New I O N 1 T S E C (.47) (.75)

M6 25 (.98)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch. Metric 41 20 x D x D 36 NOTE: Maximum unthreaded 18 x x x C portion of stud does not 32 16 exceed 1.59 mm (.06 in.). x C x 27 COMPRESSION 14 x SHEAR 23 11 LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS B x B Deflections below the line x–x are x 18 9 x x x considered safe practice for static x A A loads; data above that line are useful LOAD (kgf) LOAD (kgf) 14 x 7 x for calculating deflections under dynamic loads. 9 5

5 2

00.51 1.02 1.52 2.03 2.54 3.05 3.56 0 1.27 2.54 3.81 5.08 6.35 7.62 8.89 DEFLECTION (mm) DEFLECTION (mm)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3600 Catalog Number Maximum Load kgf (lb.) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation kgf (lb.) 15 13.2 9.5 7.3 5.7 4.8 3.2 2.3 V10Z 2M300AM406 — — — (33) (29) (21) (16) (12.5) (10.5) (7.0) (5.0) 18.1 17.9 12.9 9.8 7.7 6.4 4.3 3.2 V10Z 2M300BM406 — — — (40) (39.5) (28.5) (21.5) (17.0) (14.0) (9.5) (7.0) 27.2 22.2 16.8 13.4 10.9 7.7 5.2 V10Z 2M300CM406 — — — — (60) (49) (37) (29.5) (24.0) (17.0) (11.5) 35.9 32.9 25 19.7 16.3 11.1 7.7 V10Z 2M300DM406 — — — — (79) (72.5) (55) (43.5) (36) (24.5) (17.0)

Shear Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3600 Catalog Number Maximum Load kgf (lb.) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation kgf (lb.) 8.2 7.3 4.2 3.3 2.3 1.7 1.3 1 0.8 0.5 V10Z 2M300AM406 (18) (16.0) (9.3) (7.2) (5.0) (3.8) (2.8) (2.3) (1.8) (1.2) * 9.5 5.9 4.6 3.2 2.3 1.8 1.4 1.2 0.8 V10Z 2M300BM406 — (21) (13.0) (10.2) (7.0) (5.3) (4.0) (3.2) (2.6) (1.8) * 15.4 11.1 9.1 6.7 5.1 4.1 3.4 2.8 2 1.6 V10Z 2M300CM406 — (34) (24.5) (20) (14.7) (11.2) (9.0) (7.5) (6.2) (4.5) (3.5) 18.1 14.5 11.8 8.6 6.7 5.5 4.5 3.8 2.7 2.3 V10Z 2M300DM406 — (40) (32) (26) (19.0) (14.8) (12.0) (10.0) (8.3) (6.0) (5.0) *At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation.

1-19 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cylindrical Mounts – To 48 kgf

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 21 TO 48 kgf (47 TO 105 lb.) Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 12 TO 30 kgf (27 TO 66 lb.)

13.5 25 New I O N 1 T S E C (.53) (.98)

M8 35 (1.38)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch. Metric

91 36 D C D 82 C 32 x x 73 B x x 27 64 COMPRESSION 23 SHEAR LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS 54 B x x Deflections below the line x–x are A 45 x 18 considered safe practice for static x x x loads; data above that line are useful 36 x

LOAD (kgf) LOAD (kgf) 14 x for calculating deflections under x dynamic loads. 27 x A 9 x 18 x 5 9

01.27 2.54 3.81 5.08 6.35 7.62 0 2.54 5.08 7.62 10.16 12.7 DEFLECTION (mm) DEFLECTION (mm)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 700 850 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 3000 Catalog Number Load kgf (lb.) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation kgf (lb.) 21.3 — — — 20.2 13.6 10 8.2 6.1 5 — V10Z 2M311AM08 (47) (44.5) (30) (22) (18) (13.5) (11) 33.6 32.9 22 16.1 12.3 9.5 7.9 5.7 V10Z 2M311BM08 — — — (74) (72.5) (48.5) (35.5) (27) (21) (17.5) (12.5) 43.5 34.3 25.5 19.5 15.4 12.7 8.8 V10Z 2M311CM08 — — — — (96) (75.7) (55.5) (43) (34) (28) (19.5) 47.6 45.4 33.1 25.6 20.4 17.2 11.6 V10Z 2M311DM08 — — — — (105) (100) (73) (56.5) (45) (38) (25.5)

Shear Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 700 850 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 3000 Catalog Number Load kgf (lb.) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation kgf (lb.) 12.3 12.3 8.8 5.2 4.1 2.7 V10Z 2M311AM08 (27) (27) (19.5) (11.5) (9) (6) * * * * * 18.6 14.1 8.6 6.6 4.8 3.6 — V10Z 2M311BM08 (41) (31) (19) (14.5) (10.5) (8) * * * * 29.9 24.3 15 12 8.6 6.4 5.2 4.1 V10Z 2M311CM08 — (66) (53.5) (33) (26.5) (19) (14) (11.5) (9) * * 29.9 27.7 17.2 13.8 10 8.8 5.9 4.8 3.9 — V10Z 2M311DM08 (66) (61) (38) (30.5) (22) (19.5) (13) (10.5) (8.5) * *At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation.

1-20 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cylindrical Mounts – To 54 kgf

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 19 TO 54 kgf (41 TO 120 lb.) Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 10 TO 29 kgf (21 TO 63 lb.)

New I O N 1 T S E C 13.5 32 (.53) (1.26)

M8 32 (1.26)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch. Metric

82 36 D C 73 D 32 x 64 C 27 x B x 54 COMPRESSION LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS x 23 SHEAR x Deflections below the line x–x are 45 x x considered safe practice for static 18 36 x loads; data above that line are useful x A x B LOAD (kgf) for calculating deflections under x LOAD (kgf) 14 27 x x A dynamic loads. x 9 18 x x

9 5

01.27 2.54 3.81 5.08 6.35 7.62 8.89 0 2.54 5.08 7.62 10.16 12.7 15.24 17.78 DEFLECTION (mm) DEFLECTION (mm)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 600 850 950 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2500 3000 Catalog Number Load kgf (lb.) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation kgf (lb.) 18.6 15.7 12.5 8.6 6.4 4.5 3.2 V10Z 2M310AM08 — — — — (41) (34.5) (27.5) (19) (14) (10) (7) 29 21.8 14.5 10.9 7.9 5.5 3.9 — — — — V10Z 2M310BM08 (64) (48) (32) (24) (17.5) (12) (8.5) 40.8 36.3 25 18.8 13.6 9.1 6.4 V10Z 2M310CM08 — — — — (90) (80) (55) (41.5) (30) (20) (14) 54.4 40.4 32 24 17.5 12 V10Z 2M310DM08 — — — — — (120) (89) (70.5) (53) (38.5) (26.5)

Shear Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 600 850 950 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2500 3000 Catalog Number Load kgf (lb.) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation kgf (lb.)

9.5 9.1 5 3.9 3 2.5 V10Z 2M310AM08 (21) (20) (11) (8.5) (6.7) (5.5) * * * * * 14.1 8.2 6.4 4.8 3.6 2.5 V10Z 2M310BM08 — (31) (18) (14) (10.5) (8) (5.5) * * * * 21.8 14.3 11.3 8.8 7 5 3.9 — V10Z 2M310CM08 (48) (31.5) (25) (19.5) (15.5) (11) (8.5) * * * 28.6 22.7 18.6 14.8 12.5 9.3 7.3 6.4 3.6 V10Z 2M310DM08 — (63) (50) (41) (32.6) (27.5) (20.5) (16) (14) (8) * *At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation.

1-21 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cylindrical Mounts – To 64 kgf

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 25 TO 64 kgf (56 TO 142 lb.) Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 15 TO 29 kgf (32 TO 64 lb.)

13.5 19 New I O N 1 T S E C (.53) (.75)

M8 32 (1.26) NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch. Metric

73 36 x D D 64 32 x x C C x 54 x 27 x LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS COMPRESSION x 45 23 SHEAR Deflections below the line x–x are x B x B considered safe practice for static 36 x 18 loads; data above that line are useful x x x x A A for calculating deflections under 27 LOAD (kgf) LOAD (kgf) 14 dynamic loads. x x 18 9

9 4

00.51 1.02 1.52 2.03 2.54 3.05 0 0.25 0.51 0.76 1.02 DEFLECTION (mm) DEFLECTION (mm)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 950 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 3000 3600 Catalog Number Load kgf (lb.) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation kgf (lb.) 25.4 22.7 17.2 12.9 10.2 8.2 5.7 V10Z 2M314AM08 — — — — (56) (50) (38) (28.5) (22.5) (18) (12.5) 33.1 33.1 23.1 17.7 13.8 11.1 7.5 5.5 — — — V10Z 2M314BM08 (73) (73) (51) (39) (30.5) (24.5) (16.5) (12) 49.5 38.6 28.8 22.7 18.6 12.7 9.1 V10Z 2M314CM08 — — — — (109) (85) (63.5) (50) (41) (28) (20)

64.4 58.5 44.9 35.4 29 20 13.6 V10Z 2M314DM08 — — — — (142) (129) (99) (78) (64) (44) (30)

Shear Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 950 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 3000 3600 Catalog Number Load kgf (lb.) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation kgf (lb.) 14.5 10.4 8.2 6.6 4.5 3.4 V10Z 2M314AM08 (32) (23) (18) (14.5) (10) (7.5) * * * * * 17.2 14.5 11.1 8.6 5.9 4.3 3.2 V10Z 2M314BM08 (38) (32) (24.5) (19) (13) (9.5) (7) * * * * 23.1 20.2 16.3 11.8 8.8 6.4 5.5 4.5 — V10Z 2M314CM08 (51) (44.5) (36) (26) (19.5) (14) (12) (10) * * 29 26.3 21.1 15.4 12.3 9.3 7.7 6.4 4.3 V10Z 2M314DM08 — (64) (58) (46.5) (34) (27) (20.5) (17) (14) (9.5) * *At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation.

1-22 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cylindrical Mounts – To 84 kgf

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 42 TO 84 kgf (93 TO 185 lb.) Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 16 TO 30 kgf (36 TO 67 lb.)

13.5 16 New I O N 1 T S E C (.53) (.63)

M8 35 (1.38) NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch. Metric

91 45 x D C D 82 41 x x C 73 36 B x x 64 32 LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS COMPRESSION x SHEAR x x 54 27 Deflections below the line x–x are A x B considered safe practice for static 45 x 23 x x loads; data above that line are useful x x A for calculating deflections under 36 18 x LOAD (kgf) LOAD (kgf) dynamic loads. 27 14 x

18 9

9 4

00.25 0.51 0.76 1.02 1.27 1.52 1.78 2.03 2.29 2.54 2.79 0 0.51 1.52 2.54 3.56 4.57 5.08 6.10 7.11 DEFLECTION (mm) DEFLECTION (mm)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 950 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 Catalog Number Load kgf (lb.) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation kgf (lb.) 42.2 32.2 23.1 17.7 14.1 11.3 V10Z 2M312AM08 (93) — — — — (71) (51) (39) (31) (25) — 53.5 48.1 36.7 29 23.6 19.5 15.9 V10Z 2M312BM08 (118) — — — — (106) (81) (64) (52) (43) (35) 71.7 54.9 43.5 35.8 29.5 24.5 V10Z 2M312CM08 (158) — — — — — (121) (96) (79) (65) (54) 83.9 74.4 59.4 49.5 40.8 33.6 V10Z 2M312DM08 (185) — — — — — (164) (131) (109) (90) (74)

Shear Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 950 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 Catalog Number Load kgf (lb.) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation kgf (lb.) 16.3 15.4 11.3 8.6 6.1 4.5 V10Z 2M312AM08 (36) (34) (25) (19) (13.5) (10) * * * * *

20.9 17.2 13.6 9.5 7.3 5.5 4.3 V10Z 2M312BM08 (46) — (38) (30) (21) (16) (12) (9.5) * * *

25.9 22.7 15.9 11.8 9.1 7.3 5.9 V10Z 2M312CM08 (57) — — (50) (20) (26) (20) (16) (13) * *

30.4 29.9 20.9 15.4 11.8 9.5 8.2 6.4 V10Z 2M312DM08 (67) — — (66) (26) (34) (26) (21) (18) (14) * *At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation.

1-23 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV NEW SIZES ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cylindrical Mounts – Neoprene – To 16 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Hardened Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 8 TO 16 POUNDS (3.6 TO 7.3 kgf) Isolator – Neoprene • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 4.4 TO 9 POUNDS (2 TO 4.1 kgf) • OIL-RESISTANT ELASTOMER

1/2 3/8 (12.7) (9.5)

#8-32 NC 9/16 (14.3)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

32 15

28 C

24 C SHEAR LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS COMPRESSION 10 Deflections below the line x–x 20 x x are considered safe practice for x B static loads; data above that line 16 x x B are useful for calculating x A x

LOAD (lb.) 12 LOAD (lb.) deflections under dynamic loads. x x x A 5 8 x x 4

00.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0 0.10 0.20 0.30 DEFLECTION (in.) DEFLECTION (in.)

Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum Catalog Number Mode 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3600 Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) Compression 8 (3.6) — — — — 6.2 (2.8) 4.8 (2.2) 4.0 (1.8) 3.2 (1.5) 2.7 (1.2) 2.0 (0.9) V10Z 2-304A Shear 4.4 (2) 4.0 (1.8) 3.1 (1.4) 2.2 (1) 1.7 (0.8) 1.3 (0.6) * * * * * Compression 12 (5.4) — — — — 10.2 (4.6) 8 (3.6) 6.5 (2.9) 5.4 (2.4) 4.5 (2) 3.2 (1.4) V10Z 2-304B Shear 6.7 (3) 6.5 (2.9) 5.2 (2.3) 3.7 (1.7) 2.8 (1.3) 2.3 (1) 1.8 (0.8) * * * * Compression 16 (7.3) — — — — — — 14.0 (6.4) 11.6 (5.3) 9.6 (4.4) 6.8 (3.1) V10Z 2-304C 2.3 (1.04) 1.9 (0.9) Shear 9 (4.1) — 9.0 (4.1) 6.3 (2.9) 4.6 (2.1) 3.6 (1.6) 2.9 (1.3) * * *At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation.

1-24 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cylindrical Mounts – Neoprene – To 60 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 33 TO 60 POUNDS (15 TO 27.2 kgf) Isolator – Neoprene • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF 18 TO 34 POUNDS (8.2 TO 15.4 kgf) OIL-RESISTANT ELASTOMER

L 1/2

(12.7) I O N 1 T S E C

1/4-20 NC 1 (25.4)

Note: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

NOTE: 90

Maximum unthreaded portion of 80 40 stud does not exceed 1/16 inch x C & C1 (1.59 mm). 70 35 C & C1 x x 60 30 LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS COMPRESSION x SHEAR Deflections below the line x–x 50 25 are considered safe practice for static loads; data above that line 40 20 x x A are useful for calculating A LOAD (lb.) LOAD (lb.) 30 15 deflections under dynamic loads. x x

20 10

10 5

00.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 DEFLECTION (in.) DEFLECTION (in.)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 850 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 3000 3600 Catalog Number L Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 3/4 33 29.0 21.0 16.0 12.5 10.5 7.0 5.0 V10Z 2-306A (19.1) (15) — — — (13.2) (9.5) (7.3) (5.7) (4.8) (3.2) (2.3) 3/4 60 49.0 37.0 29.5 24.0 17.0 11.5 V10Z 2-306C (19.1) (27.2) — — — — (22.2) (16.8) (13.4) (10.9) (7.7) (5.2) 51/64 60 49.0 37.0 29.5 24.0 17.0 11.5 V10Z 2-306C1 (20.2) (27.2) — — — — (22.2) (16.8) (13.4) (10.9) (7.7) (5.2)

Shear Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 850 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 3000 3600 Catalog Number L Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 18 16.0 9.3 7.2 5.0 3.8 2.8 2.3 2.3 1.2 V10Z 2-306A — (8.2) (7.3) (4.2) (3.3) (2.3) (1.7) (1.3) (1) (1) (0.5) * 34 24.5 20.0 14.7 11.2 9.0 7.5 7.5 4.5 3.5 V10Z 2-306C — (15.4) — (11.1) (9.1) (6.7) (5.1) (4.1) (3.4) (3.4) (2) (1.6) 34 24.5 20.0 14.7 11.2 9.0 7.5 7.5 4.5 3.5 V10Z 2-306C1 — (15.4) — (11.1) (9.1) (6.7) (5.1) (4.1) (3.4) (3.4) (2) (1.6) *At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield less than 81% isolation.

1-25 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cylindrical Mounts – To 210 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 95 TO 210 POUNDS (43.1 TO 95.3 kgf) Isolator – Natural Rubber • NOT RECOMMENDED FOR STATIC SHEAR LOADS

1 (25.4)

S E C T I O N 1 T S E C

5/16-18 NC 5/16-18 NC x 9/16 (14.3) TAPPED 1-1/2 .40 (10.2) DEEP MIN. (38.1)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

450 D 400 C 350 LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS 300 Deflections below the line x–x COMPRESSION are considered safe practice for 250 static loads; data above that line x B x 200 are useful for calculating x x A deflections under dynamic loads. LOAD (lb.) 150 x x 100 x

x 50

0 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 DEFLECTION (in.)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 1150 1250 1500 1750 2000 2750 3500 Catalog Number Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 95 95 80 55 40 30 15 V10Z 2-308A (43.1) (43.1) (36.3) (24.9) (18.1) (13.6) (6.8) — 135 125 85 60 45 22 — V10Z 2-308B (61.2) (56.7) (38.6) (27.2) (20.4) (10) — 185 140 100 75 40 25 V10Z 2-308C — — (83.9) (63.5) (45.4) (34) (18.1) (11.3) 210 185 135 105 55 35 — — V10Z 2-308D (95.3) (83.9) (61.2) (47.6) (24.9) (15.9)

1-26 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cylindrical Mounts – To 95 kgf

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 43 TO 95 kgf (95 TO 210 lb.) Isolator – Natural Rubber • NOT RECOMMENDED FOR STATIC SHEAR LOADS

New I O N 1 T S E C 25 13.5 (.53) (.98)

M8 M8 38 (1.50) The projections shown are per ISO convention. Metric NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch.

204 D 181 C 159 LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS 136 Deflections below the line x–x are COMPRESSION considered safe practice for static 113 loads; data above that line are useful x B x 91 for calculating deflections under x x A dynamic loads. LOAD (kgf) 68 x x 45 x

x 23

0 1.27 2.54 3.81 5.08 6.35 7.62 DEFLECTION (mm)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 1150 1250 1500 1750 2000 2750 3500 Catalog Number Load kgf (lb.) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation kgf (lb.)

43.1 43.1 36.3 25 18.2 13.6 6.8 V10Z 2M308AM08 (95) (95) (80) (55) (40) (30) (15) — 61.2 56.7 38.6 27.2 20.4 10 V10Z 2M308BM08 (135) — (125) (85) (60) (45) (22) — 83.9 63.5 45.4 34 18.2 11.3 V10Z 2M308CM08 (185) — — (140) (100) (75) (40) (25) 95.3 83.9 61.2 47.6 25 15.9 V10Z 2M308DM08 (210) — — (185) (135) (105) (55) (35)

1-27 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cylindrical Mounts – To 86 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 37 TO 86 POUNDS (16.8 TO 39 kgf) Isolator – Natural Rubber • NOT RECOMMENDED FOR STATIC SHEAR LOADS

(25.4) I O N 1 T S E C

1 (25.4) 5/16-18 NC TAPPED .20 (5.1) DEEP MIN. (TYP)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

120 D

100 x

LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPHS 80 COMPRESSION x Deflections below the line x–x C x are considered safe practice for 60 x B static loads; data above that line x

LOAD (lb.) x are useful for calculating x A deflections under dynamic loads. 40 x

00.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 DEFLECTION (in.)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 700 950 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 3000 Catalog Number Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 37 35.0 24.0 18.0 13.5 11.0 V10Z 2-319A — — — — — (16.8) (15.9) (10.9) (8.2) (6.1) (5) 48 34.0 26.0 20.5 16.0 13.0 — — — — — V10Z 2-319B (21.8) (15.4) (11.8) (9.3) (7.3) (5.9) 57 46.0 32.5 26.5 20.0 16.0 V10Z 2-319C — — — — — (25.9) (20.9) (14.7) (12) (9.1) (7.3) 86 — — — — 80.0 59.0 48.0 36.0 30.0 21.0 V10Z 2-319D (39) (36.3) (26.8) (21.8) (16.3) (13.6) (9.5)

1-28 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I

V O

D N A CylindricalCylindrical Mounts Mounts – – Urethane Urethane – – To To 45 45 lbs. lbs. C O M TS P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF .3 TO 45 POUNDS (0.14 TO 20.4 kgf) Isolator – Urethane • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF .1 TO 10 POUNDS (0.05 TO 4.5 kgf)

PL L

D D

TD TD G FEATURES: Male - Female Female - Blank • Highly damped • Very resistant to abrasion, oils, chemicals, ozone and ultraviolet radiation • These mounts exhibit extremely low ampliﬁcation at resonance and quickly return to system equilibrium after shock or vibration input

Load Stiffness Ib./in. (kgf/mm) T Temperature Range Thread D lb. (kgf) Catalog Number D L P G Thread Static Dynamic Size Depth Cmpr. Peak Max. ShearΔ Cmpr. ShearΔ Cmpr. ShearΔ Durometer Max. Performacne Intermittent .3 .1 31 4 120 23 +32°F to +90°F +120°F V10Z60-MF1U0424 24 * .280 .320 .200 .060 .110 (0.14) (0.05) (0.6) (0.07) (2.1) (0.4) (0°C to +32.2°C) (+48.9°C) #4-40 (7.1) (8.1) (5.1) (1.5) (2.8) 2.0 .8 200 27 765 148 +55°F to +105°F +225°F V10Z60- 1U0452 52 (0.91) (0.36) (3.6) (0.5) (13.7) (2.6) (+12.8°C to +40.5°C) (+107.2°C) .6 .3 42 7 164 33 +32°F to +90°F +120°F V10Z60- 2U0624 24 * .405 .500 .375 .060 .160 (0.27) (0.14) (0.75) (0.13) (2.9) (0.6) (0°C to +32.2°C) (+48.9°C) #6-32 (10.3) (12.7) (9.5) (1.5) (4.1) 4.0 2.0 270 47 1049 208 +55°F to +105°F +225°F V10Z60- 2U0652 52 (1.8) (0.91) (4.8) (0.84) (18.7) (3.7) (+12.8°C to +40.5°C) (+107.2°C) .6 .3 42 7 164 33 +32°F to +90°F +120°F V10Z60- 2U0824 24 * .405 .500 .375 .060 .160 (0.27) (0.14) (0.75) (0.13) (2.9) (0.6) (0°C to +32.2°C) (+48.9°C) #8-32 (10.3) (12.7) (9.5) (1.5) (4.1) 4.0 2.0 270 47 1049 208 +55°F to +105°F +225°F V10Z60- 2U0852 52 (1.8) (0.91) (4.8) (0.84) (18.7) (3.7) (+12.8°C to +40.5°C) (+107.2°C) .625 .625 .500 .100 .260 12.0 3.5 900 92 2350 385 +55°F to +105°F +225°F V10Z60- 3U2552 52 1/4-20 (15.9) (15.9) (12.7) (2.5) (6.6) (5.4) (1.6) (16.1) (1.6) (42) (6.9) (+12.8°C to +40.5°C) (+107.2°C) 1.000 .750 .625 .100 .290 45.0 10.0 2580 230 6727 896 +55°F to +105°F +225°F V10Z60- 4U3152 52 5/16-18 (25.4) (19.1) (15.9) (2.5) (7.4) (20.4) (4.5) (46.1) (4.1) (120.1) (16) (+12.8°C to +40.5°C) (+107.2°C) STYLE: NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. FB Female–Blank MF Male–Female * To be discontinued when present stock is depleted. ΔShear load data not applicable for Female–Blank style.

1-29 Rev: 8-24-10 SS Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I

V O

D N A CylindricalCylindrical Mounts Mounts – – Urethane Urethane – – To To 50 50 lbs. lbs. C O M TS P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF .5 TO 50 POUNDS (0.23 TO 22.7 kgf) Isolator – Urethane • FOR SHEAR LOADS OF .2 TO 13 POUNDS (0.09 TO 5.9 kgf)

PPL PL

D D

G G G FEATURES: • Highly damped Male - Male Male - Blank • Very resistant to abrasion, oils, chemicals, ozone and ultraviolet radiation • These mounts exhibit extremely low ampliﬁcation at resonance and quickly return to system equilibrium after shock or vibration input

Stiffness Ib./in. (kgf/mm) Load Temperature Range Thread lb. (kgf) Catalog Number Durometer D L P G Static Dynamic Size Cmpr. Peak Max. ShearΔ Cmpr. ShearΔ Cmpr. ShearΔ Max. Performacne Intermittent .5 .2 25 3 40 9 +32°F to +90°F +120°F V10Z60- 1U0424 24 * .280 .320 .200 .060 (0.23) (0.09) (0.4) (0.05) (0.7) (0.16) (0°C to +32.2°C) (+48.9°C) #4-40 (7.1) (8.1) (5.1) (1.5) 4.0 1.5 159 19 262 59 +55°F to +105°F +225°F V10Z60- 1U0452 52 (1.8) (0.7) (2.8) (0.3) (4.7) (1.1) (+12.8°C to +40.5°C) (+107.2°C) 1.0 .4 31 4 45 12 +32°F to +90°F +120°F V10Z60-MB2U0624 24 * .405 .500 .375 .060 (0.45) (0.18) (0.6) (0.07) (0.8) (0.22) (0°C to +32.2°C) (+48.9°C) #6-32 (10.3) (12.7) (9.5) (1.5) 8.0 3.0 200 24 285 74 +55°F to +105°F +225°F V10Z60- 2U0652 52 (3.6) (1.36) (3.6) (0.4) (5.1) (1.3) (+12.8°C to +40.5°C) (+107.2°C) 1.0 .4 31 4 45 12 +32°F to +90°F +120°F V10Z60- 2U0824 24 * .405 .500 .375 .060 (0.45) (0.18) (0.6) (0.07) (0.8) (0.22) (0°C to +32.2°C) (+48.9°C) #8-32 (10.3) (12.7) (9.5) (1.5) 8.0 3.0 200 24 285 74 +55°F to +105°F +225°F V10Z60- 2U0852 52 (3.6) (1.36) (3.6) (0.4) (5.1) (1.3) (+12.8°C to +40.5°C) (+107.2°C) .625 .625 .500 .100 20.0 5.0 320 35 471 120 +55°F to +105°F +225°F V10Z60- 3U2552 52 1/4-20 (15.9) (15.9) (12.7) (2.5) (9.1) (2.3) (5.7) (0.6) (8.4) (2.1) (+12.8°C to +40.5°C) (+107.2°C) 1.000 .750 .625 .100 50.0 13.0 860 75 1108 270 +55°F to +105°F +225°F V10Z60- 4U3152 52 5/16-18 (25.4) (19.1) (15.9) (2.5) (22.7) (5.9) (15.4) (1.3) (19.8) (4.8) (+12.8°C to +40.5°C) (+107.2°C) STYLE: NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. MB Male–Blank MM Male–Male * To be discontinued when present stock is depleted. ΔShear load data not applicable for Male–Blank style.

1-30 Rev: 8-24-10 SS Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O D N ® A Cylindrical Mounts – Sorbothane Type

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Studs – Carbon Steel, Zinc Plated • VIBRATION ISOLATION • SHOCK ABSORPTION Damper – Sorbothane® Polyether-Based Polyurethane • LONG FATIGUE LIFE 50 or 70 Shore 00 Durometer B B CC C New

S E C T I O N 1 T S E C

A A

Fig. 1 D Fig. 2 B C B

A A

Fig. 3 D Fig. 4

TEMPERATURE RANGE: -20°F to +160°F (-29°C to +72°C) Fig. Thread A B C D Load Range Per Catalog Number Diameter Damper Width Stud Length Thread Depth No. Size in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) Mount lb. (kgf) 50 Durometer .75 .50 4-8 V10Z59-MM0807550 #8-32 (19.05) (12.7) (1.8-3.6) 1.50 1.00 .5 11-16 V10Z59-MM2515050 1 1/4-20 (38.1) (25.4) (12.7) — (5-7.3) 1.75 .85 20-40 V10Z59-MM2517550 1/4-20 (44.45) (21.59) (9.1-18.1) .75 .50 .25 3-6 V10Z59-MF0807550 #8-32 (19.05) (12.7) (6.35) (1.4-2.7) 1.50 1.00 .5 .35 11-18 V10Z59-MF2515050 2 1/4-20 (38.1) (25.4) (12.7) (8.89) (5-8.2) 1.75 .85 .35 20-40 V10Z59-MF2517550 1/4-20 (44.45) (21.59) (8.89) (9.1-18.1) .75 .50 3-5 V10Z59-MB0807550 #8-32 (19.05) (12.7) (1.4-2.3) 1.50 1.00 11-18 .5 — V10Z59-MB2515050 3 1/4-20 (38.1) (25.4) (12.7) (5-8.2) 1.75 .85 20-40 V10Z59-MB2517550 1/4-20 (44.45) (21.59) (9.1-18.1) .75 .50 .25 3-5 V10Z59-FB0807550 #8-32 (19.05) (12.7) (6.35) (1.4-2.3) 1.50 1.00 .5 .35 11-18 V10Z59-FB2515050 4 1/4-20 (38.1) (25.4) (12.7) (8.89) (5-8.2) 1.75 .85 .35 20-40 V10Z59-FB2517550 1/4-20 (44.45) (21.59) (8.89) (9.1-18.1) 70 Durometer .75 .50 8-12 V10Z59-MM0807570 #8-32 (19.05) (12.7) (3.6-5.4) 1.50 1.00 .5 19-27 V10Z59-MM2515070 1 1/4-20 (38.1) (25.4) (12.7) — (8.6-12.2) 1.75 .85 35-75 V10Z59-MM2517570 1/4-20 (44.45) (21.59) (15.9-34) .75 .50 .25 5-12 V10Z59-MF0807570 #8-32 (19.05) (12.7) (6.35) (2.3-5.4) 1.50 1.00 .5 .35 18-30 V10Z59-MF2515070 2 1/4-20 (38.1) (25.4) (12.7) (8.89) (8.2-13.6) 1.75 .85 .35 36-75 V10Z59-MF2517570 1/4-20 (44.45) (21.59) (8.89) (16.3-34) .75 .50 6-8 V10Z59-MB0807570 #8-32 (19.05) (12.7) (2.7-3.6) 1.50 1.00 .5 — 18-27 V10Z59-MB2515070 3 1/4-20 (38.1) (25.4) (12.7) (8.2-12.2) 1.75 .85 35-75 V10Z59-MB2517570 1/4-20 (44.45) (21.59) (15.9-34) .75 .50 .25 6-8 V10Z59-FB0807570 #8-32 (19.05) (12.7) (6.35) (2.7-3.6) 1.50 1.00 .5 .35 18-27 V10Z59-FB2515070 4 1/4-20 (38.1) (25.4) (12.7) (8.89) (8.2-12.2) 1.75 .85 .35 35-75 V10Z59-FB2517570 1/4-20 (44.45) (21.59) (8.89) (15.9-34) See additional information on technical page. 1-31 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O D N ® A Cylindrical Mounts – Sorbothane Type

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Studs – Carbon Steel, Zinc Plated • VIBRATION ISOLATION • SHOCK ABSORPTION Damper – Sorbothane® Polyether-Based Polyurethane • LONG FATIGUE LIFE 50 or 70 Shore 00 Durometer New B B CC C

A A

Fig. 1 D Fig. 2 B C B

A A

Fig. 3 D Fig. 4 Metric OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE: -29°C to +72°C (-20°F to +162°F) A B C D Load Range Fig. Thread Diameter Damper Width Stud Length Thread Depth Per Mount Catalog Number No. Size mm mm mm mm kgf (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) (lb.) 50 Durometer 38.1 25.4 5-7 V10Z59MMM638150 (1.5) (1.00) (11-15.4) 1 — 44.5 21.6 9-18 V10Z59MMM644550 (1.75) (.85) (19.8-39.7) 38.1 25.4 5-8 V10Z59MMF638150 (1.5) (1.00) 12 13.1 (11-17.6) 2 44.5 21.6 (.47) (.52) 9-18 V10Z59MMF644550 (1.75) (.85) (19.8-39.7) M6 38.1 25.4 5-8 V10Z59MMB638150 (1.5) (1.00) (11-17.6) 3 — 44.5 21.6 9-18 V10Z59MMB644550 (1.75) (.85) (19.8-39.7) 38.1 25.4 5-8 V10Z59MFB638150 (1.5) (1.00) 13.1 (11-17.6) 4 — 44.5 21.6 (.52) 9-18 V10Z59MFB644550 (1.75) (.85) (19.8-39.7) 70 Durometer 38.1 25.4 8-12 V10Z59MMM638170 (1.5) (1.00) (17.6-26.5) 1 — 44.5 21.6 16-34 V10Z59MMM644570 (1.75) (.85) (35.3-75) 38.1 25.4 8-13 V10Z59MMF638170 (1.5) (1.00) 12 13.1 (17.6-28.7) 2 44.5 21.6 (.47) (.52) 16-34 V10Z59MMF644570 (1.75) (.85) (35.3-75) M6 38.1 25.4 8-12 V10Z59MMB638170 (1.5) (1.00) (17.6-26.5) 3 — 44.5 21.6 16-34 V10Z59MMB644570 (1.75) (.85) (35.3-75) 38.1 25.4 8-12 V10Z59MFB638170 (1.5) (1.00) 13.1 (17.6-26.5) 4 — 44.5 21.6 (.52) 16-34 V10Z59MFB644570 (1.75) (.85) (35.3-75) See additional information on technical page.

1-32 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N ® A Sorbothane Technical Information

C O M T S www.vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 PONEN vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 Inch/Metric Material Properties of Sorbothane® Durometer (Shore 00) 10 Property Units 50 70 7 NAT. RUBBER 80 DURO SHORE 00 2 c/cc = 0.05 Tensile Strength at Break 122.61 (0.85) 206.06 (1.42) psi (N/mm ) 5 Elongation at Break 568 399 % 3 Tensile Elastic Stress at 25.47 (0.18) 66.18 (0.46) 2 100% Strain Tensile Elastic Stress at NEOPRENE 85 DURO SHORE 00 54.86 (0.38) 127.02 (0.88) c/cc = 0.15 200% Strain 1.0 Tensile Elastic Stress at 80.13 (0.55) 165.95 (1.14) psi (N/mm2) 300% Strain 0.7 SORBOTHANE 50 DURO SHORE 00 c/cc = 0.4 Compressive Stress at 12.00 (0.08) 30.00 (0.21) 0.5 20% Strain 0.3

Compressive Stress at Transmissibility 105.00 (0.72) 232.00 (1.60) 50% Strain 0.2 Tear Strength 48.73 (8.58) 65.26 (11.49) lb./in. (N/mm) Bulk Modulus 2.86 (4.15 x 10-5) — Pascal (psi) Static Coefficient of 0.1 10.4 4.1 Friction — 0.07 Kinetic Coefficient of 2.6 2.5 Friction 0.5 1.0 2 3 5 7 10 Density 85.5 (1.37) 84.9 (1.36) lb./ft3 (g/cm3) F/Fn Specific Gravity 1.364 1.363 — Optimum Performance -20° to +150° -20° to +160° Transmissibility of Sorbothane and other materials F (C) Temperature Range (-29° to +66°) (-29° to +71°) as a function of the Excitation Frequency/Natural Frequency Ratio Glass Transition -37.4° (-38.6°) -34.7° (-37°) C (F) Flash Ignition 570° (299°) — F (C) Flammability Self Ignition Flammability 750° (399°) — F (C) 25 Flammability Rating with V2 V2 — Flame Retardent Added Resilience Test 20 11 22 % Rebound Height Impulse Resilience Test 18 25 % Rebound Height 15 Butyl Dielectric Strength 256 (10.1) 261 (10.3) V/mil (kV/mm) Neoprene Dynamic Young's 10 105 (0.72) 120 (0.83) Modulus at 5 Hertz Dynamic Young's SORBOTHANE 50 DURO

150 (1.03) 162 (1.12) G-Force 5 Modulus at 15 Hertz psi (N/mm2) Dynamic Young's 210 (1.45) 237 (1.63) Modulus at 30 Hertz 0 Dynamic Young's 270 (1.86) 300 (2.07) Modulus at 50 Hertz -5 Tangent Delta at .56 .56 5 Hertz Excitation Tangent Delta at -10 .58 .60 0 5 10 15 20 25 15 Hertz Excitation Time (ms) Tangent Delta at .57 .59 30 Hertz Excitation Response of Sorbothane and other materials to an Impulse Tangent Delta at — .50 .55 50 Hertz Excitation Bacterial Resistance No growth Fungal Resistance No growth Heat Aging Stable 1.2 Ultraviolet Good 1 Ozone Special item 0.8 Chemical Resistance to NR -1.4 0.6

Hydraulic Fluid (lb.) Chemical Resistance to 0.4 SORBOTHANE 4.3 50 DURO Kerosene 0.2

% wt change Normalized Load Chemical Resistance to 0 6.4 Diesel 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 Chemical Resistance to Percent Deflection 5.0 Soap Solution Hysteresis Response of Sorbothane and Natural Rubber

1-33 Rev: 8-24-10 SS ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Technical Information for Silicone Gel Mounts

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

New

S E C T I O N 1 T S E C Metric General Characteristics V10Z61MA1 V10Z61MA2 & V10Z61MB1 V10Z61MB2 & V10Z61MSF10

Specific Gravity 1.05 1.06 1.07 Needle* Penetration 55 — — Hardness (1/10 mm) Asker C** — 33 52.5 Specific Heat 1.52 1.51 1.52 J/g x K (Btu/lb. x °F) (.36) (.36) (.36) Thermal Conductivity 0.2 0.2 0.2 W/m x K (.12) (.12) (.12) [Btu/(h x ft. x °F)]

Volume Resistance 4.0 x 1014 3.2 x 1014 6.6 x 1014 Ohm x cm (1.6 x 1014) (1.3 x 1014) (2.6 x 1014) (Ohm x in.) Toluene + + + Acetone + + + Methanol - - - Distilled H20 - - - Chemical Fuel + + + Resistance Lubricant + + + NaCl (10%) - - - HCL (10%) - - - NaOH (5%) - - - Temperature -40°C to 200°C -40°C to 200°C -40°C to 200°C Range (-40°F to 392°F) (-40°F to 392°F) (-40°F to 392°F) + = Has a Reaction - = No Reaction

Catalog Number Quantity of Deflection mm (in.) Load at Deflection kgf (lb.)

V10Z61MTHB 6.3 ±1 (.248 ±.04) 0.010 (.022) V10Z61MTHA 3.3 ±1 (.130 ±.04) 0.010 (.022) V10Z61MTHC 5 ±1 (.197 ±.04) 0.026 (.057) V10Z61MTHTW 4.4 ±0.5 (.173 ±.02) 0.208 (.459) V10Z61MMN03 0.031 (.068) V10Z61MMN05 0.052 (.115) 3.5 ±1 (.138 ±.04) V10Z61MMN07 0.073 (.161) V10Z61MMN10 0.104 (.229) V10Z61MSF02 0.031 (.068) V10Z61MSF05 4 ±0.5 (.157 ±.02) 0.078 (.172) V10Z61MSF10 0.146 (.322) *JIS K 2207 **Japan Rubber Association Standard (SRIS 0101)

1-34 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Proper Application of Silicone Gel Mounts

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

RIGHT USE New

S E C T I O N 1 T S E C Metric FEATURES:

1. EVEN LOAD INSTALLED SURFACE • Highest damping effect arises when gel is compressed 10% up to 30%.

• Low in temperature dependency, this material offers stable performance from -40°C to 200°C (-40°F to 392°F).

• Excellent chemical resistance.

• Low in compression set.

• Performance stays the same even after repeated use.

2. HANG IN COMPRESSIVE DIRECTION • Contains nothing harmful. Environment-friendly.

WRONG USE

3. TWIST

1. UNEVEN LOAD

4. TENSILE DIRECTION

2. BOLT HOLE OUT OF CENTER 5. SHEARING DIRECTION

1-35 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Double-Studded Silicone Gel Vibration Mounts

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Studs – Fig.1 & 2: Brass, Nickel Plated; Fig. 3: Iron, • DAMPS LOW FREQUENCY VIBRATIONS Unichro Plated • FOR SMALL TO INTERMEDIATE LOAD APPLICATIONS Body – Silicone Gel • TO BE USED IN COMPRESSION ONLY Ø20 Ø28 (.79) (1.1) M6 M6 New I O N 1 T S E C Ø12 (.47) 17 (.67) M4 20 (.79)

15 (.59)

h h h

Ø18 Ø25 Ø35 (.71) (.98) (1.38) Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3 Note: Dimensions in ( ) are inch. TEMPERATURE RANGE: -40°C to +200°C (-40°F to +392°F) Metric Resonance Resonance Recommended Fig. Optimum Load h Catalog Number Point Magnification Frequency Number kgf/leg (lb./leg) mm (in.) Hz dB Hz

V10Z61MTHB 0.4 to 0.6 (.9 to 1.3) 13 to 11 13 to 12 18 18 (.71) 1 ˜ V10Z61MTHA 0.5 to 0.8 (1.1 to 1.8) 16 to 15 12 23 ˜ 12 (.47) V10Z61MTHC 2 0.8 to 2 (1.8 to 4.4) 14 to 12 13 to 12 20 ˜ 18 (.71) V10Z61MTHTW 3 12.5 to 25 (27.6 to 55.1) 10 to 8 20 to 19 from 14 25 (.98)

• MATERIAL: Studs– Iron, Unichro Plated Body – Silicone Gel

M6 New 18 (.71)

22 (.87)

Ø24 (.94) Ø30 (1.18) Note: Dimensions in ( ) are inch. TEMPERATURE RANGE: -40°C to +200°C (-40°F to +392°F)

Resonance Resonance Recommended Optimum Load Catalog Number* Point Magnification Frequency kgf/leg (lb./leg) Hz dB Hz

V10Z61MMN03 2 to 3.5 (4.4 to 7.7) 12 to 10 12 17 ˜ **V10Z61MMN05 3.5 to 5.5 (7.7 to 12.1) 11 to 10 14 to 13 16 ˜ V10Z61MMN07 5.5 to 8.5 (12.1 to 18.7) 11 to 10 16 to 15 16 ˜ V10Z61MMN10 8.5 to 12.5 (18.7 to 27.6) 11 to 10 20 to 18 16 ˜ See application page for proper usage. **See page 2-3 for Transmissibility Chart. * This type is slotted on the stud for fixing a bolt.

1-36 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Ring Mounts – To 20 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Cadmium Plated • FOR LOADS OF 1 TO 20 POUNDS (0.45 TO 9.07 kgf) Isolator – Natural Rubber

S E C T I O N 1 T S E C

LOAD

W L H

D CURVE 2 35 30 B 25 20 131 15 A 132 10 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NATURAL FREQUENCY (CPS) FREQUENCY NATURAL LOAD PER MOUNT (lb.)

CURVE 1 CURVE 3 40 35 35 30 30 25 25 20 121 20 15 112 111 122 141 15 10 142 10 5 0 1 2 3 4 0 5 10 15 20 NATURAL FREQUENCY (CPS) FREQUENCY NATURAL NATURAL FREQUENCY (CPS) FREQUENCY NATURAL LOAD PER MOUNT (lb.) LOAD PER MOUNT (lb.)

Dimensions "K" Rated Load Dynamic "C" Catalog Number Curve lb. Spring Rate Damping H H (kgf) A B (No DWL lb. / in. Constant (Load) Load) (kgf / mm) 1.0 90 V10Z 8-112 .193 (0.45) .50 .51 .56 .53 1.56 .31 (1.6) #6-32 2.0 (12.7) (13) (14.2) (13.5) (39.6) (7.9) 155 V10Z 8-111 (0.91) (2.77) .376 1 2.5 63 V10Z 8-122 .025 (1.13) .62 .58 .68 .68 1.93 .34 (1.13) #10-32 3.0 (15.7) (14.7) (17.3) (17.3) (49) (8.6) 77 V10Z 8-121 (1.36) (1.38) .058 5.0 137 V10Z 8-132 .027 (2.27) .75 .81 .93 1.00 2.54 .53 (2.45) 2 1/4 - 20 8.0 (19.1) (20.6) (23.6) (25.4) (64.5) (13.5) 210 V10Z 8-131 (3.63) (3.75) .174 13.0 122 V10Z 8-142 .136 (5.9) .62 1.45 1.75 1.62 3.00 .75 (2.18) 3 5/16-18 20.0 (36.8) (36.8) (44.5) (41.1) (76.2) (19.1) 172 V10Z 8-141 (9.07) (3.07) .262 Static "K" is approximately 1/2 to 1/3 Dynamic Rate. NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

1-37 Buy Product See Section 1 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Ring Mounts

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Mounting Plates – Steel, plated • FOR STANDARD LOADS OF 75 TO 1200 kgf Isolators – Natural Rubber (165 TO 2645 lb.)

TWO RING MOUNTS

S E C T I O N 1 T S E C

Ød L Ød2 1 Ød1

H H H

ØD L

Style 2HH Style 2BB Style 2NN THREE RING MOUNTS Metric Ød L Ød 2 Ød2 1 FEATURES: • Low natural frequency • Constant natural frequency H H H in a wide range of load • Excellent stability • Multiple layers are possible • Very easy to install L APPLICATIONS • COMPRESSORS • LIGHTWEIGHT MACHINES Style 3HH Style 3BB Style 3NN • PUMPS • OFFICE EQUIPMENT • BLOWERS • MEASURING INSTRUMENTS COMBINATION MOUNTS • TRANSFORMERS • SCALES

CATALOG NUMBER DESIGNATION V 1 0 Z 4 7 M R M

Load Code Style HN Style HB Style BN Mounting Style: (see drawings at left) NOTE: These combination mounts shown HH, BB, NN, HN, HB or BN above are also available with three rings.

Load Range Load Defl. with *Nat. d d L Standard Lower Limit… Std. Load Freq. DH1 2 Code Load Upper Limit

No. Rings kgf lb. kgf lb. mm in. (cpm) mm in. mm in. Thread mmin. mm in. 0602 2 11 .43 450 35 1.38 75 165 25...100 55...220 60 2.36 M8 11 .43 51 2.00 0603 3 15 .59 370 30 1.18 0802 2 14 .55 380 46 1.81 150 331 50...200 110...441 80 3.15 M10 13 .51 0803 3 20 .79 320 67 2.64 1202 2 20 .79 310 66 2.60 300 661 100...400 220...882 120 4.72 M12 15 .59 35 1.38 1203 3 30 1.18 260 97 3.82 1602 2 27 1.06 270 86 3.39 600 1322 200...800 440...1763 160 6.30 M16 19 .75 55 2.17 1603 3 41 1.61 220 126 4.96 2302 2 38 1.50 230 114 4.49 1200 2645 400...1600882...3526 230 9.06 M16 19 .75 55 2.17 2303 3 57 2.24 190 168 6.61 *The natural frequency of 1 layer is 2 layers natural frequency x 2

1-38 SECTION 2 Buy Product See Section 2 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A A T I V O

A Base Mounts – Flange Type

C O S www.vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 MPONENT vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Isolator – Ozone-Resistant Natural Rubber (55 Shore A) • EXCELLENT TEAR RESISTANCE Bolt – DIN 976 • STUD IS REMOVABLE FOR FEMALE THREAD ATTACHMENT Nut – DIN 934 Washer – DIN 9021 Base – Carbon Steel D C New D C

A I

I L 13.52 L (.532) FIG. 1 E

d1 d2 FIG. 2 Metric The projections shown are per ISO convention. Maximum Minimum Admissible A D E L I d d Fig. 1 2 Temporary Catalog Number mm mm mm mm mm C mm mm Load Deﬂection Load Deﬂection No. (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) N mm N mm Overload (lb.) (in.) (lb.) (in.) % 300 50 V10Z77MAGB-30B 24 (67.4) 4 (11.2) 1 1 (.94) 450 (.16) (.039) V10Z77MAGB-30 30 48 88 63.6 8 4 (101.2) 100 M8 30 (1.18) (1.89) (3.46) (2.50) (.315) (.157) 500 (22.5) V10Z77MAGB-D30B 38 (112.4) 7 2 2 (1.50) 700 (.28) 150 (.079) V10Z77MAGB-D30 (157.4) (33.7)

PERFORMANCE GRAPH

V10Z77MAGB-D30 700

600 Did You Know? V10Z77MAGB-D30B 500 ...That Advanced Antivibration V10Z77MAGB-30 Components is well-equipped to 400 handle an entire project from the design and manufacturing of individual

300 V10Z77MAGB-30B components to the assembly of ﬁnal products? We are dedicated to quality

200 products and on time delivery.

100

0 12345678

2-2 Rev: 8-24-10 SS Rev: 8-24-10SS FlangePlate– Body – • MATERIAL: Stud– 2-R6 (.24) Catalog Number www.vibrationmounts.comPhone:516.328.3662Fax:516.328.3365

V10Z61MSF10 V10Z61MSF05 V10Z61MSF02 ADVA

C N O C

M D P

N N

E T

I N V

(1.81)

(2.36)

T I

46 B 60

S R

TRANSMISSIBILITY T I O

Steel, Trivalent ChromatePlated N 0.0315 Silicone Gel (1.42) 0.315 Ø36 0.01 3.17 31.7 NOTE: 100 0.1 10 1

0 20406080100 Stainless Steel 7.5 to12.5(16.527.6) 3.25 to7.5(7.216.5) 1.25 to3.25(2.87.2) Dimensions in()areinch. TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICSOFTHESILICONEGEL TYPEMOUNTS vibrationmounts.com Phone:516.328.3662Fax:516.328.3365 LONG HOLE 2-4.2x6(.17 x.24) Optimum Load kgf/leg (lb./leg) kgf/leg

Silicone Dampers 60° TEMPERATURE RANGE: (.94) Ø24 M6 FREQUENCY (Hz) Damping Rubber Base Mounts–SiliconeGelType (Example Shown: (1.18) u Product Buy Ø30

-40°Cto+200°C(-40°F+392°F) SLOTTED 2-3 V10Z61MMN05 18 (.71) 22 (.87) Resonance Magni Resonance Point Vibration Level:0.2G Load: 20 kgf/4 Legs Load: 20kgf/4 • (44.1 lb./4Legs) FOR SMALL TO INTERMEDIATE LOAD APPLICATIONS e eto 2 Section See ) ﬁ cation • • CAN BEUSEDWHENSPACE ISLIMITED DAMPS LOWFREQUENCY VIBRATIONS • TO BEUSEDINCOMPRESSIONONLY Dampers Silicone 6.5 9.5 Hz eus Quote Request Dampers Rubber 8.8 19.8 Hz Metric ii Website Visit Buy Product See Section 2 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A A T I V O

A Platemounts – To 20 lbs.

C O S www.vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 MPONENT vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR LOADS OF 4 TO 20 POUNDS (1.8 TO 9.1 kgf) Base – Steel or Aluminum

1.25 (31.8)

1.0 (25.4) X X

Ø.165 (4.2) LOAD/DEFLECTION GRAPH .17 Ø.17 Maximum Recommended .46 (4.3) (4.3) Static Load/Deﬂection (11.7) 40 .75 D (19.1) 30

.035 (0.89) 20 C Ø1.0

LOAD (lb.) B (25.4) 10 SECTION X-X A 0 .05 .10 DEFLECTION (in.) 1.414 (35.9)

Base Type Square Aluminum Steel V10Z40-1210B1 — Ø1.25 Catalog Ø.165 V10Z40-1210C1 (31.8) 1.68 Number V10Z40-1210C3 (42.7) (4.2) V10Z40-1210D1 —

Base Type Diamond Aluminum Steel V10Z40-1210A2 — NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. Catalog V10Z40-1210B2 V10Z40-1210B4 Number V10Z40-1210C2 V10Z40-1210C4 V10Z40-1210D2 V10Z40-1210D4

NOTE: The above platemounts are available in Neoprene as a special order (200 pc. minimum). Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Load Maximum Rating Load lb. (kgf) 1900 2500 3000 4000 Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) A 4 (1.8) 4 (1.8) 2 (0.9) 1.5 (0.7) 1 (0.5) B 8 (3.6) 8 (3.6) 4 (1.8) 3.0 (1.4) 2 (0.9) C 12 (5.4) 12 (5.4) 7 (3.2) 5.0 (2.3) 3 (1.4) D 20 (9.1) 20 (9.1) 11 (5) 8.0 (3.6) 5 (2.3)

2-4 Rev: 8-24-10 SS Buy Product See Section 2 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Platemounts – To 26 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR LOADS OF 3 TO 26 POUNDS (1.4 TO 11.8 kgf) Base – Steel or Aluminum

LOAD/DEFLECTION GRAPH Maximum Recommended Static Load/Deflection DL 30 1.78 DK (45.2) 25 DD 20 CK .16 DIA. (4) 15 CC 1.38 BK (35)X X LOAD (lb.) 10 BB 5 AA

0 .05 .10 I O N 2 T S E C .26 (6.6) .39 DEFLECTION (in.) (9.9) .20 (5.1) .63 (16) Base Type .050 Aluminum Steel (1.3) Square 1.50 (38.1) — — SECTION X-X V10Z40-1215BB1 V10Z40-1215BB3 V10Z40-1215BK1 — Catalog V10Z40-1215CC1 V10Z40-1215CC3 Number 1.95 V10Z40-1215CK1 V10Z40-1215CK3 (5) V10Z40-1215DD1 — V10Z40-1215DK1 — V10Z40-1215DL1 V10Z40-1215DL3

Base Type Diamond Aluminum Steel V10Z40-1215AA2 V10Z40-1215AA4 1.78 2.34 .16 DIA. V10Z40-1215BB2 V10Z40-1215BB4 (45.2) (59.4) (4) V10Z40-1215BK2 — Catalog V10Z40-1215CC2 V10Z40-1215CC4 Number — V10Z40-1215CK4 V10Z40-1215DD2 V10Z40-1215DD4 NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. — V10Z40-1215DK4 — —

NOTE: 1. The above platemounts are available in Neoprene as a special order (200 pc. minimum). 2. The above platemounts may be discontinued but are still available in large quantities. Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Load Maximum Rating Load lb. (kgf) 1600 1750 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) AA 3 (1.4) 3 (1.4) 2 (0.9) 1.7 (0.8) 1.0 (0.5) .8 (0.4) .6 (0.3) .4 (0.2) BB 6 (2.7) 6 (2.7) 5 (2.3) 3.5 (1.6) 2.0 (0.9) 1.6 (0.7) 1.2 (0.5) .8 (0.4) BK 9 (4.1) 9 (4.1) 7 (3.2) 5.0 (2.3) 3.0 (1.4) 2.4 (1.1) 1.7 (0.8) 1.3 (0.6) CC 12 (5.4) 12 (5.4) 9 (4.1) 7.0 (3.2) 4.5 (2) 3.0 (1.4) 2.2 (1) 1.7 (0.8) CK 14 (6.4) 14 (6.4) 11 (5) 9.0 (4.1) 5.5 (2.5) 4.0 (1.8) 2.8 (1.3) 2.2 (1) DD 17 (7.7) 17 (7.7) 13 (5.9) 11.0 (5) 6.5 (2.9) 5.0 (2.3) 3.4 (1.5) 2.6 (1.2) DK 20 (9.1) 20 (9.1) 16 (7.3) 12.0 (5.4) 8.0 (3.6) 5.5 (2.5) 4.0 (1.8) 3.0 (1.4) DL 26 (11.8) 26 (11.8) 20 (9.1) 16.0 (7.3) 10.0 (4.5) 7.0 (3.2) 5.0 (2.3) 4.0 (1.8) 2-5 Buy Product See Section 2 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Platemounts – To 60 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR LOADS OF 12 TO 60 POUNDS (5.4 TO 27.2 kgf) Base – Steel or Aluminum

2.25 (57.2)

LOAD/DEFLECTION GRAPH 1.75 Maximum Recommended (44.5) X X Static Load/Deflection 90 80 DK 70 .19 DIA. 60 DD .34 (4.8) 50

S E C T I O N 2 T S E C (8.6) 40 .391 .56 CC (9.9) (14.2) 30

LOAD (lb.) BB 20 AA 10 1.0 (25.4) 0 .05 .10 .15 .20 .25 .062 DEFLECTION (in.) (1.57) 2.00 (50.8) SECTION X-X

2.475 (62.9) Base Type Steel Square — — Catalog V10Z40-1260CC3 Number V10Z40-1260DD3 V10Z40-1260DK3 2.25 .19 DIA. (57.2) 2.98 (4.8) (75.7) Base Type Diamond Aluminum Steel V10Z40-1260AA2 V10Z40-1260AA4 — V10Z40-1260BB4 Catalog V10Z40-1260CC2 V10Z40-1260CC4 Number NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. V10Z40-1260DD2 V10Z40-1260DD4 V10Z40-1260DK2 V10Z40-1260DK4

NOTE: 1. The above platemounts are available in Neoprene as a special order (200 pc. minimum). 2. The above platemounts may be discontinued but are still available in large quantities. Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Load Maximum Rating Load lb. (kgf) 1100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2500 3000 3500 Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) AA 12 (5.4) 12 (5.4) 10 (4.5) 7 (3.2) 5 (2.3) 3 (1.4) 2 (0.9) 2 (0.9) 1 (0.5) BB 20 (9.1) 20 (9.1) 16 (7.3) 11 (5) 7 (3.2) 6 (2.7) 4 (1.8) 3 (1.4) 2 (0.9) CC 30 (13.6) 30 (13.6) 23 (10.4) 15 (6.8) 11 (5) 9 (4.1) 5 (2.3) 4 (1.8) 3 (1.4) DD 45 (20.4) 45 (20.4) 35 (15.9) 23 (10.4) 17 (7.7) 13 (5.9) 8 (3.6) 6 (2.7) 4 (1.8) DK 60 (27.2) 60 (27.2) 47 (21.3) 31 (14.1) 22 (10) 17 (7.7) 11 (5) 7 (3.2) 6 (2.7)

2-6 Buy Product See Section 2 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Platemounts – To 90 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR LOADS OF 30 TO 90 POUNDS (13.6 TO 40.8 kgf) Base – Steel or Aluminum

2.25 (57.2) LOAD/DEFLECTION GRAPH Maximum Recommended Static Load/Deflection DD 90

80 1.75 CK (44.5)X X 70

60 CC 50 .19 DIA. (4.8) BK 40 I O N 2 T S E C

.399 10.1 LOAD (lb.) BB .22 30 .386 ( 9.8 ) (5.6) .59 (15) 20 1.000 (25.4) 10 .062 (1.6) 0 2.00 .02 .04 .06 .08 .10 .12 .14 (50.8) DEFLECTION (in.) SECTION X-X

2.475 (62.9) Base Type Aluminum Steel Square — V10Z40-1220BB3 V10Z40-1220BK1 — Catalog — V10Z40-1220CC3 Number — — V10Z40-1220DD1 V10Z40-1220DD3 2.25 2.98 .19 DIA. (57.2) (75.7) (4.8) Base Type Aluminum Steel Diamond — V10Z40-1220BB4 Catalog — V10Z40-1220BK4 — — NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. Number — V10Z40-1220CK4 V10Z40-1220DD2 V10Z40-1220DD4

NOTE: 1. The above platemounts are available in Neoprene as a special order (200 pc. minimum). 2. The above platemounts may be discontinued but are still available in large quantities. Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Load Maximum Rating Load lb. (kgf) 1325 17502000 25003500 3000 4000 Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) BB 30 (13.6) 30 (13.6) 17 (7.7) 13 (5.9) 8.4 (3.8) 6.0 (2.7) 4.3 (2) 3.3 (1.5) BK 40 (18.1) 40 (18.1) 23 (10.4) 18 (8.2) 11.0 (5) 7.8 (3.5) 5.7 (2.6) 4.4 (2) CC 50 (22.7) 50 (22.7) 29 (13.2) 22 (10) 14.0 (6.4) 10.0 (4.5) 7.2 (3.3) 5.5 (2.5) CK 70 (31.8) 70 (31.8) 40 (18.1) 31 (14.1) 20.0 (9.1) 14.0 (6.4) 10.0 (4.5) 7.0 (3.2) DD 90 (40.8) 90 (40.8) 52 (23.6) 40 (18.1) 25.0 (11.3) 18.0 (8.2) 13.0 (5.9) 10.0 (4.5)

2-7 Buy Product See Section 2 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Platemounts – To 760 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR LOADS OF 440 TO 760 POUNDS (200 TO 344.7 kgf) Base – Steel

.687 DIA. (17.4)

3.25 (82.6)

2.90 (73.7) DIA. MAX.

1.14 I O N 2 T S E C (29) LOAD/DEFLECTION GRAPH Maximum Recommended 2.25 Static Load/Deflection .135 (57.2) 1000 (3.4)

2.26 (57.4) DIA. 800 D 2.75 (69.9) DIA. 600 C .406 DIA. (10.3) B 400

LOAD (lb.)

200

0 .05 .10 .15 DEFLECTION (in.)

4.25 (108)

5.25 (133.4)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

Maximum Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Catalog Number Load 1300 15002000 2500 30003500 4000 lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 440 440 300 160 100 70 50 40 V10Z40-1280B (200) (200) (136) (72.6) (45.4) (31.8) (22.7) (18.1) 560 560 380 200 120 90 60 50 A10Z40-1280C (254) (254) (172.4) (90.7) (54.4) (40.8) (27.2) (22.7) 760 760 520 270 170 120 90 70 A10Z40-1280D (344.7) (344.7) (235.9) (122.5) (77.1) (54.4) (40.8) (31.8) NOTE: The above platemounts are available in Neoprene as a special order (200 pc. minimum).

2-8 Buy Product See Section 2 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Finger-Flex Assemblies

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Housing – Zinc Plated Steel with • FOR LOADS OF 6 TO 37 POUNDS (2.7 TO 16.8 kgf) Clear Dichromate Sealer

Isolator – Rubber

13/64 (5.2)

17/64 DIA. HOLE (6.7)

2-3/8 (60.3)

1-15/16 1-15/16 (49.2) (49.2)

S E C T I O N 2 T S E C

2-3/8 (60.3) Assembled style V10Z 4- mounts are supplied with rubber bushings and rings permanently installed within a convenient 23/32 (18.3) cadmium plated metal mounting cup. Load is supported by the top surface of the assembly which has a 17/64 (6.7 mm) diameter V10R 4-1504 clearance hole to accommodate a screw fastener from the load 1-1/8 member. The cup base dimensions and mounting hole pattern (28.6) V10R 4-1505 conform to MIL size 2 specifications. The rubber isolation members are similiar to the FINGER-FLEX V10R 4-1504 and V10R 5-1505 series. 3/64 (1.2)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. NATURAL FREQUENCY: 6–30 Hz

40 V10Z 4-1550D 40 V10Z 4-1550D 30 30 20 20 V10Z 4-1550A V10Z 4-1550A 10 10 LOAD (lb.) LOAD (lb.) 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 .02 .04 .06 .08 .10 NATURAL FREQUENCY (Hz) DEFLECTION (in.)

Load Type Compression, Approximate Hardness Catalog Number lb. (kgf) per mount Durometer min. max.

V10Z 4-1550A 6 (2.7) 20 (9.1) 30

V10Z 4-1550D 15 (16.8) 37 (16.8) 60

2-9 Buy Product See Section 2 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A A T I V O

A Finger-Flex Assemblies

C O S www.vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 MPONENT vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Chromate • FOR LOADS UP TO 50 POUNDS (110.2 kgf) Isolator – Rubber

Fig. 1

V10R 4-1505 1-1/16 (27) V10R 4-1504 1-15/32 (37.3) V10R 4-1505

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

NATURAL FREQUENCY: 6–30 Hz V10Z 4-1552D 40 50 40 30 V10Z 4-1552D 30 20 V10Z 4-1552A 20 V10Z 4-1552A 10 10 LOAD (lb.) LOAD (lb.) 0 0 .04 .08 .12 .16 .20 .24 5101520 25 DEFLECTION (in.) NATURAL FREQUENCY-Hz

Fig. 2

V10R 4-1505

V10R 4-1504 1-13/32 1-13/16 (35.7) (46) V10R 4-1504

V10R 4-1505

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

NATURAL FREQUENCY: 6-30 Hz 40 50 V10Z 4-1553D 30 40 V10Z 4-1553D 30 20 V10Z 4-1553A 20 10 V10Z 4-1553A

LOAD (lb.) 10 LOAD (lb.) 0 0 .04 .08 .12 .16 .20 .24 567 8 9 10 11 12 DEFLECTION (in.) NATURAL FREQUENCY-Hz

Catalog Number Approximate Hardness Durometer • FIG 1 V10Z 4-1552A 30

V10Z 4-1552D 60 • FIG 2 V10Z 4-1553A 30

V10Z 4-1553D 60

2-10 Rev: 8-24-10 SS Buy Product See Section 2 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A A T I V O

A Cup Mounts – To 135 lbs.

C O S www.vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 MPONENT vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR LOADS OF 33 TO 135 POUNDS (15 TO 61 kgf) Base – Steel, Zinc Plated

1-15/16 (49.2) LOAD/DEFLECTION GRAPH Deflections below the line x---x 1/4 - 20 UNC TAP are considered safe practice for 5/8 DP static loads; data above that line (15.9) are useful for calculating deflections under dynamic loads. 2-3/8 (60.3) X X 150 x DK

100 13/64 DIA. DD (5.2) SECTION X-X

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. CC LOAD (lb.) 50 .19 1.50 DIA. BB (4.8) (38.1) AA x

.67 (17) 0 1.13 .05 .10 (28.7) 1.44 (36.6) DEFLECTION (in.)

.035 (0.89)

Maximum Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Catalog Number Rating 1600 1750 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 lb. (kgf) Maximum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 33 33 27 22 14 10 7 6 V10Z40-1240AA (15) (15) (12.2) (10) (6.4) (4.5) (3.2) (2.7)

42 42 34 28 18 13 9 7 V10Z40-1240BB (19.1) (19.1) (15.4) (12.7) (8.2) (5.9) (4.1) (3.2)

62 62 51 42 27 19 14 11 V10Z40-1240CC (28.1) (28.1) (23.1) (19.1) (12.2) (8.6) (6.4) (5)

90 90 74 60 39 28 20 16 V10Z40-1240DD (40.8) (40.8) (33.6) (27.2) (17.7) (12.7) (9.1) (7.3) 135 135 114 93 60 43 30 24 V10Z40-1240DK (61.2) (61.2) (51.7) (42.2) (27.2) (19.5) (13.6) (10.9)

2-11 Rev: 8-24-10 SS Buy Product See Section 2 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I

V O

D N A Base Mounts – Cylindrical Type

C O M TS P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Isolator – Natural Rubber • LATERAL STIFFNESS 3 TO 4 TIMES GREATER THAN AXIAL STIFFNESS Base – Carbon Steel ØDM ØD C

A A1

L l

ØU XX IL Metric

The projections shown are per ISO convention.

DM A A I Max. Load Deﬂection 1 U L D Hardness Catalog Number* mm mm mm C mm mm mm mm in Compression mm Shore A (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) N (lb.) (in.)

700 3 V10Z74MMG074-4 45 (157) (.12) 74 53 42 72 9 90 32 1200 2.5 M10 V10Z74MMG074-6 (2.91) (2.09) (1.65) (2.84) (.35) (3.54) (1.26) 60 (270) (.10) 1750 2 V10Z74MMG074-7 75 (393) (.08) 1400 4 V10Z74MMG092-4 45 92 63 53 90 11 114 36 (315) (.16) M12 (3.62) (2.48) (2.09) (3.54) (.43) (4.49) (1.42) 2000 3 V10Z74MMG092-6 60 (450) (.12) 3600 5 V10Z74MMG124-4 45 124 94 75 114 13 144 60 (809) (.20) M16 (4.88) (3.70) (2.95) (4.49) (.51) (5.67) (2.36) 8000 4 V10Z74MMG124-7 75 (1798) (.16) *To be discontinued when present stock is depleted.

PERFORMANCE GRAPHS 1800 3000 10000 V10Z74MMG074-7 V10Z74MMG124-7 1500 2000 V10Z74MMG092-6 7500 V10Z74MMG074-6 1200 1800 5000 V10Z74MMG124-4 900 1500 2500 V10Z74MMG074-4 V10Z74MMG092-4 600 1200 0 12345678910 300 900

600 012345 300

012345

2-12 Rev: 5-9-11 SS Buy Product See Section 2 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Base Mounts – Cylindrical Type

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Isolator – Natural Rubber • LIMITED SIDE DEFLECTIONS • EASY LEVELING Carbon Steel, Zinc Plated Base – • LOW MAINTENANCE

A A B B New C G Fig. 1 t H t H

E E K K L L

Fig. 2 D D Metric

S E C T I O N 2 T S E C F F Fig. 1 Fig. 2 The projections shown are per ISO convention.

900 T4115 800 T4115G

700

600

500 T3090 T3090G 400 LOAD (kgf) 300 T2062 200 T2062G

100 T1048 T1048G

1 2345 6 DEFLECTION (mm)

A B C D E F L K H t Static Deflection Fig. Load Catalog Number G mm mm mm mm mm mm No. mm mm mm mm mm kgf (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) (lb.) (in.) 48 38 8.2 6.2 20 42 80 68 23 1.5 120 2.5 V10Z55MT1048 (1.89) (1.50) (.32) (.24) (.79) (1.65) (3.15) (2.68) (.91) (.06) (264.6) (.10) 62 50 10.2 8.2 25 55 100 85 30 2 270 3.6 V10Z55MT2062 (2.44) (1.97) (.40) (.32) (.98) (2.17) (3.94) (3.35) (1.18) (.08) (595.2) (.14) 1 — 90 73 16.2 10.2 44 82 130 110 45 3 450 4.4 V10Z55MT3090 (3.54) (2.87) (.64) (.40) (1.73) (3.23) (5.12) (4.33) (1.77) (.12) (992.1) (.17) 115 98 24.2 16.2 60 105 190 160 50 4 850 6 V10Z55MT4115 (4.53) (3.86) (.95) (.64) (2.36) (4.13) (7.48) (6.30) (1.97) (.16) (1873.9) (.24) 48 38 — 6.2 20 42 80 68 23 1.5 120 2.5 V10Z55MT1048G (1.89) (1.50) M8 (.24) (.79) (1.65) (3.15) (2.68) (.91) (.06) (264.6) (.10) 62 50 — 8.2 25 55 100 85 30 2 270 3.6 V10Z55MT2062G (2.44) (1.97) M10 (.32) (.98) (2.17) (3.94) (3.35) (1.18) (.08) (595.2) (.14) 2 90 73 — 10.2 44 82 130 110 45 3 450 4.4 V10Z55MT3090G (3.54) (2.87) M14 (.40) (1.73) (3.23) (5.12) (4.33) (1.77) (.12) (992.1) (.17) 115 98 — 16.2 60 105 190 160 50 4 850 6 V10Z55MT4115G (4.53) (3.86) M16 (.64) (2.36) (4.13) (7.48) (6.30) (1.97) (.16) (1873.9) (.24)

2-13 Buy Product See Section 2 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I

V O

D N A Base Mounts – Dome Type

C O M TS P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Isolator – Natural Rubber • CAN BE MOUNTED IN SERIES Base – Carbon Steel ØD C

ØDM I

U SHOWN: Catalog Number V10Z75MBM200-.. with upper metal reinforcement visible. Metric

ØDM L

The projections shown are per ISO convention.

Max. Load Max. A D DM L I U Hardness Under Deﬂection Catalog Number* mm mm mm mm mm C mm mm (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) Shore A Compression N (lbf) (in.) 1600 V10Z75MBM100-6 55 32 45 96 160 128 11 x 16 (359.7) 4 M10 (1.26) (1.77) (3.78) (6.30) (5.04) (.43 x .63) 2200 (.158) V10Z75MBM100-7 75 (494.6) 1300 V10Z75MBM150-4 45 (292.3) 7 33 – 36 82 144 226 186 2500 (.276) V10Z75MBM150-6 M14 Ø12 (1.30 – 1.42) (3.23) (5.67) (8.90) (7.32) 55 (562.0) 3500 6 V10Z75MBM150-7 75 (786.8) (.236) 5000 V10Z75MBM200-4 45 (1124.0) 7 40 128 200 280 240 8000 (.276) V10Z75MBM200-6 M16 Ø14.5 (1.58) (5.04) (7.87) (11.02) (9.45) 55 (1798.5) 12000 6 V10Z75MBM200-7 75 (2697.7) (.236) *To be discontinued when present stock is depleted.

PERFORMANCE GRAPHS

2750 5500 13750 V10Z75MBM100-7 V10Z75MBM200-7 2500 5000 12500 V10Z75MBM150-7 2250 4500 11250 V10Z75MBM100-6 V10Z75MBM200-6 2000 4000 V10Z75MBM150-6 10000 1756 3500 8750 1500 3000 7500 V10Z75MBM200-4 1250 2500 6250 V10Z75MBM150-4 1000 2000 5000 750 1500 3750 500 1000 2500 250 500 1250

0 123456789101112 0 123456789101112 0 123456789101112

2-14 Rev: 5-9-11 SS Buy Product See Section 2 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A A T I V O

A Diamond Base Mounts

C O S MPONENT www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Plates – Steel • FOR LOADS OF 45 TO 1100 POUNDS (20.4 TO 499 kgf) Isolator – Oil-Resistant Neoprene or Durulene™

ØF 2–HOLES B

E A

TOP INSERT PLATE G APPLICATIONS • INDUSTRIAL AIR CONDITIONING BOTTOM INSERT • CD BUSINESS MACHINES CS STEEL PLATE • H CHOOSE DURULENE FOR THE FOLLOWING • ROOFTOP – Extreme heat or cold, direct sunlight • INDOOR/OUTDOOR – Severe weather • OZONE-EMITTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

FEATURES: • Threaded Plate Molded into Mounting • Nonskid Base & Top Surface

TEMPERATURE RANGE: Neoprene – -40°F to +180°F (-40°C to +82.2°C) Durulene™ – -65°F to +250°F (-40°C to +121.1°C) Max. Height C Max. Static Catalog Number* Graph Load A B DFEGHDeflection Ref.∆ Standard Double Neoprene Durulene™ lb. (kgf) CS CD Standard Double 1S 45 V10Z52-FA0045 V10Z52-FA0045 D 1D (20.4) 3S 70 3-1/8 1-3/4 1 1-1/4 2-3/8 11/32 1-1/4 3/16 .20 .40 V10Z52-FA0070 V10Z52-FA0070 D 5/16-18 3D (31.8) (79.4) (44.5) (25.4) (31.8) (60.3) (8.7) (31.8) (4.8) (5.08) (10.16) 5S 120 V10Z52-FA0120 V10Z52-FA0120 D 5D (54.4) 6S 135 V10Z52-FB0135 V10Z52-FB0135 D 6D (61.2) 7S 240 V10Z52-FB0240 V10Z52-FB0240 D 7D (108.9) 3-7/8 2-3/8 1-1/4 1-3/4 3/8-16 3 11/32 1-3/4 7/32 .25 .50 9S 380 (98.4) (60.3) (31.8) (44.5) (76.2) (8.7) (44.5) (5.6) (6.35) (12.7) V10Z52-FB0380 V10Z52-FB0380 D 9D (172.4) 10S 550 . V10Z52-FB0550 V10Z52-FB0550 D 10D (249.5) 11S 525 V10Z52-FC0525 V10Z52-FC0525 D 11D (238.1) 13S 750 5-1/2 3-3/8 1-3/4 2-7/8 4-1/8 11/32 2-1/2 1/4 .25 .50 V10Z52-FC0750 V10Z52-FC0750 D 1/2-13 13D (340.2) (139.7) (85.7) (44.5) (73) (104.8) (8.7) (63.5) (6.4) (6.35) (12.7) 14S 1100 V10Z52-FC1100 V10Z52-FC1100 D 14D (499) * To complete the Catalog Number, specify: Additional load ratings available on special order. NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. S for Standard Deflection or D for Double Deflection ∆For Load Deflection Graphs see page 2-17

2-15 Buy Product See Section 2 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A A T I V O

A Rectangular Base Mounts

C O S MPONENT www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Plates – Steel • FOR LOADS OF 110 TO 3000 POUNDS (49.9 TO 1360.8 kgf) Isolator – Oil-Resistant Neoprene or Durulene™

A E

B F

TOP INSERT PLATE G APPLICATIONS • INDUSTRIAL BOTTOM INSERT • AIR CONDITIONING CD STEEL PLATE CS • BUSINESS MACHINES H CHOOSE DURULENE FOR THE FOLLOWING • ROOFTOP – Extreme heat or cold, direct sunlight • INDOOR/OUTDOOR – Severe weather • OZONE-EMITTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

FEATURES: • Threaded Plate Molded into Mounting • Nonskid Base & Top Surface

TEMPERATURE RANGE: Neoprene – -40°F to +180°F (-40°C to +82.2°C) Durulene™ – -65°F to +250°F (-40°C to +121.1°C) Rated Height C Max. Static Catalog Number* Graph Load A B DFE G H Deflection Ref.∆ Standard Double Neoprene Durulene™ lb. (kgf) CS CD Standard Double AS 110 .40 § V10Z53-FB0110 — AD (49.9) (10.16) 260 3-3/4 2-1/8 1-1/8 1-7/8 3 3/8 1-9/16 1/4 .20 § V10Z53-FB0260S — CS 3/8-16 — (117.9) (95.3) (54) (28.6) (47.6) (76.2) (9.5) (39.7) (6.4) (5.08) DS 470 .40 § V10Z53-FB0470 — DD (213.2) (10.16) 500 § FS V10Z53-FC0500S — (226.8) — — 720 5 3-1/16 1-5/8 4 9/16 2-5/16 3/8 .25 § V10Z53-FC0720S — GS 1/2-13 (326.6) (127) (77.8) (41.3) (101.6) (14.3) (58.7) (9.5) (6.35) HS 1120 2-3/4 .50 § V10Z53-FC1120 V10Z53-FC1120 D HD (508) (69.9) (12.7) IS 1500 V10Z53-FD1500 V10Z53-FD1500 D ID (680.4) JS 2250 V10Z53-FD2250 V10Z53-FD2250 D JD (1020.6) 6-1/4 4-5/8 1-5/8 2-3/4 5 9/16 3 3/8 .25 .50 1/2-13 KS 3000 (158.8) (117.5) (41.3) (69.9) (127) (14.3) (76.2) (9.5) (6.35) (12.7) V10Z53-FD3000 V10Z53-FD3000 D KD (1360.8) LS 4000 V10Z53-FD4000 V10Z53-FD4000 D LD (1814.4) * To complete the Catalog Number, specify: Additional load ratings available on special order. NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. S for Standard Deflection or D for Double Deflection ∆For Load Deflection Graphs see page 2-17 § To be discontinued when present stock is depleted.

2-16 ANTIV ED IB C R N A A T I V O

A Load Deﬂection for Base Mounts

C O S www.vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 MPONENT vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365

For Catalog Numbers V10Z52-... and V10Z53-... on pages 2-15 and 2-16.

LOAD VS. DEFLECTION

400 9S 9D 350

300 CS 250 7S 7D

200

LOAD (lbs.) 150 6S 6D 5S 5D 100 AS AD 3S 3D 50 1S 1D 0 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6

DEFLECTION (in.)

LOAD VS. DEFLECTION

4000 LS LD

3500

3000 KS KD

2500 JS JD 2000

LOAD (lbs.) IS ID 1500 HS HD 1000 14S 14D 13S GS 13D DS 11S 500 10D FS 10S DD 11D 0 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6

DEFLECTION (in.)

2-17 Buy Product See Section 2 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A M-Style Mounts

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Mounting Plates – Mild Steel, Painted • FOR STANDARD LOADS OF 15 TO 125 kgf (33.1 TO 275.6 lb.) Isolators – Natural Rubber, 60 Durometer

Bolt Thread h2 h1 S

S Y Metric

S E C T I O N 2 T S E C

X APPLICATIONS FEATURES: • VIBRATION SCREEN • Compared with circular rubber L • VIBRATION CONVEYORS mounts, they ensure lower spring VIBRATION SIEVES rate in vertical direction and higher A • • INSTRUMENT PANELS stability in horizontal direction. REFRIGERATORS Suited for machines which generate l1 • • COMPRESSORS considerable vibrations during low- l2 speed operation. • Excellent in controlling vibrations of 600 cpm or higher. B • Can be installed in very small areas because of its narrow width. Used for oscillating motions. Ød •

DIMENSIONS Bolt Catalog Number A l1 l2 h1 h2 d L BSh Thread 125 104 30 80 55 4.5 40 29 25 11 V10Z46MKD040 M10 (4.9) (4.1) (1.2) (3.1) (2.2) (.18) (1.6) (1.14) (.98) (.43) 160 130 35 100 70 4.5 45 34 32 14 V10Z46MKD045 M12 (6.3) (5.1) (1.4) (3.9) (2.8) (.18) (1.8) (1.34) (1.26) (.55) 210 170 40 130 90 6 55 54 50 17 V10Z46MKD055 M16 (8.3) (6.7) (1.6) (5.1) (3.5) (.24) (2.2) (2.13) (2.00) (.67) 245 205 50 165 115 8 65 52 50 20 V10Z46MKD065 M16 (9.6) (8.1) (2.0) (6.5) (4.5) (.32) (2.6) (2.05) (2.00) (.79) Provided with hex nut and lock washer. NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch.

TECHNICAL DATA Standard Load Allowable Load Spring Rate Stiffness Stiffness Catalog Number in Z Direction kgf (lb.) in Z dir. Kz Ratio Ratio kgf (lb.) Z Dir.X Dir. Y Dir. kgf/cm (lb./ft.) Kx/Kz Ky/Kz 15…35 70 12 14 200 V10Z46MKD040 0.17 0.2 (33.1...77.2) (154.3) (26.5) (30.9) (13.4 x 103) 30…50 100 22 20 250 V10Z46MKD045 0.22 0.2 (66.2...110.2) (220.5) (48.5) (44.1) (16.8 x 103) 50…90 175 45 35 290 V10Z46MKD055 0.25 0.2 (110.2...198.4) (385.8) (99.2) (77.2) (19.5 x 103) 80…125 250 45 40 370 V10Z46MKD065 0.19 0.16 (176.4...275.6) (551.2) (99.2) (88.2) (24.9 x 103)

2-18 Buy Product See Section 2 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A V - Style Mounts

Fig. 1 & Fig. 3 Shown

X B Y

Ød1 S G

t X 1 H1 Z Metric

S E C T I O N 2 T S E C G FEATURES: Ød1 S Compared with circular rubber mounts, these have higher E • A stiffness in horizontal direction "X" and better stability. Fig. 1 Without Base Plate They are also well-suited for rotating machines which generate vibrating forces in the horizontal direction. X • Easy to install. The spring rate can be changed just B by altering the mounting positions. Y For the base plate attached type (Fig. 2), a rubber pad is fitted Ød2 • 2 HOLES A to the base plate so that the machine can be placed on the floor. F

Ød S G X 1 t 1 APPLICATIONS • AIR COMPRESSORS • MACHINE TOOLS Z t H H 2 2 1 • VIBRATION SCREENS • VIBRATION SIEVES 45° • HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL • HIGH-SPEED DIESEL ENGINES P SEPARATORS 1 t Rubber L 3 Pad Fig. 2 With Base Plate LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPH Load (kgf)

X 900 800 KC170BP 700 600 2000 500 1800 KC140BP 1600 Y 400 1400 P2 B 1200 300 1000 250 200 180 KC100BP 160 Ød KC070 140 2 120 2 HOLES 100 A KC060 90 80 F S G KC080 (BP) 70 60 50 Ød1 KC045 40 2 PLACES KC075 (BP) t1 30 25 X 45° 20 t H 18

1 LOAD RANGE NUMBER 2 16 14 12 Z 10 9 P 8 1 KC035 7 6 L 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.61.8 2.0 2.5 3.0 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 Fig. 3 With Base Plate DEFLECTION (mm)

2-19 Buy Product See Section 2 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A V - Style Mounts Selection Data

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

CATALOG NUMBER DESIGNATION Metric V 1 0 Z 4 5 M Load Range Number Base Plate - BP Use information in both tables below to (where applicable) determine appropriate Load Range Number

DIMENSIONS measured in mm and (inches) Load Fig. d1 Range A BEF GSt1 L P1 P2 H1 H2 d2 t2 t3 Number No. Thread 60 30 30 26 29 25 4.5 35 KC035 M10 (2.4) (1.2) (1.2) (1.0) (1.1) (1.0) (.18) (1.4) 82 50 40 40 34 32 4.5 45 KC045 M12 (3.2) (2.0) (1.6) (1.6) (1.3) (1.3) (.18) (1.8) 108 70 45 56 44 40 6 60 KC060 M12 (4.3) (2.8) (1.8) (2.2) (1.7) (1.6) (.24) (2.4)

1 124 90 55 65 52 50 8 70 I O N 2 T S E C KC070 M16 (4.9) (3.5) (2.2) (2.6) (2.0) (2.0) (.32) (2.8) 135 70 76 56 44 40 6 73 KC075 M12 (5.3) (2.8) (3.0) (2.2) (1.7) (1.6) (.24) (2.9) 148 90 76 65 52 50 8 80 KC080 M16 (5.8) (3.5) (3.0) (2.6) (2.0) (2.0) (.32) (3.1) 135 70 56 44 40 6 170 140 85 79 14 6 KC075BP M12 (5.3) (2.8) (2.2) (1.7) (1.6) (.24) (6.7) (5.5) (3.3) (3.1) (.55) (.24) 148 90 65 52 50 8 180 150 94 88 14 8 6 KC080BP 2 M16 (5.8) (3.5) (2.6) (2.0) (2.0) (.32) (7.1) (5.9) (3.7) (3.5) (.55) (.32) (.24) 180 110 100 57 46 8 240 200 114 108 18 8 KC100BP M20 (7.1) (4.3) (3.9) (2.2) (1.8) (.32) (9.5) (7.9) (4.5) (4.3) (.71) (.32) 250 240 127 250 220 175 140 18x2 12 KC140BP (9.8) (9.5) (5.0) 56 46 12 (9.8) (8.7) (6.9) (5.5) .71x.08 (.47) 3 M20x2 288 180 184 (2.2) (1.8) (.47) 300 252 100 170 22x2 12 KC170BP (11.3) (7.1) (7.2) (11.8) (9.9) (3.9) (6.7) .87x.08 (.47) NOTES: "BP" at the end of the Catalog Number stands for base plate attached type. All units are provided with hex nuts and spring washers.

TECHNICAL DATA measured in kgf and (lb.) Load ALLOWABLE LOAD Spring Rate Z Stiffness Stiffness Range Standard Load in Direction Ratio Ratio Z Direction Number Z Direction X Direction Y Direction kgf/cm Kx/Kz Ky/Kz 4...10 20 13 5 65 0.75 0.34 KC035 (9...22) (44) (28) (11) 25...45 90 55 25 235 0.61 0.27 KC045 (55...99) (196) (121) (55) 30...95 185 65 30 380 0.58 0.26 KC060 (66...209) (407) (143) (66) 50...150 290 110 55 520 0.54 0.27 KC070 (110...330) (638) (242) (121) 30...90 170 105 40 190 0.81 0.3 KC075 (66...198) (374) (231) (88) 35...135 260 155 60 300 0.78 0.28 KC080 (77...297) (572) (341) (132) 30...90 170 105 40 190 0.81 0.3 KC075BP (66...198) (374) (231) (88) 35...135 260 155 60 300 0.78 0.28 KC080BP (77...297) (572) (341) (132) 100...300 600 260 120 600 0.54 0.26 KC100BP (220...660) (1320) (572) (264) 300...650 1300 550 250 1200 0.56 0.27 KC140BP (660...1430) (2860) (1210) (550) 500...900 1750 650 280 1700 0.33 0.23 KC170BP (1100...1980) (3850) (1430) (616) NOTE: Rubber material is natural rubber of hardness 45 durometer.

2-20 Buy Product See Section 2 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Rectangular Mounts – To 900 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS TO 900 POUNDS (408 kgf) Base – Steel • FOR SHEAR LOADS TO 360 POUNDS (163.3 kgf)

1-3/4 3 (44.5) (76.2)

5/8 DIA. (15.9)

3 X X (76.2) 1-1/2 (38.1)

1-1/2 (38.1) 3/4 5 (19.1) (127) 6-1/2 (165.1)

S E C T I O N 2 T S E C

3/4-10 NC-2 2-1/4 1200 (57.2) 3-1/8 (79.4) 1100 3/8 4-9/16 COMPRESSION (9.5) (115.9) 1000

900 X 1/4 X COMPRESSION (6.4) 1-7/16 800 (36.5) 700

SECTION X-X 600

500 NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. LOAD (lb.) SHEAR X 400 SHEAR

300 X LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPH Deflection below the line x-x are considered 200 safe practice for static loads; data above that 100 line are useful for calculating deflections under dynamic loads. 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 DEFLECTION (in.)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum Δ 750 850 950 11001250 1500 1750 2000 2500 3000 Catalog Number Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 800 590 390 270 V10Z 6-530C 900 (408) —————— (362.9) (267.6) (177) (122.5)

Shear Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum Δ 750 850 950 11001250 1500 1750 2000 2500 3000 Catalog Number Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 360 335 260 195 155 102 75 55 V10Z 6-530C 360 (163.3) (163.3) (152) (118) (88.5) (70.3) (46.3) (34) (25) ** NOTE: 81% vibration absorption (usually satisfactory) will be obtained when the mounting indicated is operating at the minimum load shown for each forced frequency. Better than 81% absorption will be obtained either with a greater load (within the limits shown) for a given forced frequency, or with a higher forced frequency for a given load. *At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield 81% isolation. Δ To be discontinued when present stock is depleted. 2-21 Buy Product See Section 2 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Rectangular Mounts – To 775 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS TO 775 POUNDS (351.5 kgf) Base – Steel • FOR SHEAR LOADS TO 315 POUNDS (142.9 kgf)

7/8 5-3/16 (22.2) (131.8) X 7/16 (11.1)

Y Y

3-13/16 1-7/16 (96.8) (36.5) 1/2 5/8 LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPH (12.7) (15.9) Deflections below the line x-x are considered safe 11/16 4-1/2 (17.5) (114.3) practice for static loads; data above that line is useful X SECTION X-X for calculating deflections under dynamic loads I O N 2 T S E C

1400 5/16-18 UNC (TYP) 1300 3/8 COMPRESSION (9.5) 1200

1100 COMPRESSION 1000

5-7/8 .120 900 (149.2) (3) SECTION Y-Y 800 X 700 X NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. 600

LOAD (lb.) 500 400 SHEAR

300 X SHEAR 200 X 100

0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 DEFLECTION (in.)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 750 850 950 11001250 1500 1750 2000 2500 3000 Catalog Number Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 775 585 440 270 175 V10Z 6-500B — ————— (351.5) (265.4) (200) (122.5) (79.4)

Shear Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 750 850 950 11001250 1500 1750 2000 2500 3000 Catalog Number Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 315 315 260 200 165 125 125 585 440 V10Z 6-500B (142.9) (142.9) (117.9) (90.7) (74.8) (56.7) (56.7) (29.5) (24.9) **

*At these forcing frequencies, lesser loads will yield 81% isolation. NOTE: 81% vibration absorption (usually satisfactory) will be obtained when the mounting indicated is operating at the minimum load shown for each forced frequency. Better than 81% absorption will be obtained either with a greater load (within the limits shown) for a given forced frequency, or with a higher forced frequency for a given load.

2-22 Buy Product See Section 2 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Rectangular Mounts – To 1475 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS TO 1475 POUNDS (669 kgf) Base – Steel • FOR SHEAR LOADS TO 440 POUNDS (200 kgf)

1-1/8 1-1/2 (28.6) (38.1) X 3/16 (4.8)

Y Y

3/4 (19.1) 1-1/4 3-13/16 2-1/2 (31.8) (96.8) (63.5) SECTION X-X 4-3/4 1 LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPH (25.4) (120.7) X Deflections below the line x-x are considered safe practice for static loads; data above that line is useful I O N 2 T S E C for calculating deflections under dynamic loads 3/8-24 UNF (TYP) 2800 2600 COMPRESSION 7/16 DIA. 2400 (11.1) 2200 COMPRESSION 5-7/8 2000 (149.2) 6-3/4 1800 (171.5) 1600 SECTION Y-Y x 1400 x 1200

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. LOAD (lb.) 1000 800 SHEAR 600 x SHEAR 400 x 200

0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 DEFLECTION (in.)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 675 850 950 11001250 1500 1750 2000 2500 Catalog Number Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation (lb.) 1475 1200 1040 650 470 320 170 V10Z 6-520B — — — (669) (544.3) (471.7) (294.8) (213.2) (145.1) (77.1)

Shear Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Maximum 675 850 9501100 1250 1500 1750 2000 2500 Catalog Number Load lb (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation (kgf) 440 440 250 190 135 110 70 60 50 V10Z 6-520B (200) (200) (113.4) (86.2) (61.2) (49.9) (31.8) (27.2) (22.7) * *At this forcing frequency, lesser loads will yield 81% isolation. NOTE: 81% vibration absorption (usually satisfactory) will be obtained when the mounting indicated is operating at the minimum load shown for each forced frequency. Better than 81% absorption will be obtained either with a greater load (within the limits shown) for a given forced frequency, or with a higher forced frequency for a given load.

2-23 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Vibration Transmissibility Charts

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

Transmissibility vs. Frequency Ratio and c/cc For more extensive discussion of vibration 100 analysis and isolation, see the technical 80 section starting on page T1-0. 60 c/c = .01 40 c 30 Schematic of simple mounting system 20

Amplification c/cc = .05 10 Mass (M) 8 6 c/c = .10 4 c

S E C T I O N 2 T S E C 3 K c/cc = .20 c/cc 2 Transmissibility T Transmissibility c/cc = .50

K = Stiffness of spring (mount) 1 c/cc = Critical damping ratio .8 20% c = System damping coefficient .6 40% cc = Critical damping coefficient Attenuation fd = Disturbing frequency .10 fn = Natural frequency .4 .3 .20 70% .50 .2 .01

.05 Percent Isolation

.1 90% .1 .2 .3 .4 .6 .8 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 Vibration Transmissibility Chart for C/C = 0 c 100% Forcing Frequency 2000 Ratio: .01 Natural Frequency 30%

.02 20%

.03 10% 1000 RESONANCE 900 .04 5% 800 .06 1 700 600 3% .1 % TRANSMISSIBILITY = T = 100 f 2 500 2% d ( f ) 1 400 .2 n 350 .3 1% 300 .4 ) CYCLES PER MINUTE n TO DETERMINE THE EFFICIENCY OF ISOLATION, 250 .6 Amplification To Be Avoided SUBTRACT THE % TRANSMISSIBILITY FROM 100% 200 1.0

Noncritical Applications

150 DEFLECTION IN INCHES STATIC 2.0 Critical Applications 3.0 TRANSMISSIBLITY 100 90 4.0 80 6.0 70 Extremely Critical Applications

NATURAL FREQUENCY (f FREQUENCY NATURAL 60 10.0 100 800 500 300 400 600 200 3000 2000 1000 DISTURBING FREQUENCY (fd) CYCLES PER MINUTE

2-?24 SECTION 3 Buy Product See Section 3 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Level Mounts – To 2500 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Housing – Cast Iron • FOR LOADS OF 120 TO 2500 POUNDS (54.4 TO 1134 kgf) Isolator – Oil-Resistant Neoprene

D DIA. x E LONG 1-1/2 MAX. LEVELING BOLT (38.1)

LEG OF EQUIPMENT C

CHARACTERISTICS INSTALLATION The mounts consist of a high-quality, Raise the machine with conventional lifting nonskid, neoprene isolation element yielding devices, place the mounts beneath the machine 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) deflection at rated load, feet and attach the leveling bolts to the mounts. rugged load-bearing top casting and hardware Lower the machine and ensure that the total necessary for leveling and fastening equipment weight is carried by all of the mounts. Level to a I O N 3 T S E C to mount. Up to 5/8 in. (15.9 mm) leveling desired height by gradual and sequential capability eliminates shimming. Bolting adjustment of the leveling bolts. Tighten the equipment to floor is not required. locknuts.

Dimensions Steady Max. Maximum Catalog Number Load Impact Height ACDEB lb. (kgf) lb. (kgf) Adjustment 120 90 V10Z12-MA00120 (54.4) (40.8) 2-7/8 2-3/8 1-7/8 5/16 2-3/4 1/2 200 150 (73) (60.3) (47.6) (7.9) (69.9) (12.7) V10Z12-MA00200 (90.7) (68) 450 337 V10Z12-MB00450 (204.1) (152.9) 4-15/16 3-7/8 1-3/4 1/2 3 1/2 1600 1200 (125.4) (98.4) (44.5) (12.7) (76.2) (12.7) V10Z12-MB01600 (725.7) (544) 2500 1875 7-1/2 5-7/8 2-5/16 3/4 3-1/2 1/2 V10Z12-MC02500 (1134) (850.5) (190.5) (149.2) (58.7) (19.1) (88.9) (12.7) NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

3-2 Buy Product See Section 3 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Leveling Mounts – To 10000 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS ONLY • STAINLESS STEEL MESH • CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT • FOR LOADS OF 100 TO 10000 POUNDS

C 1/2 (12.7) D

B DIA. CHARACTERISTICS The mounts consist of two rugged meehanite castings, a resilient pad of knitted stainless steel mesh and pressed steel baseplate. The leveling screw seats into the bottom casting thus providing a built-in leveling device. The excellent damping characteristics of this mount are unaffected by contaminants such as oil, grease or caustics.

INSTALLATION Raise the machine with conventional lifting I O N 3 T S E C BEFORE LEVELING AFTER LEVELING devices; place the mounts beneath the machine feet and attach the leveling screws to the mount. Lower the machine and ensure that the total weight is carried by all of the mounts. Level to a desired height by gradual and sequential adjustment of the leveling screws. Tighten the locknut.

Load Range Catalog Number A B CD lb. kgf V10Z25-0139-1 100–250 45–113 V10Z25-0139-2 250–500 113–227 2 4-1/4 3-1/2 V10Z25-0139-3 500–1000 227–454 5/8-11 UNC (50.8) (108) (89) V10Z25-0139-4 1000–2000 454–907 V10Z25-0139-5 2000–4000 907–1814 *V10Z25-0339 1000–10000 454–4536 V10Z25-0339-1 1000–4000 454–1814 2-1/8 7-45/64 4-9/32 1-8 UNC V10Z25-0339-3 4000–7000 1814–3175 (54) (196) (109) V10Z25-0339-5 7000–10000 3175–4536 NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. * To be discontinued when present stock is depleted.

3-3 Buy Product See Section 3 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Leveling Mounts – To 12000 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • FOR LOADS OF 100 TO 12000 POUNDS (45.4 TO 5443.1 kgf) Turning leveling bolt raises height of metal housing and foot of machine as much as 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). Locknut is tightened down High-strength steel onto machine foot after it housing carries has been leveled for load and rides on permanent positioning. neoprene base without any appreciable mechanical wear or fatigue. Neoprene elastomer mounting base controls deflections under vibration and shock STATIC H loads with high isolation efficiency. Base of mount rests squarely against floor surface with no creeping D or walking. Machine remains readily portable with no damage to floor.

BEFORE LEVELING AFTER LEVELING

S E C T I O N 3 T S E C INSTALLATION Raise the machine with conventional lifting devices; place the mounts beneath the machine feet and attach the leveling bolts to the mounting. Lower the machine and ensure that the total weight is carried by all of the mounts. Level to a desired height by gradual and sequential adjustment of the leveling bolts. Tighten the locknut. NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. Bolt Load lb. (kgf) D H Natural Frequency Catalog Number Static Size & at Maximum Load Dia. Min. Max. Height Length Hz 100 500 3-1/2 1-1/8 V10Z25-LM3 (45.4) (226.8) (89) (28.6) 1/2-13 x 3-1/2 500 1000 5 1-3/4 V10Z25-LM5 (226.8) (453.6) (127) (44.5) 1/2-13 x 5 8-12 1000 4000 6-1/4 1-3/4 Approximately V10Z25-LM6 (453.6) (1814.4) (159) (44.5) 3/4-10 x 5 4000 12000 8 2 V10Z25-LM8 (1814.4) (5443.1) (203) (50.8) 1-14 x 8

3-4 Buy Product See Section 3 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Leveling Mounts– Iso-Pad Type – To 4000 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Isolator – Iso-Pad (Standard Load) • FOR LOADS OF 200 TO 4000 POUNDS Refer to characteristics shown on page 8-2 (90.7 TO 1814.4 kgf) Base – Casting 30000 psi (2109 kgf/cm2) Tensile Strength Bolt – SAE Grade No. 5 Heat-Treated

B C

Fig. 1 (REGULAR MOUNT)

Fig. 2

Fig. 1 B

A I O N 3 T S E C

*Fig. 2 (FIXED MOUNT)

Dimensions Pad Pad Pad Load per Bolt Catalog Number Fig. Dimensions Area Area Mount A B C Dimensions Minimum Maximum Overall in. (mm) sq. in. sq. cm lb. (kgf) Height Adjustment Height 2 x 2 x 5/8 200 – 500 V10R12-R22 4 25.8 (50.8 x 50.8 x 15.9) (90.7 – 226.8) 1-1/2 2-3/4 5-1/4 1/2-20 x 4 3 x 3 x 5/8 500 – 1200 (38.1) (69.9) (133.3) V10R12-R33 (76.2 x 76.2 x 15.9) 9 58.1 (226.8 – 544.3) 1 4 x 4 x 5/8 1200 – 2400 1-3/4 V10R12-R44 16 103.2 (101.6 x 101.6 x 15.9) (544.3 – 1088.6) (44.5) 4-3/4 7-1/2 3/4-16 x 6 5-1/2 x 5-1/2 x 5/8 2400 – 4000 1-7/8 (120.7) (190.5) V10R12-R66 30-1/4 195.2 (139.7 x 139.7 x 15.9) (1088.6 – 1814.4) (47.6) 2 x 2 x 5/8 200 – 500 V10R12-F22 4 25.8 (50.8 x 50.8 x 15.9) (90.7 – 226.8) 1-7/8 2-9/16 4-3/4 1/2-20 x 4 3 x 3 x 5/8 500 – 1200 (47.6) (65.1) (120.7) V10R12-F33 (76.2 x 76.2 x 15.9) 9 58.1 (226.8 – 544.3) 2 4 x 4 x 5/8 1200 – 2400 2-7/16 3-13/16 6-9/16 V10R12-F44 16 (101.6 x 101.6 x 15.9) 103.2 (544.3 – 1088.6) (61.9) (96.8) (166.7) 5-1/2 x 5-1/2 x 5/8 2400 – 4000 3/4-16 x 6 2-5/8 3-11/16 6-3/4 V10R12-F66 30-1/4 (139.7 x 139.7 x 15.9) 195.2 (1088.6 – 1814.4) (66.7) (93.7) (171.5) * Recommended for use under impact machinery. Additional bolt and mount sizes available on request.

3-5 Buy Product See Section 3 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I

V O

D N A Leveling Mounts – Conical Type

C O M TS P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Bolt – DIN 976 • ISOLATES IMPACTS & STRUCTURAL NOISE Nuts – DIN 934 Washer – DIN 9021 • PREVENTS MACHINE PIVOTING Isolator – Natural Rubber (Ozone-Resistant) New With Threaded Leveling Bolt

B C

ØDM Metric

ØD

The projections shown are per ISO convention. PERFORMANCE GRAPH

V10Z76MSG-40 NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch. 700 650 A B D DM 600 Catalog Number* mm mm mm mm C (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) 550 500 12 18 30 40 V10Z76MSG-30 (.472) (.709) (1.181) (1.575) M8/M10 450 17 45 38 50 400 V10Z76MSG-40 (.669) (1.772) (1.496) (1.979) M8 350 300 V10Z76MSG-30 Maximum Minimum Admissible 250 Temporary Catalog Number* Load Deﬂection Load Deﬂection 200 N mm N mm Overload (lbf) (in.) (lbf) (in.) % 150 250 2 50 V10Z76MSG-30 100 100 (56) (.079) (11) 1

450 2.5 80 (.039) 50 V10Z76MSG-40 (101) (.089) (18) 50 *To be discontinued when present stock is depleted. 0123

3-6 Rev: 5-9-11 SS Buy Product See Section 3 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Leveling Carry Mounts

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Handle – Steel, Painted • BALL TYPE Bolt – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR LOADS OF 200 TO 600 kgf (441 TO 1323 lb.) Housing – Iron, Galvanized Ball – Steel Isolator – Oil-Resistant Rubber

BOLT THREAD

L ØD3

H1 h 1 H2 Metric h2

ØD2

ØD1 DESCRIPTION CARRY MOUNT is a moveable mount in which the rubber mount is incorporated with a rotating ball. They allow movement of machines and give excellent vibration-free installations.

S E C T I O N 3 T S E C FEATURES: MOUNT IN MACHINE LEVELED Compact Design ROLLING POSITION RUBBER PAD EXTENDED • • Excellent Stability INSTALLATION • Easy Movement & Setting • Lightweight Place the CARRY MOUNT under the bolt hole of the machine. • Low Price Insert the bolt into the screw hole of the CARRY MOUNT and screw it in until the bolt stops. APPLICATIONS • SHOP MACHINES Turn the spoked wheel clockwise to lift the rubber mount. • OFFICE EQUIPMENT The steel ball then allows free movement. • MEDICAL INSTRUMENTS

Turn the spoked wheel counterclockwise to lift the steel ball. The rubber mount now supports the machine in place.

Working D1 Bolt Catalog Number H1 H2 ±2 D2 D3 L h1 h2 Load Max. Thread kgf (lb.) (± .08) 200 58 70 100 80 44 67 12 V10Z44MCM200 M12 (441) (2.3) (2.76) (3.9) (3.1) (1.7) (2.63) 7.5 (.47) 600 65 79 140 120 54 72 (.3) 14 V10Z44MCM600 M16 (1323) (2.6) (3.11) (5.5) (4.7) (2.1) (2.83) (.55) NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch.

3-7 Buy Product See Section 3 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Leveling Carry Mounts

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Frame & Bolt – Steel, Galvanized • CASTER TYPE Wheel – Nylon • FOR LOADS OF 60 TO 100 kgf (132 TO 220 lb.) Isolator – Oil-Resistant Rubber

Ød, 4 HOLES L L 100 Ød (3.9) 2 HOLES 72 (2.8)

100 80 100 (3.9) (3.1) (3.9) 72 (2.8)

Ø60 (2.4) CM060 & CM060S CM100 & CM100S

MOUNTING HOLES

1 1. MOUNTING PLATE LEVEL ADJUSTING Metric 2 HOLE Ø6.5 mm 2. FRAME (.26) 3. WHEEL H 1 4. RUBBER MOUNT H2 D 5 5. LEVELING BOLT & h1 ADJUSTING NUT FEATURES: Compact Design 3 • 4 Excellent Stability h2 D • 1 • Easy Movement & Setting • Lightweight • Low Price

APPLICATIONS SHOP MACHINES • I O N 3 T S E C • OFFICE EQUIPMENT • MEDICAL INSTRUMENTS

CASTER IN MACHINE LEVELED ROLLING POSITION RUBBER MOUNT EXTENDED

DESCRIPTION CARRY MOUNT is a moveable mount in which the rubber mount is incorporated into a caster. They allow movement of machines and give excellent vibration-free installations.

INSTALLATION Raise machine and attach casters with suitable bolts. Insert screwdriver or 1/4 diameter rod into level adjusting hole and turn it to the left (clockwise) to lift the rubber mount. Machine can now be easily moved. Once relocated, level adjusting hole is rotated counterclockwise to lift the wheel. The machine is then positioned in place.

Working Catalog Number Load Max. H1 H2 D D1 h1 h2 dL kgf (lb.) 80 30 51 57 15 V10Z43MCM060 60 (3.1) (1.18) (2.00) (2.24) 10 (.59) 8.8 95 (132) 70 8.9 50 34 (.39) 16 (.35) (3.7) V10Z43MCM060S (2.8) (.35) (1.97) (1.34) (.63) 120 46 75 76 20 17 143 V10Z43MCM100 100 (4.7) (1.81) (2.95) (2.99) (.79) (.67) 11 (5.6) (220) 85 8.9 60 34 15 15 (.43) 126 V10Z43MCM100S (3.3) (.35) (2.36) (1.34) (.59) (.59) (5.0) NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch.

3-8 SECTION 4 Buy Product See Section 4 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I

V O

D N A Suspension Mounts – Spring Type C O M TS P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 MATERIAL: Spring – DIN 17223-C CYLINDRICAL SUSPENDS MACHINERY • 11 METAL CAP • Box – Carbon Steel • LATERAL TO AXIAL STIFFNESS RATIO 0.8 TO 1 Isolator – Natural Rubber C Assembly New

CYLINDRICAL RUBBER BUSHING

The projections shown are per ISO convention. L Metric TEMPERATURE RANGE: -90°C TO 200°C (-130°F TO 392°F) Maximum Minimum A E L Stiffness Admissible Catalog Number* mm C mm mm Load Deﬂection Load Deﬂection N/mm Temporary Overload (in.) (in.) (in.) N mm N mm (lb./in.) % (lb.) (in.) (lb.) (in.) 150 60 6 V10Z71MTM015 60 (33.7) (13.5) (34.3) (2.36) 250 100 10 V10Z71MTM025 (56.2) (22.5) (57.1) 100 55 750 25 300 10 30 V10Z71MTM075 M8 10 (3.94) (2.17) (168.6) (.98) (67.4) (.39) (171.3) 80 1000 400 40 V10Z71MTM100 (3.15) (224.8) (89.9) (228.4) 1250 500 50 V10Z71MTM125 (281) (112.4) (285.5) 2000 860 57.14 V10Z71MTM200 (449.6) (193.3) (326.3) 25 2500 1070 71.42 V10Z71MTM250 20 150 80 100 (562) 35 (240.5) 15 (407.8) M12 (5.91) (3.15) (3.94) 3500 (1.38) 1050 (.59) 100 V10Z71MTM350 (786.8) (236) (571) 14 4500 1930 128.57 V10Z71MTM450 (1011.6) (433.9) (734.2) 11 *To be discontinued when present stock is depleted. PERFORMANCE GRAPHS

260 1300 V10Z71MTM450 V10Z71MTM025 V10Z71MTM125 240 1200 4000 220 1100 200 1000 V10Z71MTM100 V10Z71MTM350 180 900 160 800 3000 V10Z71MTM015 V10Z71MTM075 140 700 V10Z71MTM250 120 600 V10Z71MTM200 100 500 2000 80 400 60 300 1000 40 200 20 100

0 5 10 15 20 25 0 5 10 15 20 25 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35

4-2 Rev: 5-9-11 SS Buy Product See Section 4 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I

V O

D N A Suspension Mounts – Rubber Type

C O M TS P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Metal Housing – Carbon Steel • FOR SUSPENSION FROM CEILING Isolator – Natural Rubber • STRONG & EASY TO ASSEMBLE Bushing – Carbon Steel

31.6 M6

Ø25 M6 54.5 58.5 38.5

Ø15 51.1 Metric

44.7

The projections shown are per ISO convention.

Maximum Maximum Natural Catalog Number* Load Deﬂection Frequency kgf mm Hz. (lbf) (in.) min - max. 50 6 V10Z72MTG-50R6 7-12 (112) (.23) *To be discontinued when present stock is depleted.

PERFORMANCE GRAPH Load (kgf) 50 V10Z72MTG-50R6

0123456

4-3 Rev: 5-9-11 SS ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cable Isolators

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

In Section 5, starting on page 5-23, we offer a large selection of cable isolators. These assemblies are made of aircraft-quality, stranded, stainless steel cable, helically wound into metal retaining bars suitable for surface mounting. Shock and vibration are damped as the result of friction between strands of cable under load (“flexture hysteresis”). Their superior characteristics include their ability to provide protection in compression, extension, shear and roll in all axes simultaneously.

All stainless steel and aluminum construction gives these units an excellent ability to resist corrosion and leads to extremely long maintenance-free life. Below are some of the applications where the cable isolators can be superior to any other type of vibration mounts.

General Characteristics and Uses

Application Types of Equipment Sources of Vibration Other Environmental Critical Specifications Needed Isolator Other Protected and Shock Hazards (Limitations) Characteristics Requirements Life of Installed Navigation Displays, Nearby Blast, Ship’s Shipboard Salt Water, MIL-S-901D Equipment, Corrosion Radar Communication, Inherent Vibration, Compliant in All Directions Electronics Temperature Extremes MIL-STD-167 Resistance, Sonar Heavy Weather Maintenance-Free

Over-the- Instrumentation, Irregular Terrain Temperature Extremes, Munson Rough Road Minimum Space, Long Fatigue Life, Road Generators, Poor Road Condition, Ozone, Radioactivity, Course, 10 g’s Maintenance-Free for Large Displacement Vehicles Electronics Collision UV Radiation Repeated Shock Inaccessible Locations

Shipping Jet Engines, Missiles, Transit, Handling Drop, Altitude Variations, Excellent Shock Indefinite Shelf Life, Accidental Drop Containers Gyroscopes, Electronics Loading / Unloading Exposure to Moisture Mitigation Repeated Use

Geophysical Data Acquisition, Data Off-the-Road Vehicles, Misaligned Installation, Severe Road Shock, Maintenance-Free, Repeated Large Deflections Equipment Processing Electronics Transit Ship (Un)loading Rough Use Careless Handling No Replacement Due to Load Shock

Chemical Processing Centrifuge, Dryers, Unbalanced Dynamic Corrosive Environments, High Temperature, Low Frequency Maintenance-Free for I O N 4 T S E C Equipment Pumps Loads, Fluid Hammer Chlorine, Sulfur Corrosive Environments Reponse Inaccessible Locations

Low Profile, Dynamic Rapid Maneuvering, Long Fatigue Life, No ECM, Communications, Temperature and 15-g 11ms Hard Landing Response Does Not Avionics Hard Landings, Aging Deterioration, Reconnaissance Altitude Extremes MIL-STD-810 Change with Temperature Lightweight Turbulent Air or Altitude

Missile Launcher, Tank Excellent Shock Ordnance Off-Road Vehicles, Munson Rough Road Artillery, Computer Nearby Blast Mitigation, Use at Any Altitude Equipment Railroad Humping Course, Railroad Humping Controls, Electronics Maintenance-Free

Medical Mechanical Equipment Moving Parts, Easy to Maintain, — Minimal Vibration Can Be Sterilized Equipment Critical to Patient Care Moving Carts No Outgassing

4-4 SECTION 5 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Spring Mounts – Elliptic Leaf Type (Naval " X " Type)

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

This type of vibration and shock isolator was designed specifi- any such placement can render the shock protection useless. cally for shipboard or mobile applications. They are particularly Preferred Systems suitable to protect delicate shipboard equipment from shock due Mounts supporting the system underneath only, with the center to underwater explosions or sudden stoppage of vehicles for of gravity in the lower third of the unit, is preferred. When this is vehicle-mounted equipment. impossible, a fully suspended method should be used. Top All materials used are impervious to corrosion and will operate steadies can be used where it is difficult to choose mounts to efficiently under a wide range of temperature, making the units support the weight using a fully suspended configuration. well-suited for naval or aircraft applications. Their basic design The practice of combining units on one raft is often carried out employs two or more high tensile stainless steel "U" formed to ensure that a suitable loading is obtained. This practice is leaves, situated at each end, forming an elliptical shape when especially important for operator-controlled equipment; the seat joined together in the center portion with face plates. The spaces can be mounted on the raft as well. between the "U" formed leaves are filled with a specially devel- Orientation oped polymer or stainless steel mesh. Where possible, the horizontal roll axis should be fore and aft, Nonmetallic collars backed by stainless steel washers are to minimize equipment movement due to ship roll, but any supplied for load attachment, while providing noise reduction. orientation is acceptable for shock protection. It is advisable to Inch size or metric bolts may be used for fastening of the place mounts on any one piece of equipment in the same equipment to the base or foundation. direction. Low transmitted shock accelerations are obtained by combin- TYPICAL APPLICATIONS INCLUDE: ing large permitted static deflection in every direction with a high energy loss within the mount. The high damping efficiency is • Heavy Machine Tools obtained by the polymer which has a very low static stiffness. The load-bearing characteristics are determined by the metal con- • Air Compressors struction of the mountings. These mounts may be used in tension • Engine Suspension as well as compression. The "X" Mount is one of that rare breed that gives both vibration • Machine Mounting isolation and shock protection. Its low frequency ensures effective vibration isolation, except where the resonant frequency of • Machine Craft Installations the surrounding structure may be sympathetic with the mount's • Laboratory Equipment natural frequency. Similarly, care must be taken during transportation of equipment supported by "X" Mounts. • Electric Motors The main disadvantage of the mount is that transmissibility at Factory Test Gear resonance is high. In most applications this is not critical as the • "X" Mounts are placed in areas that do not coincide with its • Seat Suspension in Aircraft and resonant frequency. This special applications mount may be of Vehicles particular interest not only for its improved vibration performance at low temperature, but also its lower natural frequency at room • Radar Communications temperatures. This may avoid the need of trying to reduce the Equipment natural frequency by means of adding a rubber washer in tandem, Electronic Control Equipment as this procedure also increases the transmissibility at resonance • of the system. • Equipment Mountings in Tanks Shock protection of the new design has the added benefit of and Other Military Vehicles durability under repeated shocks at low temperatures. • Bomb and Other Lifting Gear INSTALLATION OF "X" MOUNTS Refrigeration Compressors Due to the sophisticated nature of the "X" Mounts, it is essential • that they be correctly loaded. Incorrect loading will mean inad- • Mobile Vehicles equate shock protection (this is true even in underloaded situations). • Fuel Tanks Bad Practice Blowers and Fans Due to the shape and size of the "X" Mount, there is a strong • tendency to use the space created as storage. Needless to say, • Pumps

5-2 I O N 5 T S E C Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Spring Mounts – Elliptic Leaf Type

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Leaves – 304 Stainless Steel* • NATO APPROVED NAVAL "X" MOUNTS Washers – Nylon and Stainless Steel Damping Compound – Polymer

L HEIGHT UNDER D NOMINAL LOAD VIBRATION MODES: VERTICAL: H h HORIZONTAL 1:

UNLOADED HEIGHT HORIZONTAL 2: W d

MOUNTING HARDWARE DETAIL Available only if final use is for governmental installation

TEMPERATURE RANGE: +50°F to +86°F Shown as mounted (bolts and washers are not supplied). +10°C to +30°C Bolt Size Nominal Load L W H h D d Height Loaded UNF Weight Catalog Number Load Range Length Width Height Unloaded Diameter Bolt Hole in. lb. lb. in. in. with Washers with Washers Washers in. lb. (kg) (kgf) (kgf) (mm) (mm) (nearest in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) (mm) metric) 25 20–40 1.5 V10Y15-57170025 (11.3) (9–18) 8 2 4.5 4.17 1.25 .354 5/16 (0.68) 50 40–75 (203) (50.8) (114) (106) (31.75) (9) (8) 1.75 V10Y15-57180050 (22.7) (18–34) (0.8) 100 75–120 4.85 2.25 V10Y15-57190100 (45.4) (34–54) (123) (1.02) 150 120-200 8.5 2 5.25 1.25 .512 1/2 2.5 V10Y15-57200150 (68) (54-91) (216) (50.8) (133) 4.88 (31.75) (13) (12) (1.13) 250 200-300 (124) 2.75 V10Y15-57210250 (113.5) (91–136) (1.25) 400 300–550 7.3 13 V10Y15-84290400 (181.4) (136–250) (185) (5.9) 700 550–850 11.7 4 7.5 7.25 2.5 .827 3/4 14.5 V10Y15-84280700 (317.5) (250–386) (297) (101.6) (190) (184) (63.5) (21) (20) (6.57) 1000 850–1200 7.3 16 V10Y15-84271000 (453.6) (386–545) (185) (7.25)

Static Stiffness Natural Frequencies - Hz Catalog Number Vertical Horizontal 1 Horizontal 2 lb./in. lb./in. lb./in. Vertical Horizontal 1 Horizontal 2 (kg/cm) (kg/cm) (kg/cm) 75 40 100 V10Y15-57170025 (13.39) (7.14) (17.88) 7.5 4.5 5.5 150 80 200 V10Y15-57180050 (26.79) (14.29) (35.72) 250 135 330 V10Y15-57190100 (44.65) (24.11) (58.93) 400 220 520 V10Y15-57200150 7.5 4.5 5.5 (71.43) (39.29) (92.86) 650 350 850 V10Y15-57210250 (116.08) (62.5) (151.8) 2300 620 3070 V10Y15-84290400 10.5 4.5 5.5 (410.74) (110.72) (548.25) 3000 760 2700 V10Y15-84280700 (535.75) (135.72) (482.17) 7.5 4.0 5.0 4800 1100 4000 V10Y15-84271000 (857.2) (196.44) (714.33) *NOTE: Available in natural finish or painted black (at a higher price on special order).

5-3 I O N 5 T S E C Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Spring Mounts – Elliptic Leaf Type

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Leaves – 304 Stainless Steel • NATO APPROVED NAVAL "X" MOUNTS Washers – Nylon and Stainless Steel • LIGHTWEIGHT Damping Compound – Polymer HEIGHT UNDER M8 BOLT NOMINAL LOAD New

3.23 (82) 2.99 (76)

1 .33 (8.5) UNLOADED HEIGHT (25) .79 (20) Available only if final use is for 5.26 governmental installation (133.5) NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. VIBRATION MODES: VERTICAL:

FEATURES: The 6 kg Mount is designed to isolate lightweight equipment HORIZONTAL 1: (i.e. computers, printers, electronics panels etc.) from shock and vibration and has similar properties to the present range of 'X' mounts HORIZONTAL 2: with some reduction in the available deflection under shock conditions.

TEMPERATURE RANGE: +50°F to +86°F +10°C to +30°C Bolt Size Weight Static Stiffness Natural Frequencies - Hz Nominal Load UNF Excluding Catalog Number Load Range in. Bolt Vertical Horizontal 1 Horizontal 2 lb. lb. (nearest Vertical Horizontal 1 Horizontal 2 (kgf) (kgf) lb. lb./in. lb./in. lb./in. metric) (kg) (kg/cm) (kg/cm) (kg/cm) 13.2 10.6–15.9 1/4 .31 33 43 18 V10Y15-39210013 7.2–8.9 8.3–10.1 5.4–6.6 (6) (4.8–7.2) (6) (0.14) (5.91) (7.68) (3.25)

5-4 I O N 5 T S E C Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Spring Mounts – Elliptic Leaf Type

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Leaves – 304 Stainless Steel • NATO APPROVED NAVAL "XM" MOUNTS Washers – Nylon and Stainless Steel • FOR EXTREME ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS Damping Compound – Stainless Steel Mesh

SPRING New ASSY.

H h

BUSH

WASHER W L Available only if final use is for governmental installation

TEMPERATURE RANGE: -238°F to +752°F -150°C to +400°C Bolt Size Nominal Load L W H h D d UNF Load Range Length Width Height Unloaded Height Loaded Diameter Bolt Hole Weight Catalog Number in. lb. lb. lb. in. in. with Washers with Washers Washers in. (kgf) (kgf) (mm) (mm) (nearest (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) (mm) metric) 25 20–40 1.5 V10Y15-5717M0025 (11.3) (9–18) 8 2 4.5 4.17 1.25 .354 5/16 (0.68) 50 40–75 (203) (50.8) (114) (106) (31.75) (9) (8) 1.75 V10Y15-5718M0050 (22.7) (18–34) (0.8) 100 75–120 4.85 2.25 V10Y15-5719M0100 (45.4) (34–54) (123) (1.02) 150 120-200 8.5 2 5.25 1.25 .512 1/2 2.5 V10Y15-5720M0150 (68) (54-91) (216) (50.8) (133) 4.88 (31.75) (13) (12) (1.13) 250 200-300 (124) 2.75 V10Y15-5721M0250 (113.5) (91–136) (1.25) 400 300–550 7.3 13 V10Y15-8429M0400 (181.4) (136–250) (185) (5.9) 700 550–850 11.7 4 7.5 7.25 2.5 .827 3/4 14.5 V10Y15-8428M0700 (317.5) (250–386) (297) (101.6) (190) (184) (63.5) (21) (20) (6.57) 1000 850–1200 7.3 16 V10Y15-8427M1000 (453.6) (386–545) (185) (7.25)

5-5 I O N 5 T S E C ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Spring Mounts – Elliptic Leaf Type

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

TRANSMISSIBILITY / TEMPERATURE / RESONANCE

"Q" / TEMPERATURE 30 20 "Q" Factor 10.0 20 Real stiffness "Q" = –––––––––––––––– Complex stiffness 3.0 10 10

Q 1.0 0 dB 0.3 -10

f 0.1 -20 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 e d Temperature °C -30 c

-40 b a

5 6 7 10 20 30 50 100 Impressed frequency Hz NATURAL FREQUENCY / TEMPERATURE 30

° ° Temp C ( F) fn Hz Q fn=Natural Frequency a 41.6 (106.9) 6.2 10.2 20 b 29.9 (85.8) 6.6 6.1 c 19.7 (67.5) 7.6 2.8 d 10.2 (50.4) 13.0 2.2 e 0.5 (32.9) 22.0 4.0 10 f –16.1 (3.0) 29.6 22.7

-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 Temperature °C

5-6 I O N 5 T S E C Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV NEW SIZES ED IB C R N A T A I

V O

D N A Spring Mounts – Foam Type – To 1250 N C O M TS P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Spring – Steel (Black Cataphoresis or Blue Epoxy) • WORKING TEMPERATURE RANGE Base – Carbon Steel Bushing – Carbon Steel -90°C TO +200°C (-130°F TO +392°F) Isolator – Polyethylene • LATERAL TO AXIAL STIFFNESS RATIO 0.8 TO 1 Base Pad – Foam Rubber

51 (2.0) New

80 (3.2) 16 (.63) M8

63 (2.5) M Style Base Mounting 11 (.43) Metric shown 106 (4.2)

The projections shown are per ISO convention.

Maximum Minimum Admissible Stiffness Temporary Catalog Number* Load Deﬂection Load Deﬂection N/mm N mm N mm (lb./in.) Overload (lb.) (in.) (lb.) (in.) % 250 100 10 V10Z73MAM025 (56.2) (22.5) (57.1) 500 200 20 V10Z73MAM050 (112.4) (45.0) (114.2) 750 25 300 10 30 10 V10Z73MAM075 (168.6) (.98) (67.4) (.39) (171.3) 1000 400 40 V10Z73MAM100 (224.8) (89.9) (228.4) 1250 500 50 V10Z73MAM125 (281.0) (112.4) (285.5) To complete the part number please specify mounting style. Continued on the next page *To be discontinued when present stock is depleted.

PERFORMANCE GRAPHS

26 130 A Height at V10Z73MAM025 V10Z73MAM125 Mounting 24 120 Description Free Height 25 mm (.98 in.) Deﬂection Style mm (in.) 22 110 mm (in.) 20 100 V10Z73MAM100 C No bases 71 (2.80) 46 (1.81) 18 90 16 80 V10Z73MAM075 14 70

M Lower base attached 74 (2.91) 49 (1.93) 12 60

10 50 V10Z73MAM050

8 40 R Upper and Lower bases attached 77 (3.03) 52 (2.05) 6 30

4 20

2 10

0 5 10 15 20 25 0 5 10 15 20 25

5-7 Rev: 5-7-11 SS Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A A T I V O

A Spring Mounts – Foam Type – To 4500 N

C O S M P O N E N T www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Spring – Steel (Black Cataphoresis or Blue Epoxy) • WORKING TEMPERATURE RANGE Base – Carbon Steel Bushing – Carbon Steel -90°C TO +200°C (-130°F TO +392°F) Isolator – Polyethylene • LATERAL TO AXIAL STIFFNESS RATIO 0.8 TO 1 Base Pad – Foam Rubber 69 (2.7) New M12

96 (3.8) 128 (5.04) 96 8 (.32) (3.8) 12 (.47) Metric 86 (3.4)

M Style 22 M8 Base Mounting (.87) 3 (.12) shown

Maximum Minimum Admissible Stiffness Temporary Catalog Number* Load Deﬂection Load Deﬂection N/mm N mm N mm (lb./in.) Overload (lb.) (in.) (lb.) (in.) % 1500 640 43 V10Z73MAM150 (337.2) (143.9) (245.5) 30 2000 860 57 V10Z73MAM200 (449.6) (193.3) (325.5) 25 2500 35 1070 15 71 V10Z73MAM250 (562.0) (1.38) (240.5) (.59) (405.4) 20 3500 1500 100 V10Z73MAM350 (786.8) (337.2) (571.0) 14 4500 1930 129 V10Z73MAM450 (1011.6) (433.9) (736.6) 11 To complete the part number please specify mounting style. *To be discontinued when present stock is depleted. PERFORMANCE GRAPH

4500 V10Z73MAM450

A Height at 4000 Mounting Description Free Height 35 mm (1.38 in.) Deﬂection Style mm (in.) 3500 V10Z73MAM350 mm (in.) 3000 C No bases 111 (4.37) 76 (2.99) 2500 V10Z73MAM250

2000 V10Z73MAM200 M Lower base attached 114 (4.49) 79 (3.11) 1500 V10Z73MAM150

1000 R Upper and Lower bases attached 117 (4.61) 82 (3.23) 500

0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35

5-8 Rev: 5-8-11 SS Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Spring Mounts – Damped Type – To 200 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Base Plate – Mild Steel • CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT Springs – High-Tensile Steel - Phosphated & Dyed Black • STAINLESS STEEL MESH Isolator – Knitted Stainless Steel Mesh • FOR LOADS OF 60 TO 200 POUNDS (27 TO 90 kgf) End Caps – Light Alloy

4.0 (101.6)

3.25 (82.6)

2 HOLES .386 (9.8) DIA.

3.0 (76.2)

3/8-16 UNC-2B x 1/2 DEEP

2.50 (63.5) CHARACTERISTICS Lateral to vertical stiffness ratio approximately 1:1. Elastic Limit corresponds to a maximum load in compression of .042 oz. (1.2 g) and radially H .007 oz. (0.2 g). Damping factor c/co .10 to .15.

APPLICATIONS • MEDIUM-HEAVY INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENT • OPTICAL EQUIPMENT • LABORATORY EQUIPMENT NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. MOUNTING Must be loaded vertically through its axis.

TEMPERATURE RANGE: -94°F to +347°F (-70°C to +175°C) H - Height Static Load Natural Catalog Number Frequency Free Max.Load Hz lb. kgf in. mm In. mm

V10Z30-2273 60 – 90 27 – 40

V10Z30-2274 90 – 135 40 – 61 2 – 2-1/25.7 144 3.0 76.2

V10Z30-2275 135 – 200 61 – 90

5-9 I O N 5 T S E C Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Spring Mounts – Damped Type – To 750 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Mounting Plates – Mild Steel, Painted • CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT Springs – High-Tensile Steel; Phosphated, Dyed Black • STAINLESS STEEL MESH Isolators – Knitted Stainless Steel Mesh • FOR LOADS OF 150 TO 750 POUNDS (68 TO 340 kgf)

X H

3-3/4 (95.3) 4-1/2 (114.3)

.563 (14.3) DIA. 1/2-20 UNF CHARACTERISTICS Lateral to vertical stiffness approximately 1:1. Elastic Limit corresponds to a maximum load in compression of .042 oz. (1.2 g) and radially .007 oz. (0.2 g). Damping factor c/co .15 to .20. H APPLICATIONS • HEAVY LOADS • COMPRESSORS .260 (6.6) DIA. • PUMPS • GRAIN VIBRATORS SECTION X-X MOUNTING NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. Must be loaded vertically through its axis.

TEMPERATURE RANGE: -94°F to +347°F (-70°C to +175°C) H - Height Static Load Natural Catalog Number Frequency Free Max. Load lb. kgf Hz in. mm in. mm

V10Z31-2461 150 – 260 68 – 118

V10Z31-2462 250 – 450 113 – 205 4 – 4-1/2 3.0 76.2 2.378 60.4

V10Z31-2463 440 – 750 200 – 340

5-10 I O N 5 T S E C ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Selection Criteria – V10Z32 Mounts

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

INDUSTRIAL AND MARINE APPLICATIONS The following table gives recommended isolation efficiency in relation to site configuration and driving motor power. If site configuration is not known, assume for basement condition. Transfer the recommended efficiency to the transmissibility curves on the graph.

Recommended Isolation Efficiency: Driving Basement Upper Floor Upper Floor Motor, kW or Ground Heavy Light Floor Construction Construction Up to 4 — 50% 90% 4 – 10 50% 75% 93% 10 – 30 80% 90% 95% 30 – 75 90% 95% 97.5% 75 – 225 95% 97% 98.5%

EXAMPLE Project a line from the efficiency required on the right - Recommended efficiency = 93% hand side to intersect the performance lines 1008, 1006 first projection gives R = 5.5 for 1008 and 1004. Project those intersections down to obtain the ____f ____16.3 two dimensionless ratios (R) for the three mountings. and from fn = , fn = = 2.96 Hz Divide the lowest running speed (Hz) of the complete R 5.5 machine by R to give the natural frequency f 'n required. discard 1008 as it has fn = 9 to 7 Hz Compare f 'n with the actual natural frequency (fn) of the mounting concerned . If f'n fits into the fn band of the second projection gives R = 4 for 1006 & 1004 mounting, select that mounting. If two mountings meet the ____16.3 above conditions, select the one with higher fn; it will be again fn = = 4.08 Hz more stable. 4 which fits 1004, fn = 5 to 3 Hz A fan turning at 980 rpm (16.3 Hz) driven by a 7 kw motor running at 1470 rpm, which is to be installed on an upper Now, all that remains is to place sufficient 1004 floor of light construction: series mountings under the machine to support its weight evenly.

1 20% 40%

70% 80%

0.1 90% 93% V10Z32- 1008 97% ISOLATION

98.5% TRANSMISSIBILITY (T) V10Z32- 0.01 99% 1006 & 1004 99.5%

0.001 99.9% 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 100 f ROTATION SPEED OF MACHINERY (Hz) (R) FREQUENCY RATIO = ––– = ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– fn MOUNTING NATURAL FREQUENCY (Hz)

5-11 I O N 5 T S E C Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Spring Mounts – Damped Type – To 1235 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Mounting Plates – Mild Steel, Painted • CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT Springs – High-Tensile Steel; Phosphated, Dyed Black • STAINLESS STEEL MESH Isolator – Knitted Stainless Steel Mesh • FOR LOADS OF 66 TO 1235 POUNDS (30 TO 560 kgf) 3.07 (78)

2 HOLES .433 (11) DIA.

3-15/16 (100)

CHARACTERISTICS APPLICATIONS Lateral to vertical stiffness approximately 1:1. • HEAVY LOADS M12 4.33 (110) Elastic Limit corresponds to a maximum load in • COMPRESSORS 5-33/64 (140) compression of .042 oz. (1.2 g) and radially • PUMPS NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. .007 oz. (0.2 g). Damping factor c/co .15 to .20. • GRAIN VIBRATORS MOUNTING Must be loaded vertically TEMPERATURE RANGE: -94°F to +347°F (-70°C to +175°C) through its axis. H Natural Equivalent Static Load Range Catalog Number Frequency Static Free Loaded Hz Deflection lb. kgf

V10Z32-100411 165 – 243 75 – 110

V10Z32-100412 209 – 287 95 – 130

V10Z32-100413 276 – 353 125 – 160 5.82 5.04 .394 – 1.181 3 – 5 (148) (128) (10 – 30) V10Z32-100414 353 – 507 160 – 230

V10Z32-100415 463 – 683 210 – 310

V10Z32-100416 661 – 926 300 – 420

V10Z32-100611 66 – 110 30 – 50

V10Z32-100612 110 – 176 50 – 80

V10Z32-100613 176 – 275 80 – 125 3.94 3.54 .197 – .394 5 – 7 (100) (90) (5 – 10) V10Z32-100614 276 – 430 125 – 195

V10Z32-100615 430 – 683 195 – 310

V10Z32-100616 683 – 926 310 – 420

V10Z32-100811 88 – 187 40 – 85

V10Z32-100812 143 – 246 65 – 125

V10Z32-100813 243 – 419 110 – 190 3.94 3.54 .118 – .197 7 – 9 (100) (90) (3 – 5) V10Z32-100814 386 – 595 175 – 270

V10Z32-100815 551 – 882 250 – 400

V10Z32-100816 794 – 1235 360 – 560

5-12 I O N 5 T S E C Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Spring Mounts – Damped Type – To 2469 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Mounting Plates – Mild Steel, Painted • CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT Springs – High-Tensile Steel; Phosphated, Dyed Black • STAINLESS STEEL MESH Isolator – Knitted Stainless Steel Mesh • FOR LOADS OF 860 TO 2469 POUNDS (390 TO 1120 kgf)

M12

3-15/16 (100) 4 HOLES .512 (13) DIA.

8.27 (210) 9-27/32 (250) CHARACTERISTICS Lateral to vertical stiffness approximately 1:1. NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. Elastic Limit corresponds to a maximum load in compression of .042 oz. (1.2 g) and radially .007 oz. (0.2 g). Damping factor c/co .15 to .20.

APPLICATIONS • HEAVY LOADS • COMPRESSORS • PUMPS • GRAIN VIBRATORS MOUNTING Must be loaded vertically through its axis.

TEMPERATURE RANGE: -94°F to +347°F (-70°C to +175°C) H Natural Equivalent Static Load Range Catalog Number Frequency Static Free Loaded Hz Deflection lb. kgf

V10Z32-100425 860 – 1367 390 – 620 5.82 5.04 .394 – 1.181 3 – 5 (148) (128) (10 – 30) V10Z32-100426 1323 – 1852 600 – 840

V10Z32-100625 860 – 1367 390 – 620 3.94 3.54 .197 – .394 5 – 7 (100) (90) (5 – 10) V10Z32-100626 1367 – 1852 620 – 840

V10Z32-100825 1102 – 1764 500 – 800 3.94 3.54 .118 – .197 7 – 9 (100) (90) (3 – 5) V10Z32-100826 1587 – 2469 720 – 1120

5-13 I O N 5 T S E C Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Spring Mounts – Silicone Gel Type

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Studs – Brass • DAMPS LOW FREQUENCY VIBRATIONS Body – Silicone Gel • VERTICAL VIBRATIONS DAMPED WITHOUT HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION Spring – Piano Wire Type B, Nickel Plated • TO BE USED IN COMPRESSION ONLY

THREAD 12 New (.472)

23 SPRING (.906)

Ø15 (.591) Ø28 Metric (1.102)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch.

TEMPERATURE RANGE: -40°C to +200°C (-40°F to +392°F)

Optimum Load Resonance Resonance Recommended Catalog Number kgf/leg Point Magnification Frequency Thread (lb./leg) Hz dB Hz

0.8 to 1.6 V10Z61MBG7 (1.8 to 3.5) 16 to 14 M3 10 to 8 from 14 1.5 to 4 V10Z61MBG8 18 to 16 M6 (3.3 to 8.8)

Demonstration of Silicone Gel's outstanding shock-absorbing abilities. An ordinary fresh raw egg dropped down from 18 meters (59 ft.) high to a 2 cm (.787 in.) thick Silcone Gel bed does not break. It is publicly proven many times.

5-14 I O N 5 T S E C Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Steel Spring and Mesh Mounts – To 10 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Housing – Aluminum Alloy, Anodized • CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT • STAINLESS STEEL MESH Eyelets – Brass, Tin Plated • FOR LOADS OF .5 TO 10 POUNDS (.25 TO 4.6 kgf) Isolators – Stainless Steel Spring and Mesh

ACROSS FLATS .15 (3.8) .56 (14.2) RADIAL DEFLECTION

1.58 (40.1) DIA. H

1.62 (41.1) DIA.

59/64 (23.5) 5/32 (4)

NOTE: MAX BOLT LENGTH INTO CAP IS 9/32 (7.1)

TYPICAL TRANSMISSIBILITY CURVE #8-32 UNC-2B (SUFFIX A) as a function of applied load M4 x 0.7 mm (SUFFIX C) .27 (7) DEEP 5 ΔΔ 1-45/64 1.37 4.5 (43.4) (34.9) 4 2 HOLES 3.5 MIN LOAD .157 (4) DIA. 3 MAX LOAD 2.5 TYPE "D" 2 4 HOLES OVAL BASE 1.5 Δ 1 .157 (4) DIA. 1.94 (49.4) TYPICAL PER SIDE TRANSMISSIBILITY FOR SQUARE BASE 0.5 2-1/4 (57.1) CONFIGURATION 0 TYPE "S" SQUARE BASE 1 2 3 4 5 8 10 20 30 40 50 100 FREQUENCY NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

DYNAMIC CHARACTERISTICS LOADING LIMITATIONS Ratio between transverse and axial stiffness (vertical) Prior to abutting snubber, load corresponding to a approximately 1:2.5 continuous acceleration of at least 2 G. Natural frequency = 7 to 11 Hz vertical and 4.5 to 7 Hz Loads corresponding to at least 10 G may be accepted transverse depending on load, for a displacement input without subsequently affecting the mount performance. ± .014 (0.35). Maximum displacement of the suspended unit under Maximum displacement input ± .016 (0.4). limiting loads ± .197 (5). Transmissibility ≤ 4:1. Conforms to MIL-E-5400 APPLICATIONS • AIRCRAFT • MOBILE TEMPERATURE RANGE: -94°F to +347°F • MARINE • ROTATING MACHINES -70°C to +175°C

Base Type Thread H - Height Weight Static Load Catalog Number Free Max. Load (Approx.)

M4 x

Oval

#8-32

0.7 mm Square lb. kgf in. mm in. mm oz. kg

UNC-2B V10Z19-7011SA .55 – 1.00 0.25 – 1 V10Z19-7012SA .80 – 1.80 0.35 – 0.8 V10Z19-7013SA 1.50 – 3.40 0.7 – 1.5 V10Z19-7014SA 2.20 – 5.60 1 – 2.55 1.35 38.1 1.09 27.68 1.4 0.04 V10Z19-7015DA V10Z19-7015DC 5.60 – 10.10 2.55 – 4.6 V10Z19-7015SA V10Z19-7015SC

5-15 I O N 5 T S E C Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Steel Spring and Mesh Mounts – To 132 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Housing – Aluminum Alloy, Anodized • CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT • STAINLESS STEEL MESH Eyelets – Brass, Tin Plated • FOR LOADS OF 1.5 TO 132 POUNDS (0.7 TO 60 kgf) Isolators – Stainless Steel Spring and Mesh

1.18 (30) .205 (5.2) RADIAL DISPLACEMENT UNLOADED 1-27/32 (46.3)

2-1/4 (57.27) DIA.

1-3/16 (30) 11/64 (4.5)

2-3/8 (60.5) NOTE: TYPICAL TRANSMISSIBILITY CURVE MAX FIXING BOLT LENGTH as a function of applied load 1.94 (49.2) INTO CAP A, B, & C IS 23/64 (9.14) INTO CAP D IS .580 (14.73) 5 1/4-20 UNC-2B (SUFFIX A) 4.5 1/4-28 UNF-2B (SUFFIX B) 4 M6 x 1 mm (SUFFIX C) 3.5 MIN LOAD 3/8-24 UNF (SUFFIX D) 3 MAX LOAD 2.5 2 4 HOLES 1.5 1

.197 (5) DIA. TRANSMISSIBILITY 0.5 0 NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. 123 4 5 7.5 9.5 20 30 50 100 FREQUENCY DYNAMIC CHARACTERISTICS LOADING LIMITATIONS In accordance with curve 1 of spec MIL-C-172. Just prior to abutting snubber, load corresponding Ratio between transverse and axial stiffness to a continuous acceleration of at least 2 G. (vertical): approximately 1:2.5. Loads corresponding to at least 10 G may be Natural Frequency = 7 to 10 Hz vertical and 4.5 to 6 Hz accepted without subsequently affecting the transverse depending on load for a displacement mount performance. input of ± .030 (0.75). Maximum displacement of the suspended unit Maximum displacement input ± .031 (0.8) under limiting loads ± .236 (6). Transmissibility: ≤4:1 Conforms to MIL-E-5400C APPLICATIONS • AIRCRAFT • MOBILE TEMPERATURE RANGE: -94°F to +347°F (-70°C to +175°C) • MARINE • ROTATING MACHINES WEIGHT: 3.53 - 4.41 oz. (100-125 g) approx.

Catalog Number Static Load

1/4-20 UNC-2B 1/4-28 UNF-2BM6 x 1 mm 3/8-24 UNF lb. kgf V10Z22-7201A V10Z22-7201B V10Z22M7201C V10Z22-7201D 1.55 – 2.75 0.7 – 1.25 V10Z22-7202A V10Z22-7202B V10Z22M7202C V10Z22-7202D 2.55 – 5.00 1.15 – 2.3 V10Z22-7203A V10Z22-7203B V10Z22M7203C V10Z22-7203D 4.40 – 9.90 2 – 4.5 V10Z22-7204A V10Z22-7204B V10Z22M7204C V10Z22-7204D 6.20 – 12.35 2.8 – 5.6 V10Z22-7205A V10Z22-7205B V10Z22M7205C V10Z22-7205D 9.90 – 19.85 4.5 – 9 V10Z22-7206A V10Z22-7206B V10Z22M7206C V10Z22-7206D 15.40 – 30.85 7 – 14 V10Z22-7207A V10Z22-7207B V10Z22M7207C V10Z22-7207D 17.65 – 39.70 8 – 18 V10Z22-7209A V10Z22-7209B V10Z22M7209C V10Z22-7209D 35.30 – 48.50 16 – 22 V10Z22-7210A V10Z22-7210B V10Z22M7210C V10Z22-7210D 44.10 – 72.75 20 – 33 — — — V10Z22-7211D 72.75 – 132.30 33 – 60

5-16 I O N 5 T S E C Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Steel Mesh Mounts – To 1000 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Cap and Base – Aluminum Alloy • FOR LOADS OF 10 TO 1000 POUNDS (4.6 TO 453.5 kgf) Center Stud – Aluminum Alloy • STAINLESS STEEL MESH Isolator – Knitted Stainless Steel Mesh • FINISH: Alochrome 1200 on all Aluminum components

3 (76.2)

2.50 (63.5)

3/8-16 UNC-2B

APPLICATIONS • LIGHTWEIGHT MACHINE TOOLS 4 HOLES .295 (7.5) DIA. • PRINTING AND TEXTILE MACHINERY

CHARACTERISTICS Although normally intended to be used in compression, they will accept accidental tensile loads. The 1-13/32 (35.7) H mounts should be fixed to the floor for loads in excess of 220 lb. (99.8 kgf) or when working conditions require it. They will accept compressive loads at least five times the static load.

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

H - Height Static Load Natural Weight Catalog Number Frequency Free Max. Load lb. kgf Hz oz. kg in. mm in. mm

V10Z28-1641 10 – 20 4.55 – 9.05

V10Z28-1642 20 – 50 9.05 – 22.5

V10Z28-1643 50 – 100 22.5 – 45.35 13 – 17 For an 6.33 0.18 1.91 48.6 1.44 36.6 V10Z28-1644 100 – 200 45.35 – 90.7 amplitude of ± .012(0.3) V10Z28-1645 200 – 500 90.7 – 226.8

V10Z28-1646 500 – 1000 226.8 – 453.5

5-17 I O N 5 T S E C Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Steel Mesh Mounts – To 1600 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Housing – Machine Casting • CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT • STAINLESS STEEL MESH Center, Cup and Washer are • FOR LOADS OF 70 TO 1600 POUNDS (32 TO 725 kgf) Cadmium Plated Mild Steel Isolator – Stainless Steel Mesh

4 HOLES .323 (8.2) DIA. 3-1/4 (82.55) 8000 LOAD INCREASING 2.45 LOAD (62.3) DECREASING 6000 5/8-11 UNC

4000 LOAD (lb.)

2000

H 0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 DEFLECTION (in.) *

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. APPLICATIONS Primarily developed for heavy-duty applications where severe shock forces are encountered, these mounts are especially recommended for vehicle and marine installations where there are high starting torques or reversals of loads. They are capable of withstanding compression loads as high as ten times the static loads and are used for isolating marine fans, mobile engines, generators, instrument consoles and general machine tools such as lathes, milling machines, slotters, broachers, etc. TEMPERATURE RANGE: -94°F to +347°F (-70°C to +175°C)

Static Load Natural H - Height Catalog Number Frequency Hz lb. kgf Free Loaded

V10Z27-3021 70 – 400 32 – 181

V10Z27-3022 300 – 800 136 – 363 14 – 22 1-61/64 1-53/64 (49.68) (46.38) V10Z27-3023 600 – 1600 273 – 725

*A locking device is provided for the removal of rusted mounting bolts.

5-18 I O N 5 T S E C Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Steel Mesh Mounts – To 20000 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Mounting Plates – Mild Steel, Painted • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF Isolators – Knitted Stainless Steel Mesh 1000 TO 20000 POUNDS (450 TO 9070 kgf) 6-1/2 (165.1) • FREESTANDING • CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT 2.618 (66.5)

APPLICATIONS • DESIGNED PRINCIPALLY FOR HEAVY-DUTY PUNCH AND X X PANEL PRESSES 5/8-11 UNC LARGE MACHINE TOOLS 15/16 1-7/64 • (23.9) (28.4) • ROCK CRUSHERS LOADED FREE FLOOR MOUNTING To support heavy loads, the mounts are grouped together on a spreader 3/4 SECTION X-X plate.The spreader plate should be made (20) the same size as the floor bearing area of the base. Fasten the mounts to the spreader plate by the 5/8 tapped hole provided, then fasten the spreader to the machine base. EXAMPLE: Machine Weight 65 = = 7.22 (use 8 mounts) MACHINE Total Weight of Machine = 65 TONS 9 BASE Capacity of Mount

SPREADER Static Load Range PLATE Catalog Number lb. kgf NOTE: Dimensions MUST BE FREESTANDING V10Z33-1133 1000 – 20000 450 – 9070 in ( ) are mm. ON FLOOR OR FOUNDATION V10Z33-1133-2 2000 – 5000 905 – 2265 V10Z33-1133-4 10000 – 20000 4530 – 9070 Steel Mesh Mounts – To 16000 lbs. • MATERIAL: Mounting Plates – Mild Steel, Painted • FOR COMPRESSION LOADS OF 800 TO Isolators – Knitted Stainless Steel Mesh 16000 POUNDS (360 TO 7250 kgf) • FLOOR MOUNTED • CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT

6-1/2 (165.1) 2.630 (66.8) APPLICATIONS Designed for heavy machine tools, MACHINE 5/8-11 UNC this low profile mount serves the dual BASE purpose of effectively isolating machine vibration while preventing movement by holding firmly on its base. FLOOR X LEVEL FLOOR MOUNTING X It is important that the stud is firmly fixed into the floor before the machine 1.281 .915 is bolted down. In the illustration, Rawbolt DIA. (23.24) (32.5) "studding" has been used, but foundation anchoring hardware is not provided with the mount. 2.875 For use on level surfaces only. Use 1.0 3/8 (73)DIA. (24) maximum diameter fixing studs. (10) 1.500 DIA. 1.118 FREE (38) (28.4) Static Load Range Catalog Number* lb. kgf 1/8 1.281 DIA. V10Z34-1139 800 – 16000 360 – 7250 (3) (32.5) To be discontinued when present stock is depleted. SECTION X-X *

5-19 I O N 5 T S E C Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Spring Mounts – Suspension Type

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Mounting Plates – Steel, Cadmium Plated • ALL METAL Springs – Spring Steel Wire

K MAX. C E D

J MAX.

J Designates vertical displacement K Designates radial displacement 26 24 STATIC LOAD DEFLECTION CURVE 22 AXIAL 20 RADIAL 18 16 14 12 10 LOAD (lb.) 8 6 4 2 0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.20 DEFLECTION (in.) TEMPERATURE RANGE: -76°F to +302°F -60°C to +150°C Nominal Weight Dimensions Catalog Number Load lb. kgf oz. kg in. mm in. mm LIGHT-DUTY V10C16-LS197501 1 0.45 A 7/8 22.23 E .14 3.56 V10C16-LS197602 2 0.91 B 1-1/4 31.75 F 9/32 7.14 .38 0.011 V10C16-LS197703 3 1.36 C 1 25.4 J 5/32 3.97 V10C16-LS203704 4 1.81 D .17 4.22 K 1/8 3.18 MEDIUM-DUTY V10C16-MS197802 2 0.91 V10C16-MS197904 4 1.81 A 1-1/4 31.75 E .17 4.22 V10C16-MS198006 6 2.72 B 1-25/32 45.25 F 23/64 9.13 V10C16-MS198108 8 3.63 1.14 0.033 C 1-3/8 34.93 J 3/16 4.76 V10C16-MS198210 10 4.54 D .26 6.53 K 3/16 4.76 V10C16-MS198312 12 5.44 V10C16-MS371114 14 6.35 HEAVY-DUTY V10C16-HS198410 10 4.54 V10C16-HS198515 15 6.80 A 1-3/4 44.45 E .2 4.98 V10C16-HS198620 20 9.07 B 2-5/16 54.77 F 17/32 13.5 3.01 0.086 V10C16-HS198725 25 11.34 C 1-3/4 44.45 J 1/4 6.35 V10C16-HS198830 30 13.61 D .39 9.93 K 3/16 4.76 V10C16-HS198935 35 15.88 NOTE: Curves shown for mounts with a nominal load rating of 6 pounds.

Deflection curve for mounts with other load ratings may be drawn by shifting the curve shown to pass through a point defined by the intersection of the mounts nominal load (pounds) with a standard deflection of .06 inches.

5-20 I O N 5 T S E C Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Spring Mounts – Pedestal Type

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Mounting Plates – Steel, Cadmium Plated • ALL METAL Springs – Spring Steel Wire

K MAX. B C E H D

F J MAX.

J Designates vertical displacement K Designates radial displacement 26 24 STATIC LOAD DEFLECTION CURVE 22 AXIAL 20 RADIAL 18 16 14 12 10 LOAD (lb.) 8 6 4 2 0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.20 DEFLECTION (in.) TEMPERATURE RANGE: -76°F to +302°F -60°C to +150°C Nominal Weight Dimensions Catalog Number Load lb. kgf oz. kg in. mm in. mm LIGHT-DUTY A 7/8 22.23 F 15/64 5.95 V10C17-LP199301 1 0.45 B 1-11/16 42.85 G 9/16 14.29 V10C17-LP199402 2 0.91 .71 0.021 C 1-3/8 34.93 H 1-9/16 39.67 V10C17-LP199503 3 1.36 D .170 4.22 J 5/32 3.97 V10C17-LP199604 4 1.81 E .150 3.73 K 1/8 3.18 MEDIUM-DUTY V10C17-MP199702 2 0.91 V10C17-MP199804 4 1.81 A 1-1/4 31.75 F 21/64 8.33 V10C17-MP199906 6 2.72 B 2-3/8 60.33 G 13/16 20.64 V10C17-MP235008 8 3.63 2.05 0.061 C 1-15/16 49.20 H 2-25/32 70.64 V10C17-MP235110 10 4.54 D .257 6.53 J 3/16 4.76 V10C17-MP235212 12 5.44 E .196 4.98 K 3/16 4.76 V10C17-MP370914 14 6.35 HEAVY-DUTY V10C17-HP235310 10 4.54 A 1-3/4 44.45 F 31/64 12.30 V10C17-HP235415 15 6.80 B 3.0 76.20 G 1-3/32 29.37 V10C17-HP235520 20 9.07 3.01 0.138 C 2-1/2 63.5 H 2-3/4 69.85 V10C17-HP235625 25 11.34 D .39 9.93 J 1/4 6.35 V10C17-HP235730 30 13.61 E .26 6.53 K 3/16 4.76 V10C17-HP371035 35 15.88 NOTE: Curves shown for mounts with a nominal load rating of 6 pounds.

5-21 I O N 5 T S E C Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Spring Mounts – Single Hole Type

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Mounting Plates – Steel, Cadmium Plated • ALL METAL Springs – Spring Steel Wire

G MAX. D B C F MAX.

D F Designates vertical displacement G Designates radial displacement

26 24 STATIC LOAD DEFLECTION CURVE 22 AXIAL 20 RADIAL 18 16 14 12 10 DEFLECTION LOAD (lb.) 8 6 4 2 0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.20 DEFLECTION (in.) TEMPERATURE RANGE: -76°F to +302°F -60°C to +150°C Nominal Weight Dimensions Catalog Number Load lb. kgf oz. kg in. mm in. mm LIGHT-DUTY V10C18-LF237001 1 0.45 A 3/8 9.53 E 1-3/32 27.78 V10C18-LF237102 2 0.91 B 1-19/64 32.94 .93 0.026 F 5/32 3.97 V10C18-LF237203 3 1.36 C 3/8 9.53 G 1/8 3.18 V10C18-LF237304 4 1.81 D #4 BA 4 MEDIUM-DUTY V10C18-MF237402 2 0.91 V10C18-MF237504 4 1.81 A 1/2 12.7 E 1-21/64 33.73 V10C18-MF237606 6 2.72 B 1-7/8 47.63 2.71 0.076 F 3/16 4.76 V10C18-MF237708 8 3.63 C 1/2 12.7 G 3/16 4.76 V10C18-MF237810 10 4.54 D #1/4 BSF 6 V10C18-MF237912 12 5.44 HEAVY-DUTY V10C18-HF238210 10 4.54 V10C18-HF238315 15 6.80 A 11/16 17.46 E 1-51/64 45.64 V10C18-HF238420 20 9.07 B 2-9/16 61.91 6.47 0.182 F 1/4 6.35 V10C18-HF238525 25 11.34 C 27/32 21.43 G 3/16 4.76 V10C18-HF238630 30 13.61 D #3/8 BSF 10 V10C18-HF371235 35 15.88 NOTE: Curves shown for mounts with a nominal load rating of 6 pounds (2.7 kgf).

5-22 I O N 5 T S E C ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cable Isolators

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

COMPRESSION SHEAR LOAD

LOAD New

WALL

FLOOR OR BASE

ROLL 45° COMPRESSION & ROLL

LOAD UNIT BEING ISOLATED

WALL

LOAD WALL / FLOOR

45°

GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS AND USES

Applications Typical Equipment Protection From Operational Advantages

Long life, Maintenance-free, Temperature Shipboard Electronics, Computers, Machinery Explosive blast, Inherent vibration, Storms extremes, Corrosion resistance, All axes protection Rough Long life, Maintenance-free, Temperature Rough terrain, Poor road conditions, Terrain Instrumentation, Generators, Electronics extremes, Ozone, Radioacitvity, UV Collision Vehicles Radiation

High-G maneuvering, Hard landings, Temperature and altitude extremes, Aircraft Electronics, Computers Turbulent air Lightweight

Shipping Long life, Maintenance-free, Exposure Optics, Instruments, Missiles, Electronics Transit, Handling drop, Loading/Unloading Containers to moisture, Repeated use

Industrial Unbalanced dynamic loads, Fluid hammer, Long life, Maintenance-free, Corrosive Centrifuge, Dryers, Pumps Equipment Inherent vibration, Foundation weakness environments

Ordnance Missile launchers, Tank artillery, Computer Maintenance-free, Temperature extremes, Rough terrain, Railroad humping,Transit Equipment controls, Electronics Nearby blast

Medical Mechanical equipment necessary for Vibration from moving parts, Mobile carts- Maintenance-free, No outgassing, Can be Equipment patient care Transport shock sterlized

Wind causing resonant frequencies, Stack Maintenance-free, Temperature extremes, Chimneys Chimneys, Scrubbers, Measuring devices gas causing turbulence near scrubber, etc. Corrosive environments

5-23 I O N 5 T S E C Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A A T I V O

A Cable Isolators – 1/16" & 3/32" Cable Dia.

C O M T S www.vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 PONEN vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Cable – Stainless Steel (MIL-W-83420) • ISOLATION PROTECTION IN ALL AXES Retaining Bars – Aluminum Alloy • RESISTS CORROSION • MAINTENANCE–FREE 6061-T6; Iridited (MIL-C-5541) Retaining Clips – Stainless Steel New

MOUNTING HOLES

W O.D.

A D H1 L H 1/16 Diameter Cable

Compression Shear or Roll 45° Compression & Roll Mounting Catalog Number O.D. HH LDAWW Spr. Rate Max. Spr. Rate Max. Spr. Rate Max. 1 1 Holes lb./in. Deflect. lb./in. Deflect. lb./in. Deflect. (kgf/mm) in. (kgf/mm) in. (kgf/mm) in.

1.0 .7 99 .3 69 .3 37 .6 V10Z70-0625100 (25.4) (17.8) (1.77) (7.6) (1.23) (7.6) (0.66) (15.2) 1.1 .8 65 .4 54 .4 23 .7 .177 (4.3) V10Z70-0625110 (27.9) (20.3) (1.16) (10.2) (0.96) (10.2) (0.41) (17.8) Hole 1.2 1.0 36 .5 48 .6 11 .8 Countersink V10Z70-0625120 (30.5) (25.4) (0.64) (12.7) (0.86) (15.2) (0.20) (20.3) .16 3.12 2.69 .20 .40 .20 .31 (7.9) 1.3 1.1 (4.1) (79.2) (68.3) (5.1) (10.2) (5.1) 25 .6 32 .7 8 .9 to V10Z70-0625130 (33) (27.9) (0.45) (15.2) (0.57) (17.8) (0.14) (22.9) 82 deg. 1.4 1.2 18 .7 24 .8 5 1.0 (4x) V10Z70-0625140 (35.6) (30.5) (0.32) (17.8) (0.43) (20.3) (0.09) (25.4) 1.5 1.3 14 .8 21 .9 4 1.1 V10Z70-0625150 (38.1) (33) (0.25) (20.3) (0.38) (22.9) (0.07) (27.9) 3/32 Diameter Cable

1.1 .9 377 .2 177 .3 82 .5 V10Z70-0938110 (27.9) (22.9) (6.73) (5.1) (3.16) (7.6) (1.46) (12.7) 1.2 1.0 233 .3 136 .4 75 .6 V10Z70-0938120 (30.5) (25.4) .196 (5) (4.16) (7.6) (2.43) (10.2) (1.34) (15.2) Hole 1.3 1.1 146 .4 84 .5 49 .7 Countersink V10Z70-0938130 (33) (27.9) .25 4.44 3.95 .24 .50 .25 (2.61) (10.2) (1.50) (12.7) (0.88) (17.8) .41 (10.4) 1.5 1.3 (6.4) (112.8) (100.3) (6.1) (12.7) (6.4) 85 .5 51 .6 24 1.1 V10Z70-0938150 (38.1) (33) to (1.52) (12.7) (0.91) (15.2) (0.43) (27.9) 82 deg. 1.6 1.4 61 .6 38 .7 17 1.2 V10Z70-0938160 (40.6) (35.6) (4x) (1.09) (15.2) (0.68) (17.8) (0.3) (30.5) 1.7 1.5 48 .7 32 .8 14 1.3 V10Z70-0938170 (43.2) (38.1) (0.86) (17.8) (0.57) (20.3) (0.25) (33) NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. Special mounting conﬁgurations, load ratings, materials and ﬁnishes are available on special order. Please contact our Engineering Department for more information. 5-24 Rev: 8-24-10 SS Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A A T I V O

A Cable Isolators – 1/8" & 5/32" Cable Dia.

MOUNTING HOLES .56 (14.2)

O.D.

.28 (7.1)

.25 4.50 (6.4) (114.3) H1 5.00 H (127) 1/8 Diameter Cable

Compression Shear or Roll 45° Compression & Roll Mounting Catalog Number O.D. HH Spr. Rate Max. Spr. Rate Max. Spr. Rate Max. 1 Holes lb./in. Deflect. lb./in. Deflect. lb./in. Deflect. (kgf/mm) in. (kgf/mm) in. (kgf/mm) in.

1.4 1.1 696 .2 335 .4 162 .9 V10Z70-1250140 (35.6) (27.9) (12.43) (5.1) (5.98) (10.2) (2.89) (22.9) 1.5 1.2 450 .4 263 .5 130 1.0 V10Z70-1250150 (38.1) (30.5) (8.04) (10.2) (4.7) (12.7) (2.32) (25.4) 1.6 1.3 290 .5 181 .6 98 1.1 V10Z70-1250160 (40.6) (33) .257 (6.5) (5.18) (12.7) (3.23) (15.2) (1.75) (27.9) Hole 1.7 1.4 215 .6 146 .7 75 1.2 V10Z70-1250170 (43.2) (35.6) Countersink (3.84) (15.2) (2.61) (17.8) (1.34) (30.5) .31 .52 (13.2) 1.8 1.5 (7.9) 170 .7 129 .8 56 1.3 V10Z70-1250180 (45.7) (38.1) to (3.04) (17.8) (2.3) (20.3) (1) (33) 82 deg. 1.9 1.6 135 .8 125 .9 44 1.5 V10Z70-1250190 (48.3) (40.6) (4x) (2.41) (20.3) (2.23) (22.9) (0.79) (38.1) 2.1 1.8 82 1.0 75 1.1 28 1.7 V10Z70-1250210 (53.3) (45.7) (1.46) (25.4) (1.34) (27.9) (0.5) (43.2) 2.3 2.0 61 1.2 67 1.3 20 1.9 V10Z70-1250230 (58.4) (50.8) (1.09) (30.5) (1.2) (33) (0.36) (48.3) 5/32 Diameter Cable

1.6 1.2 767 .4 377 .5 264 .7 V10Z70-1563160 (40.6) (30.5) (13.7) (10.2) (6.73) (12.7) (4.71) (17.8) 1.7 1.3 543 .5 295 .6 179 .8 V10Z70-1563170 (43.2) (33) .257 (6.5) (9.7) (12.7) (5.27) (15.2) (3.2) (20.3) Hole 1.9 1.5 329 .7 210 .8 114 1.1 V10Z70-1563190 Countersink (48.3) (38.1) .38 (5.88) (17.8) (3.75) (20.3) (2.04) (27.9) .52 (13.2) 2.1 1.8 (9.7) 196 .9 149 1.1 67 1.4 V10Z70-1563210 (53.3) (45.7) to (3.5) (22.9) (2.66) (27.9) (1.2) (35.6) 82 deg. 2.3 2.0 133 1.0 131 1.3 45 1.6 V10Z70-1563230 (58.4) (50.8) (4x) (2.38) (25.4) (2.34) (33) (0.8) (40.6) 2.5 2.2 97 1.2 86 1.5 30 1.8 V10Z70-1563250 (63.5) (55.9) (1.73) (30.5) (1.54) (38.1) (0.54) (45.7) 5-25 NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. Special mounting conﬁgurations, load ratings, materials and ﬁnishes are available on special order. Please contact our Engineering Department for more information. Rev: 8-24-10 SS Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A A T I V O

A Cable Isolators – 3/16" Cable Dia.

C O S www.vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 MPONENT vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Cable – Stainless Steel (MIL-W-83420) • ISOLATION PROTECTION IN ALL AXES Retaining Bars – Aluminum Alloy • RESISTS CORROSION • MAINTENANCE–FREE 6061-T6; Iridited (MIL-C-5541) Retaining Clips – Stainless Steel New

MOUNTING HOLES

.56 (14.2)

O.D.

.28 (7.1)

.25 4.50 .38 (6.4) (114.3) (9.7) 5.00 H (127)

3/16 Diameter Cable - Standard Duty

Compression Shear or Roll 45° Compression & Roll Mounting Catalog Number O.D. H Spr. Rate Max. Spr. Rate Max. Spr. Rate Max. Holes lb./in. Deflect. lb./in. Deflect. lb./in. Deflect. (kgf/mm) in. (kgf/mm) in. (kgf/mm) in.

1.4 1.2 1891 .3 913 .4 845 .4 V10Z70-1875140 (35.6) (30.5) (33.77) (7.6) (16.3) (10.2) (15.09) (10.2) 1.5 1.3 .257 (6.5) 1534 .3 710 .4 537 .6 V10Z70-1875150 (38.1) (33) (27.39) (7.6) (12.68) (10.2) (9.59) (15.2) Hole 1.6 1.4 Countersink 1149 .4 558 .5 414 .7 V10Z70-1875160 (40.6) (35.6) (20.52) (10.2) (9.96) (12.7) (7.39) (17.8) .52 (13.2) 1.7 1.5 to 811 .5 433 .5 280 .9 V10Z70-1875170 (43.2) (38.1) (14.48) (12.7) (7.73) (12.7) (5) (22.9) 82 deg. 1.8 1.6 (4x) 612 .7 340 .5 231 .9 V10Z70-1875180 (45.7) (40.6) (10.93) (17.8) (6.07) (12.7) (4.13) (22.9) 1.9 1.7 492 .8 263 .6 204 1.0 V10Z70-1875190 (48.3) (43.2) (8.79) (20.3) (4.7) (15.2) (3.64) (25.4) NOTES: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. Same cable diameter but additional sizes are available on the following page. Special mounting conﬁgurations, load ratings, materials and ﬁnishes are available on special order. Please contact our Engineering Department for more information.

5-26 Rev: 8-24-10 SS Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cable Isolators – 3/16" Cable Dia.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Cable – Stainless Steel (MIL-W-83420) • ISOLATION PROTECTION IN ALL AXES Retaining Bars – Aluminum Alloy • RESISTS CORROSION • MAINTENANCE–FREE 6061-T6; Iridited (MIL-C-5541) Retaining Clips – Stainless Steel New

MOUNTING HOLES

.56 (14.2)

O.D.

.28 (7.1)

.25 2.58 (6.4) (65.6) .38 5.16 (9.7) 5.66 (131.1) H (143.8)

3/16 Diameter Cable – Light-Duty 45° Compression Compression Shear or Roll & Roll Mounting Catalog Number O.D. H Spr. Rate Max. Spr. Rate Max. Spr. Rate Max. Holes lb./in. Deflect. lb./in. Deflect. lb./in. Deflect. (kgf/mm) in. (kgf/mm) in. (kgf/mm) in.

2.28 2.00 279 1.00 159 .8 94 1.90 V10Z70-1875228 (57.9) (50.8) (4.98) (25.4) (2.84) (20.3) (1.68) (48.3) 2.50 2.06 227 1.05 131 1.1 72 2.20 V10Z70-1875250 (63.5) (52.3) .28 (7.1) (4.05) (26.7) (2.34) (27.9) (1.29) (55.9) Hole 2.94 2.13 155 1.10 95 1.3 57 2.50 V10Z70-1875294 (74.7) (54.1) Countersink (2.77) (27.9) (1.7) (33) (1.02) (63.5) .53 (13.5) 3.19 2.19 129 1.20 77 1.8 54 2.65 V10Z70-1875319 (81) (55.6) to (2.3) (30.5) (1.38) (45.7) (0.96) (67.3) 82 deg. 3.45 2.45 82 1.40 58 1.9 36 2.75 V10Z70-1875345 (87.6) (62.2) (6x) (1.46) (35.6) (1.04) (48.3) (0.64) (69.9) 4.20 3.20 39 2.00 31 2.1 18 3.20 V10Z70-1875420 (106.7) (81.3) (0.7) (50.8) (0.55) (53.3) (0.32) (81.3) NOTES: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. Same cable diameter but additional sizes are available on the previous page. Special mounting configurations, load ratings, materials and finishes are available on special order. Please contact our Engineering Department for more information.

5-27 I O N 5 T S E C Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cable Isolators – 1/4" Cable Dia.

MOUNTING HOLES

.62 (15.7) O.D.

.31 (7.9)

.29 5.162 .5 (7.4) (131.1) (12.7) 5.75 H (146.1)

1/4 Diameter Cable 45° Compression Compression Shear or Roll & Roll Mounting Catalog Number O.D. H Spr. Rate Max. Spr. Rate Max. Spr. Rate Max. Holes lb./in. Deflect. lb./in. Deflect. lb./in. Deflect. (kgf/mm) in. (kgf/mm) in. (kgf/mm) in.

2.20 1.90 1033 .6 516 .8 300 1.5 V10Z70-2500220 (55.9) (48.3) (18.45) (15.2) (9.21) (20.3) (5.36) (38.1) 2.50 2.13 623 .8 323 1.0 182 1.8 V10Z70-2500250 (63.5) (54.1) (11.13) (20.3) (5.77) (25.4) (3.25) (45.7) 2.80 2.31 423 1.0 277 1.3 122 2.2 V10Z70-2500280 .28 (7.1) (71.1) (58.7) (7.55) (25.4) (4.95) (33) (2.18) (55.9) Hole 3.13 2.50 304 1.1 192 1.6 96 2.3 V10Z70-2500313 Countersink (79.5) (63.5) (5.43) (27.9) (3.43) (40.6) (1.71) (58.4) .53 (13.5) 3.50 2.50 234 1.3 174 1.7 92 2.5 V10Z70-2500350 to (88.9) (63.5) (4.18) (33) (3.11) (43.2) (1.64) (63.5) 82 deg. 3.75 2.63 181 1.5 124 1.9 76 2.7 V10Z70-2500375 (4x) (95.3) (66.8) (3.23) (38.1) (2.21) (48.3) (1.36) (68.6) 3.95 2.63 159 1.5 110 2.0 75 2.8 V10Z70-2500395 (100.3) (66.8) (2.84) (38.1) (1.96) (50.8) (1.34) (71.1) 4.25 3.25 100 2.0 67 2.2 39 3.0 V10Z70-2500425 (108) (82.6) (1.79) (50.8) (1.2) (55.9) (0.7) (76.2) NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. Special mounting configurations, load ratings, materials and finishes are available on special order. Please contact our Engineering Department for more information.

5-28 I O N 5 T S E C Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cable Isolators – 3/8" Cable Dia.

MOUNTING HOLES

1.00 (25.4) O.D.

.50 (12.7)

1.19 1.75 .63 (30.2) (44.5) (16) 4.38 H (111.3) 6.13 8.50 (155.7) (215.9)

3/8 Diameter Cable 45° Compression Compression Shear or Roll & Roll Mounting Catalog Number O.D. H Spr. Rate Max. Spr. Rate Max. Spr. Rate Max. Holes lb./in. Deflect. lb./in. Deflect. lb./in. Deflect. (kgf/mm) in. (kgf/mm) in. (kgf/mm) in.

3.31 2.80 1099 1.0 638 1.0 662 1.5 V10Z70-3750331 (84.1) (71.1) (19.63) (25.4) (11.39) (25.4) (11.82) (38.1) 3.50 2.90 1017 1.1 454 1.1 442 2.0 V10Z70-3750350 (88.9) (73.7) (18.16) (27.9) (8.11) (27.9) (7.89) (50.8) 4.13 3.00 .28 (7.1) 734 1.3 385 1.5 357 2.3 V10Z70-3750413 (104.9) (76.2) Hole (13.11) (33) (6.88) (38.1) (6.38) (58.4) 4.25 3.25 Countersink 598 1.5 313 1.6 212 2.8 V10Z70-3750425 (108) (82.6) .53 (13.5) (10.68) (38.1) (5.59) (40.6) (3.79) (71.1) 4.50 3.50 to 447 1.7 236 1.7 167 3.5 V10Z70-3750450 (114.3) (88.9) 82 deg. (7.98) (43.2) (4.21) (43.2) (2.98) (88.9) 4.75 4.13 (8x) 319 2.0 179 2.0 100 4.0 V10Z70-3750475 (120.7) (104.9) (5.7) (50.8) (3.2) (50.8) (1.79) (101.6) 5.50 4.25 228 2.2 135 2.2 89 4.5 V10Z70-3750550 (139.7) (108) (4.07) (55.9) (2.41) (55.9) (1.59) (114.3) NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. Special mounting configurations, load ratings, materials and finishes are available on special order. Please contact our Engineering Department for more information.

5-29 I O N 5 T S E C Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Cable Isolators – 1/2" Cable Dia. C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone:Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Cable – Stainless Steel (RR-W-410 D1) • ISOLATION PROTECTION IN ALL AXES Retaining Bars – Aluminum Alloy • RESISTS CORROSION • MAINTENANCE–FREE 6061-T6; Iridited (MIL-C-5541) Retaining Screws – Alloy Steel; Cadmium Plated (QQ-P-416) or Stainless Steel New

MOUNTING HOLES

1.00 (25.4) O.D.

.50 (12.7)

1.19 1.75 .75 (30.2) (44.5) (19.1) 4.38 H (111.3) 6.13 8.50 (155.7) (215.9) 1/2 Diameter Cable 45° Compression Compression Shear or Roll & Roll Mounting Catalog Number O.D. H Spr. Rate Max. Spr. Rate Max. Spr. Rate Max. Holes lb./in. Deflect. lb./in. Deflect. lb./in. Deflect. (kgf/mm) in. (kgf/mm) in. (kgf/mm) in.

4.00 3.25 1730 1.5 795 1.2 705 2.5 V10Z70-5000400 (101.6) (82.6) (30.89) (38.1) (14.2) (30.5) (12.59) (63.5) 4.13 3.50 1492 1.6 674 1.3 604 2.7 V10Z70-5000413 (104.9) (88.9) (26.64) (40.6) (12.04) (33) (10.79) (68.6) 4.75 3.75 .328 (8.3) 1159 1.7 507 1.5 409 3.2 V10Z70-5000475 (120.7) (95.3) Hole (20.7) (43.2) (9.05) (38.1) (7.3) (81.3) 5.25 4.25 Countersink 718 2.3 357 1.8 280 3.5 V10Z70-5000525 (133.4) (108) .66 (16.8) (12.82) (58.4) (6.38) (45.7) (5) (88.9) 5.65 4.90 to 469 2.8 243 2.3 180 4.0 V10Z70-5000565 (143.5) (124.5) 82 deg. (8.38) (71.7) (4.34) (58.4) (3.21) (101.6) 6.13 5.40 (8x) 339 3.5 209 2.6 134 4.5 V10Z70-5000613 (155.7) (137.2) (6.05) (88.9) (3.73) (66) (2.39) (114.3) 7.10 6.10 229 4.1 120 3.0 87 5.2 V10Z70-5000710 (180.3) (154.9) (4.09) (104.1) (2.14) (76.2) (1.55) (132.1) NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. Special mounting configurations, load ratings, materials and finishes are available on special order. Please contact our Engineering Department for more information.

5-30 I O N 5 T S E C Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV NEW ED IB C R N A A T I V O

A Cable Isolators – 5/8" Cable Dia.

C O S www.vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 MPONENT vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Cable – Stainless Steel (RR-W-410 D-1) • ISOLATION PROTECTION IN ALL AXES Retaining Bars – Aluminum Alloy • RESISTS CORROSION • MAINTENANCE–FREE 6601-T6; Iridited (MIL-C-5541) Retaining Screws – Stainless Steel New

MOUNTING HOLES

1.00 (25.4) O.D.

.50 (12.7)

1.49 2.15 1.00 (37.85) (54.61) (25.4) 5.38 H (136.65) 7.53 10.50 (191.26) (266.7)

5/8 Diameter Cable

4.0 3.5 3721 1.2 1602 1.2 1950 1.8 V10Z70-6250400 (101.6) (88.9) (66.45) (30.48) (28.61) (30.48) (34.82) (45.7) .41 (10.4) 4.4 3.9 2789 1.4 1258 1.4 1533 2.3 Hole V10Z70-6250440 (111.8) (99.06) (49.81) (35.56) (22.47) (35.56) (27.38) (58.4) Countersink 5.3 4.3 1774 1.8 821 1.8 888 2.8 .78 (19.8) V10Z70-6250530 (134.6) (109.2) (31.58) (45.72) (14.66) (45.72) (15.86) (71.1) to 6.0 4.7 1199 2.2 641 2.2 549 3.2 82 deg. V10Z70-6250600 (152.4) (119.4) (21.41) (55.88) (11.45) (55.88) (9.80) (81.28) (8x) 6.5 5.0 974 2.5 523 2.5 462 3.6 V10Z70-6250650 (165.1) (127) (17.39) (63.5) (9.34) (63.5) (8.25) (91.44) NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. Special mounting conﬁgurations, load ratings, materials and ﬁnishes are available on special order. Please contact our Engineering Department for more information.

5-30A Rev: 3-21-09 SS Buy Product See Section 5 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV NEW ED IB C R N A A T I V O

A Cable Isolators – 7/8" Cable Dia.

C O S www.vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 MPONENT vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Cable – Stainless Steel (RR-W-410 D-1) • ISOLATION PROTECTION IN ALL AXES Retaining Bars – Aluminum Alloy • RESISTS CORROSION • MAINTENANCE–FREE 6601-T6; Iridited (MIL-C-5541) Retaining Screws – Stainless Steel New

MOUNTING HOLES

1.50 (38.1) O.D.

.75 (19.5)

2.00 3.00 1.50 (50.8) (76.2) (38.1) 7.50 H (190.5) 10.50 14.50 (266.7) (368.3)

7/8 Diameter Cable

5.5 5.25 4375 2.0 2865 2.1 2820 2.5 V10Z70-8750550 (139.7) (133.4) (78.13) (50.8) (51.16) (53.34) (50.36) (63.5) .53 (13.46) 6.5 6.0 2782 2.6 1541 2.6 1441 3.2 Hole V10Z70-8750650 (165.1) (152.4) (49.68) (66.04) (27.52) (66.04) (25.73) (81.28) Countersink 7.0 6.25 1956 3.0 1419 2.9 1271 3.8 1.0 (15.4) V10Z70-8750700 (177.8) (158.8) (34.93) (76.2) (25.34) (73.66) (22.70) (96.52) to 8.25 7.5 1277 3.6 809 3.3 770 4.7 82 deg. V10Z70-8750825 (209.6) (190.5) (22.8) (91.44) (14.45) (83.82) (13.75) (119.4) (8x) 9.25 8.5 842 4.2 493 4.0 388 6.4 V10Z70-8750925 (235) (215.9) (15.04) (106.7) (8.80) (101.6) (6.04) (162.6) NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. Special mounting conﬁgurations, load ratings, materials and ﬁnishes are available on special order. Please contact our Engineering Department for more information.

5-30B Rev: 3-21-09 SS SECTION 6 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Bumper Technical Information

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

ENERGY ABSORBING PRODUCTS Within the family of antivibration products, we are introducing a line of ENERGY-ABSORBING PRODUCTS. GENERAL In order to lend full understanding of the importance and capabilities of this product line, we will deal with the concept of ENERGY as well as present some practical examples of several applications. The examples will also include calculations of the forces involved.

S E C T I O N 6 T S E C Energy-absorbing components are often used as parts of a system or a device itself or, alternatively, they might be used as a safety measure to absorb runaway energy in case of failure of a component or a system. Some numerical examples are addressing both types of these applications. ENERGY A body is said to possess energy if it has the ability to perform work. This ability can be the result of its position or its condition. The position of the body produces POTENTIAL ENERGY, whereas if the body is moving with some velocity it possesses energy of motion or KINETIC ENERGY.

The formulas governing energy are as follows:

Kinetic Energy of a body in translation

2 E = mV ...... lb. in. or lb. ft. 2

W 2 2 where m is mass: m = ...... lb. sec /in. or lb. sec /ft. g V is velocity in in./sec or ft./sec W is weight in lb. g is acceleration of gravity 32.16 ft./sec2 or 386 in./sec2

Kinetic Energy of a body in rotation

2 E = Io• ...... lb. in. or lb. ft. 2 2 where Io is the mass moment of inertia about the axis of rotation in lb. in.sec or lb. ft.sec is angular velocity in rad/sec or 1/sec

Potential Energy

E = W•h ...... lb. in. or lb. ft. where W is weight in lb. h is height of free fall in in. or ft. If the velocity at the end of the free fall is needed, it can be found from:

V = 2gh ...... in./sec or ft./sec

The total energy is considered the sum total of all energies involved, and this is the amount which is available to perform work.

In the examples which follow, simplified formulas have been developed and used to provide a very close approximation. This enables the application of units which are most commonly used. The nomenclature used in these examples are as follows:

E1 Kinetic energy (lb. in.) F Propelling force (lb.) t Deceleration time (sec) 2 E2 Work (propelling force) Energy (lb. in.) C Cycles per hour a Decelertaion (ft./sec )

E3 Total energy (E1 + E2 lb. in.) HP Motor energy (horsepower) u Friction (coefficient)

E4 Total energy (E1 + E2) Per Hour (lb. in.) T Torque (lb. in.) RS Shock absorber mounting radius (in.) 2 WE Effective weight (lb.) g Acceleration due to gravity (ft./sec ) K Distance from pivot to center of gravity (in.)

W Weight of object (lb.) H Falling height including stroke of shock absorber (in.) VS Velocity at the shock absorber (ft./sec) V Velocity (ft./sec) S Shock absorber stroke (in.) q Reaction force (lb.)

The actual nature of the application and the availability of space will determine which type of Bumper will be used. In order to facilitate the choice, the following graph is given which compares the Force vs. Travel characteristics of the different types. FORCE vs TRAVEL CURVE V10P81-R05 700 V10P80-A01 600

500 FORCE (lb.)

V10P80-AS102 400 V10P81-R05 300

V10P80-AS102 200

V10P80-A01 100

This drawing shows size comparison of identical capacity 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2 bumpers from each product group. The graph at the right shows TRAVEL (in.) comparable performance characteristics. Continued on the next page 6-2 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Bumper Technical Information

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

EXAMPLES 1. Weight with no propelling force Formulas Example 2 2 E1 = (0.2)•(W)•(V ) W = 500 lb. E1 = (0.2)•(500)•(6 ) = 3600 lb. in. E4 = (E1)•(C) V = 6 fps E4 = (3600)•(500) = 1,800,000 lb. in./hour S WE = W C = 500/hour I O N 6 T S E C V W

2. Weight with propelling force Formulas Example 2 2 E1 = (0.2)•(W)•(V ) W = 800 lb. E1 = (0.2)•(800)•(5 ) = 4000 lb. in.

E2 = (F)•(S) V = 5 fps E2 = (300)•(3) = 900 lb. in. S E3 = E1 + E2 F = 300 lb. E3 = 4000 + 900 = 4900 lb. in. E4 = (E3)•(C) C = 250/hour E4 = (4900)•(250) = 1,225,000 lb. in./hour W W = E + E S = 3 in. W = 4000 + 900 V E 1 2 E = 980 lb. (0.2)•(V2) (0.2)•(52)

3. Motor driven weight Formulas Example 2 2 E1 = (0.2)•(W)•(V ) W = 1700 lb. E1 = (0.2)•(1700)•(4 ) = 5440 lb. in.

E2 = (1375)•(HP)•(S) V = 4 fps E2 = (1375)•(8)•(4) HP = 11,000 lb. in. S V 4 E = E + E HP = 8 E3 = 5440 + 11,000 = 16,440 lb. in. V W 3 1 2 E4 = (E3)•(C) C = 100/hour E4 = (16,440)•(100) = 1,644,000 lb. in./hour W = E + E S = 4 in. W = 5440 + 11,000 E 1 2 E = 5138 lb. (0.2)•(V2) (0.2)•(42)

4. Swinging weight with torque Formulas Example 2 2 E1 = (0.2)•(W)•(V ) W = 350 lb. E1 = (0.2)•(350)•(3 ) = 630 lb. in. V E = (T)•(S) V = 3 fps E = (1500)•(1) W 2 2 = 75 lb. in. S RS 20 V E = E + E T = 1500 lb. in. E = 630 + 75 = 705 lb. in. VS 3 1 2 3 E4 = (E3)•(C) RS = 20 in. E4 = (705)•(250) = 176,250 lb. in./hour V = (V)•(R ) K = 30 in. V = (3)•(20) S S S = 2 fps K 30 R W = E + E C = 250/hour W = 630 + 75 S E 1 2 E = 881 lb. K 2 (0.2)•(22) T (0.2)•(VS ) S = 1 in.

5. Free-falling weight W Formulas Example E1 = (900)•(20-4) = 14,400 lb. in. E1 = (W)•(H-S) W = 900 lb. E2 = (900)•(4) = 3600 lb. in.

E2 = (W)•(S) H = 20 in. E3 = (900)•(20) = 18,000 lb. in. H E3 = (W)•(H) C = 100/hour E4 = (18,000)•(100) = 1,800,000 lb. in. E = (E )•(C) S = 4 in. V = (5)•(20-4) = 8.9 fps S 4 3 V = 5•(H-S) W = (900)•(20) E = 1125 lb. WE = (W)•(H) 20-4 H-S

5.1 Weight without additional propelling force Formulas Example E1 = (W)•(M)•(sin A) W = 900 lb. E1 = (900)•(75)•(sin A) = 17,470 lb. in. E = (W)•(S)•(sin A) M = 75 in. E = (900)•(4)•(sin A) = 932 lb. in. M 2 2 W E3 = (M+S)•(W)•SIN (A) S = 4 in. E3 = 17,470 + 932 = 18,402 lb. in. S E4 = (E3)•(C) C = 100/hour E4 = (18,402)•100 = 1,840,200 lb. in. W = (W)•(M+S) A = 15° W = (900)•(75 + 4) E E = 948 lb. M 75 A°

5.2 (Calculate as in Ex. 5) Free-swinging weight W H S

Continued on the next page 6-3 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Bumper Technical Information

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

EXAMPLES 6. Turntable with propelling force (horizontal or vertical) Formulas Example 2 2 E1 = (0.1)•(W)•(VT) W = 2000 lb. E1 = (0.1)•(2000)•(3.5) = 2450 lb. in. VT E2 = (T)•(S) RT = 50 in. E2 = (15,000)•(2) = 938 lb. in.

S E C T I O N 6 T S E C RS 32 E = E + E R = 32 in. E = 2450 + 938 = 3388 lb. in. RT R 3 1 2 S 3 S W E = (E )•(C) V = 3.5 fps E = (3388)•(100) = 338,800 lb. in./hour T 4 3 T 4 VS = (RS)•(VT) T = 15,000 lb. in. VS = (32)•(3.5) VS = 2.24 fps RT 50 W = E + E C = 100/hour W = 2450 + 938 E 1 2 E = 3376 lb. 2 2 0.2 VS 0.2•2.24 S S = 2 in.

V 7. Turn over R Formulas Example V E = (W)•(V )2 W = 700 lb. E = (700)•(52) S 1 R 1 = 1167 lb. in. RR 15 15 E2 = (T)•(S) RR = 60 in. E2 = (25,000)•(1) = 833 lb. in. RS RS 30 E = E + E R = 30 in. E = 1167 + 833 = 2000 lb. in. S S 3 1 2 S 3 E = (E )•(C) V = 5 fps E = (2000)•(700) = 1,400,000 lb. in./hour T W 4 3 R 4 V = (R )•(V ) T = 25,000 lb. in. V = (30)•(5) S S R S = 2.5 fps RR 60 W = E + E C = 700/hour W = 1167 + 833 E 1 2 E = 1600 lb. 2 2 0.2•(VS ) (0.2)•(2.5 ) S = 1 in.

8. Swinging weight with propelling force Formulas Example E = (W)•(V )2 W = 90 lb. E = (90)•(6.5)2 1 R 1 = 254 lb. in. 15 15

E2 = (T)•(S) = (F)•(R)•(S) VR = 6.5 fps E2 = (150)•(24)•(1) = 120 lb. in.

RS RS 30 RR W R E3 = E1 + E2 F = 150 lb. E3 = 254 + 120 = 374 lb. in. F E = (E )•(C) R = 50 in. E = (374)•(1800) = 673,000 lb. in./hour R 4 3 R 4 S V = (R )•(V ) R = 24 in. V = (30)•(6.5) S S R S = 3.9 fps S RR 50 W = E + E R = 30 in. W = 254 + 120 VS E 1 2 S E = 123 lb. VR 2 2 0.2•(VS ) C = 1800/hour (0.2)•(3.9 ) S = 1 in.

9. Descending weight at controlled speed Formulas Example 2 2 E1 = (0.2)•(W)•(V ) W = 40,000 lb. E1 = (0.2)•(40,000)•(2.5 ) = 50,000 lb. in.

E2 = (W)•(S) V = 2.5 fps E2 = (40,000)•(5) = 200,000 lb. in.

W E3 = E1 + E2 C = 5 hour E3 = 50,000 + 200,000 = 250,000 lb. in. E4 = (E3)•(C) S = 5 in. E4 = (250,000)•(5) = 1,250,000 lb. in./hour W = E + E W = 50,000 + 200,000 S E 1 2 E = 200,000 lb. (0.2)•(V2) (0.2)•(2.52)

Reaction force (pounds) q Stopping time (seconds) For all examples Deceleration (feet per second2) For all examples (1.5)(E ) S (6)•(V )2 For all examples q = 3 t = a = S S (6)•(VS) S

NOTE: VS = Velocity at impact with shock absorber

6-4 Buy Product See Section 6 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I

V O

D N A Bumpers – Axial Type – High-Load C O M TS P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

• MATERIAL: High-Performance Elastomer-Polyester • OUTDOOR ENVIRONMENTS • HIGH-PERFORMANCE • HIGHLY INERT TO MOST CHEMICALS AND LUBRICANTS

C New

A F H

D B G

OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE: -40°F to +120°F (-40°C to +48.9°C) Energy Max. A B C Catalog Number Capacity Force Free Free Wrench Height Bulge Hole lb. in. (kgf. m.) lb. (kgf) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) 100 700 .76 .85 .41 V10P80-A01 (1.15) (318) (19.3) (21.6) (10.4) 250 1200 1.01 1.11 .56 V10P80-A02 (2.88) (544) (25.7) (28.2) (14.2) 400 2000 1.18 1.35 .66 V10P80-A03 (4.61) (907) (30) (34.3) (16.8) 700 2500 1.37 1.55 .80 V10P80-A05 (8.06) (1134) (34.8) (39.4) (20.3) 1100 3300 1.62 1.83 .93 V10P80-A07 (12.67) (1497) (41.1) (46.5) (23.6) 1400 3800 1.77 1.96 1.02 V10P80-A08 (16.13) (1724) (45) (49.8) (25.9) 2000 5000 2.02 2.25 1.16 V10P80-A10 (23.04) (2268) (51.3) (57.2) (29.5) 2500 5300 2.11 2.43 1.23 V10P80-A11 (28.8) (2404) (53.6) (61.7) (31.2) 3000 6100 2.26 2.54 1.30 V10P80-A12 (34.56) (2767) (57.4) (64.5) (33) 4000 7500 2.54 2.81 1.41 V10P80-A14 (46.08) (3402) (64.5) (71.4) (35.8)

D E F G H Weight Catalog Number Base Mounting Loaded Loaded Base Diameter Hole Height Bulge Thickness oz. (g) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) .75 .40 1.07 .13 .16 V10P80-A01 (19.1) (10.2) (27.2) (3.3) (4.5) .98 .31 .53 1.43 .16 .37 V10P80-A02 (24.9) (7.9) (13.5) (36.3) (4.1) (10.5) 1.16 .63 1.70 .19 .62 V10P80-A03 (29.5) (16) (43.2) (4.8) (17.6) 1.35 .42 .73 2.00 .22 1.00 V10P80-A05 (34.3) (10.7) (18.5) (50.8) (5.6) (28.3) 1.61 .86 2.33 .26 1.70 V10P80-A07 (40.9) (21.8) (59.2) (6.6) (48.2) 1.71 .92 2.51 .28 2.00 V10P80-A08 (43.4) (23.4) (63.8) (7.1) (56.7) 1.97 .55 1.06 2.86 .32 3.10 V10P80-A10 (50) (14) (26.9) (72.6) (8.1) (87.9) 2.08 1.12 3.05 .34 3.70 V10P80-A11 (52.8) (28.4) (77.5) (8.6) (104.9) 2.23 1.19 3.22 .36 4.60 V10P80-A12 (56.6) (30.2) (81.8) (9.1) (130.4) 2.46 .81 1.32 3.58 .40 6.10 V10P80-A14 (62.5) (20.6) (33.5) (90.9) (10.2) (172.9) See page 6-2 for technical information. 6-5 Rev: 8-24-10 SS Buy Product See Section 6 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Bumpers – Radial Type

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: High-Performance Elastomer-Polyester • OUTDOOR ENVIRONMENTS • HIGH-PERFORMANCE • HIGHLY INERT TO MOST CHEMICALS AND LUBRICANTS New C D I O N 6 T S E C

A H F

TEMPERATURE RANGE: -40°F to +120°F (-40°C to +48.9°C) Energy Max. A B C Catalog Number Free Free Wrench Capacity Force Height Bulge Hole lb. in. (kgf. m.) lb. (kgf) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) 10 75 .97 1.12 V10P81-R01 (0.12) (34) (24.6) (28.4) 20 100 1.25 1.44 V10P81-R02 (0.23) (45) (31.8) (36.6) 30 150 1.47 1.67 V10P81-R03 (0.35) (68) (37.3) (42.4) .38 50 200 1.72 1.95 (9.5) V10P81-R04 (0.58) (91) (43.7) (49.5) 100 300 2.17 2.48 V10P81-R05 (1.15) (136) (55.1) (63) 200 475 2.31 2.61 V10P81-R06 (2.30) (215) (58.7) (66.3) 300 600 2.65 3.00 .44 V10P81-R07 (3.46) (272) (67.3) (76.2) (11.1)

E F G H D Weight Catalog Number Width Mounting Loaded Loaded Base in. (mm) Hole Height Bulge Thickness oz. (g) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) .52 .32 1.51 .15 .24 V10P81-R01 (13.2) (8.1) (38.4) (3.8) (6.8) .76 .41 1.96 .20 .48 V10P81-R02 (19.3) (10.4) (49.8) (5.1) (13.6) .79 .48 2.27 .23 .60 V10P81-R03 (20.1) .22 (12.2) (57.7) (5.8) (17) 1.36 (5.6) .37 2.68 .16 .90 V10P81-R04 (34.5) (9.4) (68.1) (4.1) (25.5) 1.70 .47 3.43 .26 1.80 V10P81-R05 (43.2) (11.9) (87.1) (6.6) (51) 1.82 .74 3.47 .35 2.80 V10P81-R06 (46.2) (18.8) (88.1) (8.9) (79.4) 1.80 .28 .85 4.03 .40 3.60 V10P81-R07 (45.7) (7.1) (21.6) (102.4) (10.2) (102.1) See page 6-2 for technical information.

6-6 Buy Product See Section 6 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I

V O

D N A Bumpers – Axial Type – Low-Load

C O M TS P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: High-Performance Elastomer-Polyester • OUTDOOR ENVIRONMENTS • HIGH-PERFORMANCE • HIGHLY INERT TO MOST CHEMICALS AND LUBRICANTS C New

A F H

D B G

OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE: -40°F to +120°F (-40°C to +48.9°C) Energy Max. A B C Catalog Number Capacity Force Free Free Wrench Height Bulge Hole lb. in. (kgf. m.) lb. (kgf) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) 50 300 .81 .79 .48 V10P80-AS101 (0.58) (136) (20.6) (20.1) (12.2) 100 400 1.09 1.02 .63 V10P80-AS102 (1.15) (181) (27.7) (25.9) (16) 200 600 1.27 1.24 .77 V10P80-AS103 (2.3) (272) (32.3) (31.5) (19.6) 300 900 1.48 1.46 .82 V10P80-AS105 (3.46) (408) (37.6) (37.1) (20.8) 550 1300 1.75 1.68 .98 V10P80-AS107 (6.34) (590) (44.5) (42.7) (24.9) 700 1600 1.91 1.88 1.09 V10P80-AS108 (8.06) (726) (48.5) (47.8) (27.7) 800 1900 2.03 1.99 1.12 V10P80-AS109 (9.22) (862) (51.6) (50.5) (28.4) 1200 2200 2.33 2.28 1.30 V10P80-AS111 (13.82) (998) (59.2) (57.9) (33)

D E F G H Weight Catalog Number Base Mounting Loaded Loaded Base Diameter Hole Height Bulge Thickness oz. (g) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) .73 .40 1.08 .12 .14 V10P80-AS101 (18.5) (10.2) (27.4) (3) (4) .98 .53 1.45 .16 .32 V10P80-AS102 (24.9) .31 (13.5) (36.8) (4.1) (9.1) 1.18 (7.9) .63 1.72 .19 .56 V10P80-AS103 (30) (16) (43.7) (4.8) (15.9) 1.35 .73 1.99 .22 1.00 V10P80-AS105 (34.3) (18.5) (50.5) (5.6) (28.3) 1.58 .86 2.35 .26 1.50 V10P80-AS107 (40.1) (21.8) (59.7) (6.6) (42.5) 1.73 .92 2.53 .28 2.10 V10P80-AS108 (43.9) .56 (23.4) (64.3) (7.1) (59.5) 1.85 (14.2) .99 2.71 .30 2.50 V10P80-AS109 (47) (25.1) (68.8) (7.6) (70.9) 2.09 1.12 3.07 .35 3.50 V10P80-AS111 (53.1) (28.4) (78) (8.9) (99.2) See page 6-2 for technical information.

6-7 Rev: 8-24-10 SS Buy Product See Section 6 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Bumpers – Conical

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR LOADS OF 44 TO 62 POUNDS (20 to 28.1 kgf) Isolator – Natural Rubber

5/16 - 24 UNF THREAD I O N 6 T S E C

1-1/2 DIA. 1 DIA. (38.1) (25.4)

3/4 1-1/4 (19.1) (31.8)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

Recommended Maximum Load Catalog Number Static Occasional Dynamic lb. (kgf) lb. (kgf) 44 80 V10Z 7-1020A (20) (36.3) 49 100 V10Z 7-1020B (22.2) (45.4) 56 122 V10Z 7-1020C (25.4) (55.3) 62 145 V10Z 7-1020D (28.1) (65.8)

6-8 Buy Product See Section 6 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Bumpers – Conical

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Fasteners – Steel, Zinc Plated • FOR LOADS OF 20 TO 28 kgf (44 TO 62 lb.) Isolator – Natural Rubber

New I O N 6 T S E C M8

38 Ø25 (1.50) (.98)

13.5 32 (.53) (1.26)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch. Metric

Recommended Maximum Load Catalog Number Static Occasional Dynamic kgf (lb.) kgf (lb.)

V10Z 7M1020AM 20 (44) 36.3 (80)

V10Z 7M1020BM 22.2 (49) 45.4 (100)

V10Z 7M1020CM 25.4 (56) 55.3 (122)

V10Z 7M1020DM 28.1 (62) 65.8 (145)

Did You Know? ...That substantial quantity discounts are available for all products?

6-9 Buy Product See Section 6 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Channel Mounts – To 52 lbs./in.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR LOADS UP TO 52 lb. / in. (0.93 kgf / mm) OF LENGTH Channels – Steel • SUPPLIED IN 30 INCH (762 mm) LENGTHS

2-3/32 (53.2)

A I O N 6 T S E C

7/64 B (2.8)

3/4 (19.1) 1-3/16 1-7/8 (30.2) (47.6) 4-1/4 (108) INSTALLATION INFORMATION

HOLES DRILLED AT ASSEMBLY BY CUSTOMER, AS REQUIRED LOAD DEFLECTION GRAPH MFG. HOLE Deflections below the line x-x are considered safe practice for static loads; data above that line are useful for calculating deflections under dynamic loads. 70

LOAD

SUPPORT x 50 x

30 110C (762) 40 (PER INCH Style 110 for Suspended Loads LENGTH) 30 LOAD (lb.)

0 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 DEFLECTION (in.)

Spacers and Mounting Hardware NOT Provided NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

Load Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Dimensions Limit Catalog Number 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 in. (mm) lb./in. (kgf/mm) Min. Load for 81% Isolation lb./in. (kgf/mm) A B 52 52 35 26.5 20 16 3/8 1-39/64 V10Z 5-110C (0.93) (0.93) (0.63) (0.47) (0.36) (0.29) (9.5) (40.9) NOTE: 81% vibration absorption (usually satisfactory) will be obtained when the mount indicated is operating at the minimum load shown for each forced frequency. Better than 81% absorption will be obtained either with a greater load (within the limits shown) for a given forced frequency, or with a higher forced frequency for a given load.

6-10 Buy Product See Section 6 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Bumpers – Rectangular

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR LOADS TO 4700 POUNDS (2132 kgf) Base – Steel 2 X (50.8) 9 2 1-1/2 (228.6) (38.1) (50.8) I O N 6 T S E C

Y Y 4 11/16 DIA. (101.6) 1-3/4 (17.5) DIA. X (44.5) SECTION X-X 13 (330.2) 1/4 (6.4)

SECTION Y-Y NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

Recommended Maximum Loads lb. (kgf) Catalog Number* Static Occasional Dynamic

V10Z 7-1001 4700 (2132) 11000 (4990)

*To be discontinued when present stock is depleted.

• MATERIAL: Isolator – Natural Rubber • FOR LOADS TO 1200 POUNDS (544 kgf) Base – Steel 1-1/4 (31.8)

X X 2-1/2 (63.5)

6-3/4 (171.5) 4-3/4 1-1/16 1 (27) (120.7) (25.4) 7/16 DIA. 3/16 (11.1) (4.8) 1-1/4 (31.8)

5-7/8 7/16 (149.2) (11.1) SECTION X-X

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

Recommended Maximum Loads lb. (kgf) Catalog Number* Static Occasional Dynamic

V10Z 7-1011 1200 (544) 2150 (975)

*To be discontinued when present stock is depleted.

6-11 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Shock Absorber Features

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

2 New I O N 6 T S E C

9 8 7 6 Metric 5

• DOUBLE ENERGY ABSORPTION FEATURES: • SMOOTH DAMPING 1 Metering piston with helical groove • RESERVE OIL 2 Storage chamber / oil reserve storage 3 Guide

These features are obtained by: 4 Housing • Energy absorption: Up to three times as much as conventional shock 5 Spring I absorbers. This is achieved by the size of the piston and the large volume of oil. 6 Check Valve 7 Seal • Service life: Substantially longer and more reliable as a result of reserve oil storage. 8 Spring II

• Damping action: Constant over the entire stroke due to the spiral 9 Seal groove design. 10 Piston Rod • Cycle time: Minimal due to the large nominal size of the check valve.

• Adjustability: Fast and simple due to the adjustment by means of rotation of the threaded housing.

• Quality: Made to meet the highest requirements: steel, hardened and ground, nickel-plated. Made in Germany.

6-12 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Stroke Control

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

Threaded body of I O N 6 T S E C the machine STROKE 1

Threaded body of the machine

Threaded body of the machine STROKE 2

Threaded body of the machine

STOP The damping amount can easily be adjusted within a very narrow range due to the new and unique design of our shock absorbers.

Adjustment of damping is possible even to the last mm of the stroke. The shock absorber just has to be retracted slightly. By reducing the stroke, you can decrease the braking action.

• Stroke control

Attention! The shock absorber may not be used as a fixed stop.

6-13 Buy Product See Section 6 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Shock Absorbers

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Housing – Steel, Hardened and Ground, Nickel Plated • DOUBLE ENERGY ABSORPTION • SMOOTH DAMPING • RESERVE OIL • HELICAL GROOVE TECHNOLOGY

62 I O N 6 T S E C (2.44) New 5 Δ Δ SW7 (.20) 2 x SW13 (.51) (.28) (SUPPLIED) Stroke: 8 mm (.3 in.) Piston Reset Time: .2 sec. Min. Resetting Force: 6 N (1.35 lbf) M10 x 1 Ø8.8 (.35) Max. Resetting Force: 12 N (2.70 lbf) Ø3 (.12) Weight: 0.02 kg (.71 oz.) 2.3 (.09) 8 (.31) 51 11 STROKE (2.00) (.43)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch. Δ SW indicates dimension across flats.

Metric Max. Energy Max. Energy Min. Impact Max. Impact Effective Mass* Catalog Number Absorption Absorption per Stroke per Hour Speed Speed Max. Min. m/s (ft./s) m/s (ft./s) J (lbf • in.) J (lbf • in./h) kg (lb.) kg (lb.) 0.2 1.4 50 10 V20S10M100H (.66) (4.59) (110.2) (22) 10 16000 1.2 2.2 14 4 V20S10M100M (88.5) (141600) (3.94) (7.22) (30.9) (8.8) 2 4 1 V20S10M100S 5 (6.56) (13.12) (10) (2.2) *As comparative figure to conventional shock absorbers. All data measured at 20% safety.

Accessories Head Shaft Support / Dirt Seal Stop Sleeves Cooler Nut Steel Steel Vanadium Steel Alloy Aluminum V21S01MMKS10 V21S02M16045 V21S04MSS10100 V21S03MCN10100 Steel with Plastic Insert** V21S01MMKK10 A Δ M16 X 1.5 SW 13 (.51)

M10 16 (.63) 1 X M5 Δ 0.5 (.020) 0.5 (.020) Ø3 (.12) X 1 Ø6 A SW13 x 45° x 45° (.24) (.51) M10 X 1 Ø8 (.31) Ø15 Ø17 M10 X 1 (.59) (.67) 34 11 Δ (1.34) (.43) **Fig. 2.5 8 Ø12 23 7 SW13 45 (.51) (.10) (.31) 16 (.47) (.90) (.28) with 5 (1.77) 30 (.63) (1.18) insert (.20) SECTION A-A Δ SW indicates dimension across flats. 6-14 Buy Product See Section 6 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Shock Absorbers

69.5 I O N 6 T S E C (2.74) New Δ 6 SW8 (.24) Δ (.31) 2 x SW14 (.55) (SUPPLIED) Stroke: 10 mm (.4 in.) Piston Reset Time: .3 sec. Min. Resetting Force: 8 N (1.80 lbf) M12 x 1 Ø10 (.39) Ø3 Max. Resetting Force: 15 N (3.37 lbf) (.12) Weight: 0.04 kg (1.41 oz.) 2.3 (.09) 10 (.39) 56 13.5 STROKE (2.20) (.53)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch. Δ SW indicates dimension across flats.

Metric Max. Energy Max. Energy Min. Impact Max. Impact Effective Mass* Catalog Number Absorption Absorption per Stroke per Hour Speed Speed Max. Min. m/s (ft./s) m/s (ft./s) J (lbf • in.) J (lbf • in./h) kg (lb.) kg (lb.) 0.2 1.4 800 16 V20S12M100H (.66) (4.59) (1764) (35.3) 16 30000 1.2 2.2 22 7 V20S12M100M (141.6) (265500) (3.94) (7.22) (48.5) (15.4) 2 5 1 V20S12M100S 8 (6.56) (11.00) (17.6) (2.2) *As comparative figure to conventional shock absorbers. All data measured at 20% safety.

Accessories Head Shaft Support / Dirt Seal Stop Sleeves Cooler Nut Steel Steel Vanadium Steel Alloy Aluminum V21S01MMKS12 V21S02M18054 V21S04MSS12100 V21S03MCN12100 Steel with Plastic Insert** V21S01MMKK12 A Δ M18 X 1.5 SW 15 (.59)

20 M12 1 X M5 0.5 (.020) 0.5 (.020) Ø3 (.12) (.79) Δ X 1 Ø6 A SW14 x 45° x 45° (.24) (.55) M12 X 1 Ø10 (.39) Ø20 M12 X 1 Ø16 (.79) 40 13.5 (.63) Δ (1.57) (.53) 33 SW17 **Fig. 3.5 53.5 8 Ø14 7 (.14) (.31) (.55) (1.30) (.28) (.67) with 6 (2.11) 20 40 insert (.24) SECTION A-A (.79) (1.57) Δ SW indicates dimension across flats. 6-15 Buy Product See Section 6 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Shock Absorbers

83 I O N 6 T S E C (3.27) New Δ 8 SW10 (.31) Δ (.39) 2 x SW17 (.67) (SUPPLIED) Stroke: 12 mm (.47 in.) Piston Reset Time: .3 sec. F Ø12 Min. Resetting Force: 10 N (2.25 lbf) (.47) Ø4 Max. Resetting Force: 20 N (4.50 lbf) (.16) Weight: 0.06 kg (2.17 oz.) 3.5 (.14) 12 (.47) 66 17 STROKE (2.60) (.67)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch. Δ SW indicates dimension across flats.

Metric Max. Energy Max. Energy ◊ F Min. Impact Max. Impact Effective Mass Catalog Number Thread Absorption Absorption per Stroke per Hour Speed Speed Max. Min. Size m/s (ft./s) m/s (ft./s) J (lbf • in.) J (lbf • in./h) kg (lb.) kg (lb.) 0.2 1.4 1550 32 V20S14M100H (.66) (4.59) (3417) (70.5) 1.2 2.2 43 13 V20S14M100M M14 X 1 (3.94) (7.22) (94.8) (28.7) 2 5 16 2 V20S14M100S 31 50000 (6.56) (11.00) (35.3) (4.4) (274.4) (442500) 0.2 1.4 1550 32 V20S14M150H (.66) (4.59) (3417) (70.5) 1.2 2.2 43 13 V20S14M150M M14 X 1.5 (3.94) (7.22) (94.8) (28.7) 2 5 16 2 V20S14M150S (6.56) (11.00) (35.3) (4.4) ◊ As comparative figure to conventional shock absorbers. All data measured at 20% safety. Accessories Head Shaft Support / Dirt Seal Stop Sleeves Cooler Nut Steel Steel Vanadium Steel Alloy Aluminum V21S01MMKS14 V21S02M20063 V21S04MSS14100** V21S03MCN14100§ V21S04MSS14150 V21S03MCN14150 Steel with Plastic Insert* V21S01MMKK14 A Δ M20 X 1.5 SW 17 (.67)

23 M14 1 X M5 (.91) 0.5 (.020) 0.5 (.020) § Ø4 (.16) X 1.5 Ø8 A Δ SW16 M14 X 1** x 45° x 45° M14 X 1 (.32) (.63) M14 X 1.5 M14 X 1.5 Ø11 (.43) Ø18 Ø23 46 17 (.71) (.91) (1.81) (.67) Δ *Fig. 3 63 8 Ø16 42 8 SW19 (.12) (2.48) (.31) (.63) (1.65) (.31) (.75) with 7 25 50 insert (.28) SECTION A-A (.98) (1.97) Δ SW indicates dimension across flats. 6-16 Buy Product See Section 6 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Shock Absorbers

95 I O N 6 T S E C (3.74) New Δ 10 SW14 (.39) Δ (.55) 2 x SW24 (.94) (SUPPLIED) Stroke: 15 mm (.59 in.) Piston Reset Time: .5 sec. M20 x 1.5 Ø18 (.71) Min. Resetting Force: 15 N (3.37 lbf) Ø6 Max. Resetting Force: 25 N (5.62 lbf) (.24) 4 Weight: 0.13 kg (4.59 oz.) (.16) 15 (.59) 76 19 STROKE (2.99) (.75)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch. Δ SW indicates dimension across flats.

Metric Max. Energy Max. Energy Min. Impact Max. Impact Effective Mass* Catalog Number Stop Absorption Absorption per Stroke per Hour Speed Speed Max. Min. m/s (ft./s) m/s (ft./s) J (lbf • in.) J (lbf • in./h) kg (lb.) kg (lb.) 0.2 1.2 3500 97 V20S20M150H (.66) (3.94) (7716) (213.8) Power 70 63000 1 2 140 35 V20S20M150M (3.28) (308.6) (77.2) Stop (619.5) (557550) (6.56) 1.8 4.5 43 7 V20S20M150S (5.91) (14.76) (94.8) (15.4) 0.2 1.2 7500 208 V20S20M150HN (.66) (3.94) (16534) (458.6) 1 2 300 75 V20S20M150MN Emergency 150 — Stop (1327.5) (3.28) (6.56) (661) (165.3) 1.8 4.5 93 15 V20S20M150SN (5.91) (14.76) (205) (33) *As comparative figure to conventional shock absorbers. All data measured at 20% safety. Accessories Head Shaft Support / Dirt Seal Stop Sleeves Cooler Nut Steel Steel Vanadium Steel Alloy Aluminum V21S01MMKS20 V21S02M25077 V21S04MSS20150 V21S03MCN20150 Steel with Plastic Insert** A Δ V21S01MMKK20 M25 X 1.5 SW 22 (.87)

20 (.79) A Ø6 (.24) 1 X M5 Δ 0.5 (.020) 0.5 (.020) Ø10 SW22 x 45° x 45° M20 X 1.5 (.39) (.87) M20 X 1.5 Ø17 (.67) Ø25 Ø30 (1.18) M20 58 19 (.98) ** X 1.5 (2.28) (.75) Δ Fig. 3.5 77 10 Ø23 51 9 SW24 (.14) (.39) (.91) (2.00) (.35) (.94) with 8 (3.03) 25 60 insert (.31) SECTION A-A (.98) (2.36) Δ SW indicates dimension across flats. 6-17 Buy Product See Section 6 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Shock Absorbers

136 I O N 6 T S E C (5.35) Stroke: 25 mm (.98 in.) New Δ 12 Δ Piston Reset Time: .6 sec. SW19 (.47) 2 x SW30 (1.18) (.75) (SUPPLIED) Min. Resetting Force: 20 N (4.50 lbf) Max. Resetting Force: 40 N (9.00 lbf) Weight: 0.27 kg (9.52 oz.) M25 x 1.5 Ø23 (.91) Ø8 (.31) 4 (.16) 25 (.98) 105 31 STROKE (4.13) (1.22)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch. Δ SW indicates dimension across flats.

Metric Max. Energy Max. Energy Min. Impact Max. Impact Effective Mass* Catalog Number Stop Absorption Absorption per Stroke per Hour Speed Speed Max. Min. m/s (ft./s) m/s (ft./s) J (lbf • in.) J (lbf • in./h) kg (lb.) kg (lb.) 0.2 0.8 10500 656 V20S25M150H (.66) (2.62) (23148) (1446) Power 210 95000 0.6 1.8 1167 130 V20S25M150M Stop (1858.5) (840750) (1.97) (5.91) (2573) (286.6) 1.4 4 214 26 V20S25M150S (4.59) (13.1) (471.8) (57.3) 0.2 0.8 27500 1719 V20S25M150HN (.66) (2.62) (60627) (3790) Emergency 550 0.6 1.8 3056 340 V20S25M150MN — Stop (4867.5) (1.97) (5.91) (6737) (749.6) 1.4 4 561 69 V20S25M150SN (4.59) (13.1) (1237) (152) *As comparative figure to conventional shock absorbers. All data measured at 20% safety. Accessories Head Shaft Support / Dirt Seal Stop Sleeves Cooler Nut Steel Steel Vanadium Steel Alloy Aluminum V21S01MMKS25 V21S02M33103 V21S04MSS25150 V21S03MCN25150 Steel with Plastic Insert** A Δ V21S01MMKK25 M33 X 1.5 SW 30 (1.18)

22 (.87) A Δ Ø8 (.31) 1 X M5 SW27 0.5 (.020) 0.5 (.020) Ø12 x 45° x 45° M25 X 1.5 (.47) (1.06) M25 X 1.5 Ø22 (.87) Ø32 Ø36 (1.26) (1.42) M25 72 31 Δ ** X 1.5 (2.83) (1.22) 10 SW27 Fig. 5 130 (.39) Ø27 69.5 10.5 with (.20) (4.05) 35 (1.06) (2.74) (.41) (1.06) 10.5 (1.38) 80 insert (.41) SECTION A-A (3.15) Δ SW indicates dimension across flats. 6-18 Buy Product See Section 6 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Shock Absorbers

165 I O N 6 T S E C Δ (6.50) Stroke: 30 mm (1.18 in.) SW24 2 x NUT Ø41 (1.61) New (.94) (SUPPLIED) Piston Reset Time: .6 sec. Min. Resetting Force: 35 N (7.87 lbf) Max. Resetting Force: 75 N (16.86 lbf) M33 x 1.5 Weight: 0.48 kg (16.93 oz.) Ø10 Ø28 (.39) (1.10) 5 10 30 (1.18) (.39) (.20) STROKE 125 41 (4.92) (1.61)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch. Δ SW indicates dimension across flats.

Metric Max. Energy Max. Energy Min. Impact Max. Impact Effective Mass* Catalog Number Stop Absorption Absorption per Stroke per Hour Speed Speed Max. Min. m/s (ft./s) m/s (ft./s) J (lbf • in.) J (lbf • in./h) kg (lb.) kg (lb.) 0.2 0.8 16000 1000 V20S33M150H (.66) (2.62) (35273) (2204.6) Power 320 120000 0.6 2 1778 160 V20S33M150M Stop (2832) (1062000) (1.97) (6.56) (3920) (352.7) 1.4 3.5 327 52 V20S33M150S (4.59) (11.48) (720.9) (114.64) 0.2 0.8 45000 2813 V20S33M150HN (.66) (2.62) (99207) (6202) Emergency 900 0.6 2 5000 450 V20S33M150MN — Stop (7965) (1.97) (6.56) (11023) (992) 1.4 3.5 918 147 V20S33M150SN (4.59) (11.48) (2024) (324.1) *As comparative figure to conventional shock absorbers. All data measured at 20% safety. Accessories Head Shaft Support / Dirt Seal Stop Sleeves Cooler Nut Steel Steel Vanadium Steel Alloy Aluminum V21S01MMKS33 V21S02M45130 V21S04MSS33150 V21S03MCN33150 Steel with Plastic Insert** A Δ V21S01MMKK33 M45 X 1.5 SW 41 (1.61)

28 (1.10) A 1 X M5 Ø10 (.39) Ø14 Δ 0.5 (.020) 0.5 (.020) (.55) SW36 x 45° x 45° M33 X 1.5 (1.42) M33 X 1.5 Ø28 (1.10) Ø44 Ø38 (1.73) M33 90 40 (1.50) X 1.5 (3.54) (1.57) Δ **Fig. 5 130 15 Ø36 91.5 12 SW36 (.20) (5.12) (.59) (1.42) (3.60) (.47) (1.42) with 11.5 40 103.5 insert (.45) SECTION A-A (1.57) (4.07) Δ SW indicates dimension across flats. 6-19 Buy Product See Section 6 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Shock Absorbers

170 New I O N 6 T S E C Δ (6.69) SW36 2 x NUT Ø60 (2.36) (1.42) (SUPPLIED) Stroke: 25 mm (.98 in.) Piston Reset Time: .6 sec. M45 x 1.5 Min. Resetting Force: 40 N (8.99 lbf) Ø12 Max. Resetting Force: 80 N (17.98 lbf) (.47) Ø43 Weight: 1.25 kg (44.1 oz.) (1.69) 6 10 25 (.98) (.39) (.24) STROKE 140 30 (5.51) (1.18)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch. Δ SW indicates dimension across flats.

Metric Max. Energy Max. Energy Min. Impact Max. Impact Effective Mass* Catalog Number Stop Absorption Absorption per Stroke per Hour Speed Speed Max. Min. m/s (ft./s) m/s (ft./s) J (lbf • in.) J (lbf • in./h) kg (lb.) kg (lb.) 0.2 0.7 32500 2653 V20S45M150H (.66) (2.30) (71650) (5849) Power 650 150000 0.6 1.6 3611 508 V20S45M150M Stop (5753) (1327500) (1.97) (5.25) (7961) (1120) 1.4 3.5 663 106 V20S45M150S (4.59) (11.48) (1462) (233.7) 0.2 0.7 75000 6122 V20S45M150HN (.66) (2.30) (165345) (13497) Emergency 1500 0.6 1.6 8333 1172 V20S45M150MN — Stop (13275) (1.97) (5.25) (18371) (2584) 1.4 3.5 1531 245 V20S45M150SN (4.59) (11.48) (3375) (540.1) *As comparative figure to conventional shock absorbers. All data measured at 20% safety. Accessories Head Stop Sleeves Cooler Nut Steel Vanadium Steel Alloy Aluminum V21S01MMKS45 V21S04MSS45150 V21S03MCN45150 V21S03MCN45150L◊ (Longer Length) Steel with Plastic Insert** V21S01MMKK45

0.5 (.020) 0.5 (.020) Δ Ø12 (.47) SW55 x 45° x 45° M45 X 1.5 (2.17) M45 X 1.5 Ø38 Ø60 (1.50) Ø58 (2.36) (2.28) Δ Ø52 18 SW55 ** 15 92 or 132 Fig. 5 (2.05) (3.62) (5.20) (.71) (2.17) (.20) (.59) 50 with 15 110 or 150 insert (.59) (1.97) (4.33) (5.91) Δ SW indicates dimension across flats. 6-20 Buy Product See Section 6 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Shock Absorbers

250 I O N 6 T S E C Δ (9.84) SW36 2 x NUT Ø60 (2.36) New (1.42) (SUPPLIED) Stroke: 50 mm (1.97 in.) Piston Reset Time: 1 sec. M45 x 1.5 Min. Resetting Force: 60 N (13.49 lbf) Ø12 (.47) Max. Resetting Force: 90 N (20.23 lbf) Ø43 (1.69) Weight: 2 kg (70.5 oz.) 6 10 50 (1.97) (.24) (.39) STROKE 195 55 (7.68) (2.17)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch. Δ SW indicates dimension across flats.

Metric Max. Energy Max. Energy Min. Impact Max. Impact Effective Mass* Catalog Number Stop Absorption Absorption per Stroke per Hour Speed Speed Max. Min. m/s (ft./s) m/s (ft./s) J (lbf • in.) J (lbf • in./h) kg (lb.) kg (lb.) 0.2 0.7 65000 5306 V20S45M150LH (.66) (2.30) (143299) (11698) Power 1300 190000 0.6 1.6 7222 1016 V20S45M150LM Stop (11505) (1681500) (1.97) (5.25) (15922) (2240) 1.4 3.5 1327 212 V20S45M150LS (4.59) (11.48) (2926) (467.4) 0.2 0.7 150000 12245 V20S45M150LHN (.66) (2.30) (330690) (26995) Emergency 3000 0.6 1.6 16667 2344 V20S45M150LMN — Stop (26550) (1.97) (5.25) (36744) (5168) 1.4 3.5 3061 490 V20S45M150LSN (4.59) (11.48) (6748) (1080) *As comparative figure to conventional shock absorbers. All data measured at 20% safety. Accessories Head Stop Sleeves Cooler Nut Steel Vanadium Steel Alloy Aluminum V21S01MMKS45 V21S04MSS45150 V21S03MCN45150 V21S03MCN45150L◊ (Longer Length) Steel with Plastic Insert** V21S01MMKK45

0.5 (.020) 0.5 (.020) Δ Ø12 (.47) SW55 x 45° x 45° M45 X 1.5 (2.17) M45 X 1.5 Ø38 Ø60 (1.50) Ø58 (2.36) (2.28) Δ Ø52 18 SW55 ** 15 92 or 132 Fig. 5 (2.05) (3.62) (5.20) (.71) (2.17) with (.20) (.59) 50 15 110 or 150 insert (.59) (1.97) (4.33) (5.91) Δ SW indicates dimension across flats. 6-21 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Shock Absorbers Technical Information

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

SHOCK ABSORBERS - FORMULAS AND CALCULATION EXAMPLES W1 Kinetic energy per stroke; mass load only in Nm HM Holding moment factor (normal 2.5) 1 to 2.5 Metric W2 Energy/work of propelling force per stroke in Nm M Torque in Nm 2 W3 Total energy per stroke (W1 + W2) in Nm J Mass inertia moment in kgm 2 W4 Total energy per hour (W3 x n) in Nm/h g Gravity constant = 9.81 in m/s

S E C T I O N 6 T S E C me Effective mass in kg h Falling height without shock absorber stroke in m m Mass to be braked in kg s Stroke of shock absorber in m v Final velocity of mass in m/s L/R/r Radius in m vD Shock absorber impact velocity in m/s Q Countervailing force/supporting force in N w Angular velocity in 1/s μ Friction coefficient F Additional propelling force in N t Braking time in s n Number of strokes per hour in 1/h ß Angle in ° P Motor drive in kW

Free Falling Mass m Formula: Example: W1 = m x g x h m = 10 kg W1 = 10 x 0.3 x 9.81 = 29.43 Nm

W2 = m x g x s h = 0.3 m W2 = 10 x 9.81 x 0.02 = 1.962 Nm W = W + W n = 120 1/h W = 29.43 + 1.962 = 31.392 Nm h 3 1 2 3 W4 = W3 x n s = 0.02 m W4 = 31.392 x 120 = 3767.04 Nm/h

vD = 2 x g x h vD = 2 x 9.81 x 0.3 = 2.426 m/s 2 s me = 2 x W3 / vD me = 2 x 31.392 / 2.426 = 25.88 kg

Free Falling Mass without Propelling Force Formula: Example: 2 2 W1 = m x v x 0.5 m = 13000 kg W1 = 13000 x 2 x 0.5 = 26000 Nm m W2 = m x g x s v = 2 m/s W2 = 13000 x 9.81 x 0.22 = 28056.6 Nm W = W + W s = 0.22 m W = 26000 + 28056.6 = 54056.6 Nm s 3 1 2 3 W4 = W3 x n n = 30 1/h W4 = 54056.6 x 30 = 1621698 Nm/h 2 vD = v me = 2 x 54056.6 / 2 = 27028.3 kg 2 me = 2 x W3 / vD

Mass on a Conveyor Belt m Formula: Example: 2 2 W1 = m x v x 0.5 m = 190 kg W1 = 190 x 1.8 x 0.5 = 307.8 Nm μ W2 = m x x g x s v = 1.8 m/s W2 = 190 x 0.2 x 9.81 x 0.04 = 14.91 Nm s W3 = W1 + W2 n = 170 1/h W3 = 307.8 + 14.91 = 322.71 Nm μ W4 = W3 x n = 0.2 (Stahl/Guß) W4 = 322.71 x 170 = 54860 Nm 2 vD = v s = 0.04 m me = 2 x 322.71 / 1.8 = 199.2 kg 2 me = 2 x W3 / vD

Mass with Motor Drive Formula: Example: W = m x v2 x 0.5 m = 980 kg W = 980 x 1.72 x 0.5 = 1416.1 Nm s 1 1 W2 = 1000 x P x HM x s / v v = 1.7 m/s W2 = 1000 x 6 x 2.7 x 0.11 / 1.7 = 1048.24 Nm

W3 = W1 + W2 HM = 2.7 W3 = 1416,1 + 104824 = 2464.34 Nm m W4 = W3 x n P = 6 kW W4 = 2464.34 x 80 = 197146.8 Nm P 2 vD = v n = 80 1/h me = 2 x 2464.34 / 1.7 = 1705.43 kg 2 me = 2 x W3 / vD s = 0.11 m

Note: Add rotational energies of motor, coupling and gear, if not negligible, to W1.

Mass on an Incline a. with Propelling b. with Propelling Force m Formula: Force Downward: Upward: s h 2 W1 = m x g x h = m x vD x 0.5 W2 = (F - m x g x sinß) W2 = (F + m x g x sinß)

F W2 = m x g x sinß x s x s x s

W3 = W1 + W2 W = W x n m•g 4 3 vD = 2 x g x h 2 ß me = 2 x W3 / vD Continued on the next page 6-22 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Shock Absorbers Technical Information

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

Mass without Propelling Force Formula: Example: s W = m x v2 x 0.5 m = 200 kg W = 200 x 32 x 0.5 = 900 Nm Metric 1 1

W2 = 0 v = 3 m/s W2 = 0 m W3 = W1 + W2 n = 1000 1/h W3 = 900 + 0 = 900 Nm W4 = W3 x n s = 0.01 m W4 = 900 x 1000 = 900000 Nm/h

S E C T I O N 6 T S E C vD = v me = m

Mass with Propelling Force s Formula: Example: F 2 2 W1 = m x v x 0.5 m = 30 kg W1 = 30 x 1.9 x 0.5 = 54.15 Nm

m W2 = F x s v = 1.9 m/s W2 = 300 x 0.03 = 9 Nm

W3 = W1 + W2 F = 300 N W3 = 54.15 + 9 = 63.15 Nm W4 = W3 x n n = 800 1/h W4 = 63.15 x 800 = 50520 Nm/h 2 vD = v s = 0.03 m me = 2 x 63.15 / 1.9 = 34.97 kg 2 me = 2 x W3 / vD

2.1 with vertical motion upward: W2 = (F - m x g) x s 2.2 with vertical motion downward W2 = (F + m x g) x s

Rotary Table with Horizontal or Vertical Propelling Moment v Formula: Example: 2 2 2 W1 = m x v x 0.25 = 0.5 x J x w m = 1200 kg W1 = 1200 x 1.3 x 0.25 = 507 Nm R W2 = m x s / R v = 1.3 m/s W2 = 1200 x 0.04 / 0.9 = 53.3 Nm M m W3 = W1 + W2 M = 1200 Nm W3 = 507 + 53.3 = 560.33 Nm s W4 = W3 x n s = 0.04 m W4 = 560.33 x 90 = 50429.7 Nm/h v = v x R / L = w x R L = 1.35 m v = 1.3 x 0.9 / 1.35 = 0.86 m/s vD D D 2 2 me = 2 x W3 / vD R = 0.9 m me = 2 x 560.33 / 0.86 = 1515.22 kg n = 90 1/h

Swinging Mass with Propelling Force L Formula: Example: 2 2 2 r W1 = m x v x 0.18 = 0.5 x J x w m = 1500 kg W1 = 1500 x 3 x 0.18 = 2430 Nm m W = F x r x s / R = M x s / R v = 3 m/s W = 6000 x 0.7 x 0.05 / 0.9 = 233.33 Nm F 2 2 R W3 = W1 + W2 F = 6000 N W3 = 2430 + 233.33 = 2633.33 Nm W = W x n s = 0.05 m W = 2633.33 x 700 = 1864333 Nm/h vD 4 3 4 vD = v x R / L = w x R r = 0.7 m vD = 3 x 0.9 / 1.5 = 1.8 m/s A 2 2 me = 2 x W3 / vD R = 0.9 m me = 2 x 2633.33 / 1.8 = 1625.51 kg s L = 1.5 m n = 700 1/h

Swinging Mass with Propelling Moment (e.g. Turning Device) Formula: Example: v D W = m x v2 x 0.18 = 0.5 x J x w2 J = 41 kgm2 W = 0.5 x 41 x 22 = 82 Nm L m 1 1 W2 = F x r x s / R = M x s / R w = 2 1/s W2 = 400 x 0.025 / 0.9 = 11.1 Nm s R s W3 = W1 + W2 M = 400 Nm W3 = 82 + 11.1 = 93.1 Nm W4 = W3 x n s = 0.025 m W4 = 93.1 x 1,300 = 121044 Nm/h

vD = v x R / L = w x R L = 1.8 m vD = 2 x 0.9 = 1.8 m/s 2 2 me = 2 x W3 / vD R = 0.9 m me = 2 x 93.1 / 1.8 = 57.47 kg n = 1300 1/h Note: Please check impact angle long = s/R (see example 6.2)

Swinging Mass with Propelling Moment M Formula: Example: L 2 2 2 W1 = m x v x 0.5 = 0.5 x J x w m = 30 kg W1 = 30 x 1.5 x 0.5 = 33.75 Nm

R W2 = M x s / R v = 1.5 m/s W2 = 60 x 0.02 / 0.6 = 2 Nm W3 = W1 + W2 M = 60 Nm W3 = 33.75 + 2 = 35.75 Nm

W4 = W3 x n R = 0.6 m W4 = 35.75 x 1600 = 57200 Nm vD vD = v x R / L = w x R L = 0.9 m vD = 1.5 x 0.6 / 0.9 = 1 m/s 2 2 m s me = 2 x W3 / vD n = 1600 1/h me = 2 x 33.75 / 1 = 71.5 kg s = 0.02 m

Counterv. force/supporting force Q (N) Applies for all examples: Q = 1.2 x W3 / s

Braking Time t (s) Applies for all examples: t = 2.6 x s / vD 2 2 Retardation a (m/s ) Applies for all examples: a = 0.6 x vD / s

Note: If used in a damp environment, please consult our engineering department. 6-23 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Shock / Vibration Isolation Application Sheet

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

Completed By: Date:

S E C T I O N 6 T S E C

Company Name: The following data will help us to determine your Address: needs to meet your shock and vibration requirements. If a drawing cannot be included, Contact Name/Position: please include a sketch with this form. Telephone: FAX:

e-mail:

Technical Requirements

Equipment Description:

Equipment Weight (lbs. or kg.): Temperature Range (°F or °C): Low: High:

Excitation Source: Preferred Damping Material (Circle One):

Excitation Frequency (rpm, cpm, cps or Hz): Natural Rubber, Neoprene, Urethane, Sorbothane®, Vinyl Chloride Elastomeric Resin, Allowable Static Deflection of Isolators (inch or mm): Silicone Gel,Wire Mesh, Cable, others: % Vibration Isolation Efficiency Desired:

Space Limitation if any:

Examples of how to choose vibration isolators for various operating situations are given in the Vibration Mount Technical Section starting on page T1-27.

Prototype/Production Requirements

Prototype Quantity: Timing:

Production Forecast: Timing:

6-24 SECTION 7 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Finger-Flex Mounts

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 TYPICAL INSTALLATION ARRANGEMENTS

Multiple Installations Typical Installations Any number of Finger-Flex mounts Finger-Flex mounts are used for can be installed in parallel to achieve office machines, electronic equipment, greater load-carrying capacity. These motors, air conditioning equipment, mounts may also be stacked in series heating equipment, fans, blowers, to meet greater deflection requirements. pumps and scientific equipment. Separators between mounts, if used, must be designed to meet the specific requirements of the installation.

S E C T I O N 7 T S E C

Shoulder bolt

Mounting base A. Finger-Flex bushing If the load support is 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or more thick, two Mounting support Finger-Flex bushings are generally used. Finger-Flex bushing

Rebound plate

B. Shoulder bolt When the load Rubber parts used are similiar to supporting member is Mounting base type V10R 4-1504 & V10R 4-1505 Finger-Flex bushing 1/8 inch (3.18 mm) to combination. The difference is that the 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick, Mounting support flange of the rubber bushing within this the standard bushing Finger-Flex bushing assembled mounting has fingers on and ring combination is only one of its surfaces. The ring most suitable. Rebound plate member absorbs both vibration and shock.

C. If the load supporting Shoulder bolt member is less than Mounting base 1/8 inch (3.18 mm) thick, Finger-Flex bushing the metal surrounding the Mounting support mounting hole should be Finger-Flex bushing turned up. This provides Rebound plate additional mounting area for the bushing.

7-2 Buy Product See Section 7 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Finger-Flex Mounts – To 12 lbs.

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Natural Rubber • FOR LOADS UP OF 4 TO 12 POUNDS (1.8 TO 5.4 kgf)

1/4 (6.4) 5/64 5/64 (2) (2)

13/16 8 FINGERS (20.6) 29/64 (11.5) EACH SIDE OUT OF PHASE

Fig. 1 RING STYLE 60 50 LOAD

S E C T I O N 7 T S E C 5/64 40 (2) D 5/64 30 SUPPORT (2) C 20 LOAD (lb.) 3/16 B (4.8) 10 A 0 0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 13/16 15/32 1/4 DEFLECTION (in.) (20.6) (11.9) (6.4) 8 FINGERS Deflection below the X are considered safe practice for EACH SIDE static loads; data above the X are useful for calculating OUT OF PHASE deflections under dynamic loads.

1/4 12 8 FINGERS (6.4) 10 EACH SIDE 9/16 D OUT OF (14.3) 8 PHASE C Fig. 2 BUSHING STYLE 6 4 LOAD (lb.) B 2 NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. A 0 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 NATURAL FREQUENCY (CPS)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Fig. Hardness Catalog Number 2400 2700 3000 3300 No. Durometer Maximum Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 4 4 3 2 V10R 4-1500A 30 (1.8) (1.8) (1.4) (0.9) — 6 6 4 3 V10R 4-1500B 40 (2.7) (2.7) (1.8) (1.4) — 1 9 9 6 4 3 V10R 4-1500C 50 (4.1) (4.1) (2.7) (1.8) (1.4) 12 12 9 7 5 V10R 4-1500D 60 (5.4) (5.4) (4.1) (3.2) (2.3) 4 4 3 2 V10R 4-1501A 30 (1.8) (1.8) (1.4) (0.9) — 6 6 4 3 V10R 4-1501B 40 (2.7) (2.7) (1.8) (1.4) — 2 9 9 6 4 3 V10R 4-1501C 50 (4.1) (4.1) (2.7) (1.8) (1.4) 12 12 9 7 5 V10R 4-1501D 60 (5.4) (5.4) (4.1) (3.2) (2.3)

7-3 Buy Product See Section 7 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Finger-Flex Mounts – To 25 lbs.

10 FINGERS 1-11/64 51/64 EACH SIDE (29.8) (20.2) OUT OF PHASE

7/64 (2.8) 7/64 5/16 (2.8) (7.9)

Fig. 1 RING STYLE 80 70 LOAD

60 I O N 7 T S E C 50 D 40 SUPPORT C .193 30 B (4.9) 10 FINGERS LOAD (lb.) 20 1/16 (12 on 1503B) A (1.6) 10 0 0.04 0.08 0.12 35/64 0 0.16 0.20 (13.9) DEFLECTION (in.)

1-11/64 11/16 3/8 Deflections below the X are considered safe practice (29.8) (17.5) (9.5) for static loads; data above the X are useful for calculating deflections under dynamic loads.

24 17/32 12 FINGERS (13.5) 20 D EACH SIDE 16 OUT OF Fig. 2 BUSHING STYLE C PHASE 12

8 NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. LOAD (lb.) B 4 A 0 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 NATURAL FREQUENCY (CPS)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Fig. Hardness Catalog Number 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 No. Durometer Maximum Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 10 10 7 5 4 3 V10R 4-1502A 30 (4.5) (4.5) (3.2) (2.3) (1.8) (1.4) 13 13 9 7 5 4 V10R 4-1502B 40 (5.9) (5.9) (4.1) (3.2) (2.3) (1.8) 1 18 18 14 10 8 6 V10R 4-1502C 50 (8.2) (8.2) (6.4) (4.5) (3.6) (2.7) 25 25 20 13 10 8 V10R 4-1502D 60 (11.3) (11.3) (9.1) (5.9) (4.5) (3.6) 10 10 7 5 4 3 V10R 4-1503A 30 (4.5) (4.5) (3.2) (2.3) (1.8) (1.4) 13 13 9 7 5 4 V10R 4-1503B 40 (5.9) (5.9) (4.1) (3.2) (2.3) (1.8) 2 18 18 14 10 8 6 V10R 4-1503C 50 (8.2) (8.2) (6.4) (4.5) (3.6) (2.7) 25 25 20 13 10 8 V10R 4-1503D 60 (11.3) (11.3) (9.1) (5.9) (4.5) (3.6)

7-4 Buy Product See Section 7 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Finger-Flex Mounts – To 37 lbs.

21/64 (8.3) 3/32 (2.4) 3/32 (2.4)

1-3/8 3/4 12 FINGERS (34.9) (19.1) EACH SIDE OUT OF PHASE

200 175 Fig. 1 RING STYLE LOAD 150 I O N 7 T S E C D 125 C 3/32 100 SUPPORT (2.4) 75 3/32 B (2.4) LOAD (lb.) 50 A 5/16 25 (7.9) 0 0 0.04 0.08 0.12 0.16 0.20 0.24 DEFLECTION (in.) 1-3/8 11/16 3/8 Deflections below the X are considered safe practice (34.9) (17.5) (9.5) 12 FINGERS for static loads; data above the X are useful for EACH SIDE calculating deflections under dynamic loads. OUT OF PHASE 35 D 30 12 FINGERS 21/64 25 EACH SIDE (8.3) C OUT OF 21/32 20 (16.7) B PHASE 15 Fig. 2 BUSHING STYLE

LOAD (lb.) 10 A 5 NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. 0 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 NATURAL FREQUENCY (CPS)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Fig. Hardness Catalog Number 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 No. Durometer Maximum Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 14 12 9 7 5 — V10R 4-1504A 30 (6.4) (5.4) (4.1) (3.2) (2.3) 19 19 14 10 8 6 V10R 4-1504B 40 (8.6) (8.6) (6.4) (4.5) (3.6) (2.7) 1 27 25 19 16 13 — V10R 4-1504C 50 (12.2) (11.3) (8.6) (7.3) (5.9) 37 32 25 21 — — V10R 4-1504D 60 (16.8) (14.5) (11.3) (9.5) 14 12 9 7 5 V10R 4-1505A 30 (6.4) — (5.4) (4.1) (3.2) (2.3) 19 19 14 10 8 6 V10R 4-1505B 40 (8.6) (8.6) (6.4) (4.5) (3.6) (2.7) 2 27 25 19 16 13 V10R 4-1505C 50 (12.2) — (11.3) (8.6) (7.3) (5.9) 37 32 25 21 — V10R 4-1505D 60 (16.8) — (14.5) (11.3) (9.5)

7-5 Buy Product See Section 7 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Finger-Flex Mounts – To 80 lbs.

12 FINGERS 1-29/32 1-1/4 EACH SIDE (48.4) (31.8) OUT OF PHASE

5/32 (4) 5/32 (4) 1/2 (12.7)

Fig. 1 RING STYLE 300

250 LOAD

D I O N 7 T S E C 200 3/8 12 FINGERS (9.5) 150 SUPPORT C 3/32 100

(2.4) LOAD (lb.) B 35/64 50 (13.9) A 0 1-29/32 0 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 (48.4) 1-5/32 9/16 (29.4) (14.3) DEFLECTION (in.)

Deflections below the X are considered safe practice for static loads; data above the X are useful for calculating deflections under dynamic loads. 12 FINGERS 7/8 EACH SIDE (22.2) 80 OUT OF PHASE 70 Fig. 2 BUSHING STYLE D 60 50 C 40 30 B LOAD (lb.) 20 10 NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. A 0 810121416 18 NATURAL FREQUENCY (CPS)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Fig. Hardness Catalog Number 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 No. Durometer Maximum Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 35 30 17 13 10 8 V10R 4-1506A 30 (15.9) (13.6) (7.7) (5.9) (4.5) (3.6) 50 50 24 18 14 12 V10R 4-1506B 40 (22.7) (22.7) (10.9) (8.2) (6.4) (5.4) 1 65 40 31 24 20 V10R 4-1506C 50 (29.5) — (18.1) (14.1) (10.9) (9.1) 80 76 56 43 33 V10R 4-1506D 60 — (36.3) (34.5) (25.4) (19.5) (15) 35 30 17 13 10 8 V10R 4-1507A 30 (15.9) (13.6) (7.7) (5.9) (4.5) (3.6) 50 50 24 18 14 12 V10R 4-1507B 40 (22.7) (22.7) (10.9) (8.2) (6.4) (5.4) 2 65 40 31 24 20 V10R 4-1507C 50 (29.5) — (18.1) (14.1) (10.9) (9.1) 80 76 56 43 33 V10R 4-1507D 60 (36.3) — (34.5) (25.4) (19.5) (15)

7-6 Buy Product See Section 7 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Finger-Flex Mounts – To 350 lbs.

2-3/16 1-1/4 5/8 (55.6) (31.8) (15.9)

1/8 13/16 (3.2) (20.6)

Fig. 1 RING STYLE

800 LOAD 700 13/32 D C

(10.3) I O N 7 T S E C 5 FINGERS 600 ON OUTSIDE 7/32 500 OF SHAFT (5.6) 32° 30' 400 SUPPORT X B 300 X

LOAD (lb.) X 200 A X 100 3 7/8 (76.2) 1-1/16 5/8 0 (27) (15.9) (22.2) 2-1/8 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 (54) DEFLECTION (in.)

Deflections below the X are considered safe practice for static loads; data above the X are useful for calculating deflections under dynamic loads. 11/16 (17.5) 350 15/32 D (11.9) 1-25/32 300 (45.2) 250 Fig. 2 BUSHING STYLE C 200

150 B NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. LOAD (lb.) 100 A 50

0 6 7 8 9 10 11 NATURAL FREQUENCY (CPS)

Compression Forcing Frequency in Cycles per Minute Fig. Hardness Catalog Number 900 1000 1250 1500 1750 No. Durometer Maximum Load lb. (kgf) Minimum Load for 81% Isolation lb. (kgf) 250 250 178 105 65 48 V10R 4-1508C 50 (113.4) (113.4) (80.7) (47.6) (29.5) (21.8) 1 350 324 242 141 93 66 V10R 4-1508D 60 (158.8) (147) (109.8) (64) (42.2) (29.9) 120 98 46 30 22 — V10R 4-1509A 30 (54.4) (44.5) (20.9) (13.6) (10) 160 160 104 67 46 34 V10R 4-1509B 40 (72.6) (72.6) (47.2) (30.4) (20.9) (15.4) 2 250 250 178 105 65 48 V10R 4-1509C 50 (113.4) (113.4) (80.7) (47.6) (29.5) (21.8) 350 324 242 141 93 66 V10R 4-1509D 60 (158.8) (147) (109.8) (64) (42.2) (29.9)

7-7 Buy Product See Section 7 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Bolt Mounts – Solo Unitized

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Outer Body – Natural Rubber Load-Carrying Member • SOLO TYPE Spacer – Steel, Tubular Rolled • FOR LOADS OF 60 TO 1300 POUNDS (27.2 TO 590 kgf)

PREASSEMBLY DIMENSIONS

G E K F J

INSTALLATION: 1. Lubricate mount and H socket with water or rubber lubricant. I O N 7 T S E C A 2. Insert into socket, hand ISOLATED C UNIT rotate with axial force. 3. If necessary, use driving M B bolt. Care must be taken L N that the driving bolt does not overhang the steel sleeve O.D. J BEVEL D E CINCH WASHER F SUPPORT RECOMMENDED DIMENSIONS SELECTION CRITERIA: PLATE Calculate static load. Select a mount of equal CINCH WASHER ASSEMBLY BOLT or greater capacity. For dynamic loads greater SOLO MOUNTING than 3X static load, select next larger size. SELECTION GUIDE AND SPECIFICATIONS Nominal Nominal Load Deflection N Catalog Number Rating Rating ABCDEFGHJKLM Axial Axial (min) lb. (kgf) in. (mm) 60 .010 1.00 .17 .75 .13 .44 .38 .18 .77 .03 .55 .38 1.00 .09 V10Z42-1010 (27.2) (0.25) (25.4) (4.3) (19.1) (3.3) (11.2) (9.7) (4.6) (19.6) (0.8) (14) (9.7) (25.4) (2.3) 125 .018 1.09 .19 .75 .31 .69 .38 .21 .78 .03 .96 .38 1.12 .09 V10Z42-2000 (56.7) (0.46) (27.7) (4.8) (19.1) (7.9) (17.5) (9.7) (5.3) (19.8) (0.8) (24.4) (9.7) (28.4) (2.3) .015 .48 .62 1.38 .52 1.31 2.18 .52 V10Z42-4000 (0.38) (12.2) (15.7) (35.1) (13.2) (33.3) (55.4) (13.2) 200 .035 2.00 .46 1.25 .25 1.00 .39 .52 1.32 .06 1.30 .38 2.00 .12 V10Z42-4040 (90.7) (0.89) (50.8) (11.7) (31.8) (6.4) (25.4) (9.9) (13.2) (33.5) (1.5) (33) (9.7) (50.8) (3) .030 .46 .25 1.00 .64 1.25 1.30 .64 V10Z42-4050 (0.76) (11.7) (6.4) (25.4) (16.3) (31.8) (33) (16.3) 425 .020 2.01 .56 1.50 .75 1.71 .64 .62 1.52 .06 2.12 .64 2.50 .15 V10Z42-5000 (192.8) (0.51) (51.1) (14.2) (38.1) (19.1) (43.4) (16.3) (15.7) (38.6) (1.5) (53.8) (16.3) (63.5) (3.8) .71 .93 2.00 2.42 V10Z42-6000 (18) (23.6) (50.8) (61.5) 500 .030 3.00 1.81 .64 .81 1.81 .12 .64 3.00 .19 (226.8) (0.76) (76.2) .76 (46) .50 1.56 (16.3) (20.6) (46) (3) 1.97 (16.3) (76.2) (4.8) V10Z42-6020 (19.3) (12.7) (39.6) (50) 900 .075 3.75 .94 2.00 .75 2.12 .77 1.16 2.06 .09 2.66 .77 3.70 .25 V10Z42-7000 (408.2) (1.91) (95.3) (23.9) (50.8) (19.1) (53.8) (19.6) (29.5) (52.3) (2.3) (67.6) (19.6) (94) (6.4) 1300 .030 4.53 1.12 2.75 1.75 3.37 1.06 1.22 2.75 .12 4.34 1.06 4.50 .25 V10Z42-8020 (590) (0.76) (115.1) (28.4) (69.9) (44.5) (85.6) (26.9) (31) (69.9) (3) (110.2) (26.9) (114.3) (6.4)

7-8 NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. Buy Product See Section 7 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Bolt Mounts – Tandem Unitized

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Outer Body – Natural Rubber Load-Carrying Member • TANDEM TYPE Spacer – Steel, Tubular Rolled • FOR LOADS OF 150 TO 900 POUNDS (68 TO 408.2 kgf)

PREASSEMBLY DIMENSIONS

G E K F J

S E C T I O N 7 T S E C INSTALLATION: 1. Lubricate mount and SHOWN FOR socket with water or MOUNTING ORIENTATION rubber lubricant. 2. Insert into socket, hand rotate with axial force. A 3. If necessary, use driving M C N L bolt. Care must be taken that the driving bolt does not overhang the steel ISOLATED UNIT B sleeve O.D. MOUNT CINCH WASHER RECOMMENDED DIMENSIONS SUPPORT PLATE D 2 x E SELECTION CRITERIA: F Calculate static load. MOUNT Select a mount of equal or greater capacity. For ASSEMBLY BOLT dynamic loads greater CINCH WASHER than 3X static load, select next larger size. TANDEM MOUNTING

SELECTION GUIDE AND SPECIFICATIONS Nominal Nominal Load Deflection N Catalog Number Rating Rating ABCDEFGHJKLM (min) Axial Axial lb. (kgf) in. (mm) 150 .010 1.78 .38 1.12 .38 .59 .52 .43 1.16 .03 .62 .52 1.75 .10 V10Z42-A3010 (68) (0.25) (45.2) (9.7) (28.4) (9.7) (15) (13.2) (10.9) (29.5) (0.8) (15.7) (13.2) (44.5) (2.5) 425 .015 2.58 .87 1.50 .50 1.05 .64 .92 1.62 .06 1.17 .64 2.50 .15 V10Z42-A5020 (192.8) (0.38) (65.5) (22.1) (38.1) (12.7) (26.7) (16.3) (23.4) (41.1) (1.5) (23.7) (16.3) (63.5) (3.8) 500 .018 3.00 .75 1.81 .75 1.16 .64 .40 1.85 .12 1.19 .64 3.00 .19 V10Z42-A6010 (226.8) (0.46) (76.2) (19.1) (46) (19.1) (29.5) (16.3) (10.2) (47) (3) (30.2) (16.3) (76.2) (4.8) 900 .080 3.75 .74 2.25 .75 1.13 .77 1.12 2.28 .12 1.50 .77 4.00 .25 V10Z42-A7010 (408.2) (2.03) (95.3) (18.8) (57.2) (19.1) (28.7) (19.6) (28.4) (57.9) (3) (38.1) (19.6) (101.6) (6.4)

7-9 NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. Buy Product See Section 7 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Bolt Mounts – Ring and Bushing Type

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Isolator – Neoprene • WEAR PLATE DESIGN IMPROVES FATIGUE LIFE Wear Plate & Sleeve – Carbon Steel, AND WEAR RESISTANCE Rust-Resistant Coating • RESISTS OILS, OZONE AND MOST SOLVENTS .53 • FAIL-SAFE DESIGN WITH SNUBBING WASHER (13.5) New .78 APPLICATIONS (19.8) • SMALL ENGINES • GENERATORS R 06 1.94 • PUMPS .45 (49.3) (1.5) (11.4) • RADIATORS WEAR • OPERATOR CABS IN PLATE SEVERE ENVIRONMENTS

Ø1.23 (31.2) AXIAL LOAD vs. DEFLECTION .563 (14.3) Thick Mounting Plate

1400 I O N 7 T S E C

.78 1200 (19.8) -RX3031500 1000

800 .77 600 Ø1.88 (19.6) -RX3031260

(47.8) LOAD (lb.) 400

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. 200 -RX3031150 0 0 .025 .05 .075 .10 .125 .15 .175 .20 .225 TEMPERATURE RANGE: -20°F to +180°F (-28.9°C to +82.2°C) DEFLECTION (in.)

Max. Load lb. (N) AXIAL LOAD vs. DEFLECTION Thick Mounting Plate Thin Mounting Plate .50 (12.7) Thick Mounting Plate Catalog Number Inch (mm) Inch (mm) 1400 .563 (14.3) .50 (12.7) 1200 -RX3031500

Axial Radial Axial Radial 1000 -RX3031260 V10Z82-RX3031150 150 (667) 75 (333) 80 (355) 40 (177) 800 600 V10Z82-RX3031260 260 (1156) 130 (578) 160 (711) 80 (355)

LOAD (lb.) 400

V10Z82-RX3031500 500 (2224) 250 (1112) 300 (1334) 150 (667) 200 -RX3031150 0 0 .025 .05 .075 .10 .125 .15 .175 .20 .225 DEFLECTION (in.)

TYPICAL INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION SNUBBING WASHER V 9C20-051 (Zinc Plated Carbon Steel) ISOLATED EQUIPMENT

DIA. .563 (14.3) .51 (13) or .50 (12.7)

.06 (1.5) CHAMFER SUPPORT REQUIRED STRUCTURE 1.94 (49.3) INSTALLED 1.25 (31.75) MIN. MOUNTING HOLE DIAMETER

SNUBBING WASHER THICKNESS DIA. .13 (3.3) 2.00 (50.8) NOTE: Install so bushing supports static load.

7-10 Buy Product See Section 7 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Bolt Mounts – Ring and Bushing Type

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Isolator – Neoprene • FULL REBOUND PROTECTION • STRUCTURE-BORNE NOISE ATTENUATION Sleeve – Carbon Steel • RESISTS OILS, OZONE AND MOST SOLVENTS Rust-Resistant Coating • FAIL-SAFE DESIGN WITH SNUBBING WASHER

F APPLICATIONS G • HIGHWAY AND OFF-HIGHWAY New VEHICLES: ISOLATE ENGINES, J K CABS, RADIATORS, BATTERY RAD. BOXES, FUEL TANKS AND ACCESSORIES • MOTOR GENERATORS AND H COMPRESSORS B • PUMPS AND CENTRIFUGES • MARINE EQUIPMENT AND G POWER PLANTS • HVAC EQUIPMENT A • PORTABLE EQUIPMENT AND MACHINERY

• OFFICE EQUIPMENT/COMPUTERS I O N 7 T S E C

AXIAL LOAD vs. DEFLECTION AXIAL LOAD vs. DEFLECTION AXIAL LOAD vs. DEFLECTION (.38 Thick Mounting Plate) (.56 Thick Mounting Plate) (.88 Thick Mounting Plate) 600 1400 2500 -R41391300 -R21200200 -R30310500 1200 500 2000

1000 400 -R30310300 -R41390700 1500 800 300 -R21200120 600 1000 LOAD (lb.) LOAD (lb.) LOAD (lb.) 200 -R30310150 -R21200060 400 500 -R41390350 100 200

0 0 .02 .04.06 .08 .10 .12 .14 .16 .18 .02 .04.06 .08 .10 .12 0.025 .05 .075 .10 .125 .15 .175 .20 .225 DEFLECTION (in.) DEFLECTION (in.) DEFLECTION (in.)

TEMPERATURE RANGE: -20°F to +180°F (-28.9°C to +82.2°C) Mounting Natural A B F G H K J Axial Static Radial Static Catalog Number Durometer Plate Frequency in. in. in. in. in. in. in. Load, Max. Load, Max. Thickness (Max. Load) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) lb. (N) lb. (N) in. (mm) Hz (ref) 60 30 V10Z82-R21200060 40 (266) (133) 1.31 .59 .39 .48 .79 1.25 .04 120 40 .38 V10Z82-R21200120 56 15 (33.3) (15) (9.9) (12.2) (20.1) (31.8) (1) (533) (177) (9.7) 200 50 V10Z82-R21200200 70 (889) (222) 150 60 V10Z82-R30310150 48 (667) (266) 1.88 .77 .53 .78 1.3 1.94 .06 300 120 .56 V10Z82-R30310300 64 (47.8) (19.6) (13.5) (19.8) (33) (49.3) (1.5) (1334) (533) (14.2) 500 200 V10Z82-R30310500 68 (2224) (889) 12 350 140 V10Z82-R41390350 40 (1556) (622) 2.55 1.03 .65 .9 1.58 2.43 .09 700 300 .88 V10Z82-R41390700 56 (64.8) (26.2) (16.5) (22.9) (40.1) (61.7) (2.3) (3113) (1334) (22.4) 1300 650 V10Z82-R41391300 70 (5782) (2891) NOTE: For Snubbing Washers and Installation Configurations see page 7-13

7-11 Buy Product See Section 7 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Bolt Mounts – Ring and Bushing Type C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Isolator – Neoprene • FULL REBOUND PROTECTION • STRUCTURE-BORNE NOISE ATTENUATION Sleeve – Carbon Steel, • RESISTS OILS, OZONE AND MOST SOLVENTS Rust-Resistant Coating • FAIL-SAFE DESIGN WITH SNUBBING WASHER F New G

J K RAD.

H B

S E C T I O N 7 T S E C

AXIAL LOAD vs. DEFLECTION AXIAL LOAD vs. DEFLECTION APPLICATIONS (1.12 Thick Mounting Plate) 1.25 Thick Mounting Plate HIGHWAY AND OFF-HIGHWAY 5000 8000 • -R78544600 VEHICLES: ISOLATE ENGINES, CABS, RADIATORS, BATTERY -R56462100 7000 4000 -R78543600 BOXES, FUEL TANKS AND 6000 ACCESSORIES MOTOR GENERATORS AND 3000 5000 • -R56461000 -R78542600 COMPRESSORS 4000 • PUMPS AND CENTRIFUGES 2000 MARINE EQUIPMENT AND 3000 • LOAD (lb.) LOAD (lb.) POWER PLANTS -R56460500 2000 • HVAC EQUIPMENT 1000 • PORTABLE EQUIPMENT AND 1000 MACHINERY 0 • OFFICE EQUIPMENT/COMPUTERS 0 .05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 DEFLECTION (in.) DEFLECTION (in.)

TEMPERATURE RANGE: -20°F to +180°F (-28.9°C to +82.2°C) Mounting Natural A B F G H K J Axial Static Radial Static Catalog Number Durometer Plate Frequency in. in. in. in. in. in. in. Load, Max. Load, Max. Thickness (Max. Load) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) lb. (N) lb. (N) in. (mm) Hz (ref) 500 200 V10Z82-R56460500 40 (2224) (889) 3.5 1.41 .93 1 2.3 2.88 1000 400 1.12 V10Z82-R56461000 60 (88.9) (35.8) (23.6) (25.4) (58.4) (73.2) (4448) (1779) (28.4) 2100 900 V10Z82-R56462100 70 .12 (9341) (4003) 10 (3) 2600 1000 V10Z82-R78542600 60 (11565) (4448) 4.88 1.86 1.063 1.25 2.55 3.38 3600 1450 1.25 V10Z82-R78543600 68 (124) (47.2) (27) (31.8) (64.8) (85.9) (16013) (6449) (31.8) 4600 1900 V10Z82-R78544600 74 (20461) (8451) NOTE: For Snubbing Washers and Installation Configurations see next page.

7-12 Buy Product See Section 7 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Bolt Mounts – Washers and Installation C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Carbon Steel - Zinc Plated Snubbing Washers

New DIA. X

THICKNESS Z DIA. Y

S E C T I O N 7 T S E C

For Dia. X Dia. Y Thickness Z Catalog Number Series in. in. in. V10Z82- (mm) (mm) (mm)

.40 1.56 .09 V 9C20-040 R21 (10.2) (39.6) (2.3) .51 2.00 .13 V 9C20-051 R30 & RX30 (13) (50.8) (3.3) .66 2.81 .19 V 9C20-066 R41 (16.8) (71.4) (4.8) .94 3.88 .25 R56 V 9C20-094 (23.9) (98.6) (6.4) 1.06 5.25 .38 V 9C20-106 R78 (26.9) (133.4) (9.7)

INSTALLATION CONFIGURATIONS

ISOLATED EQUIPMENT SNUBBING WASHER

E D MOUNTING HOLE B RADIUS SUPPORT C REQUIRED STRUCTURE DIAMETER INSTALLED C E ISOLATED B RADIUS INSTALLED MOUNTING STRUCTURE REQUIRED HOLE D DIAMETER

SNUBBING WASHER Installation Dimensions

Mount Series B C D E For Bolt Mounts, in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) see previous pages. V10Z82-R21 .04 (1.02) 1.25 (31.8) .38 (9.7) .75 (19.1) V10Z82-R30 .06 (1.52) 1.94 (49.3) .56 (14.2) 1.25 (31.8) V10Z82-R41 .09 (2.29) 2.43 (61.7) .88 (22.4) 1.50 (38.1) V10Z82-R56 .12 (3.05) 2.88 (73.2) 1.12 (28.4) 2.25 (57.2) V10Z82-R78 .12 (3.05) 3.38 (85.9) 1.25 (31.8) 2.50 (63.5)

7-13 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I

V O

D N A Vinyl Elastomer Grommets

C O M T S www.vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 PONEN vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Highly-Damped Blue Vinyl Elastomer • VIBRATION & SHOCK CONTROL • SMALL SIZES • NOISE CONTROL • EXCELLENT PHYSICAL INTEGRITY G G F F New

E C B C E B

H H Fig. 1 Fig. 2 A A D D Fig. 1 Fig. 2 G Fig. 4 Fig. 6 H D A F

EC B E C Fig. 3 Fig. 5

H D G APPLICATIONS Fig. 3 Fig. 4 • COMPUTER DISK DRIVES COMPUTER PRINTERS AND PERIPHERALS H D • D • PRECISION EQUIPMENT – MEDICAL, OFFICE C AND LABORATORY

E BE

C H G A G F Fig. 5 Fig. 6 PEAK PERFORMANCE TEMPERATURE RANGE: 55°F TO 105°F (13°C TO 41°C) A B C D E F G H Fig. Catalog Number Plate Hole Inside Overall Outside Edge Rib Rib Load No. Thickness Diameter Diameter Height Diameter Radius Height Width lb. (N) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)

V10R14-G401-1 .063 (1.60) .224 (5.69) .313 (7.95) .563 (14.30) V10R14-G402-1 .125 (3.18) .226 (5.74) .375 (9.53) 1 .125 (3.18) .063 (1.60) .063 (1.60) 6 (26.7) .375 (9.53) V10R14-G403-1 .063 (1.60) .276 (7.01) .313 (7.95) .625 (15.88) V10R14-G404-1 .125 (3.18) .281 (7.14) .375 (9.53)

V10R14-G410-1 .057 (1.45) .250 (6.35) .158 (4.01) .230 (5.84) .379 (9.63) .050 (1.27) .040 (1.02) .050 (1.27) 3 (13.3)

V10R14-G411-1 .063 (1.60) .375 (9.53) .188 (4.78) .323 (8.20) .563 (14.30) .130 (3.30) .063 (1.60) .063 (1.60) 6 (26.7) 2 V10R14-G412-1 .031 (0.79) .250 (6.35) .158 (4.01) .230 (5.84) .379 (9.63) .050 (1.27) .040 (1.02) .050 (1.27) 3 (13.3)

V10R14-G414-1 .043 (1.09) .375 (9.53) .188 (4.78) .323 (8.20) .563 (14.30) .130 (3.30) .063 (1.60) .063 (1.60) 6 (26.7)

A B C D E F G H Fig. Catalog Number Shank Shank Inside Overall Flange Flange Rib Rib Load No. Height Diameter Diameter Height Diameter Height Height Width lb. (N) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)

V10R82-F10-1 3 — — .460 (11.68) .250 (6.35) — .813 (20.65) .078 (1.98) .085 (2.16) 10 (44.5) V10R82-M10-1 4 .313 (7.95) .469 (11.91) .260 (6.60) .563 (14.30) .250 (6.35)

V10R82-F25-1 5 — — .457 (11.61) .520 (13.21) — .125 (3.18) 1.000 (25.40) .132 (3.35) 25 (111.2) V10R82-M25-1 6 .544 (13.82) .473 (12.01) .260 (6.60) 1.060 (26.92) .516 (13.11) .135 (3.43)

7-14 Rev: 8-24-10 SS Buy Product See Section 7 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Bolt Mounts – Silicone Gel Type

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Collar – Brass • PROTECTS FRAGILE SUBJECTS FROM MICROVIBRATIONS Bushing – Silicone Gel AND LIGHT SHOCKS New d

3.5 (1.4) 3 (.12) L 3 (.12) Ø7 Ø4 Ø11 (.28) (.43) Fig. 1 (.16) Ø11 Ø7 (.43) (2.8) d Metric

S E C T I O N 7 T S E C

4 (.16) 4 (.16) L Fig. 2 4 (.16) Ø9 Ø14 (.35) Ø5 (.55) (.20) BOLT Ø9 (NOT SUPPLIED) Ø14 (.35) (.55) WASHER (NOT SUPPLIED) d GEL BUSHING OBJECT TO ISOLATE

COLLAR GEL BUSHING MOUNTING BASE Fig. 3

6.5 5 (.20) INSTALLATION DIAGRAM (.26) L 5 (.20) Ø14 (.55) Ø25 (.98) Note: Dimensions in ( ) are inch. Ø6 Ø14 (2.4) (.55) Ø25 (.98) TEMPERATURE RANGE: -40°C to +200°C (-40°F to +392°F)

d L Optimum Load Resonance Resonance Recommended Fig. Collar Catalog Number Collar Collar kgf/leg Point Magnification Frequency No. Thickness ID Length (lb./leg) Hz dB Hz 3 6 90 @ 0.05 kg (.11 lb.) V10Z61MS 1 0.5 (.02) 0.05 to 0.188 (.11 to .41) 64 to 42 7 to 9 (.12) (.24) 60 @ 0.188 kg (.41 lb.) 95 @ 0.125 kg (.28 lb.) V10Z61MA1 0.125 to 0.625 (.28 to 1.38) 9 to 10 3 7 67 to 35 50 @ 0.625 kg (1.38 lb.) 2 1 (.04) (.12) (.28) 70 @ 0.625 kg (1.38 lb.) V10Z61MA2 0.625 to 1 (1.38 to 2.2) 15 to 16 49 to 37 55 @ 1 kg (2.2 lb.) 70 @ 1 kg (2.2 lb.) V10Z61MB1 1 to 3.75 (2.2 to 8.27) 15 to 17 4 11 49 to 23 35 @ 3.75 kg (8.27 lb.) 3 1 (.04) (.16) (.43) 30 @ 3.75 kg (8.27 lb.) V10Z61MB2 3.75 to 8 (8.27 to 17.64) 19 to 23 20 to 15 25 @ 8 kg (17.64 lb.) NOTE: More technical data is given on pages 1-34, 1-35 & 2-3.

7-15 Buy Product See Section 7 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I

V O

D N A Bolt Mounts – Washer Type

C O M TS P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Washer – Stainless Steel • CAN BE USED AS SEALING WASHER Seal – Silicone Rubber • ONE-PIECE CONSTRUCTION • SELF-SEALING New

X X

Bottom View

Top View

RUBBER METAL

5/64

Thread Size O.D.

SECTION X-X TEMPERATURE RANGE: -160°F to +500°F (-106.7°C to +260°C) PRESSURE RANGE: 100 psi (0.69 N/mm2) Internal & External

Thread Washer Thread Washer Catalog Number Catalog Number Size O.D. Size O.D.

V10Z14-04050 1/2 V10Z14-08100 1 1/4 V10Z14-04100 #6 1 V10Z14-08150 1-1/2

V10Z14-04150 1-1/2 V10Z14-10100 1 5/16 V10Z14-05050 1/2 V10Z14-10150 1-1/2

V10Z14-05100 #8 1 V10Z14-12100 1 3/8 V10Z14-05150 1-1/2 V10Z14-12150 1-1/2

V10Z14-06050 1/2 V10Z14-14100 1 7/16 V10Z14-06100 #10 1 V10Z14-14150 1-1/2

V10Z14-06150 1-1/2 V10Z14-16100 1 1/2 INSTALLATION: Bolt Mounts – Washer Type are installed on V10Z14-16150 1-1/2 bolts or screws in the same manner as regular washers. The rubber section should always face the panel.

7-16 Rev: 8-24-10 SS ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Silicone vs. Rubber

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

New REBOUND RESILIENCE No matter what the temperature could be, Silicone Gel performs more stably than other materials. 70 Metric 60

40 V10Z61 and V10Z62 Series Silicone Urethane High Damping Rubber NBR (Rubber) 30 Natural Rubber

S E C T I O N 7 T S E C

20 REBOUND RESILENCE (%)

0 -100 -50 0 50 100 150 TEMPERATURE (°C)

COMPRESSION SET Outstanding restoration is available even when Silicone Gel stays compressed. 70

60 1. Compress above materials by 25% and leave compressed for 22 hours in 70°C (158° F). 50 2. Release compression and leave in normal temperature for 30 minutes.

COMPRESSION SET (%) 20

0 V10Z61 Urethane NBR Natural EPDM and High (Rubber) Rubber Rubber V10Z62 Damping Series Rubber Silicone

7-17 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Unique Properties of Silicone Gel

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

Silicone gel has many properties that are superior to many other vibration damping materials such as rubber and urethane.

• Stable performance over wide temperature range: -40°C (-40°F) to 100 ~ 200°C (212 ~ 392°F) depending on the composition. • Good thermal conductivity. • Excellent in light-load and high-frequency vibration applications. • High ozone, UV and chemical resistance.

Many Forms of Silicone Gel Products Are Offered in This Catalog

Stud Type Mounts p. 1-34 thru 1-36

S E C T I O N 7 T S E C

Base Mounts p. 2-3

Shock Absorbent Test Spring Mounts p. 5-14 Impact of dropping a fresh egg from a height of 18 m (59 feet) onto a 2 cm (.79 in.) thick silicone gel pad is gently absorbed without breaking the egg. Bolt Mounts p. 7-15

Silicone Foam Pads p. 8-8

Silicone Gel Pads p. 8-9

Silicone Gel Tape & Chips p. 8-10

7-18 SECTION 8 Buy Product See Section 8 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Iso-Pads

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: A compound of two layers of tough vinyl • FOR STANDARD LOADS OF 50 TO 100 PSI (3.5 TO 7 kgf/cm2) chloride elastomeric resin bonded to both

sides of a strong reinforcing core of monofilament fiberglass and fused in a special process.

COLOR: Orange COEFFICIENT OF FRICTION: .8 W TEMPERATURE RANGE: -50°F to +230°F (-45.6°C to 110°C) NATURAL FREQUENCY vs TEMP AT 100 PSI (7 kgf/cm2): T -50°F (-45.6°C) f = 24 Hz PATTERNED n Room Temperature fn = 27 Hz +230°F (110°C) fn = 19 Hz

60 180 NATURAL FREQUENCY vs. LOAD (PSI) (STATIC) LOAD DEFLECTION vs. RECOVERY 50 150

40 120

30 90

S E C T I O N 38 T S E C 20 60 LOADING FREQUENCY IN HZ FREQUENCY 10 30 APPLIED LOAD IN PSI UNLOADING

STATIC LOAD IN PSI DEFLECTION IN PERCENT OF ORIGINAL THICKNESS 0 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 0 1.6 3.2 4.8 6.4 8.0 9.6 11.2 12.8

2400 LOAD vs. DEFLECTION TRANSMISSIBILITY 20 2000 8.0 15 4.0 GAIN 1600 10 2.0 5 1200 1.0 0 5

.50 SCALE IN DB 10 800 LOSS

.250 TRANSMISSIBILTY 15 STATIC LOAD IN PSI STATIC .125 400 20 fo (Applied Frequency) .062 RATIO OF 25 fn (Natural Frequency) DEFLECTION IN INCHES .031 30 0 .020 .040 .060 .080 .100 .120 .140 .160 .180 .10 1.0 10

W L T Pad Area Catalog Number in. mm in. mm in. mm sq. in. sq. cm

V10R10-00 22 558 23 584 506 3265 *V10R10-33 3 76.2 3 76.2 9 58.1 *V10R10-44 4 101.6 4 101.6 5/8 15.9 16 103.2 *V10R10-36 3 76.2 6 152.4 18 116.1 *V10R10-48 4 101.6 8 203.2 32 206.5

*Priced per box of 12 pieces.

8-2 Buy Product See Section 8 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Iso-Pad Sheets

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • UNPATTERNED • PATTERNED

Fig. 1 Fig. 2

• FIG. 1 ISO-PAD FOR BOLT INSULATOR (UNPATTERNED) Coefficient of Friction: .8 Color: Orange

Sheet Dimensions Catalog Number W L T in. mm in. mm in. mm V10R11-B11 11 279.4 11 279.4 3/32 2.4

For Bolt Isolation: Occasionally, machinery must be bolted down because of unbalanced structure, upward pull, safety requirements or local ordinances. Shimming instructions would apply for bolted machinery.

The bolt head should be isolated from the machine base or feet by using a metal washer over a piece of ISO-PAD. The body of the bolt must also be isolated. This can be achieved with Bolt Insulator material cut to size, rolled into a cylinder, and slipped over the bolt.

S E C T I O N 38 T S E C • FIG. 2 ISO-PAD FOR SHIM (PATTERNED) Coefficient of Friction: .8 Color: Orange

Sheet Dimensions Catalog Number W L T in. mm in. mm in. mm V10R11-A00 22 558 22 558 3/32 2.4

For Machine Leveling: SHIM increases ISO-PAD height in 3/32 in. (2.4 mm) increments. If metal shims are required, use ISO-PAD SHIM to isolate them from the machine base and eliminate metal-to-metal contact. It is especially useful in assuring level machine installations on unlevel floors.

ISO-PAD SHIM has a composition similiar to ISO-PAD Standard. (See previous page for ISO-PAD Standard)

TYPICAL INSTALLATIONS:

MACHINE STANDARD MACHINE METAL WASHER METAL SHIM STOCK (3/16 thick) ISO-PAD (.001 TO .062 as required) SHIM ISO-PAD ISO-PAD BOLT ISO-PAD INSULATOR ISO-PAD FLOOR

8-3 Buy Product See Section 8 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I

V O

D N A Iso-Pads

C O M T S www.vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 PONEN vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Vinyl Chloride Elastomeric Resin • FOR LIGHT LOADS OF 20 TO 120 PSI (1.4 TO 8.4 kgf/cm2)

UNPATTERNED L

NATURAL FREQUENCY vs. TEMP. AT 80 PSI (5.6 kgf/cm2) W T -50 °F (-45.6°C) fn = 24 Hz Room Temperature fn = 40 Hz +230°F (110°C) fn = 24 Hz COEFFICIENT OF FRICTION: .8

NATURAL FREQUENCY VS. LOAD (PSI) (STATIC) LOAD DEFLECTION VS. RECOVERY

120 120

100 100

80 80

60 60

LOADING 40 40 FREQUENCY IN Hz FREQUENCY APPLIED LOAD IN PSI 20 20 UNLOADING

0 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 0.4.8 1.6 2.4 3.2 4.0 4.8 5.6 6.4 7.2 STATIC LOAD IN PSI DEFLECTION IN PERCENT OF ORIGINAL THICKNESS LOAD VS. DEFLECTION TRANSMISSIBILITY VS. FREQUENCY RATIO

1200

1000 8.0 20 15 4.0 GAIN 800 10 2.0 5 600 1.0 0 .50 5

400 10 SCALE IN dB

TRANSMISSIBILITY .250 LOSS

STATIC LOAD IN PSI STATIC 15 .125 200 20 .062 25 .031 30 0 .025 .050 .075 .100 .10 1.0 10 fo(Applied Frequency) DEFLECTION IN INCHES RATIO OF COLOR: Orange fn(Natural Frequency) TEMPERATURE RANGE: -50°F to +230°F (-45.6°C to 110°C) Pad Dimensions Pad Area W LT Catalog Number sq. in. sq. cm in. mm in. mm in. mm V10R 9-00 22 558 23 584 506 3265

V10R 9-11 1 25.4 1 25.4 1 6.5 .25 6.4 V10R 9-22 2 50.8 2 50.8 +.062 +1.58 4 25.8

-.000 0 V10R 9-33 3 76.2 3 76.2 9 58.1

V10R 9-44 4 101.6 4 101.6 16 103.2

8-4 Rev: 11-1-11 SS Buy Product See Section 8 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I

V O

D N A Square Rubber Mounts

C O M T S www.vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 PONEN vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Natural Rubber (55-60 Shore A Black) • 100% RUBBER • HOLE FOR EASY INSTALLATION • GREAT FOR IMPACT LOADS E

ØD

t1 t Metric

E L t t1 D Max. Load Catalog Number mm mm mm mm mm kgf (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) (lbf)

50 50 20 11 150 V10R79MPA05020 — (1.97) (1.97) (1.79) (1.43) (331) 25 200 V10R79MPA07025 (.98) (441) 70 70 30 21 29 300 V10R79MPA07030 (2.76) (2.76) (1.18) (.83) (1.14) (661) 35 400 V10R79MPA07035 (1.38) (882) 80 80 35 35 600 — V10R79MPA08035 (3.15) (3.15) (1.38) (1.38) (1323)

30 25 38 900 V10R79MPA10030 100 100 (1.18) (.98) (1.50) (1984) (3.94) (3.94) 60 40 1500 — V10R79MPA10060 (2.36) (1.57) (3307)

PERFORMANCE GRAPHS Load (kgf) 350 Load (kgf) 16000 V10R79MPA10060 1400 300 V10R79MPA07035

1200 250 V10R79MPA07030 1000 V10R79MPA10030 200 V10R79MPA07025 800 150 V10R79MPA05020 600 V10R79MPA08035

100 400

50 200

0 123456 0 12345678910

8-5 Rev: 5-12-11 SS Buy Product See Section 8 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I

V O

D N A Pads – Single Ribbed C O M TS P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax:516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Natural Black Rubber (Ozone-Resistant Rubber) • VERSATILE • SMALL FOOTPRINT New Fig. 1 V10R78MS300-10.. t 280 (11.02) 280 (11.02)

Fig. 2 V10R78MS400-12N

380 (14.96) Metric

380 (14.96)

Dimensions in ( ) are in.

t Compression Admissible Figure Catalog Number** Thickness Load Temporary Overload Number mm (in.) N/cm2 (lb./in.2) %

V10R78MS300-10N 1 10 (.39) 26 (38) *V10R78MS300-10CR 30

V10R78MS400-12N 2 12 (.47) 30 (44)

*The material for this item is Neoprene. **To be discontinued when present stock is depleted.

ASSEMBLY EXAMPLES

GLUED MOUNTING: SPLIT MOUNTING: Attachment using glue. One single pad can be used by DIRECT MOUNTING: METAL BASEPLATE MOUNTING splitting it, to insulate the different Free installation of the legs of a machine. machine on the pad simply by resting it there.

METAL PADS METAL

8-6 Rev: 5-9-11 SS Buy Product See Section 8 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I

V O

D N A Pads – Paired Ribbed C O M TS P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Natural Black Rubber (Ozone-Resistant Rubber) • VERSATILE • SMALL FOOTPRINT

t Metric

The serrated sides of the pads enable the pads to ﬁt together so that they generate greater continuity to help insulate vibrations better. PADS (matched antivibratory pads), compress simultaneously, whether or not they are of the same hardness.

Admissible H W t Compression Temporary Catalog Number* Height Width Thickness Load Made up of mm (in.) mm (in.) mm (in.) N/cm2 (lb./in.2) Overload %

V10R78MD400-16 380 (14.96) 380 (14.96) 16 (.63) 35 (51) 30 (2x) V10R78MS400-12N

*To be discontinued when present stock is depleted.

8-7 Rev: 5-9-11 SS Buy Product See Section 8 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I

V O

D N A Silicone Foam Pads

C O M TS P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Silicone Foam • OUTSTANDING DURABILITY • LOW COMPRESSION SET • DURABLE IN ANY WEATHER • FOR OUTSIDE USE • SHOCK ABSORBER • LOW FLAMMABILITY New

T L Metric TEMPERATURE RANGE: -40°C to 200°C (-40°F to 392°F)

W L T Catalog Number Width Length Thickness Color

V10Z62MNPGRN0500 500 (19.69) 450 (17.72) 3 (.118) Green V10Z62MNPGRN2000 2000 (78.7)

V10Z62MNPWTE0500 500 (19.69) 300 (11.81) 6 (.236) White V10Z62MNPWTE1000 1000 (39.4)

CHARACTERISTICS: COMPRESSION SET Speciﬁc Gravity 0.26 50 Tensile Strength (Mega Pascal) 0.32 Elongation (%) 73 40 Young's Modulus (Kilo Pascal) 269.5

Speciﬁc Heat (Joule/g •°K) 1.15

Thermal Conductivity (Watt/m •°K) 0.06 30 Speciﬁc Volume Resistance Ratio (Ω •cm) 3.8x1014 Dielectric Breakdown Strength (kV/mm) 3.8 20 Toluene X Acetone X Methanol O COMPRESSION (%) 10 Distilled H20 O Chemical 1 Resistance Fuel X Lubricant X 0.2 NaCI (10%) O Silicone Chloro- Poly- Urethane Foam prene ethylene Foam HCI (10%) O Foam NaOH (5%) O 1. Compress the materials by 50% and leave X = Has a reaction compressed for 22 hours in 70°C (158°F). O = No reaction 2. Release compression and leave subject in normal temperature for 30 minutes.

8-8 Rev: 1-22-08 SS Buy Product See Section 8 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Silicone Gel Pads

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Silicone Gel • LOW RESONANCE MAGNIFICATION • OZONE, UV AND CHEMICAL RESISTANT • ABSORBS SHOCKS • REDUCES NOISE

Ø9 Ø10 New (.354) (.394)

100 (3.94)

Metric

2 (.08)

5 100 (.197) (3.94)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch

TEMPERATURE RANGE: -40°C to +200°C (-40°F to +392°F) Optimum Resonance Resonance Recommended Deflection Catalog Number Load Point Magnification Frequency Color

mm (in.) I O N 38 T S E C kgf/pad(lb./pad) Hz dB Hz

1.4 to 3 V10Z62MSN02 0.5 to 2 (1.1 to 4.4) 27 to 21 6 from 38 (.06 to .12) Yellow 1.5 to 2.5 V10Z62MSN05 2 to 5 (4.4 to 11.0) 29 to 23 8 from 40 (.06 to .10) Green 1.1 to 2.2 V10Z62MSN15 5 to 15 (11.0 to 33.1) 26 to 18 13 from 37 (.04 to .09) Orange

0.7 to 2 V10Z62MSN50 15 to 50 (33.1 to 110.2) 22 to 15 20 to 18 from 30 (.03 to .08) Blue

INSTALLATION • Divide for light load. Add for heavy load. • Make sure of total object load and then select optimum gel pad. OBJECT BOARD (Example) • For 0.3 kgf (.66 lb.) load, add a board for extra weight or divide V10Z62MSN02 to reduce projections. • For 10 kgf (22.1 lb.) load, divide GEL PAD V10Z62MSN15 into pieces. • For 80 kgf (176.4 lb.) load, use two of V10Z62MSN50 and divide if needed.

8-9 Buy Product See Section 8 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Silicone Gel Tape & Chips

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Silicone Gel • LOW COMPRESSION SET • HIGH CHEMICAL RESISTANCE • HIGH WEATHER RESISTANCE • EFFECTIVE IN NARROW SPACE ADHESIVE AGENT ON ONE SIDE New

TL Fig. 1

ADHESIVE AGENT ON ONE SIDE Metric L

WT Fig. 2

TEMPERATURE RANGE: -40°C to 100°C (-40°F to 212°F) W L T Catalog Number Width Length Thickness • Fig. 1 TAPE

S E C T I O N 38 T S E C V10Z62MGT1 10 (.394) 1 (.039) V10Z62MGT2 20 (.787)

V10Z62MGT3 10 (.394) 1000 2 (.079) (39.4) V10Z62MGT4 20 (.787)

V10Z62MGT5 10 (.394) 3 (.118) V10Z62MGT6 20 (.787) • Fig. 2 CHIPS* V10Z62MGC1 3 (.118) 10 (.394) 10 (.394) V10Z62MGC2 5 (.197)

V10Z62MGC3 3 (.118)

V10Z62MGC4 15 (.591) 15 (.591) 5 (.197)

V10Z62MGC5 10 (.394)

V10Z62MGC6 3 (.118)

V10Z62MGC7 20 (.787) 20 (.787) 5 (.197)

V10Z62MGC8 10 (.394)

*Priced per sheet (25 chips per sheet) NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch.

8-10 SECTION 9 Buy Product See Section 9 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Couplings – Neo-Flex – Short C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Hubs – 303 Stainless Steel • MOLDED NEOPRENE CENTER • SHAFT-TO SHAFT INSULATION Center – Molded Neoprene, Durometer 73 • FAIRLOC® AND PIN TYPE HUBS L TORSIONAL VIBRATION ISOLATION 1/4 • L 1 L 2 (6.4) 1-1/4 (31.8) SPOT DRILL SET SCREW 11/16 13/16 A D1 1 A2 D2 (17.5) (20.6) 13/16 O.D. O.D. 11/16 D1 A1 A2 D2 (17.5) (20.6) O.D. O.D.

1/4 L (6.4) 1-1/4 (31.8) L 1 L 2 SPOT DRILL SET SCREW

11/16 13/16 11/16 13/16 D1 A1 A2 D2 (17.5) (20.6) D1 A1 A2 D2 (17.5) (20.6) O.D. O.D. O.D. O.D.

Fig 1. FairLoc® Type Hub Fig 2. Pin Type Hub

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. MISALIGNMENT COMPENSATION Ribbed Smooth Style Style Max. Angular Offset 5° 1° Max. Lateral Offset .010 (0.25) .005 (0.13)

Fig. 1 Fairloc® Type Hub

A1 A2 L D1 D L1 L2 Max. Catalog Number Bore Bore 2 Overall Cap Hub Hub Hub Hub Length Torque +.001 +.001 Screw Dia. Dia. Length Length ± 1/64 oz. in. (N • m) Ribbed Style Smooth Style (+0.025) (+0.025) (± 0.4) V50FSR-0303 V50FSS-0303 .1200 (3.048) .1200 (3.048) .440 (11.18) .440 (11.18) .257 (6.53) .257 (6.53) 1.264 (32.1) #2-56 100 (0.71) V50FSR-0304 V50FSS-0304 .1250 (3.175) V50FSR-0404 V50FSS-0404 .1250 (3.175) .440 (11.18) .257 (6.53) 1.264 (32.1) #2-56 V50FSR-0406 V50FSS-0406 .1250 (3.175) .1875 (4.763) .440 (11.18) .495 (12.57) .257 (6.53) .257 (6.53) 1.264 (32.1) #2-56 120 (0.85) V50FSR-0408 V50FSS-0408 .2500 (6.35) .610 (15.49) .328 (8.33) 1.335 (33.9) #2-56 / #4-40 V50FSR-0606 V50FSS-0606 .1875 (4.763) .495 (12.57) .257 (6.53) 1.264 (32.1) #2-56 .1875 (4.763) .495 (12.57) .257 (6.53) 150 (1.06) V50FSR-0608 V50FSS-0608 .2500 (6.35) .610 (15.49) .295 (7.49) 1.302 (33.1) #2-56 / #4-40 V50FSR-0808 V50FSS-0808 .2500 (6.35) .2500 (6.35) .610 (15.49) .610 (15.49) .295 (7.49) .295 (7.49) 1.330 (33.8) #4-40 180 (1.27)

Fig. 2 Pin Type Hub A A 1 2 D D Max. Catalog Number Bore Bore 1 2 Set Hub Hub Torque +.0005 +.0005 Screw I O N 9 T S E C Dia. Dia. oz. in. (N • m) Ribbed Style Smooth Style (+0.013) (+0.013) V50PSR-0303 V50PSS-0303 .1200 (3.048) .1200 (3.048) 5/16 (7.94) 5/16 (7.94) #2-56 100 (0.71) V50PSR-0304 V50PSS-0304 .1248 (3.17) V50PSR-0404 V50PSS-0404 .1248 (3.17) 5/16 (7.94) #2-56 V50PSR-0406 V50PSS-0406 .1248 (3.17) .1873 (4.757) 5/16 (7.94) 3/8 (9.53) #2-56 / #4-40 120 (0.85) V50PSR-0408 V50PSS-0408 .2498 (6.345) 1/2 (12.7) #2-56 / #6-32 V50PSR-0606 V50PSS-0606 .1873 (4.757) 3/8 (9.53) #4-40 .1873 (4.757) 3/8 (9.53) 150 (1.06) V50PSR-0608 V50PSS-0608 .2498 (6.345) 1/2 (12.7) #4-40 / #6-32 V50PSR-0808 V50PSS-0808 .2498 (6.345) .2498 (6.345) 1/2 (12.7) 1/2 (12.7) #6-32 180 (1.27)

Other bore sizes and combinations available on special order.

9-2 Buy Product See Section 9 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Couplings – Neo-Flex – Short C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Hubs – 303 Stainless Steel • MOLDED NEOPRENE CENTER • SHAFT-TO-SHAFT INSULATION Center – Molded Neoprene, Durometer 73 • TORSIONAL VIBRATION ISOLATION • FAIRLOC® AND PIN TYPE HUBS 6.3 6.3 (.25) L 31.8 (.25) (1.25) SPOT DRILL l1 l2 SET SCREW

Ø17.5 Ø17.5 D1 d1 d2 D2 (9.69) D1 d1 d2 D2 (.69) Ø20.6 Ø20.6 (.81) (.81)

Ribbed Style Ribbed Style 6.3 (.25) L 6.3 31.8 (.25) SPOT DRILL l1 l2 (1.25) SET SCREW Ø17.5 D1 d1 d2 D2 (.69) Ø17.5 Ø20.6 D d d D (.69) (.81) 1 1 2 2 Ø20.6 (.81)

Smooth Style Smooth Style Metric Fig. 1 Fairloc Type Hub Fig. 2 Pin Type Hub NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch. MISALIGNMENT COMPENSATION Ribbed Smooth Style Style Max. Angular Offset 5° 1° Max. Lateral Offset 0.25 (.010) 0.13 (.005)

Fig. 1 Fairloc® Hub Type

d1 d2 L Catalog Number D1 D2 l1 l2 Overall Max. Bore Bore Length Cap Torque Hub Hub Hub Hub Screw +.0.025 +0.025 Dia. Dia. Length Length ± 0.4 N • m (oz. in.) Ribbed Style Smooth Style (+.0010) (+.0010) (± .016) V50FSRM0303 V50FSSM0303 3 (.12) 11 (.43) 11 (.43) 7 (.28) 33.1 (1.30) M2 V50FSRM0304 V50FSSM0304 4 (.16) 11 (.43) 12.5 (.49) 7 (.28) 33.1 (1.30) M2 3 (.12) 7 (.28) 0.71 (100) V50FSRM0305 V50FSSM0305 5 (.20) 11 (.43) 16 (.63) 7.5 (.30) 33.6 (1.32) M2/M2.5 V50FSRM0306 V50FSSM0306 6 (.24) 12.5 (.49) 12.5 (.49) 7.5 (.30) 33.6 (1.32) M2/M2.5 V50FSRM0404 V50FSSM0404 4 (.16) 12.5 (.49) 7 (.28) 33.1 (1.30) V50FSRM0405 V50FSSM0405 4 (.16) 5 (.20) 12.5 (.49) 16 (.63) 7 (.28) 7.5 (.30) 33.6 (1.32) M2.5 0.85 (120) V50FSRM0406 V50FSSM0406 6 (.24) 16 (.63) 7.5 (.30) 33.6 (1.32) V50FSRM0505 V50FSSM0505 5 (.20) 5 (.20) 16 (.63) 16 (.63) 7.5 (.30) 7.5 (.30) 34.1 (1.34) M2.5 1.06 (150) V50FSRM0506 V50FSSM0506 6 (.24) V50FSRM0606 V50FSSM0606 6 (.24) 6 (.24) 16 (.63) 16 (.63) 7.5 (.30) 7.5 (.30) 34.1 (1.34) M2.5 1.27 (180) NOTE: Fairloc® hubs require controlled shaft tolerances. Suggested tolerance according to g6, h6 or h7.

Fig. 2 Pin Type Hub

S E C T I O N 9 T S E C d d 1 2 D D Catalog Number Bore Bore 1 2 Set Max. Hub Hub Torque +.0.013 +0.013 Dia. Dia. Screw N • m (oz. in.) Ribbed Style Smooth Style (+.0005) (.0005) V50PSRM0303 V50PSSM0303 3 (.12) 7.9 (.31) V50PSRM0304 V50PSSM0304 3 (.12) 4 (.16) 7.9 (.31) 9.5 (.37) M2 0.71 (100) V50PSRM0306 V50PSSM0306 6 (.24) 12.7 (.50) V50PSRM0404 V50PSSM0404 4 (.16) 9.5 (.37) 4 (.16) 9.5 (.37) M2 0.85 (120) V50PSRM0406 V50PSSM0406 6 (.24) 12.7 (.50) V50PSRM0606 V50PSSM0606 6 (.24) 6 (.24) 12.7 (.50) 7.9 (.31) M3 1.27 (180)

Other bore sizes and combinations available on special order.

9-3 Buy Product See Section 9 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Couplings – Neo-Flex – Long

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Hubs – 303 Stainless Steel • MOLDED NEOPRENE CENTER • SHAFT-TO SHAFT INSULATION Center – Molded Neoprene, Durometer 73 • FAIRLOC® AND PIN TYPE HUBS L • TORSIONAL VIBRATION ISOLATION L 9/16 L 1 (14.3) 2 13/16 D2 11/16 (20.6) D1 A1 A2 (17.5) O.D. O.D.

L L 9/16 L 1 (14.3) 2 13/16 11/16 A D2 (20.6) D1 A1 2 (17.5) O.D. O.D.

Fig 1. FairLoc® Type Hub 1/4 1/4 (6.4) 2-1/2 (6.4) (63.5) Fig 1. FairLoc® Type Hub Fig 2. Pin Type Hub SET 9/16 SPOT DRILL SCREW (14.3) 11/16 13/16 D2 D1 A1 A2 (17.5) (20.6) O.D. O.D.

1/4 1/4 (6.4) 2-1/2 (6.4) (63.5) SET 9/16 SPOT DRILL NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. SCREW (14.3) MISALIGNMENT COMPENSATION 11/16 13/16 D2 Ribbed Smooth D1 A1 d2 (17.5) (20.6) O.D. O.D. Style Style Max. Angular Offset 15° 8° Fig 2. Pin Type Hub Max. Lateral Offset .015 (0.38) .010 (0.25)

Fig. 1 Fairloc® Type Hub A A L 1 2 D Max. Catalog Number Bore Bore D1 2 L1 L2 Overall Cap Hub Hub Hub Hub Length Torque +.001 +.001 Screw Dia. Dia. Length Length ± 1/64 oz. in. (N • m) Ribbed Style Smooth Style (+0.025) (+0.025) (0.4) V50FLR-0303 V50FLS-0303 .1200 (3.048) .1200 (3.048) .440 (11.18) .440 (11.18) .257 (6.53) .257 (6.53) 2.514 (63.9) #2-56 100 (0.71) V50FLR-0304 V50FLS-0304 .1250 (3.175) V50FLR-0404 V50FLS-0404 .1250 (3.175) .440 (11.18) .257 (6.53) 2.514 (63.9) #2-56 V50FLR-0406 V50FLS-0406 .1250 (3.175) .1875 (4.763) .440 (11.18) .495 (12.57) .257 (6.53) .257 (6.53) 2.514 (63.9) #2-56 120 (0.85) V50FLR-0408 V50FLS-0408 .2500 (6.35) .610 (15.49) .328 (8.33) 2.585 (65.7) #2-56 / #4-40 V50FLR-0606 V50FLS-0606 .1875 (4.763) .495 (12.57) .257 (6.53) 2.514 (63.9) #2-56 .1875 (4.763) .495 (12.57) .257 (6.53) 150 (1.06) V50FLR-0608 V50FLS-0608 .2500 (6.35) .610 (15.49) .295 (7.49) 2.552 (64.8) #2-56 / #4-40 V50FLR-0808 V50FLS-0808 .2500 (6.35) .2500 (6.35) .610 (15.49) .610 (15.49) .295 (7.49) .295 (7.49) 2.590 (65.8) #4-40 180 (1.27)

Fig. 2 Pin Type Hub

S E C T I O N 9 T S E C A A 1 2 D D Max. Catalog Number Bore Bore 1 2 Set Hub Hub Torque +.0005 +.0005 Screw Dia. Dia. oz. in. (N • m) Ribbed Style Smooth Style (+0.013) (+0.013) V50PLR-0303 V50PLS-0303 .1200 (3.048) .1200 (3.048) 5/16 (7.94) 5/16 (7.94) #2-56 100 (0.71) V50PLR-0304 V50PLS-0304 .1248 (3.17) V50PLR-0404 V50PLS-0404 .1248 (3.17) 5/16 (7.94) #2-56 V50PLR-0406 V50PLS-0406 .1248 (3.17) .1873 (4.757) 5/16 (7.94) 3/8 (9.53) #2-56 / #4-40 120 (0.85) V50PLR-0408 V50PLS-0408 .2498 (6.345) 1/2 (12.7) #2-56 / #6-32 V50PLR-0606 V50PLS-0606 .1873 (4.757) 3/8 (9.53) #4-40 .1873 (4.757) 3/8 (9.53) 150 (1.06) V50PLR-0608 V50PLS-0608 .2498 (6.345) 1/2 (12.7) #4-40 / #6-32 V50PLR-0808 V50PLS-0808 .2498 (6.345) .2498 (6.345) 1/2 (12.7) 1/2 (12.7) #6-32 180 (1.27)

Other bore sizes and combinations available on special order.

9-4 Buy Product See Section 9 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Couplings – Neo-Flex – Long

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Hubs – 303 Stainless Steel • MOLDED NEOPRENE CENTER • SHAFT-TO-SHAFT INSULATION Center – Molded Neoprene, Durometer 73 • TORSIONAL VIBRATION ISOLATION ® Fig. 1 Fairloc Type Hub • FAIRLOC AND PIN TYPE HUBS L 14.3 l l1 (.56) 2 Ø20.6 D2 (.81) D1 d1 d2 Ø17.5 (.69)

Ribbed Style L l 14.3 l2 1 (.56) Ø20.6 D2 (.81) D1 d1 d2 Ø17.5 (.69)

Smooth Style Fig. 2 Pin Type Hub Metric 6.3 6.3 (.25) 63.5 (.25) (2.50) SET 14.3 SPOT DRILL SCREW (.56) Ø20.6 D2 D1 d1 d2 Ø17.5 (.81) (.69)

Ribbed Style 6.3 6.3 (.25) 63.5 (.25) (2.50) NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch. SET 14.3 SPOT DRILL MISALIGNMENT COMPENSATION SCREW (.56) Fairloc Type Hub Pin Type Hub Ø20.6 D2 Ribbed Smooth Ribbed Smooth D1 d1 d2 Ø17.5 (.81) Style Style Style Style (.69) Max. Angular Offset 5° 1° 15° 8° Max. Lateral Offset 0.38 (.015) 0.25 (.010) 0.38 (.015) 0.25 (.010) Smooth Style Fig. 1 Fairloc® Type Hub L Catalog Number d1 d2 D1 D2 l1 l2 Overall Cap Max. Bore Bore Torque Hub Hub Hub Hub Length Screw Ribbed Style Smooth Style +.0.025 (+.0010) +.0.025 (+.0010) Dia. Dia. Length Length ± 0.4 (± .016) N • m (oz. in.) V50FLRM0303 V50FLSM0303 3 (.12) 11 (.43) 11 (.43) 7 (.28) 64.8 (2.55) M2 V50FLRM0304 V50FLSM0304 4 (.16) 11 (.43) 12.5 (.49) 7 (.28) 64.8 (2.55) M2 3 (.12) 7 (.28) 0.71 (100) V50FLRM0305 V50FLSM0305 5 (.20) 11 (.43) 16 (.63) 7.5 (.30) 65.3 (2.57) M2/M2.5 V50FLRM0306 V50FLSM0306 6 (.24) 12.5 (.49) 12.5 (.49) 7.5 (.30) 65.3 (2.57) M2/M2.5 V50FLRM0404 V50FLSM0404 4 (.16) 12.5 (.49) 7 (.28) 64.8 (2.55) V50FLRM0405 V50FLSM0405 4 (.16) 5 (.20) 12.5 (.49) 16 (.63) 7 (.28) 7.5 (.30) 65.3 (2.57) M2.5 0.85 (120) V50FLRM0406 V50FLSM0406 6 (.24) 16 (.63) 7.5 (.30) 65.3 (2.57) V50FLRM0505 V50FLSM0505 5 (.20) 5 (.20) 16 (.63) 16 (.63) 7.5 (.30) 7.5 (.30) 65.8 (2.59) M2.5 1.06 (150) V50FLRM0506 V50FLSM0506 6 (.24) V50FLRM0606 V50FLSM0606 6 (.24) 6 (.24) 16 (.63) 16 (.63) 7.5 (.30) 7.5 (.30) 65.8 (2.59) M2.5 1.27 (180) I O N 9 T S E C NOTE: Fairloc® hubs require controlled shaft tolerances. Suggested tolerance according to g6, h6 or h7. Fig. 2 Pin Type Hub Catalog Number d1 d2 D1 D2 Set Max. Bore Bore Hub Hub Torque Ribbed Style Smooth Style +.0.013 (+.0005) +.0.013 (+.0005) Dia. Dia. Screw N • m (oz. in.) V50PLRM0303 V50PLSM0303 3 (.12) 7.9 (.31) V50PLRM0304 V50PLSM0304 3 (.12) 4 (.16) 7.9 (.31) 9.5 (.37) M2 0.71 (100) V50PLRM0306 V50PLSM0306 6 (.24) 12.7 (.50) V50PLRM0404 V50PLSM0404 4 (.16) 9.5 (.37) 4 (.16) 9.5 (.37) M2 0.85 (120) V50PLRM0406 V50PLSM0406 6 (.24) 12.7 (.50) V50PLRM0606 V50PLSM0606 6 (.24) 6 (.24) 12.7 (.50) 12.7 (.50) M3 1.27 (180)

Other bore sizes and combinations available on special order. 9-5 Buy Product See Section 9 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Couplings – Flexible – Spline Type

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Spline – Hytrel or Polyurethane • HYTREL SPLINE FOR HEAVY-DUTY Hub – Zinc Alloy Die Casting (Sizes 16, 20, 25) – Sintered Metal (Size 32)

L T (2 at 90°) D M (TYP)

B O.D.

K K E 2

FEATURES: MISALIGNMENT COMPENSATION TEMPERATURE RANGE: Hytrel -22°F to +212°F • High rpm Max. Angular Offset – 2° (-30°C to +100°C) Electrically Isolated Max. Lateral Offset – .008 (0.2) Polyurethane -4°F to +140°F • ° ° • Dampens Shock & Vibration (-20 C to +60 C) • No Lubrication

Rated Torque Coupling lb. in. (N • m) Max. Size rpm Hytrel Polyurethane

16 6.6 (0.75) 4.4 (0.5) 24000 20 13.3 (1.5) 8.8 (1) 19000 25 20.4 (2.3) 13.3 (1.5) 15000 32 39.8 (4.5) 26.6 (3) 12000 NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. Catalog NumberΔ B Bore +.001 L E Spline T Max. O.D. DK M Complete Hub Spline -.000 Length Spline Bore Set Bore Coupling Only Only +0.025 Length Screw ** ( 0 ) 5/8 .250 1-1/16 15/32 5/16 7/16 1/8 15/64 .315 V 5Z2-1608 V 5D28-1608 V 5R2-16 (15.9) (6.35) (27) (11.9) (7.9) (11.1) (3.2) (6) (8) .250 V 5Z2-2008 V 5D28-2008 #4-40 25/32 (6.35) 1-11/32 19/32 25/64 35/64 5/32 5/16 .394 V 5R2-20 (19.8) .375 (34.1) (15.1) (9.9) (13.9) (4) (7.9) (10) V 5Z2-2012 V 5D28-2012 (9.53) .250 V 5Z2-2508 V 5D28-2508 1 (6.35) 1-39/64 45/64 15/32 21/32 13/64 25/64 .472 V 5R2-25 (25.4) .375 (40.9) (17.9) (11.9) (16.7) (5.2) (9.9) (12) V 5Z2-2512 V 5D28-2512 (9.53) #6-32 .375 V 5Z2-3212 V 5D28-3212 I O N 9 T S E C 1-1/4 (9.53) 1-57/64 53/64 9/16 25/32 15/64 15/32 .591 V 5R2-32 (31.8) .500 (48) (21) (14.3) (19.8) (6) (11.9) (15) V 5Z2-3216 V 5D28-3216 (12.7) **Other bore diameter combinations and bore sizes not exceeding the maximum listed above are available on special order. Δ To complete the Catalog Number, specify: 8 for a Polyurethane Spline 9 for a Hytrel Spline Example: For a Complete Coupling with a Polyurethane Spline, specify Catalog Number V 5Z28-2008.

9-6 Buy Product See Section 9 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Couplings – Flexible – Spline Type

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Spline – Hytrel or Polyurethane • HYTREL SPLINE FOR HIGH-TORQUE AND Hub – Zinc Alloy Die Casting (Sizes 16, 20, 25) HIGH-TEMPERATURE APPLICATIONS – Sintered Metal (Size 32)

T (2 at 90°) L S w (TYP)

d D

l l 1 l 1 2 2 1 The projections are shown per ISO convention. Metric FEATURES: MISALIGNMENT COMPENSATION TEMPERATURE RANGE: Hytrel -30°C to +100°C • High rpm Max. Angular Offset – 2° (-22°F to +212°F) Electrically Isolated Max. Lateral Offset – 0.2 (.008) Polyurethane -20°C to +60°C • ° ° • Dampens Shock & Vibration (-4 F to +140 F) • Blind Assembly • No Lubrication Rated Torque Coupling N • m ( lb. in.) Max. Size rpm Hytrel Polyurethane

16 0.75 (6.6) 0.5 (4.4) 24000 20 1.5 (13.3) 1 (8.8) 19000 25 2.3 (20.4) 1.5 (13.3) 15000 32 4.5 (39.8) 3 (26.6) 12000 NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch. Catalog NumberΔ d* Spline T Max. DLBore S w Set Complete Hub Spline l1 l2 Bore Bore Coupling Only Only H8 Screw ** V 5Z2M1603 V 5D28M1603 3 (.12) V 5Z2M1604 V 5D28M1604 4 (.16) 16 27 12 8 11 3 6 8 V 5Z2M1605 V 5D28M1605 V 5R2M16 5 (.20) (.63) (1.06) (.47) (.31) (.43) (.12) (.24) (.31) V 5Z2M1606 V 5D28M1606 6 (.24) V 5Z2M1608 V 5D28M1608 8 (.31) M3 V 5Z2M2005 V 5D28M2005 5 (.20) V 5Z2M2006 V 5D28M2006 20 6 (.24) 34 15 10 14 4 8 10 V 5R2M20 V 5Z2M2008 V 5D28M2008 (.79) 8 (.31) (1.34) (.59) (.39) (.55) (.16) (.31) (.39) V 5Z2M2010 V 5D28M2010 10 (.39) V 5Z2M2506 V 5D28M2506 6 (.24) V 5Z2M2508 V 5D28M2508 25 8 (.31) 41 18 12 17 5 10 12 V 5R2 M25 I O N 9 T S E C V 5Z2M2510 V 5D28M2510 (.98) 10 (.39) (1.61) (.71) (.47) (.67) (.20) (.39) (.47) V 5Z2M2512 V 5D28M2512 12 (.47) M4 V 5Z2M3208 V 5D28M3208 8 (.31) 12 V 5Z2M3210 V 5D28M3210 32 10 (.39) 48 21 14 20 6 (.47) 15 V 5R2M32 V 5Z2M3212 V 5D28M3212 (1.26) 12 (.47) (1.89) (.83) (.55) (.79) (.24) 14 (.59) V 5Z2M3214 V 5D28M3214 14 (.55) (.55) *Bore Tolerance: 3 mm +0.014 (.12 +.0006) **Other bore diameter combinations and bore sizes not exceeding 4, 5 & 6 mm +0.018 (.16, .20 & .24 +.0007) the maximum listed above are available on special order. 8 & 10 mm +0.022 (.31 & .39 +.0009) 12 & 14 mm +0.027 (.47 & .55 +.001) Δ To complete the Catalog Number, specify: 8 for a Polyurethane Spline 9 for a Hytrel Spline Example: For a Complete Coupling with a Hytrel Spline, specify Catalog Number V 5Z29M1604

9-7 Buy Product See Section 9 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Couplings – Flexible – Spider Type

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Hubs – Aluminum • SPLIT HUB Spider – NBR Rubber – 86, 92 or 98 Durometer • PRELOADED RUBBER SPIDER

L CAP SCREWS HUB SUPPLIED

B O.D.

S DC SPIDER

COMPLETE COUPLING CATALOG NUMBER DESIGNATION: FEATURES: Precision machined hub with integral fasteners & prestressed spiders which (Consists of two hubs and a spider) eliminate backlash. Allows limited V 5 Z 2 7 – axial motion.

Coupling Size Code MISALIGNMENT COMPENSATION Max. Angular Offset – 1° Spider Durometer Code

EXAMPLE: V 5Z27-201092 is a 25/32 (19.8) O.D. coupling with a .3125 (7.9) bore & a 92 durometer spider. NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. Coupling C D Max. L Distance Length Series D Overall Rated Axial (Ref. only) Between Through Torque Motion Length Flanges Bore V 5Z27-20… 25/32 (19.8) 1-3/16 (30.2) 25/64 (9.9) 7/16 (11.1) See .030 (0.76) V 5Z27-30… 1-3/16 (30.2) 1-37/64 (40.1) 15/32 (11.9) 19/32 (15.1) Spider .040 (1.02) V 5Z27-40… 1-37/64 (40.1) 2-23/64 (59.9) 19/32 (15.1) 15/16 (23.8) Data .050 (1.27)

• HUB ONLY Coupling B Bore Cap Catalog Number O.D. +.001 (+0.025) S Size Code -.000 (+0.025) Screw V 5A27-2008 2008 .250 (6.35) 25/32 (19.8) .20 (5.1) #4-40 V 5A27-2010 2010 .3125 (7.94) V 5A27-3008 3008 .250 (6.35) V 5A27-3010 3010 1-3/16 (30.2) .3125 (7.94) .27 (6.9) #6-40 V 5A27-3012 3012 .375 (9.53) V 5A27-4012 4012 .375 (9.53) V 5A27-4016 4016 1-37/64 (40.1) .500 (12.7) .43 (10.9) #10-32 V 5A27-4020 4020 .625 (15.88)

S E C T I O N 9 T S E C • SPIDER ONLY Durometer Temp. Range Max. Rated Catalog Number O.D. Color Lateral Torque Code Maximum Operating Nonoperating Offset lb. in. (N • m) V 5R27-2086 86 Tan .007 (0.178) 19 (2.1) -58°F to +175°F -76°F to +248°F V 5R27-2092 25/32 (19.8) 92 Black .005 (0.127) 26 (2.9) (-50°C to +79°C) (-60°C to +120°C) V 5R27-2098 98 Rust .003 (0.076) 44 (5) V 5R27-3086 86 Tan .008 (0.203) 48 (5.4) -40°F to +194°F -58°F to +248°F V 5R27-3092 1-3/16 (30.2) 92 Black .006 (0.152) 66 (7.5) (-40°C t0 +90°C) (-50°C to +120°C) V 5R27-3098 98 Rust .004 (0.102) 110 (12.4) V 5R27-4086 86 Tan .006 (0.152) 62 (7) -22°F to +194°F -48°F to +248°F V 5R27-4092 1-37/64 (40.1) 92 Black .004 (0.102) 88 (9.9) (-30°C to +90°C) (-44°C to +120°C) V 5R27-4098 98 Rust .002 (0.051) 150 (16.9)

9-8 Buy Product See Section 9 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Couplings – Flexible – Spider Type

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Hubs – Aluminum • SPLIT TYPE HUB Spider – NBR Rubber - 86, 92 or 98 Durometer • PRELOADED RUBBER SPIDER

L CAP SCREWS HUB SUPPLIED

d D

L1 C SPIDER

COMPLETE COUPLING Metric CATALOG NUMBER DESIGNATION: FEATURES: Precision machined hub with integral fasteners & prestressed spiders which (Consists of two hubs and a spider) eliminate backlash. Allows limited V 5 Z 2 7 M axial motion.

Coupling Size Code MISALIGNMENT COMPENSATION Max. Angular Offset – 1° Durometer Code

EXAMPLE: V 5Z27M200692 is a 20mm O.D. coupling with a 6mm bore & a 92 durometer spider. NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch.

C L1 Coupling L Distance Length Rated Max. Series D Overall Between Through Torque Axial (Ref. only) Length Flanges Bore Motion V 5Z27M20… 20 (.79) 30 (1.18) 10 (.39) 11 (.43) See 0.8 (.03) V 5Z27M30… 30 (1.18) 40 (1.57) 12 (.47) 15 (.59) Spider 1 (.04) V 5Z27M40… 40 (1.57) 60 (2.36) 15 (.59) 24 (.94) Data 1.2 (.05)

• HUB ONLY Coupling Catalog Number D d l Cap Size Code +0.025 1 Screw V 5A27M2005 2005 5 (.2) 20 5 V 5A27M2006 2006 6 (.24) M3 (.79) (.2) V 5A27M2008 2008 8 (.31) V 5A27M3006 3006 6 (.24) 30 7 V 5A27M3008 3008 8 (.31) M3 (1.18) (.28) V 5A27M3010 3010 10 (.39) V 5A27M4010 4010 10 (.39) 40 11 V 5A27M4012 4012 12 (.47) M4 (1.57) (.43) V 5A27M4016 4016 16 (.63)

S E C T I O N 9 T S E C • SPIDER ONLY Max. Durometer Temp. Range Rated Catalog Number D Color Lateral Torque Operating Maximum Code Nonoperating Offset N • m (lb. in.) V 5R27M2086 86 Tan 0.18 (.007) 2.2 (19.47) 20 -50°C to +80°C -60°C to +120°C V 5R27M2092 92 Black 0.13 (.005) 3 (26.55) (.79) (-58°F to +176°F) (-76°F to +248°F) V 5R27M2098 98 Rust 0.08 (.003) 5 (44.25) V 5R27M3086 86 Tan 0.21 (.008) 5.5 (48.68) 30 -40°C to +90°C -50°C to +120°C V 5R27M3092 92 Black 0.15 (.006) 7.5 (66.38) (1.18) (-40°F to +194°F) (-58°F to +248°F) V 5R27M3098 98 Rust 0.09 (.004) 12.5 (110.63) V 5R27M4086 86 Tan 0.14 (.006) 7 (61.96) 40 -30°C to +90°C -40°C to +120°C V 5R27M4092 92 Black 0.1 (.004) 10 (88.51) (1.57) (-22°F to +194°F) (-40°F to +248°F) V 5R27M4098 98 Rust 0.06 (.002) 17 (150.47)

9-9 Buy Product See Section 9 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Couplings – Flexible – Jaw Type

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Body – Sintered Iron • RUBBER SPIDER Spider – NBR Rubber – 80 Durometer

S C SPIDER

O.D.

BODY D SET L SCREW MISALIGNMENT COMPENSATION Max. Angular Offset – 1° Max. Lateral Offset – .015 (0.38) NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

C D Coupling L Rated Series Overall Distance Length Set H.P. O.D. Between Through Screw S Torque @ 1800 rpm (Reference Only) Length • Flanges Bore lb. in. (N m)

V 5Z 3-035.. 5/8 (15.9) 13/16 (20.6) 9/32 (7.1) 17/64 (6.7) #6 - 32 .13 (3.3) 3.5 (0.4) .10 V 5Z 3-050.. 1-5/64 (27.4) 1-23/32 (43.4) 15/32 (11.9) 5/8 (15.9) 1/4 - 20 .31 (7.9) 26.3 (3) .75 V 5Z 3-070.. 1-23/64 (34.5) 2 (50.8) 1/2 (12.7) 3/4 (19.1) 1/4 - 20 .38 (9.7) 43.2 (4.9) 1.20 V 5Z 3-075.. 1-3/4 (44.5) 2-1/8 (54) 1/2 (12.7) 13/16 (20.6) 1/4 - 20 .31 (7.9) 90.0 (10.2) 2.50 V 5Z 3-090.. 2-7/64 (53.6) 2-1/8 (54) 1/2 (12.7) 13/16 (20.6) 1/4 - 20 .44 (11.2) 144.0 (16.3) 4.00 NOTE: If couplings are run at 3600 rpm, H.P. values shown in table can be doubled.

Catalog Number B Approximate Windup Weight @ Max. @ Maximum Complete Body Spider Bore Size Bore Torque Coupling Only Only lb. (kg) deg. V 5Z 3-03504 V 5D 3-03504 1/8 (3.18) V 5Z 3-03506 V 5D 3-03506 3/16 (4.76) V 5Z 3-03508 V 5D 3-03508 V 5R 3-035 * 1/4 (6.35) .1 (0.05) 5.0 V 5Z 3-03510 V 5D 3-03510 5/16 (7.94) V 5Z 3-03512 V 5D 3-03512 3/8 (9.53) V 5Z 3-05008 V 5D 3-05008 1/4 (6.35) V 5Z 3-05010 V 5D 3-05010 5/16 (7.94) V 5Z 3-05012 V 5D 3-05012 V 5R 3-050 * 3/8 (9.53) .2 (0.09) 4.5 V 5Z 3-05014 V 5D 3-05014 7/16 (11.11) V 5Z 3-05016 V 5D 3-05016 1/2 (12.7) V 5Z 3-07012 V 5D 3-07012 3/8 (9.53) V 5Z 3-07014 V 5D 3-07014 V 5R 3-070 7/16 (11.11) .4 (0.18) 3.5 V 5Z 3-07016 V 5D 3-07016 1/2 (12.7) V 5Z 3-07508 V 5D 3-07508 1/4 (6.35)

V 5Z 3-07510 V 5D 3-07510 5/16 (7.94) I O N 9 T S E C V 5Z 3-07512 V 5D 3-07512 V 5R 3-075 3/8 (9.53) .8 (0.36) 4.7 V 5Z 3-07514 V 5D 3-07514 7/16 (11.11) V 5Z 3-07516 V 5D 3-07516 1/2 (12.7) V 5Z 3-09008 V 5D 3-09008 1/4 (6.35) V 5Z 3-09010 V 5D 3-09010 5/16 (7.94) V 5Z 3-09012 V 5D 3-09012 V 5R 3-090 3/8 (9.53) 1.2 (0.54) 3.2 V 5Z 3-09014 V 5D 3-09014 7/16 (11.11) V 5Z 3-09016 V 5D 3-09016 1/2 (12.7) NOTE: Complete coupling consists of two bodies plus spider.

* These spiders have four legs only.

9-10 Buy Product See Section 9 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Couplings – Flexible – Geargrip

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Sleeve – Neoprene with Ground O.D. Hub – Zinc Alloy Die Casting

S M

SET SCREW O.D. C B

K D L

FEATURES: • No Lubrication • Electrically Isolated • Dampens Shock & Vibration NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. Coupling Nominal H.P. @ Max. Angular Max. Lateral Max. Operating Size Torque 1750 rpm Offset Offset Speed Temperature lb. in. (N • m) 11 6 (0.7) .17 1° .015 (0.38) 18 12 (1.4) .33 1° .015 (0.38) -20°F to +160°F 3500 rpm 21 18 (2) .50 1°30' .020 (0.51) (-29°C to +71°C) 31 60 (6.8) 1.66 2° .025 (0.64)

Catalog Number B Bore O.D. L K Set Complete Hub Sleeve ±1/16 ±1/16 CD±1/16 M S +.002 (0.050) ± ± ± Screw Coupling Only Only -.001 (0.025) ( 1.6) ( 1.6) ( 1.6) V 5Z 1-1104 V 5D 1-1104 .125 (3.18) #6-32 V 5Z 1-1106 V 5D 1-1106 .188 (4.78) .78 1 .70 7/32 .56 1/32 1/8 V 5Z 1-1108 V 5D 1-1108 V 5R 1-11 .250 (6.35) (19.8) (25.4) (17.8) (5.6) (14.2) (0.8) (3.2) #8-32 V 5Z 1-1110 V 5D 1-1110 .3125 (7.94) V 5Z 1-1112 V 5D 1-1112 .375 (9.53) V 5Z 1-1810 V 5D 1-1810 .3125 (7.94) V 5Z 1-1812 V 5D 1-1812 .375 (9.53) 1.17 1-1/2 1.15 5/16 .90 3/64 5/32 V 5R 1-18 1/4-20 V 5Z 1-1814 V 5D 1-1814 .438 (11.13) (29.7) (38.1) (29.2) (7.9) (22.9) (1.2) (4) V 5Z 1-1816 V 5D 1-1816 .500 (12.7) V 5Z 1-2110 V 5D 1-2110 .3125 (7.94) V 5Z 1-2112 V 5D 1-2112 .375 (9.53) 1.17 2-1/4 1.15 5/16 1-19/32 1/16 5/32 V 5R 1-21 1/4-20 V 5Z 1-2114 V 5D 1-2114 .438 (11.13) (29.7) (57.2) (29.2) (7.9) (40.5) (1.6) (4)

V 5Z 1-2116 V 5D 1-2116 .500 (12.7) I O N 9 T S E C V 5Z 1-3112 V 5D 1-3112 .375 (9.53) 1.43 2-3/8 1.45 3/8 1-19/32 1/16 3/16 1/4-20 V 5Z 1-3114 V 5D 1-3114 V 5R 1-31 .438 (11.13) (36.3) (60.3) (36.8) (9.5) (40.5) (1.6) (4.8)

9-11 Buy Product See Section 9 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Couplings – Flexible "K" Type

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 MATERIAL: Hubs – Steel, Zinc Plated • A* Points Body – Polyurethane

A* Flats B

SET SCREW E Fig. 1 STANDARD HUB D

C Fig. 1

* A Flats A* Points B

SET SCREW E Fig. 2 INVERTED HUB D

C Fig. 2 OUTSTANDING HUB FEATURES UNIQUE, DURABLE ELEMENT • Annealed steel for maximum strength • Speeds up to 3600 rpm • Zinc plating to resist corrosion • Tough polyurethane material is strong, • Inside hub to decrease overall length flexible, cut- and tear- resistant • Rounded corners to prevent cutting • Unique configuration gives maximum flexibility • Precision swaged mechanical crimp • Generous radius for added strength • Accommodates standard size set screws • Ozone-proof Full wraparound design stays securely in hub • TEMPERATURE RANGE : -4°F to +140°F NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm. -20°C to +60°C Dimensions B Max. Bore Torque Max. Max. Catalog Number Fig. A* Set Capacity Angular Lateral No. +.002 Screw -.000 CDE lb.in. Offset Offset Flats Points +.051 (N•m) ( 0 ) .1875 V 5Z 7-10606 (4.76) .250 V 5Z 7-10808 55/64 1-1/8 (6.35) 11/16 1/16 1-3/16 3 3/32 1 #6-32 10° (21.8) (28.6) .312 (17.5) (1.6) (30.16) (0.3) (2.4) V 5Z 7-11010 (7.92) .375 V 5Z 7-11212 (9.53) .250 V 5Z 7-20808 (6.35)

.312 I O N 9 T S E C V 5Z 7-21010 (7.92) 1-5/8 1-7/8 .375 1 3/8 1-7/8 12 1/8 V 5Z 7-21212 #10-24 15° (41.3) (47.6) (9.53) (25.4) (9.5) (47.6) (1.4) (3.2) .438 V 5Z 7-21414 (11.13) .500 V 5Z 7-21616 2 (12.7) .375 V 5Z 7-31212 (9.53) 1-53/64 2-1/8 .438 1-1/8 7/16 2-1/4 28 3/16 V 5Z 7-31414 1/4-20 15° (46.4) (54) (11.13) (28.6) (11.1) (57.2) (3.2) (4.8) .500 V 5Z 7-31616 (12.7) 1-55/64 2-9/64 .500 1-1/8 3/8 2-7/16 40 1/8 V 5Z 7-41616 1/4-20 15° (47.2) (54.4) (12.7) (28.6) (9.5) (61.9) (4.5) (3.2) 9-12 Buy Product See Section 9 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Couplings – Flexible "K" Type

S* Flats d

SET SCREW L Fig. 1 STANDARD HUB H

D Fig. 1

S* Points S* Flats d

SET SCREW L Metric Fig. 2 INVERTED HUB H

D Fig. 2

OUTSTANDING HUB FEATURES UNIQUE, DURABLE ELEMENT • Annealed steel for maximum strength • Speeds up to 3600 rpm • Zinc plating to resist corrosion • Tough polyurethane material is strong, • Inside hub to decrease overall length flexible, cut- and tear- resistant • Rounded corners to prevent cutting • Unique configuration gives maximum flexibility • Precision swaged mechanical crimp • Generous radius for added strength • Accommodates standard size set screws • Ozone-proof • Full wraparound design stays securely in hub

TEMPERATURE RANGE: -20°C to +60°C NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are inch. -4°F to +140°F Dimensions Max. Torque Max. Fig. d Set Max. Catalog Number S* Bore Screw Capacity Angular Lateral No. DHL N•m Flats Points +0.05 Offset Offset (+.002) (lb.in.) 6 V 5Z 7M10606 (.24) 24 28 17.5 0.8 30 0.4 2.4 8 ° V 5Z 7M10808 1 (.94) (1.10) (.31) (.69) (.03) (1.18) M3 (3.54) 10 (.09) 10 V 5Z 7M11010 (.39) 10 V 5Z 7M21010 43 47 (.39) 25.4 8.5 48 M5 1.4 I O N 9 T S E C (1.69) (1.85) 14 (1.00) (.33) (1.89) (12.39) V 5Z 7M21414 (.55) 2 15° 3.2 14 (.13) V 5Z 7M41414 50 54 (.55) 28.5 9.8 59 3.2 M6 (1.97) (2.13) 16 (1.12) (.39) (2.32) (28.32) V 5Z 7M41616 (.63)

9-13 Buy Product See Section 9 Request Quote Visit Website

ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Couplings – Flexible – Bantam

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365 • MATERIAL: Hubs – Zinc Alloy Die Cast, Chromated Sleeve – Natsyn™ Polyisoprene Rubber

13/16 #10-24 X 1/4 13/16 (20.6) SET SCREW 3/8 5/32 (20.6) TWO EACH END DIA. (9.5) (4)

BORE

FEATURES: CAPACITY RATING: MISALIGNMENT COMPENSATION Isolates vibration up to 85% 1/20 hp @ 1725 rpm or 30 oz. in. Max. Angular Offset – 1-1/2° Sleeve provides electrical insulation (0.21 N •m) Max. Lateral Offset – .010 (0.25) NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

Catalog Number Bore Complete +.0015 (+0.038) Coupling Hub Only Sleeve Only -.0000 (+0.038) V 5Z25-104 V 5D25-104 1/8 (3.2) V 5Z25-106 V 5D25-106 3/16 (4.8) V 5R25-1 V 5Z25-108 V 5D25-108 1/4 (6.4) V 5Z25-110 V 5D25-110 5/16 (7.9) Couplings – Flexible – One-Piece • MATERIAL: Hubs – Steel • ONE-PIECE CONSTRUCTION Sleeves – Buna Nitrile Rubber

L B 1/4-20 SET SCREW 1.30 DIA.

11/32 7/8

S E C T I O N 9 T S E C CAPACITY RATING: MISALIGNMENT COMPENSATION Rated 1/2 hp @ 1725 rpm Max. Angular Offset – 7° Max. Lateral Offset – 1/8 (3.2)

NOTE: Dimensions in ( ) are mm.

B L Catalog Number Bore Length

V 5R 5-2516 2-1/2 (63.5) 1/2 V 5R 5-3016 3 (76.2) (12.7) V 5R 5-3516 3-1/2 (88.9)

9-14 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Technical Section: Vibration and Shock Isolation

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

Table of Contents

1.0 FUNDAMENTALS OF VIBRATION AND SHOCK 1.1 What Is Vibration? ...... T1-2 1.1.1 Damping ...... T1-2 1.2 What is Shock? ...... T1-3 1.3 What is Noise? ...... T1-3 1.4 Principles of Vibration Isolation...... T1-4 1.5 Principles of Noise Reduction ...... T1-5

2.0 BASIC DEFINITIONS AND CONCEPTS IN VIBRATION AND SHOCK ANALYSIS 2.1 Kinematic Characteristics ...... T1-5 2.2 Rigid-Body Characteristics ...... T1-6 2.3 Spring and Compliance Characteristics ...... T1-6 2.4 Damping, Friction and Energy-Dissipation Characteristics ...... T1-7 2.5 Vibration Characteristics of Mechanical Systems ...... T1-7 2.5.1 Amplitude-Frequency Characteristics of Forced Vibrations...... T1-8

3.0 VIBRATION ISOLATION ...... T1-9 3.1 Vibration Isolation of Vibration-Producing Products ...... T1-10 3.2 Vibration Isolation of Vibration-Sensitive Objects ...... T1-12 3.3 Shock Isolation ...... T1-14

3.3.1 Shock Motion of Base (Base Suddenly Stops or Accelerates) ...... T1-16 e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 3.3.2 Sudden Impact on Equipment...... T1-17

4.0 NONLINEARITIES ...... T1-17

5.0 MULTIDEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS, COUPLED MODES ...... T1-19

6.0 STATIC LOAD DISTRIBUTION CALCULATION ...... T1-20 6.1 Advantages of CNF Vibration Isolators...... T1-21

7.0 CONNECTIONS OF SPRING ELEMENTS ...... T1-22 7.1 Springs in Parallel ...... T1-22 7.2 Springs in Series ...... T1-22 7.3 Spring Connected Partly in Parallel and Partly in Series ...... T1-22

8.0 3-D OBJECT DRIVEN BY VIBRATORY FORCE AND TORQUES...... T1-23 8.1 Displacement of the Object ...... T1-23 8.2 Undamped Natural Frequencies ...... T1-24 8.3 Mount Deflections ...... T1-24

9.0 COMPLEX DRIVING FORCES ...... T1-25

10.0 DESIGN PROBLEM EXAMPLES...... T1-26

REFERENCES ...... T1-34

APPENDIX 1 Useful Formulas in Vibration Analysis ...... T1-35 2 Properties of Rubber and Plastic Materials ...... T1-37 3 Hardness Conversion Charts ...... T1-38

T1-1 1.0 FUNDAMENTALS OF VIBRATION AND SHOCK

1.1 What Is Vibration? Mechanical vibration is a form of oscillatory motion. It occurs in all forms of machinery and equipment. It is what you feel when you put your hand on the hood of a car, the engine of which is running, or on the base of an electric motor when the motor is running. Perhaps the simplest illustration of a mechanical vibration is a vertical spring loaded with weight (W), as shown in Figure 1. In this position, the deflection of the spring from its free state is just sufficient to counterbalance the weight W. This deflection is called the STATIC DEFLECTION of the spring. The position in which the spring is at rest is No. 1. The spring is then slowly extended to position No. 2 and released. The elastic force moves the block W upward, accelerating up to the mean position and then decelerating moving further up. The uppermost position of the weight (position No. 3) is at the same distance from position No. 1 as position No. 2, but in the opposite direction. The subsequent motion of the weight as a function of time, if there is only negligible resistance to the motion, is repetitive and wavy if plotted on a time scale as shown by line 1 in the graph. This simple model exhibits many of the basic characteristics of mechanical vibrations. The maximum displacement from the rest or mean position is called the AMPLITUDE of the vibration. The vibratory motion repeats itself at regular intervals (A1, A2, A3). The interval of time within which the motion sequence repeats itself is called a CYCLE or PERIOD. The number of cycles executed in a unit time (for example, during one second or during one minute), is known as the FREQUENCY. The UNITS OF FREQUENCY are 1 cycle/sec or 1 Hertz (Hz) which is standard. However, "cycles per minute" (cpm) are also used, especially for isolation of objects with rotating components (rotors) which often produce one excitation cycle per revolution which can be conveniently measured in cpm. When, as in Figure 1, the spring-weight system is not driven by an outside source, the vibration is a FREE VIBRATION and the frequency is called the NATURAL FRE- QUENCY of the system, since it is determined only by its parameters (stiffness of the spring and weight of the block).

Position of weight (x) Amplitude Line 1 W W = Weight Position No. 3 A A Line 2 spring contracted d1 d2 A W d3 x

Position No. 1; e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 spring at rest (mean position) W A0 A3 Weight, W in 1 Cycle position No. 2 spring extended A1 A2 Figure 1 Free Vibrations of a Simple Vibratory System In general, vibratory motion may or may not be repetitive and its outline as a function of time may be simple or complex. Typical vibrations, which are repetitive and continuous, are those of the base or housing of an electric motor, a household fan, a vacuum cleaner, and a sewing machine, for example. Vibrations of short duration and variable intensity are frequently initiated by a sudden impulsive (shock) load; for example, rocket upon takeoff, equipment subject to impact and drop tests, a package falling from a height, or bouncing of a freight car. In many machines, the vibration is not part of its regular or intended operation and function, but rather it cannot be avoided. Vibration isolation is one of the ways to control this unwanted vibration so that its adverse effects are kept within acceptable limits.

1.1.1 Damping The vibratory motion as a function of time as shown in Figure 1 (line 1) does not change or fade. The elastic (potential) energy of the spring transforms into x motion (kinetic) energy of the massive block and back into potential energy of Object W the spring, and so on. In reality, there are always some losses of the energy Damping (usually, into thermal energy) due to friction, imperfections of the spring mate- Element c rial, etc. As a result, the total energy supporting the vibratory motion in the sys- Spring k tem is gradually decreasing (dissipated), thus diminishing the intensity (amplitude) of the spring excursions, as shown by line 2 in Figure 1 ("decaying vibration"). This phenomenon is called DAMPING, and energy-dissipating compo- Base nents are called DAMPERS, Figure 2. The rate of decay of amplitude in a system with damping is often characterized by LOGARITHMIC (or LOG) DECRE- Figure 2 Simple Vibratory MENT defined as System with Damping = log (An/An-1), (1)

T1-2 where An and An-1 are two sequential amplitudes of the vibratory process. In many cases can be assumed constant during the decaying vibratory process. Although the cycles of the damped motion as shown by line 2 in Figure 1 are not fully repetitive, the number of cycles in a unit of time is still called FREQUENCY.

1.2 What Is Shock? Shock is defined as a TRANSIENT condition whereby kinetic energy is transferred to a system in a period of time which is short, relative to the natural period of oscillation of the system. Shock usually contains a single impulse of energy of short duration and large intensity which results in a sudden change in velocity of the system undergoing shock. The principles involved in both vibration and shock isolation are similar. However, differences exist due to the steady-state nature of vibration and the transient nature of shock. Shock may occur in an infinite variety of ways and can be very complex. The simplest form is a single impulse of extremely short duration and large magnitude. Figure 3 [5] shows the most commonly employed pulse shapes used in test specifications.

0 00 Half sine wave Square wave Sawtooth

Figure 3 Basic Pulse Shapes

The reduction in shock severity, which may be obtained by the use of isolators, results from the storage of the shock energy within the isolators and its subsequent release into a "smoother" vibratory process, over a longer period of time (at the natural frequency of the spring-mass system) and/or from dissipation of the shock energy (its transformation into thermal energy). However, the energy storage can only take place by a generally large deflection of the isolator. Inasmuch as a shock pulse may contain frequency components ranging from very low to very high, it is not possible to avoid excitation of vibratory process of the isolator/mass system with its natural frequency. On the other hand, if the duration e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 of the shock pulse is short, the response of the system may not have serious consequences. Figure 4 [5] demonstrates the comparative response of a spring mass system to a rectangular pulse whose duration is greater than the natural period of the vibratory system (I) and to a relatively short impulsive-type shock (II).

Motion of mass Mass

(I) Motion of base Damper Spring t

Base Motion of base Motion of mass (II) (a)

t (b) Figure 4 Response of System in Figure 2 to Rectangular Pulses of Varying Duration

1.3 What Is Noise? Sound is a vibration of air. The air in this case is an elastic member. The vibrations of the air have a frequency and an intensity (loudness). The frequency can be expressed in cycles per second or cycles per minute. The audible frequencies range from about 20 Hz to about 18,000 Hz, although some human ears are more sensitive and may have a somewhat broader range. Some sounds are desirable and pleasant for some people, such as music. Unwanted/objectionable sounds represent NOISE. Intensity or loudness of noise is measured in decibels (dB). The decibel is a measure of the sound pressure in relation to a standard or reference sound (.0002 microbars, which is the threshold of hearing for sounds for many people). The sound/noise loudness in dB is equal to 20 times the common logarithm of this ratio. Typical values of sound pressure level in dB are shown in Tables 1a and 1b. T1-3 Table 1a: SOUND PRESSURE LEVELS (SPL) FROM TYPICAL Various industrial operations and related noise levels NOISE SOURCES recorded at distances of from one to three feet from machine. ** SPL Effect Source dB Table 1b: VALUES OF SOUND 180 Impairs Hearing Rocket engines AND NOISE INTENSITY 160 Impairs Hearing Jet aircraft engines 140 Pain Jet aircraft engine Machine Overall Sound Pressure Level 120 Threshold of pain Thunder, artillery Nearby riveter, 110 Grinder (portable) 90-100 decibels elevated train Deafening Drop hammer 100-105 decibels Boiler factory, loud 100 Lathes 80-90 decibels street noise Punch press 95-105 decibels Noisy factory, 90 Riveting guns 95-105 decibels unmuffled truck Very Loud Sander (portable) 80-95 decibels Police whistle, 80 Screw machine 90-100 decibels noisy office Sewing machines 90-100 decibels Average street noise, 70 Wood saw 95-100 decibels average radio Loud Average factory, 60 ** From: "Acoustical Enclosures Muffle Plant Noise" noisy home by S. Wasserman and A. Oppenheim, Plant Engineering, Average coversation, 50 January 1965 average office Moderate Quiet radio, quiet 40 home or private office Average auditorium, 30 quiet conversation Faint Rustle of leaves, 20 whisper 10 Soundproof room Very Faint 0 Threshold of hearing From: Marks' Standard Handbook for Mechanical Engineers, Sixth Edition, McGraw Hill Book Co. Inc. New York, 1958, Section 12, p. 153; and "How to Specify Audible Noise" by E.A. Harris and W.E. Levine, Machine Design Nov. 9, 1961, p. 168.

1.4 Principles of Vibration Isolation In discussing vibration isolation, it is useful to identify the three basic elements of all vibrating systems: the object to be isolated (equipment unit, machine, motor, instrument, etc.); the isolation system (resilient isolation mounts or isolators); and the base (floor, base plate, concrete foundation, etc). The isolators (rubber pads, springs, etc.), are interposed between the e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 object and the base. They are usually much smaller than the object and the base. If the object is the source of vibration, the purpose of vibration isolation is to reduce the force transmitted from the object to the base. If the base is the source of vibration, the purpose of isolation is to reduce the vibratory motion transmitted from the base to the object, so that vibratory displacements in the work zone (between the tool and the part in a precision machine tool, the measuring stylus and the measured part in a coordinate measuring machine, the object and the lens in a microscope, etc.) do not exceed the allowable amounts. That is, probably, the most common case (protecting delicate measuring instruments and precision production equipment from floor vibrations, transportation of vibration-sensitive equipment, etc.). In both cases, the principle of vibration isolation is the same. The isolators are resilient elements. They act as a time delay and as a source of temporary energy storage, which evens out the force or motion disturbance on one side of the vibration mounts and transmits, if properly selected, a lesser disturbance to the other end (to the base in case of force isolation, to the object in case of motion isolation). A judicious design of the vibration isolation system insures that this effect is achieved. Conversely, a poorly designed isolation system, not having proper frequency characteristics, can be worse than no isolation at all. In addition to its function as a time delay and source of temporary energy storage, vibration mounts can also function as energy dissipators or absorbers. This effect is usually produced by the damping characteristics of materials, viscous fluids, sliding friction, and dashpots, although in general these may or may not be part of the isolator. The damping, or energy- dissipating effect of an isolator may be negligible or substantial depending on the application. The main purpose of isolator damping is to reduce or to attenuate the vibrations as rapidly as possible. Damping is particularly important at certain frequencies which cause RESONANCE. This occurs when the natural frequency of the object on isolators comes close to the vibration frequency of the source. For example, if an electric motor runs at 3600 rpm, then the object-isolator natural frequency of 3600 cycles per minute (60 Hz) corresponds to the resonance condition. If a machine operates near resonance, or has to pass through a resonant speed in order to attain the operating speed, damping is important in alleviation of the vibration buildup. In summary, a good vibration mount functions as a time delay, temporary energy absorber and to some extent as an energy dissipator, or damper. The engineering design of a vibration mount consists in identifying the characteristics of the source of the vibration, the mechanical characteristics of the equipment and the determination of the mount characteristics, in order to achieve a specified degree of vibration reduction.

T1-4 1.5 Principles of Noise Reduction A good vibration isolation system is reducing vibration transmission through structures and thus, radiation of these vibration into air, thereby reducing noise. There are many ways to reduce noise. One of the most practical and effective may be the use of vibration mounts. As a general rule, a well-designed vibration isolator will also help reduce noise. In the case of panel flutter, for example, a well- designed vibration mount could reduce or eliminate the noise. This can be achieved by eliminating the flutter of the panel itself, or by preventing its transmission to ground, or by a combination of the two. The range of audible frequencies is so high that the natural frequencies of a vibration mount can usually be designed to be well below the noise-producing frequency. In order to reduce noise, try to identify its sources; e.g., transformer hum, panel flutter, gear tooth engagement, rotor unbalance, etc. Next, identify the noise frequencies. Vibration isolators for these sources designed in accordance with the guidelines for vibration and shock control may then act as barriers either in not conducting the sound, or in attenuating the vibration which is the source of the noise.

2.0 BASIC DEFINITIONS AND CONCEPTS IN VIBRATION AND SHOCK ANALYSIS

2.1 Kinematic Characteristics COORDINATE — A quantity, such as a length or an angle, which defines the position of a moving part. In Figure 1, x is a coordinate, which defines the position of the weight, W. DISPLACEMENT — A change in position. It is a vector measured relative to a specified position, or frame of reference. The change in x (Figure 1) measured upward, say, from the bottom position, is a displacement. A displacement can be positive or negative, depending on the sign convention, translational or rotational. For example, an upward displacement may be positive, and a downward displacement negative. Similarly, a clockwise rotation may be positive and a counterclockwise rotation negative. Units: inches, feet, meters (m), millimeters (mm), or, in the case of rotations: degrees, radians, etc. VELOCITY — The rate of change of displacement. Units: in/sec, mph., m/sec, etc. Velocity is a vector whose magnitude is the SPEED. Angular velocity might be measured in radians/sec or deg/sec, clockwise or counterclockwise. ACCELERATION — The rate of change of velocity. Units: in/sec2, m/sec2, etc. It is a vector and has a magnitude and direction. Angular acceleration might be measured in rad/sec2 or deg/sec2, clockwise or counterclockwise. VIBRATORY MOTION — An oscillating motion; such as, that of the weight W, in Figure 1.

T1 T e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 SIMPLE VIBRATORY MOTION — A form of vibratory motion, which as a function of the time is of the form x = a sin t, where a and are constants. The maximum displacement, a, from the mean position (x = 0) is the AMPLITUDE; the FREQUENCY (rate at which the motion repeats itself) is f = /2 cycles/sec, where ANGULAR FREQUENCY has the dimensions of rad/sec, and frequency f has the dimensions of reciprocal time; e.g. reciprocal seconds 1/sec. Such motion is also called harmonic or sinusoidal motion. PERIOD, CYCLE — The interval of time within which the motion repeats itself. In Figure 5, this is T seconds. The term cycle tends to refer also to the sequence of events within one period.

a2 a6 a1 a5 0 Time, t, secs a4 T2T3T a3

Figure 5 Periodic Motion

AMPLITUDE — Figure 5 shows time history of a vibratory motion, which repeats itself every T seconds. The maximum values of the displacement, x, from the reference position (x = 0) are called PEAKS. These are (a1, a2...). The largest of these is called the PEAK AMPLITUDE. STEADY-STATE MOTION — A periodic motion of a mechanical system; e.g., a continuously swinging pendulum of constant amplitude. STOCHASTIC or RANDOM MOTION — A motion which changes with time in a nonperiodic, possibly very complex, manner.

T1-5 HARMONICS — Any motion can be considered as made up of a sum (often an infinite number) of simple harmonic motions of different frequencies and amplitudes. The lowest-frequency component is usually called the FUNDAMENTAL FREQUENCY; higher frequency components are called HARMONICS. Their frequencies are multiples of the fundamental frequency. Sometimes, components with frequencies which are fractions of the fundamental frequency (subharmonics) are significant (e.g., the "half-frequency" whirl of rotating shafts, etc.). PULSE — Usually a displacement-time or force-time function describing a transient input into a dynamical system. PULSE SHAPE — The shape of the time-displacement or force-displacement curve of a pulse. Typically, this might be a square wave, a rectangular pulse, or a half sine-wave pulse. In general, however, the shape can be an arbitrary function of the time. SHOCK MOTION — A motion in which there is a sharp, nearly sudden change in velocity; e.g., a hammer blow on a nail, a package falling to the ground from a height, etc. Its mathematical idealization is that of a motion in which the velocity changes suddenly. This idealization often represents a good approximation to the real dynamic behavior of the system.

2.2 Rigid-Body Characteristics MASS — Inertia of the body equal to its weight in lbs. or in Newtons (N) divided by the gravitational constant (g = 32.2 ft/ sec2 = 386 in/sec2 = 9.81 m/sec2). Unit of mass, if the weight is expressed in N, is a kilogram (kg). CENTER OF GRAVITY (CENTER OF MASS, C.G.) — Point of support at which a body would be in balance. MOMENT OF INERTIA — The moment of inertia of a rigid body about a given axis in the body is the sum of the products of the mass of each volume element and the square of its distance from the axis. Units are in-lb-sec2, or in kg-m2 for example. Moments of inertia of the standard shapes are tabulated in handbooks. If instead of mass of the element its volume is used, the result is also called a moment of inertia. Depending on the application, mass-, volume-, or area moments of inertia can be used. PRODUCT OF INERTIA — The product of inertia of a rigid body about two intersecting, perpendicular axes in the body is the sum of the product of the mass (volumes, areas) of constituent elements and the distances of the element from the two perpendicular axes. Units are the same as for the moment of inertia. Tabulations are available in handbooks and textbooks. PRINCIPAL AXES OF INERTIA — At any point of a rigid body, there is a set of mutually perpendicular (orthogonal) axes intersecting in the C.G. such that the products of inertia about these axes vanish. These axes are called the principal axes of inertia. In a body having axes of symmetry, the principle axes coincide with them. (An axis of symmetry is a line in the body, e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 such that the body can be rotated a fraction of a turn about the line without changing its outline in space).

2.3 Spring and Compliance Characteristics TENSION — When a body is stretched from its free configuration, its particles are said to be in tension (e.g., a stretched bar). The tensile force per unit area is called the tensile stress (Units: lbs/in2 (psi) or Pascals, 1Pa = 1N/m2, 1 Mega Pascal (MPa) = 106 N/m2). COMPRESSION — When a body is compressed from its free configuration (e.g., a column in axial loading), the compressive force unit per area is called the compressive stress (Units: lbs/in2 or Pa). SHEAR — When a body is subjected to equal and opposite forces, which are not collinear, the forces tend to "shear" the body; e.g., a rubber pad under parallel forces in the planes of its upper and lower faces. The shear force per unit area is called the shear stress (Units: lbs/in2 or Pa). A body can be in a state of tension, compression and shear simultaneously; e.g., a beam in bending. SPRING CONSTANT — When a helical cylindrical spring is stretched or compressed by x, the displacement x is proportional to the applied force, F (Hook's law). The proportionality constant (k) (Units: lbs/in, N/m) is called the SPRING CON- STANT or STIFFNESS, F = kx. If the spring deflects in torsion, the units of k are in-lb/rad, lb/deg, N-m/rad. Such springs are called LINEAR SPRINGS. More generally, the load and the displacement are not proportional (a NONLINEAR SPRING). In such cases stiffness is changing with the changing load and displacement, and k is the ratio of a force increment ΔF to the corresponding displacement increment Δx in the loading process. An important issue for spring materials most often used in vibration isolators, such as elastomeric (rubber) materials, wiremesh materials, etc., is influence of rate of loading on their stiffness. The stiffness constant measured at low rate of loading (frequency of load application < ~0.1 Hz) is called STATIC STIFFNESS, kst and the stiffness constant measured at higher frequencies of load application is called DYNAMIC STIFF- NESS, kdyn. The DYNAMIC STIFFNESS COEFFICIENT is defined as Kdyn = kdyn / kst. FORCE-DEFLECTION CHARACTERISTIC — This refers to the shape of the force-deflection curve. For the linear spring, it is a straight line through the origin of coordinates (constant k). If, for a nonlinear spring, its stiffness increases with increasing force or displacement (as in many rubber springs loaded in compression), the characteristic is called "hardening nonlinear". If it decreases with force or displacement (e.g., as in a Belleville spring), the characteristic is called "softening nonlinear".

T1-6 ENERGY STORAGE — This is the area under the force-deflection curve of the spring. It represents the strain energy stored in the spring (Units: lb. in., lb. ft., N•m). PRELOAD — A spring or other elastic element used in an isolator or in a coupling may or may not be assembled in a condition in which it has its natural, free, or unstretched length. If its assembled length is not its free length, the spring is in tension or compression even before the isolator is loaded by the object weight or the coupling is loaded by the transmitted torque. The amount of this tension or compression is called the preload. When measured in force units, it is a preload force; when measured in deflection from the free position, it is a preload deflection. ELASTIC (YOUNG'S) MODULUS (E) AND SHEAR MODULUS (G) — These are material properties, which characterize resistance of the material to deformation in tension or in compression (E) and in shear (G). They are defined as the ratio of stress to strain, where strain is the change in length (or deformation) per unit length. E involves tensile or compressive stress/ strain and G involves shear stress/strain. Units: lb/in2, Pa. In many practical applications, especially for metals, E and G are constants within a limit of material stress known as the proportionality limit. Rubber and plastics often do not have a well- defined proportionality limit. 2.4 Damping, Friction and Energy-Dissipation Characteristics STATIC FRICTION, SLIDING FRICTION, COULOMB FRICTION — These are all terms used for the frictional resistance for sliding of one body relative to another; e.g., a weight dragged along the floor. The frictional force is approximately proportional to the contact force between the two bodies and is opposed to the direction of relative motion. The proportionality constant f is known as the friction coefficient. If a 10 lb. weight is dragged along a horizontal floor with a friction coefficient f = 0.2, the frictional resistance is 0.2 x 10 = 2 lb. Sometimes a distinction is made between the value of the coefficient of friction when motion is just starting after a stationary condition (STATIC FRICTION) and its value during motion (SLIDING or DYNAMIC FRICTION). The coefficient of friction in the latter case is generally lower and changes with the motion velocity, unless it is DRY or COULOMB FRICTION, wherein the sliding friction coefficient does not depend on velocity. The motion (kinetic) energy is decreasing due to energy dissipation during a sliding process with friction. Thus, frictional connections can be used as dampers. VISCOUS DAMPING — If, in a damper, the body moves relative to a second body, VISCOUS DAMPING refers to a resisting (friction) force which is proportional and opposite to the relative velocity between the two bodies. The proportionality constant is the coefficient of viscous damping, c. Units: force per unit velocity; i.e., lb/(in/sec) or N/(m/sec). Viscous damping

is encountered, for example, in hydraulic dashpots and devices which squeeze a liquid through an orifice. The more viscous e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 the fluid, the greater the damping. If c = 0.5 lb/(in/sec) and the body moves at 10 in/sec, the viscous damping force is 0.5 x 10 = 5 lb. Typical example: hydraulic door closers. MATERIAL or HYSTERETIC DAMPING — such as damping in rubber isolators, wire mesh isolators, etc., depends on vibration amplitudes rather than on vibratory velocity. While both viscous and hysteretic damping reduce resonance amplitudes, the viscous damping spoils vibration isolation efficiency at high frequencies (when vibration amplitudes are decreasing) while the intensity of hysteretic damping automatically decreases with the decreasing amplitudes and it results in a better isolation efficiency.

CRITICAL DAMPING ccr — Value of damping constant in mass-spring-damping system just sufficiently high so as to prevent vibration.

DAMPING RATIO c/ccr — The ratio of the damping constant to the critical damping constant for that system. The damping ratio is related to log decrement as

= 2 (c/ccr). (2) 2.5 Vibration Characteristics of Mechanical Systems MATHEMATICAL MODEL — An idealized representation of the real mechanical system, simplified so that it can be analyzed. The representation often consists of rigid masses, springs and dampers (dashpots). The model should be sufficiently realistic so that results of the analysis of the model correspond reasonably closely to the behavior of the physical system from which it was derived. LUMPED- AND DISTRIBUTED-PARAMETER SYSTEMS — In a lumped-parameter system, the mass, elastic spring and damping properties are separated or lumped into distinct components, each having only mass, only elasticity or only damping, but not more than one of these properties per component. In a distributed-parameter system, a component may possess combined mass, elasticity and damping, distributed continuously through the component. The latter systems represent more realistic models, but are more difficult to analyze. DEGREES OF FREEDOM — This is the number of independent quantities (dimensions or coordinates), which must be known in order to be able to draw the mechanical system in any one position, if the fixed dimensions of the system are known. The simple mass-spring system of Figure 1 has one degree of freedom; a mechanical differential, for example, has two degrees of freedom; a rigid body moving freely in space has six degrees of freedom (three translational and three angular coordinates should be known in order to fully describe the position of the body in space).

T1-7 FORCE AND MOTION EXCITATION — If a force varying in time is applied to a dynamical system, it usually is a source of vibration (e.g., centrifugal force due to an unbalanced rotor). The vibrations are then said to be due to force excitation. If, on the other hand, the foundation (or other part) of a machine is subject to a forced motion (vibration or shock), the resulting machine vibration is said to be due to motion excitation; e.g., an earthquake actuating a seismograph. FREE VIBRATION — If the massive block in Figure 1 is moved out of its equilibrium position, and released, the system will vibrate without the action of any external forces. Such an oscillation is called a free vibration. FORCED VIBRATION — If an external force is applied to the weight in Figure 1, which causes it to vibrate (e.g., a force varying harmonically with time), the resulting motion of the spring-mass system is called a forced vibration. If the base which supports the spring, undergoes a forced motion which in turn causes the weight to vibrate, the vibration is also forced. RANDOM VIBRATION — Equipment may be caused to vibrate by applied forces or motions in which frequencies and amplitudes of harmonics vary in a random manner with time (e.g., wind gusts on a missile). The resulting vibration is called random. NATURAL FREQUENCY — Whether the system is without damping or with damping, the frequency of free vibration is called the free-undamped natural frequency or the free-damped natural frequency. The natural frequency is a function of the mass and stiffness distribution in the system. For a simple-mass spring system, which is a reasonable approximation to many real mechanical systems, the natural frequency, fn, is

____1 ____kg ____1 ____g fn = = Hz. (3) 2 W 2 xst

Here, k is spring constant (dynamic stiffness constant kdyn should be used, see Section 2.3); W is the weight; g is the gravitational constant, 386 in/sec2 or 9.8 m/sec2; and xst is the static deflection of the spring. The reciprocal to the natural frequency is the NATURAL PERIOD T = 1/fn, sec. If xst is expressed in cm (1 cm = 0.01 m), then the natural frequency can be conveniently found as ____5 fn Hz. (4) xst

The angular natural frequency n in radians per second is e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 ____kg n = (5) W Thus, flexible systems tend to have low natural frequencies and rigid systems tend to have high natural frequencies. At the same time, the natural frequency can be changed by altering the stiffness and mass distribution of the system. A system may have more than one natural frequency, in which case the lowest of these is often the most significant one. The number of natural frequencies is equal to the number of degrees of freedom of the system. Presense of damping is slightly reducing the natural frequency; The DAMPED NATURAL FREQUENCY is

2 ____c ______1 – 2 fdn = fn 1 – = fn (3a) ( c cr ) 42

F = Fo • Sin (2 ft) where = 2 (c/ccr) c = damping constant x c = critical damping constant cr Object W = mg FORCING FREQUENCY — The frequency of an external force or motion excitation applied to a vibrating system. c Damping Coefficient Vibration Spring k 2.5.1 Amplitude-Frequency Characteristics of Forced Vibrations Isolator Constant If a sinusoidal force F(t) = Fo sin2ft is acting on massive block W connected with the base by spring having stiffness k and viscous damper Base with resistance coefficient c, Figure 6, then sinusoidal vibration of block W is excited. If frequency f is changing but amplitude Fo is constant in Figure 6 Simple Vibratory a broad frequency range, then amplitude of the vibratory displacement System Under Forced of block W changes with frequency along an AMPLITUDE-FREQUENCY Excitation CHARACTERISTIC, Figure 7. Figure 7 shows plots of the displacement amplitudes vs. FREQUENCY RATIO f/fn for various degrees of damping (LOG DECREMENT ) in the vibratory system. The plots in Figure 7 are described by the following expression for the response amplitude A of the massive block W to the force excitation: T1-8 F F / k A = ______o = ______o (6) f2 2 c f 2 f2 22 f k 1 – ____ + 2 ______1 – ____ + ______2 2 ( f n ) ( c cr fn ) ( f n ) ( fn )

RESONANCE — It is seen in Figure 7 A F /k that displacement and stress levels tend to o build up greatly when the forcing frequency = 0 coincides with the natural frequency, the build- 0 0.31 up being restrained only by damping. This 0.31 condition is known as RESONANCE. 0.47 0.47 4.0 In many cases, the forced vibration is caused by an unbalanced rotating mass, such 0.63 0.63 as the rotor of an electrical motor. The degree of unbalance can be expressed as dis- 0.94 tance e between the C.G. of the rotor and its axis of rotation. The vertical component of the 3.0 centrifugal force generated by the unbalanced rotor (mass M) is 1.3

1.6 2 2 2 2.0 Fc.f. = M e sin t = 4 Mf e sin 2t, (7) where is angular speed of rotation in rad/ sec and f is the number of revolutions per second. In case of vibration excitation by the 1.0 unbalanced rotor, combining of (6) and (7) results in e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1

______42Mf2e A = 0 2 2 2 f c f 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 f/fn k 1 – ____ + 2 ______2 ( f n ) ( c cr fn ) Figure 7 Amplitude-Frequency Characteristics of Massive Block Motion in Figure 6

42Mf2e Me f2 / f 2 = ______=______n , (6a) f2 22 f m f2 2 f 2 k 1 – ____ + ______1 – ____ + ______( fn 2 ) ( fn ) ( fn 2 ) ( f n ) where m is the total mass of the object. Expression (6a) is plotted in Figure 8 for several values of damping ().

3.0 Vibration Isolation Although VIBRATION ISOLATION is a very large area of vibration control, there are two most widely used techniques of vibration isolation:

– Reduction of transmission of vibratory or shock forces from the object, in which these forces are generated, to the base; and

– Reduction of transmission of vibratory motions of the base to the work area of vibration-sensitive objects.

These techniques are similar, but also quite different. They both deal with TRANSMISSIBILITY or TRANSMISSION RATIO. There are several transmission ratios. Usually these refer to the ratios of the maximum values of the transmitted force or displacement to the maximum values of the applied force or the forced motion. The important direction of transmission is from the object to the base for the force isolation, or from the base to the object for the motion isolation.

T1-9 10

7 0.31 5 0.63

3 1.26

2 3.14

4.4 e

A 1.0 M m

0.7 c = 1.0 c 0.5 cr

0.3

0.2

0.1 0.1 0.2 0.5 1.0 2 3 5 7 10

Frequency Ratio, f/fn Figure 8 Amplitude-Frequency Characteristics of Massive Block Motion in Figure 6 Excited by an Unbalanced Rotor

T1 T e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 3.1 Vibration Isolation of Vibration-Producing Products Figure 9 shows a simplified single-degree-of-freedom model of a vibration isolation F (t) system. While in models in Figure 1 and Figure 2, the base (foundation) is shown as having infinite mass, in Figure 9 model the foundation has a finite mass mf. If the force m x F(t) = Fo sin2ft is generated in the object (mass m), the force transmissibility F from the 1 object to the foundation is equal to the motion transmissibility x from the foundation to the object and is expressed as kc f 2 1 + __ __ ___Ff ___x1 ______mf ______( f n ) F = x = = = . (8) 2 2 mf Fo x2 m + mf f2 f x 1 – ___ + __ __ 2 ( f 2 ) ( f ) n n Figure 9 Dynamic Model of This expression (for mf = ) is plotted in Figure 10 which shows that "isolation" of the a Basic Vibration force source or the condition of F < 1 develops at frequencies greater than f = 1.41fn and Isolation System fast improving with further increasing of the frequency ratio f/fn. The maximum transmissibility occurs at the resonance when the frequency ratio f/fn = 1. At resonance (f = fn), the transmissibility at not very high damping is expressed as ______mf __ (F)max = (x)max . (9) m + mf While increasing of damping is beneficial at and around the resonance, the isolation at high frequencies deteriorates with increasing damping . This effect must be considered in designing the isolation system for a given application. Still, a reasonable increase of damping is important since it makes the system more robust if subjected to inevitable spurious excitations. Also, the higher damping improves behavior of the system if the object generates forces in a broad frequency range; e.g., as unbalanced motor(s) generating continuously changing excitation frequency during its acceleration phase. It should be considered that the transmissibility curves in Figure 10 are plotted for viscous damping in the isolators. Damping in elastomeric and wire-mesh (or cable) elements is different, so-called hysteretic damping. This latter type of damping does not affect the preresonance and the resonance behavior of the system, but demonstrate only a minimum deterioration of the isolation at high frequencies even for highly-damped isolators (more in [1]).

T1-10 As mentioned before, the goal of vibration isola- 10 = 0 tion of vibration-sensitive objects from the base vibra- 7 tion is to reduce relative vibratory displacements in 0.31 the work zone. Transmissibility of the base motion into 5 0.63 θ the relative vibrations = x1 – x2 is (for any value of 1.26 mf): 3 3.14 2 c = 1.0 ccr 2 ___f 2 1.0 θ fn

______ rel = = . (10) x 0.7 2 f2 2 f 2 1 – ___ + __ __ 0.5 2 ( f n ) ( f n ) 0.3

0.2 c = 0.5 ccr Expression (10) is plotted in Figure 11. It is clear that transmissibility of low frequency (as compared with Absolute Transmissibility, 0.1 the natural frequency) foundation vibrations into the = 1.26 relative vibrations is very small (since at low frequen- 0.07 cies the motions are very slow and the object is mov- 0.05 ing following the vibrating foundation). 0.63 c ISOLATION EFFICIENCY — Isolation is the per- 0.03 = 0.1 ccr cent of vibration force that is not transmitted through 0.31 the vibration mounts and which improves with increas- 0.02 ing frequency ratio. Isolation efficiency of 81.1% cor- 0 responding to a frequency ratio of 2.5, is generally 0.01 adequate as shown in Table 2. Figure 12, the basic 0.1 0.2 0.5 1.0 2 3 5 7 10 vibration chart, gives static deflection vs. frequency e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 Frequency Ratio, f/fn and % of vibration isolation (1 - F). It is useful for selection of vibration isolators/mounts and for calcu- Figure 10 Force/Motion Transmissibility lations (see Section 11). in Figure 9 System A more complete treatment of this case of vibra- 10 tion isolation, considering more complex and more re- = 0 alistic (several degrees of freedom) models is given 7 in [1]. 0.31 5 0.63 3 Table 2: VIBRATION ABSORPTION 1.26

rel c Frequency Vibration Absorption, Results 2 = 0.5 Ratio Percent Attained ccr c 10.0 98.9 excellent = 0.7 ccr 4.0 93.3 excellent 3.0 87.5 very good 1.0 2.5 81.1 good 2.0 66.7 fair 0.7 1.5 20.0 poor c 1.4 0 none = 1.0 0.5 ccr 1.0 (resonance) worse than with

no mountings Relative Transmissibility, 0.3

0.2

0.1 0.1 0.2 0.5 1.0 2 3 5 7 10 Frequency Ratio, f/fn Figure 11 Transmissibility of Vibratory Base Motion to Relative Vibratory Motion in the Work Zone T1-11 VIBRATION FREQUENCY (Hz) 11.7 15 10.0 2.5 3.3 5.0 6.7 8.3 10 13.3 16.7 25 33 50 67 10.0 25 9.0 23 8.0 20 7.0 18 6.0 15

5.0 12.7

4.0 10

3.0 7.6

2.0 5.1

1.5 3.8 60 80 9095 99 7085 93 97 ISOLATION 1.0 EFFICIENCY % 2.5 .9 2.3 .8 2.0 .7 1.8 .6 1.5

.5 1.27

.4 1.0

.3 0.76

RESONANCE NATURAL .2 FREQUENCY 0.5

.15 0.38 DEFLECTION (CM) STATIC STATIC DEFLECTION (INCHES) STATIC

.10 0.25 .09 0.23 .08 0.2 e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 .07 0.18 .06 0.15

.05 0.13 REGION .04 OF 0.1 AMPLIFICATION .03 0.076

.02 0.05

.015 0.038

.01 0.025 100 150 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 VIBRATION FREQUENCY (CYCLES PER MINUTE) Figure 12 Vibration Frequency vs Static Deflection of Isolators vs Isolation Efficiency

3.2 Vibration Isolation of Vibration-Sensitive Objects Since, for this group of objects, the relative vibrations in the work zone are determined by dynamic characteristics of the object itself, a model in Figure 13 should be considered. Floor (foundation) vibration x1 = x10 sin2ft is transmitted through vibration isolators (stiffness kv, damping coefficient cv) to frame/bed of the object (mass MB) causing its vibrations xB = xB0 sin2ft. The work zone of the object is between the frame/bed and its "upper unit", mass Mu (e.g., tool head of a machine tool or illumination unit of a photo-lithography tool). Stiffness km and damping coefficient cm describe structural dynamic characteristics of the object, whose structural natural frequency is

___1 ______km (Mu + MB) fm = . (11) 2 MuMB

T1-12 Accordingly, transmissibility of the vibratory motion of the foundation into the work zone can be expressed as a product of (transmissibility x of the Mu foundation motion X1 to the frame motion from expression (7) where x2 = X1, x1 = XB; and m = MB) and (transmissibility of the frame motion XB to Km Cm the relative motion Xrel in the work zone rel from expression (8) where x2 Xrel = XB, θ = Xrel, and fn = fm from expression (11)). This operation is illustrated in Figure 14.

In Figure 14, the plot (a) is maximum intensity ao of floor vibration MB (displacements amplitudes compounded from numerous on-site measure- XB ments). It is shown in [1] that for a majority of manufacturing plants ao 2.5m in the 4-30 Hz range and is much smaller outside of this range for vertical floor vibrations, and ao 2.0 m in the 4-20 Hz range and much smaller outside of this range for horizontal floor vibrations. For high preci- Kv, Cv sion facilities, the levels of allowable floor vibrations are recommended by BBN plots in Figure 15. The next plot (b) in Figure 14 illustrates transmissibility from the floor to the object frame for three cases: a - the object Xf installed on rigid mounts (e.g., jack mounts or rigid isolator mounts); b - Floor the object installed on softer, isolating mounts (lower fn) with the same Figure 13 Two-Mass Dynamic Model degree of damping (height of the resonance peak) as the mounts in a; c - for Vibration Sensitivity of the same fn as in b, but greater damping. The third plot (c) illustrates Precison Object transmissibility from the frame of the object into its work zone; fm is the Xf structural natural frequency of the object. The bottom plot shows the product of the previous three plots. An installation is considered successful if ao the vibration amplitude in the work zone does not exceed the allowable amplitude Δo. It can be seen that a rigid installation results in two peaks of the relative vibration amplitude, which often exceed the tolerance. Both peaks f are reduced by using soft isolator mounts: the second one due to reduced (a) Maximum Intensity ao of Floor Vibrating transmissibility at high frequencies per expression (6), and the first one

T1 T e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 due to lower sensitivity of the object structure to lower resonance fre- b c quency of the object on softer isolating mounts. It is clear, that increasing damping also results in reduced relative vibrations. Accordingly, the re- a quirement for an adequate vibration isolation of a vibration-sensitive object is formulated not as a required upper limit of the natural frequency fn, Φ but as a required upper limit of the "Isolation Criterion" , f fn2 fn1 (b) Transmissibility from Floor to Object Frame fn Φ = ___ . (12a)

The magnitude of this criterion can be calculated if vibration sensitivity of the object in the frequency range of interest is measured and its tolerance is assigned, see [1]. The object is properly isolated if

2 f Δof Φ < ______, (12b) fm Xf f (c) Transmissibility From Object Frame to Work Zone where Δo is the maximum tolerated vibratory displacement in the work zone of the object, Xf is the maximum amplitude of floor vibration with a frequency f; f is the transmissibility into the work zone at frequency f

(ratio of relative vibration amplitude in the work zone to amplitude of the Δo object frame vibration at frequency f). According to this criterion widely b validated by practical applications, stiffness of isolators for a given instal- c lation can be increased (usually, a very desirable feature) if the isolators f have higher damping. fv2 fv1 fm (d) Resultant Transmissibility (Product of (a), (b) & (c)) Figure 14 Model of Vibration Transmission from Floor to Work Zone

T1-13 Thus, while vibration isolation 100 100000 of the force-producing objects requires reducing natural fre- Workshop (ISO) 90 30000 quency in accordance with no- Office (ISO) mogram in Figure 12, isolation of a vibration-sensitive object 80 Residential day (ISO) 10000 can be successful even when 4 m Operating theatre (ISO) 3000 some part of the system is at 70 2 m 1 m VC - A (2000 micro-inches/sec) 0.2 m resonance, provided that the 0.5 m VC - B (1000 micro-inches/sec) 0.1 m natural frequency of the isola- 60 1000 tion system and its damping VC - C (500 micr-inches/sec)

are properly selected. Vibration micro-inch/sec Rms Velocity, 50 VC - D (250 micro-inches/sec) 300 isolation in the latter case is Velocity Level (dB re 1 micro-inch/sec) Velocity 0.063 m 0.012 m greatly simplified if structural 0.25 m VC - E (125 micro-inches/sec) stiffness and structural natural 40 100 4 5 6.3 8 10 12.5 16 20 25 31.5 40 50 63 80 frequency of the vibration-sen- One-third Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) sitive object are enhanced. Figure 15 BBN Vibration Criteria (VC) for Installation of Precision Equipment 3.3 Shock Isolation The information in this section has been taken from [2] with permission of the publisher. mz It is often necessary to determine the effectiveness of a shock z isolator as well as the magnitude of the acceleration experienced kz by elements of the protected equipment. Figure 16, similar to Figure 13, describes the system experiencing a velocity shock as illustrated by the displacement-time curves of Figure 17. The displacement of equipment (y) supported by isolators my and subjected to a velocity shock (V) is expressed by the following equation: y

T1 T e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 1 ____ ky y = V 1 – sin 2 fyt (13) ( 2 f y ) s ___1 ___ky Support where fy = is the natural frequency, Hz, of the elastic system 2 my Figure 16 Schematic Representation of Equipment, Comprised of Chassis consisting of chassis (my) and isolator (ky). Double differentiation my and Element mzkz, Mounted of equation (13) yields the acceleration experienced by the equip- Upon Isolator k . ment chassis during shock. This is designated the transmitted y acceleration and is expressed as:

y¨0 = 2fyV (14)

The units of acceleration y¨0, are linear distance (inches, m, etc) per second per second. This equation can be expressed another way, using more convenient engineering units, as:

y¨0 2πfyV fyV Transmitted Shock = ___ = ______= ____ , (15) g 386 61.4 where: V = shock velocity change, in/sec. fy = natural frequency of isolator, Hz. y¨0/g = maximum acceleration experienced by chassis, expressed as a dimensionless multiple of the acceleration due to gravity. t Figure 17 Displacement-Time Curves for Support, Thus, the maximum acceleration of the chassis during shock, is Chassis, and Element of Equipment directly proportional to the magnitude of the velocity change and (Inelastic Impact) to the natural frequency of the isolator. Figure 18 is a graphic representation of the maximum transmitted acceleration computed from Equation (15). T1-14 The maximum acceleration expe- 10 100 rienced by the chassis of the mounted 8 80 equipment, as indicated in Figure 18, 200 in/sec 6 60 should not be confused with the maxi- 150 5 100 50 mum acceleration experienced by vari- 200 in/sec 4 75 40 150 ous elements of the equipment. The 50 3 100 30 latter is equal to the product of the 40 75 maximum chassis acceleration y0 and 30 20 50 20 /g), (solid lines) 2 0

the amplification factor A , which is de- ¨ 0 , in., (dotted lines) 40 0 fined as the ratio of the maximum ac- ) 10

sy 30 celeration of the element (z¨0) to the 20 maximum acceleration of the chassis 1.0 10 10 (y¨0) and is given by: 0.8 8 5 ___z¨0 0.6 5 6 A0 = (16) y¨0 0.5 5 0.4 4 Shock Maximum Transmitted In the absence of damping, A0 is a function only of the element's natural fre- 0.3 3 quency (fz) and the isolator's natural

0.3 Maximum transmitted acceleration (y frequency (fy). For an undamped sys- Maximum deflection of isolator ( 2 tem, shock transmissibility (Ts) is related to the amplification factor (A0) as follows: 0.1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 ____fy Ts = A0 (17) Natural frequency of isolator, Hz ( f z ) Figure 18 Maximum Acceleration of Chassis my and Maximum where shock transmissibility (Ts) is the Deflection of Linear Isolator ky Shown in Figure 16, ratio of the maximum acceleration of When Support Experiences Velocity Shock as the mass element, mz, to the maximum Illustrated in Figure 17. acceleration of the same element e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 100 which would occur if the isolator's 80 spring constant, ky, were infinitely rigid. 60 Damping ratio Using values for the amplification for isolator 40 factor A as determined in [3], and plot- 0 30 0.005 ted for a range of values of damping 0.01 ratio, shock transmissibility can be de- 20 Damping ratio for termined for a damped system as element mzkz = 0.01

) 10 shown in Figure 19. The damping be- s tween m and m is assumed to be 8 0.05 z y 6 constant at one percent critical damp- 0.10 ing ( = 0.063). However, wide varia- 4 tions in the degree of damping have 3 little effect on the results. Figure 20 2 gives the amplification factor A0 for the 1.00 0.50 system shown in Figure 16 when the Shock transmissibility (T 1.0 support experiences velocity shock as 0.8 0.50 0.6 illustrated in Figure 17. The factor A0 1.00 is the ratio of the maximum accelera- 0.4 tion of mass mz to the maximum ac- 0.3 celeration of mass my.

0.1 01234 56 Natural frequency of element f Ratio z Natural frequency of isolator ( f y ) Figure 19 Shock Transmissibility for System Shown in Figure 13, When Subjected to Velocity Shock as illustrated in Figure 17 [3].

T1-15 100 80 60 Damping ratio for isolator 40 30 0.005 20 0.01 Damping ratio for element mzkz = 0.01

) 10 0 8 0.05 6 0.10 1.00 4 0.50 3

Amplification factor (A 1.0 0.8 0.50 0.6 1.00 0.4 0.3 0.2

0.1 0 123456 Natural frequency of element f Ratio z Natural frequency of isolator ( f y ) Figure 20 Amplification Factor for System Shown in Figure 16 When Subjected to Velocity Shock as Illustrated in Figure 17

3.3.1 Shock Motion of Base (Base Suddenly Stops or Accelerates) e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 The time history of the sudden acceleration process of the base in Figure. 21(a) is shown in Figure 21(b). The analytical results taken from [3] are also applicable to the object (equipment unit) dropping from a height onto a hard surface.

x Object W Velocity change of base V Damping constant c 0 Time Vibration k y 0 Isolator t 0 y = 0 t 0 y = V • t Base (a) System (b) Motion of Base

Figure 21 Vibration Isolation System for Object W (a) Subjected to Shock Motion of Base with Time History (b)

If: V = sudden velocity change of base, in/sec or m/sec c/ccr = /2 = damping ratio where is log decrement fn = undamped natural frequency of system, Hz g = gravitational constant, 386 in/sec2 = 9.81 m/sec2 dmax = max. isolator deflection, measured from equilibrium position, in. or m dst = static isolator deflection = W/k, in. or m 2 2 amax = maximum acceleration of object, in/sec or m/sec

then, for 0 c/ccr 0.2 or 0 1.25, d a 2f (1 – c/c ) _____ max = _____ max = ______n cr (18) dst g g

T1-16 Figure 22 illustrates Equation (18). When the damp- 5 ing is small, maximum force transmitted to equipment is very nearly kdmax. 4 ξ = 0.2 ξ = 0.1 = 1.26 = 0.63 3 V ξ g = 0 = 0 2

d a max = max 12345 dst g Figure 22 Shock Effect at Different Damping Values 3.3.2 Sudden Impact on Equipment [3]

Sudden impulse (large force F acting I o over very short time (to): I = Foto).

x Object W Impulse

Damping c Vibration k constant Isolator Time to Base

(a) FORCE TIME CURVE OF AN IMPULSE (b) SYSTEM e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1

Figure 23 Vibration Isolation System of Object W (b) Subjected to Sudden Impact on the Object with Time History (a)

Sudden impact, or a sharp blow is characterized by a large force (Fo) acting for a short period of time (to) as shown in Figure 23(a). For practical purposes, suddenness is taken to mean that to is small in comparison with the natural period of vibration of the system in Figure 23(b). The impulse, I, is defined as the area under the force-time curve; i.e.,

I = Fo to lb-sec or kg m/sec (19)

Application of impulse I results in a sudden downward velocity V of the object,

V = Ig/W. (20)

The maximum isolator deflection and the maximum acceleration of the object can be obtained by substituting V into Equation (18).

4.0 NONLINEARITIES The equations previously given for transmissibilty (Section 3.1) make certain assumptions which may not always be valid. For example, it is assumed that the damping is viscous or linear (resistance to relative motion is proportional to the relative velocity). The assumption greatly simplifies the analysis. However, the damping provided by wire mesh is a combination of localized frictional losses by individual wires and hysteresis in the cushion itself. Damping in elastomeric materials has similar characteristics. In practical terms, this means that the damping is a function of displacement in addition to velocity, and the terms describing the damping in the equations of motion are nonlinear. At resonance, where the displacement is large, the damping is high. In the isolation band, where displacement is small, the damping is negligible. This condition gives the best of both worlds as damping is only desirable under resonance conditions. Thus, the idealized curves in Figure 10 are on the conservative side since they show deterioration of isolation in the high frequency (after resonance) range.

T1-17 A second assumption is that the flexible members or mounts behave as linear springs. This again is not strictly true as many mounts behave as hardening springs to a lesser or greater extent, depending on material of their flexible elements (e.g., proportion of mesh cushion in the wire-mesh mounts) and/or on design features of rubber flexible elements. As the term suggests, the stiffness increases with load/displacement. This property has the useful effect of increasing the dynamic load-carrying capability of the mounts. Consider the Equation (3) for the natural frequency of a simple spring-mass system. As can be seen, increasing the weight load (mass) of the isolated object reduces the natural frequency. But if the stiffness is increasing as well (as in the case of a hardening spring) then the ratio k/m is less dependent on the mass of the object and the mount can be used in a wider load range. Some vibration isolators are designed with their stiffness proportional to the weight load,

k = AW = Amg, (21) where A is a proportionality constant. For such mounts the natural frequency is

___1 ___kg ___1 _____AWg ___1 fn = = = Ag = const. (22) 2 W 2 W 2

Accordingly, such vibration isolators are called CONSTANT NATURAL FREQUENCY (or CNF) ISOLATORS. This means that a mount will give the same degree of isolation for a broad load range, with the ratio of upper load limit and lower load limit up to and exceeding 20:1 [1]. An example of a CNF isolator is Ring Mount V10Z47M in this catalog. Besides the convenience of using the same isolators for widely different objects, CNF isolators have many other advantages. The tolerance on stiffness of constant stiffness (linear) isolators with rubber flexible elements is usually about ±17%. Such wide tolerance leads to a need for greater safety factors in order to achieve the required degree of isolation, and thus to softer isolators. The soft isolators are undesirable since they may result in a shaky installation. CNF isolators, on the other hand, are very robust and variation of rubber hardness due to production tolerances do not influence the natural frequency significantly [1]. Other advantages of CNF isolators are addressed below in Section 6.0. The other way in which a stiffening spring affects the dynamic performance of a system is to make the natural frequency

"input sensitive". As the amplitude increases, so does the dis- a a e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 placement. Consequently, that stiffness increases as well. The natural frequency (fn) increases also. Figure 24 [5] shows a comparison between the way frequency fn changes with amplitude for a linear spring (a) and a hardening spring (b). As can be seen, with a hardening spring, fn increases with amplitude. Without going into the mathematical treatment, it should be 0 fn 0 fn appreciated that the actual responses for various inputs will be (a) (b) as shown in Figure 25 [5]. It can be seen that the resonant point actually changes with different inputs. A softening spring is added Figure 24 Amplitude of Linear (a) and for comparison. Hardening (Nonlinear) (b) Springs as a Function of fn

A A A

fn fn fn (a) Hardening Spring (b) Linear Spring (c) Softening Spring

Figure 25 Typical Resonance Curves for Various Levels of Excitation

T1-18 Another property of mesh mounts is demonstrated by Figure 26 [5]. As can be seen, in practice there is a sudden sharp drop from the resonant point, ensuring that isolation is achieved almost immediately. However, it is again safer to assume that isolation does not begin until 2 fn is achieved.

a 2 Free vibration "backbone"

The hatched areas indicate the region of instability.

Figure 26 Theoretical Frequency Response Curve for a Hardening Spring Type Resonant System

5.0 MULTIDEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS, COUPLED MODES

T1 T e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 Figure 27 demonstrates that there are six independent ways in which a body can move; i.e., it has SIX DEGREES OF FREEDOM. The reader must be aware from this that there is a potential of six independent natural frequencies, as well as possible coupled modes of vibration.

Vertical

Yaw Vertical

Roll Pitch

Lateral Fore and Aft or Longitudinal

Figure 27 Degrees of Freedom of a Solid Body

T1-19 The coupling concept can be illustrated on the example of a simpler "planar" system shown in Figure 28, which shows a mass supported by springs and constrained so that it can move only in the plane of the drawing [5]. Such a x system has three coordinates which fully describe its configuration: translational y coordinates x and y, and angular coordinate . If the system is symmetrical T Fx about axis y, then when excited by a sinusoidal force Fy, in the vertical direction m, I along the axis of symmetry, the object will behave as previously shown (Figure 1), namely by vibrating in the vertical (y) direction. However, if the force vector does not coincide with the axis of symmetry, then the vertical force would excite vibratory motions not only in the y-direction, but also in x and directions. When kxky Fy kxky the mass is excited by a horizontal force Fx, both horizontal (y)¨ or longitudinal mode and pitching () vibratory motions are excited. These modes are said to be coupled when vibrations of one mode can be stimulated by a vibratory force Figure 28 Planar (Three-Degrees- or displacement in another. Coupling modes are in most cases undesirable. For of-Freedom) Vibration example, many vibration-sensitive objects have the highest vibration sensitivity Isolation System in a horizontal direction, while the floor vibrations are often more intense in the vertical direction. Coupling between the vertical and horizontal directions can be avoided by using vibration isolating mounts at each mounting point whose stiffness is proportional to the weight load acting on this mount (CNF mount) [1].

6.0 STATIC LOAD DISTRIBUTION CALCULATION In order to calculate the weight distribution between the mounting points, the position of the CENTER OF GRAVITY (C.G.) has to be determined first. It is a simple task only for an axisymmetrical object. Position of the C.G. can be obtained by computation or experiment. The computational approach is feasible in most cases to the manufacturer who has all relevant drawings containing the data on mass distribution inside the object. The experiment is suggested by the definition of the C.G. as the point of support at which the body will be in equilibrium. For example, a small object can be supported on a peg; when in equilibrium, a vertical line drawn through the peg will pass through the C.G. Unfortunately, this method is applicable only to small objects. For large objects, such as machine tools, the object is mounted, for the C.G. location purposes, onto three load cells LC1, LC2, LC3, as shown is the plane view in Figure 29. If the weight loads as sensed by these load cells are W1, W2, W3, respectively, then coordinates of the C.G. are as follows: e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1

______X1W1 + X2W2 + X3W3 xC.G. = ; W1 +W2 +W3 (23) y W + y W + y W y = ______1 1 2 2 3 3 . C.G. W +W +W 1 2 3 y

After the C.G. position is known, weight distribution between the mounting points should be calculated. Such a calculation can be LC1 rigorously performed only for the case of an object with three mount- x1 ing points (a statically-determinate problem). Unfortunately, only a LC3 relatively small percentage of objects requiring vibration isolation xC.G. are designed with the "three point" mounting arrangement. If the C.G. y1 number of the mounting points is greater than three, the accuracy y3 x3 of weight distribution calculations is suffering, unless the mounting surface of the floor is flat and horizontal and the mounting surface yC.G. LC2 y2 of the object is also flat. The tolerance on the "flatness" requirement x should be a small fraction of the projected static deformations xst of x2 the selected vibration isolators. For example, if the vertical natural frequency of the isolated Figure 29 Setup for Experimental Finding of the C.G. Location object is fn = 20 Hz, then, from Equation (4), xst = 0.0625 cm or 0.625 mm. Similarly, for fn = 10 Hz, xst = 2.5 mm, and for fn = 5 Hz, xst = 10 mm.

T1-20 Hz. When the machine is installed on five linear isolators with rubber flexible elements selected in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, different for different mounting points (line 2, fn = 15 Hz), the maximum amplitude of the relative vibrations (resulting in waviness of the ground surface) was 0.35 m. However, when the grinder was installed on five indentical CNF isolators with rubber flexible elements (line 1, fn = 20 Hz, or about two times stiffer than the linear isolators), the maximum relative vibration amplitudes was 0.25 m, about 30% lower.

0.5 0.35

m 0.25 μ 0.2

0.1 1

0.05

Double Amplitude 2 Relative Motion in Work Zone Relative Motion in Work

10 15 20 25 30 35 Frequency (Hz) Figure 33 Amplitude of Relative Motion in Work Zone with: 1 - Regular (Linear) Isolators; 2 - CNF Isolators

7.0 CONNECTIONS OF SPRING ELEMENTS

7.1 Springs in Parallel These combine like electrical resistance in series. This is the case when several springs support a single load, as shown in Figure 34. The springs are equivalent to a single spring, the spring constant of which is equal to the sum of the spring constants of the constituent k1 k2 k3 springs. The spring constant k of the single equivalent spring is given by:

k = k1 + k1 + k1. (27) Figure 34 Parallel e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 7.2 Springs in Series Connection The series connected springs in Figure 35 combine like electrical resistances in parallel. of Springs The equivalent single spring is softer than any of the component springs. The spring constant k of the equivalent single spring is given by: 1 1 1 k1 __ = __ + __ . (28) k k1 k2 If n springs are in series, this formula is readily extended to:

1 1 1 1 1 k2 __ = __ + __ + __ + ..... + __ . (29) k k1 k2 k3 kn 7.3 Spring Connected Partly in Parallel and Partly in Series Obtain equivalent spring constants for each set of parallel or series springs separately Figure 35 Series and then combine. For example, in Figure 36, the springs k and k are equivalent to a single 1 2 Connection spring, the spring constant of which, k , is given by: e1 of Springs ___1 __1 __1 ______k1 +k2 ______k1k2 = + = or ke1 = (30a) ke1 k1 k2 k1k2 k1 + k2 k1 The three springs, k3, k4, k5 in parallel, are equivalent to a single spring, the spring constant of which, ke2, is given by:

k2 ke2 = k3 + k4 + k5 (30b)

Now equivalent springs ke1 and ke2 are in series. Hence, the spring constant k of the equiva- k3 k4 k5 lent spring for the entire system is: 1 1 1 (k k )(k + k + k ) __ = ___ + ___ or k =______1 2 3 4 5 (30c) Figure 36 Mixed k ke1 ke2 k1k2 + (k1 + k2)(k3 + k4+ k5) Connection of Springs

T1-22 8.0 3-D OBJECT DRIVEN BY VIBRATORY FORCE AND TORQUES

Figure 37 shows an object with its C.G. at C, mounted on 4 flexible mounts and acted upon by a disturbing harmonic force Fy in the y-direction (vertical) and/or by torques, Tx, Ty and Tz acting singly or in combination about the x, y and z axes, which are principal inertia axes passing through the C.G. (point C).

y Fy y

θz C x Tx Tz z C

(x, y, z) θx by

ky/4 ky/4 ky/4 ky/4

bx bz

θy

C x

T1 T e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1

Figure 37 Solid Body on Vibration Isolators

The four mounts are symmetrically disposed relative to the C.G., their location defined by distances bx, by and bz from the axes, as shown. The mass moments of inertia about the principal inertia axes are Ix, Iy and Iz, respectively. As a result of the external force and torques, the object motion is (a) a displacement of C.G., maximum values of which are denoted by translational motions of the C.G. (x, y, z) and (b) rotations of the object (from equilibrium) about the coordinate axes (θx, θy, θz). These displacements are generally small relative to the major dimensions of the object.

Let: M = mass of object (W/g where W is weight of the object, g = 386 in/sec2 = 9.8 m/sec2); ky = total vertical stiffness of the four supports in lb./in. or N/m; i.e., 4 times the stiffness of each support if all four supports are identical ks = total horizontal or shear stiffness of the four supports; i.e., 4 times the horizontal stiffness of each support, if all supports are identical and for each support kx = kz = ks, lb./in. or N/m; = angular frequency of sinusoidally applied force and torques (rad/sec)

Damping is assumed to be negligible.

8.1 Displacement of the Object

Fy Due to F only: y = ______(31) y 2 ky – M

______Tzbyks Due to Tz only: x = (32) 4 2 2 2 2 IzM – (Izks +kybx M + ksby M) + kyksbx 2 ______Tz(ks – M ) θz = (33) IzM4 – 2 (Izks +kybx2 M + ksby2 M) + kyksbx2

T1-23 ______Txbyks Due to Tx only: z = (34) 4 2 2 2 2 IxM – (Ixks +Mkybz + Mby ks) + kyksbz 2 ______Tx(ks – M ) θx = (35) IxM4 – 2 (Ixks +Mkybz2 + Mby2ks) + kyksbz2

______Ty Due to Ty only: θy = (36) ks (bx2 + bz2) – Iy2

In these equations Fy, Tx, Ty and Tz represent peak values of the corresponding applied force or torques.

8.2 Undamped Natural Frequencies

Source Mode Equation

___ky Fy Translation 1 = (37) along y-axis M k k b 2 2 ______y s x Tz Rotation about 2 = A – A – (38) axes parallel to IzM z-axis k k b 2 2 ______y s x 3 = A + A – (39) IzM

ks kybx2 +ksby2 where A = ___ + ______(40) 2M 2Iz k k b 2 2 ______y s z Tx Rotation about 4 = B – B – (41) axes parallel to IxM e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 x-axis k k b 2 2 ______y s z 5 = B + B – (42) IxM

2 2 ks kybz +by ks where B = ___ + ______(43) 2M 2Ix

2 2 ______ks(bx + bz ) Ty Rotation about 6 = (44) y-axis Iy

8.3 Mount Deflections If the object motions in all coordinates are as expressed in 8.1 (x, y, z, θx, θy, θz,) and if the coordinates of the mounting point (vibration isolators) are (X, Y, Z) in the equilibrium position, then their deflections (ΔX, ΔY, ΔZ) from equilibrium due to the applied force/torques are:

ΔX = x – θzY + θyZ ΔY = y – θxZ + θzX (45) ΔZ = z – θyX + θxY provided the deflections are small relative to the object dimensions. However, if the effects of more than one disturbing force/torque are to be combined, the corresponding deflections of each mount must be combined vectorially, not be added algebraically, as in Equation (45).

General Comments 1. It is desirable to make sure that the disturbing forces and torques operate at frequencies sufficiently far removed from the computed natural frequencies, so that resonance conditions are avoided. 2. The compliance of the vibration mounts in compression and shear should be such that their combined compliance yields natural frequencies which are sufficiently lower than the frequencies of the disturbing forces and torques (hopefully at least by a factor of 2.5).

T1-24 3. The displacements (max. deflections) of the mounts can be calculated from Equation (45) for any given single disturbing force or torque. If several force/torques act simultaneously, vector addition of forces in different directions is required, and Equation (45) cannot be used. 4. The case of a horizontal disturbing force has not been considered in this presentation. 5. Other things being equal, the best arrangement for the mounts is to arrange them so that their resultant force passes through the center of gravity of the equipment and that its line of action is a principal axis. If there is a resultant torque about the center of gravity, its direction should be about a principal axis through the center of gravity. However, if this arrangement is impractical, it need not be adhered to.

9.0 COMPLEX DRIVING FORCES

When the disturbing forces are neither sinusoidal nor suddenly applied, the vibration analysis becomes more compli- cated. While it is more difficult to give general guidelines or methods of analysis, one can consider every force-time variation as composed of components of different frequencies, each being a multiple of the basic (usually driving) frequency. Math- ematically, this is known as expanding an arbitrary function into a Fourier series. Once these frequency components (harmonics) are determined, each one being sinusoidal at a different frequency, any component can be analyzed like a sinusoidal force. This can provide at least some understanding of the vibration phenomenon. Often the lowest-frequency (fundamental) component predominates and is the most important component to analyze. It is possible, however, that the design of the vibration isolation system will appear unfeasible on the basis of an analysis of only the fundamental component, whereas the exact analysis would show that a vibration isolation mounting can be useful; i.e., sometimes an analysis of components of several frequencies may be required [1]. This, however, may be quite difficult. In such cases, resolving an arbitrary force- time variation into several harmonics can provide some insight. The following represents data in the Fourier series (decomposition into several harmonics) of some representative force- time variations in Figure 38, which are neither sinusoidal nor sudden. Each force is assumed to be a periodic function of the time;

λ = τ/T, where τ is pulse width, T is the process period; = fundamental frequency.

The Fourier expansions for these forcing functions are given in Table 2. e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1

h Square wave 2h t h

τ τ

h Saw tooth 2h t h

2τ

Repeated step 2h

t τ

Figure 38 Typical Periodic Nonsinusoidal Vibratory Processes

T1-25 3. The displacements (max. deflections) of the mounts can be calculated from Equation (45) for any given single disturbing force or torque. If several force/torques act simultaneously, vector addition of forces in different directions is required, and Equation (45) cannot be used. 4. The case of a horizontal disturbing force has not been considered in this presentation. 5. Other things being equal, the best arrangement for the mounts is to arrange them so that their resultant force passes through the center of gravity of the equipment and that its line of action is a principal axis. If there is a resultant torque about the center of gravity, its direction should be about a principal axis through the center of gravity. However, if this arrangement is impractical, it need not be adhered to.

9.0 COMPLEX DRIVING FORCES

λ = τ/T, where τ is pulse width, T is the process period; = fundamental frequency.

The Fourier expansions for these forcing functions are given in Table 2. e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1

h Square wave 2h t h

τ τ

h Saw tooth 2h t h

2τ

Repeated step 2h

t τ

Figure 38 Typical Periodic Nonsinusoidal Vibratory Processes

T1-25 TABLE 2 FOURIER EXPANSIONS FOR VIBRATORY PROCESSES IN FIGURE 38 (angles in radians)

Wave Shape Function Harmonic Amplitude as Fractions of 2h ( = fundamental frequency)

Frequency of 2 3 4 5 6 Harmonics 2 2 2 Square wave ______π 0003π 5π 1 1 1 1 1 1 Saw tooth ______π 2π 3π 4π 5π 6π 2sin πλ 2sin 2πλ 2sin 3πλ 2sin 4πλ 2sin 5πλ 2sin 6πλ Repeated steps ______π 2π 3π 4π 5π 6π To illustrate this approach in a particular case, let's consider a connecting-rod motion of a slider-crank mechanism, Figure 39, as in internal-combustion engines. This motion can be shown to have the following Fourier expansion:

Connecting rod r = crank length, in. r = connecting rod length, in. Piston or slider θ = crank angle, rad or deg. Crank θ x = piston placement (piston motion in-line with crank pivot), in. = crank speed, assumed constant, rad/sec a = piston acceleration, in/sec2 x

Figure 39 Schematic of a Slider-Crank Mechanism

x 1 1 1 e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 __ = A + cos θ + __ A cos 2θ – __ A cos 4θ + __ A cos 6θ ... (46) r 0 4 2 16 4 36 6

– ___ a = cos θ + A cos 2θ – A cos 4θ + A cos 6θ ... (47) r2 2 4 6 where A2, A4, A6 are given as follows in Table 3 [4].

TABLE 3 COEFFICIENTS FOR FOURIER EXPANSION OF CONNECTING ROD MOTION

/r A2 A4 A6

3.0 0.3431 0.0101 0.0003 3.5 0.2918 0.0062 0.0001 4.0 0.2540 0.0041 0.0001 4.5 0.2250 0.0028 — 5.0 0.2020 0.0021 —

10.0 DESIGN PROBLEM EXAMPLES

The following are a number of problems intended to familiarize the reader with the basic applications of vibration isolators. More advanced techniques which would result in stiffer isolators while achieving adequate isolation can be found in [1].

NOTE: In the following problems, unless otherwise stated, it is assumed that the loads are evenly distributed among the mounting points.

T1-26 Problem No. 1 A metal tumbling unit weighing 200 lbs and driven by a 950 rpm motor is to be mounted for at least 81% vibration isolation effieciency from the tumbling drum and motor unbalance (one cycle per revolution, or 950 cpm) using 4 cylindrical mounts in shear. Select the isolators. The weight load per mounting is (1/4) x 200 lbs = 50 lbs. From the basic vibration chart, Figure 12, a forcing frequency of 950 cpm (~ 16Hz) and 81% isolation lead to a point of intersection corresponding to a static deflection of 0.25 in. Cylindrical mount Part Number V10Z 2-311C, loaded in shear, has a deflection 0.32 in. at 50 lbs. Since this deflection is in excess of 0.25 in., the isolation will be greater than the design minimum. From the basic chart in Figure 12, it is seen to be between 85-90%.

Problem No. 2 Consider the tumbling unit of Problem No. 1 and suppose the motor speed were increased to 2500 rpm. What isolators could be used, allowing loading both in shear and in compression? From the basic vibration chart, Figure 12, for a forcing frequency of 2500 cpm and 81% isolation, we find a static deflection of about 0.037 in. Hence we must look for isolators with a load rating not less than 50 lbs and with a corresponding deflection of not less than 0.037 in. The following mounts can be considered:

Load in Compression Load in Shear V10Z 2-300C (0.078 in. deflection) V10Z 2-330B (0.14 in. deflection) V10Z 2-317C (0.078 in.) V10Z 2-311C (0.31 in.) V10Z 2-310B (0.138 in.) V10Z 2-314C (0.042 in.)

Amongst these, the highest percentage of isolation is afforded by the mount with the largest deflection (V10Z 2-311C), provided that such a deflection is permissible.

Problem No. 3 A small business machine is to be mounted for 81% vibration isolation effieciency. The weight is 25 lbs and there are 4 mounting points. What additional information is required for the selection of the vibration isolation system?

Information which is needed is as follows: allowable vibration amplitudes of the machine, as a function of frequency; e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 frequency of disturbing force; direction and point of application of disturbing force; space limitations, if any; ambient conditions, if unusual; mass and compliance distribution of machine – if not uniform.

Problem No. 4 A device contains 4 symmetrically located special-configuration isolators (Finger-Flex), Part Number V10R 4-1502D, each isolator deflecting just over 0.07 in. at 20 lb load. In order to obtain satisfactory vibration isolation, it is desired to increase the deflection from 0.07 in. to 0.14 in., the load remaining the same. How can this be done? One way is to stack two (identical) mounts in series, see section 7.2, each of the four isolators being replaced by such a set.

Problem No. 5 A unit which is to be mounted for 81% vibration isolation efficiency has a forcing frequency of 1500 cpm (25 Hz), weighs 1080 lbs and is to use 6 vibration isolators in shear. Isolators with a female tap are required. Select an isolator model. The load per isolator is 1080/6 = 180 lbs. At 1500 cpm and 81% isolation effieciency, the basic vibration chart, Figure 12, gives a static deflection of 0.10 in. Isolator V10Z 2-308C loaded in shear has a deflection of about 0.13 in. at 180 lbs. This being in excess of 0.10 in., the degree of isolation is certainly satisfactory. This model has a female tap.

Problem No. 6 A 275 lb motor is mounted with cylindrical isolators V10Z 2-311C loaded in shear at six points, the forcing frequency being 1100 cpm (~ 18 Hz). What is the percentage of vibration isolation attained? The load per isolator = 275/6 = 45.8 lbs, assuming mounts to be symmetrically located, so that load is evenly distributed. From the design information furnished in the catalog, the shear deflection of the isolator at this load is ~ 0.28 in. From Figure 12, the point of intersection of 0.28 in. static deflection and forcing frequency of 1100 cpm gives an isolation efficiency of about 87%.

Problem No. 7 An air conditioner weighs 250 lbs and is driven by a motor at 1700 rpm. The unit is mounted in shear on four V10Z 2- 317B cylindrical isolators. Is this design satisfactory?

T1-27 The isolated unit is not properly installed because the maximum load rating for this isolator, as indicated in the catalog, is 21 lbs in shear and 40 lbs in compression. The load per mount is 250/4 = 62.5 lbs. Even if the isolator is installed so that it is loaded in compression, it would not be satisfactory, since the load (62.5 lbs) is significantly in excess of the 40 lbs recommended limit. Mounts, which have sufficient load capacity, are as follows (with static deflection indicated):

Part Number Static Deflection V10Z 2-310B (Compression) (0.175 in.) V10Z 2-311C (Shear – marginal) (0.38 in.) V10Z 2-330B (Shear) (0.175 in.)

The choice of isolators depends (amongst other matters) on the degree of isolation desired. With any of the above isolators, this will be in excess of 81% for the forcing frequency equal to motor rpm.

Problem No. 8 If, in the preceding problem, the air conditioner weighs 350 lbs, what is the choice of mounts? The load/mount is 350/4 = 87.5 lbs. The following mounts can be considered (with static deflection indicated):

Part Number Static Deflection V10Z 2-314C (Compression) (0.075 in.) V10Z 2-311D (Compression) (0.094 in.) V10Z 2-330B (Shear) (0.26 in.)

At 1750 cpm, 81% vibration isolation corresponds to a static deflection of 0.074 in.

Problem No. 9 A computer weighs 200 lbs. It is to be vibration isolated with 4 mounts. The forcing frequency is 1750 cpm (~ 29 Hz). If the isolators are to be loaded in compression, what models are available and what is the percentage of vibration isolation attained in each case?

The load per mount is 200/4 = 50 lbs. Hence, isolators with a load capacity of at least 50 lbs in compression are needed. e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 For each isolator, the catalog contains data (table or plots) from which static deflection under a 50 lb load can be found. From the basic vibration chart, Figure 12, with this value of static deflection and a forcing frequency of 1750 cpm, the point of intersection defines the attained vibration isolation efficiency. Thus, the following isolators can be selected:

Static deflection, in., Isolation Type of Mount Part Number at 50 lb compression Efficiency, % Cylindrical V10Z 2-317C 0.078 in. 82% Cylindrical V10Z 2-300C 0.078 in. 82% Cylindrical V10Z 2-310B 0.138 in. 91% Special (Finger-Flex) V10R 4-1506B 0.14 in. ~ 91% Special (Finger-Flex) V10R 4-1506C 0.09 in. ~ 85%

Problem No. 10 A 4-cylinder engine weighing 370 lbs and operating at 2800 rpm is to be isolated for 81% vibration isolation for one-per- revolution excitation frequency. Discuss the possible selection of isolators. The lowest frequency to be isolated is 2800 cpm (~ 46.5 Hz). In general, it is desirable to arrange the mounts so that the resultant of the loads, supported by the mounts, passes through the C.G. This is the same condition (but stated differently) as the one described in Section 5.0 above. If the isolators are symmetrically arranged, and each isolator carries the same load, this usually means that the symmetry axis of the isolators passes through the C.G. In this case, we are concerned not only with the translational displacement of the engine as a whole, but also with engine rotation. In addition, flexible gas lines and the throttle linkage can vibrate and their vibration isolation may pose an additional problem. At 2800 cpm and 81% isolation efficiency, the basic vibration chart, Figure 12, gives a static deflection of about 0.03 in. The load is 370/4 = 92.5 lbs per mount. Consider rectangular mount V10Z 6-500B loaded in shear. This has a deflection of about 0.12 in. in shear, which can accommodate the rotation of the engine about the torque-roll axis. The mount deflection in compression would serve to accommodate the shock load in translation.

T1-28 Problem No. 11 An 80 lb fan is to be vibration isolated in shear at four points with at least 93% vibration isolation efficiency when the fan is turning at 2000 rpm. Specify the mounts. The main source of vibration is rotor unbalance, and the transmission to ground of the vertical component of this force, (which is sinusoidal) is undesirable (see [1] for isolation of other vibration components). Hence, consider Section 3.1, Equa- tion (8), with negligible damping.

Solution #1: From the basic vibration chart, Figure 12, 93% isolation at a forced frequency of 2000 cycles/minute (~ 33.3 Hz) corresponds to a static deflection of about 0.14 in. and to a natural frequency of about 500 cpm (~ 8.5 Hz). Consider cylindrical vibration isolators, Part Number V10Z 2-300C loaded in shear, which deflects about 0.17 in. at 20 lbs and appears to be suitable for this application.

Solution #2: (Analytical) When the isolation efficiency is 93%, the force transmissibility, F is 1 – 0.93 = 0.07 or 7%. With zero damping (δ = 0), Equation (8) gives for δ = 0:

______1 F = (48) f2 ± 1 – ___ 2 ( fn )

where F = 0.07; "+" is to be used when f < fn, and "–" is to be used when f > fn.

Since for good isolation, f > fn, "–" sign will be used.

Solving for f/fn from Equation (48), we obtain f/fn = 3.91. Since f = 33.3 Hz, fn = 8.52 Hz. From Equation (4), solving for xst = 0.344 cm = 0.136 in. e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1

These calculations agree adequately with the values found from the chart in Figure 12.

Problem No. 12 Data as in problem 11, but damping is estimated at c/ccr = 0.1, see Section 2.4 above. How would it change the specifications? The force transmissibility, F, corresponding to 93% vibration isolation efficiency, is 0.07 and the forcing frequency is 2000 cpm (33.3 Hz). From Figure 10, for damping ratio c/ccr = 0.1 at = 0.07, the frequency f/fn = ~ 5. Hence, fn = 2000/5 = 400 cpm (~ 6.7 Hz). From the basic chart, Figure 12, this natural frequency corresponds to a static deflection of ~ 0.21 in. Since the load remains at 20 lbs per mount, the isolators specified for Problem 11 are too stiff. Isolator V10Z 2-310B loaded in shear appears to be satisfactory (deflection ~ 0.33 in. at 20 lbs). This problem could also have been solved by a computer program, or analytically. In the latter case, Equation (8) can be solved for fn at the value c/ccr = 0.1, f = 33.3 Hz. Comparison of Problems 11 and 12 shows that viscous damping in isolators results in increasing transmissibility at the isolation frequency range (which starts from f/fn = 2 = 1.41); i.e., reducing effectiveness of isolation and requiring softer isolators to get the desired efficiency. This is the price to pay for very desirable reduction of resonance amplitudes. When the damping is not viscous but material damping, such as in isolators with rubber flexible elements, the deterioration of the high frequency isolation is minimal.

Problem No. 13 A Vibroactive Object (Machine) A small machine tool weighs between 3.5 lbs and 5 lbs depending on the weight of the work piece. When the forcing frequency, which is generated by the vibration source inside the machine, is between 60-90 Hz. and again when it is within 200-400 Hz range, the vibration is objectionable. Design a vibration mount for a 3-point support with vibration isolation efficiency of not less than 81%.

T1-29 In the absence of more information, we may assume that isolators have zero damping. If we isolate for the lowest objectionable forced frequency (60 Hz), that would take care of all the troublesome regions. From the basic vibration chart, Figure 12, an 81% isolation ratio at a forced frequency of 60 Hz corresponds to a static deflection of about 0.019 in. The weight supported by each mounting ranges from 3.5/3 lbs to 5/3 lbs, or from 1.17 to 1.67 lbs. The natural frequency is read off from the chart at about 23 Hz. Hence, the vibration mount specification is: 0.019 in. deflection 1.17 lbs to 1.67 lbs supported weight. Square mount V10Z 1-321B loaded in compression is a possibility. Considering the special configuration (Finger-Flex) mounts, Part Number V10R 4-1500A can be selected. Its deflection at 1.17 lbs is only about 0.03 in. In view of its construction, the spring rate of this mount increases rapidly with deflection and the special configuration unit would be both more economical in the use of space and more effective in taking care of overloads, if this should arise.

Problem No. 14 A Vibration/Shock Sensitive Object Sensitive radio equipment is to be mounted with a 3-point suspension on a boat. Protection from engine disturbance is required, as well as from impacts of waves and from bumping against pier. The equipment weighs 54 lbs and the engine runs at 2000 rpm. Here we have both steady vibrations at 2000 cycles/min as well as shock loads, caused by wave pounding and by bumping against the dock. We have no precise information on the latter and need to do the best we can. For the steady vibration, consider Equation (8) with zero damping which becomes Equation (48). At 81% efficiency and forcing frequency of 2000 cycles/min, the basic vibration chart, Figure 12, gives a static deflection of about 0.058 in. The load per mount is 54/3 = 18 lbs. The natural frequency obtained from the chart is about 760 cycles/min = 12.7 Hz. V10R 4-1504B ring-style special-configuration (Finger-Flex) mount approximately fulfills this condition. In order to limit the effect of shock loads, conical bumpers may be added to limit the horizontal shock load, possibly with the V10Z 7-1020C type. It can, however, also be made an arbitrary guess and assumption that the pier and waves effects are equivalent approximately to a 0.5 mph sudden change of horizontal velocity of the boat and try to design the vibration mount for this condition. This will provide some insight into how much of a sudden velocity can be expected to be cushioned by vibration mounting. This corresponds to Section 3.3.1 of horizontal motion and negligible damping (c/ccr = 0). It is also important to know how much force the sensitive radio equipment can take without damage. Often such a force is expressed as a g-load; i.e., how many times its own weight the equipment can survive. For example, a 1/2 g-load means e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 that the object can withstand a maximum force of (1/2) (54) = 27 lbs without damage. Usually, the allowable shock loads are determined by testing. Let's assume that the maximum safe load on the radio equipment is 1g or 54 lbs. From Equation (15), Section 3.3.1, we have

amax 2fV ____ = _____ = 1, g g where V = 0.5 mph = 8.8 in/sec = 0.22 m/sec. Hence, f = 7 Hz. This frequency is quite low, and associated with undesirably large deflections of vibration isolators. This suggests using a cylindrical mount loaded in compression for the vertical (engine) vibrations and having reasonably large compliance in the horizontal (shear) mode to take care of some of the shock, with a conical bumper to limit excessive horizontal deflections. For example, cylindrical mount V10Z 2-300A has 0.075 in. deflection at 20 lbs compressive load, while in shear, the deflection at 16 lbs is about 0.32 in., or six times as much. This is an overload, but might still be considered due to the infrequent occurences of the shock load. The natural frequency in the shear mode based on the 16 lb load is about 5.7 Hz, which is 20% lower than the 7 Hz specified above. dmax amax From Equation (18), ____ = ____ = 1, thus d = 0.32 in. Note that d is computed as if the weight were supported d g max max in shear. st This is too large a maximum deflection. A conical bumper should be used to limit the deflection by 0.20 in., say. Alterna- tively, a stronger and stiffer mount should be considered, for example, V10Z 2-300B, which deflects 0.26 in. at 18 lbs in shear. The isolation effectiveness in compression is reduced to about 65%; and while the isolation ratio in shear is also reduced, so is the corresponding maximum deflection. In addition, the conical bumpers should be added. The final choice of mounts is a matter of judgment.

Problem No. 15 A single-cylinder gasoline engine drives a one-cylinder air compressor with belt. Both units are bolted to a light-gage metal pan, which is welded to the top of an air-receiver tank, which is in turn mounted to a four-wheel steel-tired dolly. The whole unit vibrates and walks all over the floor. The engine weighs 100 lbs and turns at 3000 rpm. The compressor weighs 120 lbs and turns at 1200 rpm. The tank weighs 25 lbs and the dolly weighs 50 lbs. What can be done?

T1-30 Possibly good rubber tires on the dolly and/or wheel suspension would help. If the tank is mounted to the dolly, total weight is:

W = 100 + 120 + 75 = 295 lbs.

The lowest-frequency disturbing force is that due to the air compressor; i.e., 1200 cycles/min = 20 Hz. At 81% vibration isolation efficiency, Figure 12 gives a static deflection of the isolator of about 0.15 in. Considering a 4-mount suspension, the load per mount is 74 lbs. Cylindrical mount V10Z 2-310B would be a possibility, loaded in compression. If the dolly continues to move, since it weighs only 50 lbs, it might require a little softer material than the 40-durometer rubber, in order to effect more isolation. Next, consider mounting on isolators the pan that holds the engine and air-compressor unit. The total weight here is 100 + 220 lbs and with the same static deflection of 0.15 in., a V10Z 2-310A mount would suffice in compression, considering the fact that the chart shows the V10Z 2-310B mounts to deflect 0.12 in. at 55 lbs. The lower-durometer mount (Type A, at 30- durometer) should, therefore, approximate the 0.15 in. required deflection. Note that the last letter in the mount identification specifies the approximate durometer hardness of the rubber (A = 30, B = 40, C = 50).

Problem No. 16 Isolation of a Punch Press (also see [1]). This is one of the most difficult applications for isolation. Shock absorption is all that can be expected. Unit weighs 1500 lbs, sits on four feet, operates at 50-100 rpm, and is driven by a 5 H.P., 1750 rpm electric motor, the flywheel turning at 250 rpm. While many vibration problems deal with sinusoidal or nearly sinusoidal forces and some (such as in package cushioning) deal with essentially sudden velocity changes, here we have a suddenly applied force, which is periodic, but not harmonic. The force-time variation is essentially that of the "Repeated Step" in Section 9.0. If we assume that the punching operation of the press occurs, say, during 30° of crank rotation, then the λ in this case (Repeated Step, Section 9.0) is 30/360 = 1/12 = 0.08333. From Section 9.0, we find that the amplitude of the fundamental harmonic is (2/π) sin πλ or 0.164. This is only about 16% of the amplitude of the force pulse, and its frequency is operating frequency (50-100 rpm or 0.85 - 1.7 Hz). Consider, however, the 4th harmonic (200-400 cycles/min). Its amplitude is (2 sin 4πλ)/4π = .1376 or 13.8%. This is not much less than the amplitude of the basic (fundamental) frequency. This shows that in the punch-press type of disturbing force, the higher harmonics cannot be neglected.

T1 T e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 The fundamental frequency (50-100 cycles/min) is so low that isolation with vibration isolation mounts would lead to their excessive static deflections. However, it is conceivable that a practical vibration isolator would be successful in isolating some of the significant higher harmonics. For vibration isolation of punch presses, the following few rules might be useful (also see [1]).

1. Slow-speed presses should be mounted with mounts of greater deflection than high-speed presses. 2. Mount deflections used for presses by direct installation of vibration isolation mounts under their feet may vary from 1/32 in. to 3/4 in. depending largely on operating speed and stroke length, with the smaller deflection being the more common. 3. There may be several static deflections that will work, while other static deflections interspaced in between them will not work; i.e., 1/16 in. and 3/16 in. may work, while 1/8 in. may not work. This can be caused, at least in part, by the fact that a significant set of higher harmonics may be isolated at one deflection, but not at another. 4. Even the best mounting system will still transmit a significant amount of vibration and shock. 5. If the ultimate in isolation is required, the punch press must be attached solidly to an inertia block of large mass and the entire press and the block mounted on vibration isolators.

Problem No. 17 A relatively high-precision experiment is to be conducted in the laboratory of a textile plant. The laboratory floor vibrates at an amplitude of 0.0005 in. due to the operation of industrial sewing machines and other textile machinery. The basic floor- vibration frequencies are that excited by the industrial sewing machines, which operate in the 1500-5000 rpm range. It is desired to vibration isolate the test unit, which weighs 25 lbs, with a four-point mounting at not less than 81% isolation of displacement. At 81% displacement isolation, the displacement transmissibility, x is 0.19. It is calculated using the same equations (8) and (48) as for F.

For zero damping, Equation (48) gives: ______1 F = f2 ± 1 – ___ 2 ( f n )

T1-31 Taking f as the lowest sewing-machine speed (1500 cycles/min or 25 Hz) and F = 0.19, we find fn = 600 cycles/min = 10 Hz. The static deflection of the vibration isolators is determined from Equation (4), as xst = 0.25 cm = 0.1 in. The same result can be obtained from Figure 12. The isolation specification, therefore, is 0.10 in. static deflection at a load of 25/4 = 6.25 lbs. Considering cylindrical vibration isolators, mount V10Z 2-316B loaded in shear, has a 0.10 in. deflection at about 6.25 lbs. Soft mounts, such as this one, are often using shear deformation of the flexible elements.

Problem No. 18 Data as in Problem 17, except that system damping is estimated at 10% of critical ( = ~ 0.63). Reevaluate the specification of the isolators. In Problem 17, we found that the displacement transmissibility corresponding to 81% isolation is x = 0.19; and that the lowest forcing frequency, f = 1500 cycles/min. = 10 Hz. From Figure 10, p.T1-11, which applies to x as well as to F, we find that the given value of the transmissibility at = ~ 0.63 yields a frequency ratio f/fn = ~ 2.7. Hence, fn = 1500/2.7 = ~ 9 Hz. At this natural frequency, the basic vibration chart (Figure 12) gives a static deflection of about 0.117 in. The load per mount, as in Problem 17, is 6.25 lbs. The isolator specification V10Z 2-316B of Problem 17 remains satisfactory.

Problem No. 19 An impact testing machine consists of a simple pendulum of length 4 feet and weight 5 lbs, which is initially horizontal. It is released and at the bottom of its swing impacts the test object. In this test, it comes to rest essentially instantaneously (inelastic impact). The object (equipment to be tested) weighs 100 lbs and is capable of withstanding accelerations up to 2g. Design a vibration isolation/mounting system so that the equipment will survive the impact test. The velocity aquired by the pendulum in the 4 foot drop is

2 Vo = 2gh, = 193 in/sec (striking velocity), where g = 386 in/sec ; h = 4 ft. x 12 = 48 in.

The momentum of the pendulum just prior to impact is equal to the impulse "I" applied to the object. It is equal to the mass of the pendulum times its velocity, 5 I = ____ x 193, or 2.5 lb-sec.

386 e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1

If the pendulum retains a residual velocity Vp' just after striking the test object, "I" would be computed from

I = (Vp – Vp') x (mass of pendulum).

The impact result is an essentially sudden velocity change by V1, of the equipment, which, can be calculated from Equation (20) as: Ig V = ___ in/sec. W

(2.5) (386) = ______in./sec. = 9.65 in./sec. 100

This value of V can be used in Equation (15), or

dmax amax 2fV ____ = ____ = _____ dst g g

with amax = 2g and V = 9.65 in./sec. Then fn = g/V = 1.35 Hz.

Realization of such low natural frequency (albeit, in a horizontal direction; less destabalizing than in the vertical direction) is a very special problem. It can be addressed by utilizing information in [1].

Problem No. 20 Vibration Isolation of High Precision Object Formulate requirements for vibration isolation system (fn and ) for a projection aligner for semiconductor manufacturing for two conditions:

T1-32 A - the apparatus is installed on the floor of a regular manufacturing plant so that for vertical direction X (f) = const = 3.0 m f 200 ___30 for frequencies 3 ~ 30 Hz and Xf(f) = 3.0 m for frequencies f 100 f > 30 Hz; for the horizontal direction Xf(f) = const = 2.5 m for 30 20 frequencies 2 ~ 20 Hz, and X (f) = 2.5 ___ m for frequencies f f f > 20 Hz.

B - floor vibration levels corresponding to line VC-B in Figure 15 (both for vertical and horizontal directions). 10

Vibration sensitivity of this apparatus to vertical and horizontal vibration of its frame (base) was experimentally determined and shown in Figure 40. These plots show what amplitude of vibration Xb at the given frequency results in a relative vibration amplitude in the working zone (image motion) not exceeding the Δ tolerated amplitude o = 0.1 m. The minima on these plots rep- Base Displacement in Micron (rms) resent structural natural frequencies of the devices. At each fre- 1 quency f, transmissibility from the base to the work zone is f = Δo/Xb. v = 125 microns/sec 5000 micro-inch/sec Since the vibration sensitivity f of this precision object is known (can be easily calculated from the experimentally obtained plots in Figure 40) then Expression (12b) can be used for speci- fying vibration isolation parameters. Δ Table 4 gives the values of f ( o divided by the ordinate of 0.1 the plot in Figure 40 for a given frequency) calculated for critical 10 30 50 100 200 300 points from the plots in Figure 40 for vertical and horizontal di- Frequency (Hz) rections, respectively. Figure 40 Vibration Sensitivity for e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 Φ Φ Table 4 also contains values of Av and Ah calculated for Projection Aligner these points using Equation (12b) and vertical and horizontal Perkin-Elmer Microlign Mod. 341 floor vibration amplitudes specified in A. for 0.1 m Image Motion (Solid Line - Limit of Vertical Floor Vibration Amplitude, Broken Line - Limit of Horizontal Floor Vibration Amplitude).

TABLE 4 VIBRATION ISOLATION SYNTHESIS FOR FIGURE 40 A. Vertical Direction (Y-axis)

f Hz (f) Φ Av Hz Φ Bv Hz 11 0.0083 4.51 12.9 12 0.010 12.3 36.6 20 0.087 7.0 26.9 25 0.0091 26.9 116 30 0.056 13.0 61 32 0.303 6.3 29.7 41 0.05 22.5 106 70 0.0077 128 601

B. Horizontal Direction (X-axis)

f Hz (f) Φ Ah Hz Φ Bh Hz 7 0.0033 13.7 23.1 12 0.05 6.05 37.5 22 0.125 22.3 78 65 0.071 49.6 174 70 0.090 49.2 172 100 0.090 84 294

T1-33 The values of ΦBv and ΦBh were calculated using floor vibration levels corresponding to line VC-B in Figure 15 (both for vertical and horizontal directions). Since plots in Figure 15 are given for vibratory velocity Vf, vibration displacement amplitudes Xf were calculated for each frequency of interest as Xf = Vf/2f. Values of ΦA calculated per Specification A are interesting only for comparison, since high precision microelectronic production equipment is never used in conventional plant facilities, only in specially designed buildings complying with some of VC criteria. It can be seen from Table 4A that the lowest value of ΦAv (case A) for vertical direction is 4.51 Hz. If vibration isolators with medium damping ν = 0.6 are used, then from Equation (12a) the required vertical natural frequency fv = 4.51 0.6 = 3.04 Hz. However, if isolators made of rubber with high damping ν = 1.2 are used, then fv = 4.51 1.2 = 5.0 Hz, which can be realized by passive isolators with soft rubber flexible elements. Much stiffer isolators (fvz > 14 Hz) can be used to comply with values of ΦBv, per Specification B, which represent (according to not very stringent requirement VC-B) floor conditions at the microelectronics industry installations. A similar situation is seen in Table 4B; however, realization of natural frequencies corresponding to ΦBh (4.7 Hz for ν = 0.6, 6.63 Hz for ν = 1.2) in horizontal directions with elastomeric isolators does not present any difficulty; even much lower values can be easily realized.

References

[1] Rivin, E.I., Passive Vibration Isolation, ASME Press, N.Y., 2003

[2] Crede Ch. E., Vibration And Shock Isolation, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, Chapter Three, 1951 e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1

[3] Mindlin, R.D., "Dynamics of Package Cushioning", Bell System Technical Journal, Vol. XXIV, Nos. 3-4, July-October, 1945

[4] Hirschhorn, J., Kinematics and Dynamics of Plane Mechanisms, McGraw-Hill, 1962

[5] C.M.T. Wells Kelo Ltd., A Commercial Guide to Shock And Vibration Isolation, Sept 1982, First Amendment, May 1983.

T1-34 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Appendix 1 – Useful Formulas in Vibration Analysis

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

Natural Frequency

____1 ____k ____1 ____kg ____1 ____g fn = = = 2 m 2 W 2 xst

where fn = natural frequency in cycles-per-second (Hz)

k = spring constant (lbs/in, N/m)

m = mass of load (lb mass, kg mass)

g = gravitational constant, 386 in/sec2 or 9.8 m/sec2

W = weight of load, m•g (lb or N)

xst = static deflectionof the spring (in or m)

____3.13 ____188 e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 fn ≈ cycles/sec = cycles/min if xst is in inch xst xst

____5 ____300 ≈ cycles/sec = cycles/min if xst is in cm xst xst

Damped Natural Frequency

2 ___c ______1 – 2 fdn = fn 1 – = fn ( c cr ) 42

where =2 (c/ccr) = log (An/An-1) logarithmic decrement

c = damping constant (lb-sec/in or N-sec/m)

ccr = critical damping constant = 2 km

th An =n amplitude of vibration

Natural Frequency of Torsional Vibrations

1 k f = ______t t 2 I

where kt = torsional stiffness (lb-in/rad or N-m/rad)

I = polar mass moment of inertia (lb-in-sec2 or kg-m2) (continued)

T1-35 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Appendix 1 (continued)

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

Transmissibility

2 f 1 + __ __ f ______mf ______( n ) F = x = m + m 2 2 f ___f2 __ __f 1 – + ( f n 2 ) ( f n )

F = force transmissibility

x = motion transmissibility

m = mass of load

mf = mass of base (foundation)

For mf = ∞:

T1 T e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 F < 1 for f 1.41 fn

For mf = ∞ and ≈ o (negligible damping):

______1 F = f2 ± 1 – ___ ( fn 2 )

At resonance (f/fn = 1), with some damping: ______mf ___ (F)max = (x)max ≈ m + mf

T1-36 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Appendix 2 – Properties of Rubber and Plastic Materials

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF FIVE STANDARD STRUCTURAL RUBBER COMPOUNDS

Compound Numbers** R-325-BFK R-430-BFK R-530-BFK R-630-BFK R-725-BFK

Shear modules, lb per sq in. 50 70 95 140 195 Logarithmic decrement of amplitude * .041 .055 .14 .23 .35 (referred to base 10) Successive amplitude ratio* .91 .88 .72 .59 .45 Percent energy loss due to hysteresis, 17 22 47 65 80 per cycle of vibration Specific heat .47 .43 .40 .38 .35 Thermal conductivity in B.T.U., per sq ft per hr for a temp gradient of 1°F per in. .97 1.04 1.08 1.15 1.26 thickness Velocity of sound in rubber rods, ft per sec 115 165 210 345 750

* The logarithmic decrement given here represents the negative of the power to which 10 must be raised in order to obtain the ratio of any two consecutive amplitudes (on the same side of zero deflection) as unexcited vibration dies out. For instance, if the logarithmic decrement is 0.2, the ratio of one amplitude to the preceding one is 1 1 10-0.2 = _____ = _____ = 0.631 = successive amplitude ratio. 100.2 1.585

(Ordinarily, logarithmic decrement is referred to natural logarithm base e, and if such values are required, they would be e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1 2.30 times the values given here.)

** Table from U.S. Rubber Engineering Guide #850 p. 25

COMPARATIVE PROPERTIES OF RUBBER AND RELATED MATERIALS Neoprene Styrene Flouro- Ethylene Natural Nitrol Butyl Hypalon (Chloro- Silicone Butadiene Urethane Elastomer SAE Abbreviation Propylene Rubber (GR-A) HR CSM prene) SI (GR-S) PU (Viton) EPT NR NBR CR SBR HK Cost Relative to Natural Rubber 110% 110% 150% 100% 110% 125% 850% 85% 450% 2000% Tensile of Compounded Stocks 2000 psi 3000 psi 3000 psi 3500 psi 3000 psi 2500 psi 800 psi 2500 psi 8000 psi 2000 psi Durometer 40-75 30-100 55-95 30-90 30-90 40-95 45-85 40-90 65-95 50-90 Elongation fair good fair excellent excellent good fair good good good Aging excellent excellent excellent good excellent excellent excellent good excellent excellent Heat Aging excellent excellent good good very good excellent excellent good excellent excellent Sunlight Aging good excellent excellent poor good poor good poor excellent excellent Lubricating Oil Resistance poor poor good poor good excellent fair poor good good Aromatic Oil Resistance poor poor poor poor fair good poor poor good good Animal-Vegetable Oils Resistance excellent poor good fair excellent good good fair fair good Flame Resistance poor poor excellent poor good poor fair poor poor good Tear Resistance good good excellent good good fair poor fair excellent fair Abrasion Resistance good good excellent excellent excellent good poor good excellent fair Compression Set Resistance fair fair good good fair good fair fair excellent good Permeability to Gases very low good good fair low fair fair fair good excellent Dielectric Strength good good good excellent fair poor good excellent fair good Freedom from Odor good fair excellent excellent good fair fair fair good fair Maximum Temperature (°F) 250 300 250 210 260 260 600 215 250 500 Minimum Temperature (°F) -50 -50 -50 -65 -50 -60 -150 -60 -60 -40

T1-37 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Appendix 3 – Hardness Conversion Charts

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

FOR RUBBER AND PLASTICS DUROMETER — PLASTOMETER CONVERSION CHART* 100 Durometer Conversions

TYPES A BCDOOO 90 100 85 77 55 95 81 70 46 90 76 59 39 85 71 52 33 80 80 66 47 29 84 98 75 62 42 25 79 97 70 56 37 22 75 95 65 51 32 19 72 94 60 47 28 16 69 93 70 55 42 24 14 65 91 50 37 20 12 61 90 45 32 17 10 57 88 40 27 14 8 53 86 60 35 22 12 7 48 83 30 17 9 8 42 80 25 12 35 76 20 6 28 70 15 21 62 50 10 14 55 5 8 45

T1 T e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T1

Durometer Scale A DURO. 40

B DURO. 30

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Plastometer Scale Conversions Are Approximate Values Dependent on Grades and Conditions of Materials Involved *Courtesy of Shore Mfg. Co., New York

Durometer Hardness of Some Rubber Compounds

Hardness (Shore A) ASTM Designation Load Rating 30 R-325-BFK A 40 R-430-BFK B 50 R-530-BFK C 60 R-630-BFK D 70 R-725-BFK

T1-38 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Technical Section: Shaft Couplings

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

Table of Contents

1.0 INTRODUCTION

2.0 APPLICATION CONSIDERATIONS 2.1 Torque and Horsepower ...... T2-2 2.2 Shaft Misalignment ...... T2-2 2.3 Lateral and Axial Flexibility of Couplings ...... T2-3 2.4 Torsional Flexibility...... T2-3 2.5 Backlash ...... T2-3 2.6 Rotational Velocity Error ...... T2-3 2.7 Service Conditions ...... T2-3

3.0 GENERAL CLASSIFICATION OF COUPLINGS AND THEIR PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS 3.1 Rigid Couplings ...... T2-4 3.2 Misalignment-Compensating Couplings ...... T2-5 3.2.1 Selection Criterion for Frictional Misalignment-Compensating Couplings ...... T2-5 3.2.1a Oldham Couplings...... T2-5 3.2.1b Universal or U-joints ...... T2-6 3.2.1b.1 General ...... T2-6 3.2.1b.2 Kinematics ...... T2-7 Example 1: Determining the Maximum Inertia Torque ...... T2-7 3.2.1b.3 Joint Selection (Torque Rating)...... T2-9 Example 2: Universal Joint Selection for Continuous Operation ...... T2-9 Example 3: Universal Joint Selection for Intermittent Operation with Shock Loading ...... T2-9 Example 4: Determining the Maximum Speed of an Input Shaft ...... T2-9 3.2.1b.4 Secondary Couples ...... T2-10 3.2.1b.5 Joints in Series ...... T2-10 Example 5: Determining the Maximum Speed of an Input Shaft in a Series ...... T2-10 Example 6 ...... T2-11 3.2.2 Selection Criterion for Misalignment-Compensating Couplings with Elastic Connectors...... T2-11 3.2.2.1 Designs of Elastic Misalignment-Compensating Couplings ...... T2-11 3.3 Torsionally Flexible Couplings and Combination Purpose Couplings...... T2-12 3.3.1 Torsionally Flexible Couplings ...... T2-12 3.3.2 Combination Purpose Couplings ...... T2-13 3.3.2.1 Miscellaneous Combination Purpose Couplings ...... T2-15 3.3.2.1a Flexible Shafts ...... T2-15 3.3.2.1b Uniflex Couplings ...... T2-15 3.3.2.1c Jaw and Spider Couplings ...... T2-16 e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T2 3.3.2.1d Sleeve Type Couplings (Geargrip) ...... T2-17

4.0 REFERENCES...... T2-17

T2-1 1.0 INTRODUCTION

A coupling is a design component intended to connect shafts of two mechanical units, such as an electric motor and a hydraulic pump or compressor driven by this motor, etc. As stated in the Resolution of the First International Conference on Flexible Couplings [1, 3], "...a flexible coupling, although it is relatively small and cheap compared to the machines it connects, is a critical aspect of any shaft system and a good deal of attention must be paid to its choice at the design stage." The following is a brief engineering data on couplings. More details are available in [1, 3].

The application considerations for couplings are numerous. The most important are the following:

• Torque and Horsepower • Allowable Shaft Misalignment • Lateral and Axial Flexibility of Coupling • Torsional Flexibility • Backlash • Rotational Velocity Error • Service Conditions

2.0 APPLICATION CONSIDERATIONS

Flexible couplings are designed to accommodate various types of load conditions. No one type of coupling can provide the universal solution to all coupling problems; hence many designs are available, each possessing construction features to accommodate one or more types of application requirements. Successful coupling selection requires a clear understanding of application conditions. The major factors governing coupling selection are discussed below.

2.1 Torque and Horsepower The strength of a coupling is defined as its ability to transmit a required 3 torque load, frequently in combination with other factors. Hence, a coupling may be selected whose rated torque capacity is many times greater than needed. For example, in a coupling subject to wear and NT HP = increasing backlash, a useful torque rating would depend chiefly on back- 63,000 lash limitations rather than strength. For manually operated drives, the torque imposed through improper handling may be in excess of the drive torque required. Couplings are frequently specified in horsepower capacity at vari- 2 ous speeds. Horsepower is a function of torque and speed, and it can be readily determined from the formula: 2500 rpm

NT HORSEPOWER 3600 rpm HP = ______1800 rpm 63,000 1

where N = rotational speed in rpm and T= torque in lb. in. This relation- 1/2 ship is graphically represented in Figure 1. 1/3 1/4 2.2 Shaft Misalignment

T2 T e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T2 Shaft misalignment can be due to unavoidable tolerance build-ups in a 0 4 12 25 28 40 50 mechanism or intentionally produced to fulfill a specific function. Various types of misalignment, as they are defined in AGMA Standard 510.02, are shown TORQUE lb. in. in Figure 2. Figure 1 Relationship Between Horsepower, Torque and Rotational Speed

T2-2 A > B θ Alignment A B Nonsymmetrical Y Angular Misalignment Parallel Offset or Lateral Misalignment θ A = B θ Y

A B Combined Angular-Offset Misalignment Symmetrical Angular Misalignment

Figure 2 Various Types of Shaft Misalignment

2.3 Lateral and Axial Flexibility of Couplings Lateral and axial flexibility of couplings are factors frequently overlooked. The term flexible does not mean that the coupling gives complete freedom of relative movement between the coupled shafts. More properly, flexible couplings give a limited freedom of the relative movement. Some forces are needed to make a flexible coupling flex. These forces are either lateral (at right angles to the shafts), or axial, or a combination of both. Lateral forces may produce a bending moment on the shafts and a radial load on the shaft support bearings. Axial force can produce undesirable thrust loads if not considered in the original design. Universal Cardan joints and Oldham couplings impose friction-generated lateral loads on the bearings. The elastomeric types of couplings will produce lateral forces in proportion to their stiffness. These issues are addressed below in Section 3.0.

2.4 Torsional Flexibility Torsional flexibility of a coupling is the torsional (twisting) elastic deformation induced in a flexible coupling while transmitting torque. In some applications using encoders, it may be essential that the torsional flexibility be very low so as not to introduce reading errors caused by the angular displacements. On the other hand, torsional deflection may be desirable for reducing torque oscillations and peak torques in driving high inertia and/or dynamic loads.

2.5 Backlash Backlash is the amount of rotational play inherent in flexible couplings which utilize moving parts. In some applications, this "slack" may not be objectionable, but in an application in servo-controlled systems, such as described in the previous paragraph, backlash would rule out couplings of this type.

2.6 Rotational Velocity Error In addition to the types of error already described, universal joints produce an error because of their kinematic behavior. If the input speed into a single universal joint is held constant, then the output will produce cyclic fluctuations in direct relation to the operating angles of the input and output shafts. This will be described more fully in the section dealing with Universal Joints.

2.7 Service Conditions e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T2 Service conditions encompass factors such as temperature, operating medium, lubrication, accessibility for maintenance, etc., and should be reviewed before a final selection is made.

3.0 GENERAL CLASSIFICATION OF COUPLINGS AND THEIR PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

Couplings play various roles in machine transmissions. According to their role in transmissions, couplings can be divided into four classes: 1. Rigid Couplings. These couplings are used for rigid connection of precisely aligned shafts. Besides torque, they also transmit bending moment and shear force if any misalignment is present, as well as axial force. The three latter factors may cause substantial extra loading of the shaft bearings. The principal areas of application: long shafting; very tight space preventing use of misalignment-compensating or torsionally flexible couplings; inadequate durability and/or reliability of other types of couplings.

T2-3 2. Misalignment-Compensating Couplings. Such couplings are required for connecting two members of a power-transmission or motion-transmission system that are not perfectly aligned. "Misalignment" means that components that are coaxial by design are not actually coaxial, due either to assembly errors or to deformations of subunits and/or their foundations, Figure 2. The latter factor is of substantial importance for transmission systems on nonrigid foundations. If the misaligned shafts are rigidly connected, this leads to elastic deformations of the shafts, and thus to dynamic loads on bearings, vibrations, increased friction losses in power transmission systems, and unwanted friction forces in motion transmission, especially in control systems. Misalignment-compensating couplings are used to reduce the effects of imperfect alignment by allowing nonrestricted or partially restricted motion between the connected shaft ends. Similar coupling designs are sometimes used to change bending natural frequencies/modes of long shafts. When only misalignment compensation is required, rigidity in torsional direction is usually a positive factor, otherwise the dynamic characteristics of the transmission system might be distorted. To achieve high torsional rigidity together with high mobility/compliance in misalignment directions (radial or parallel offset, axial, angular), torsional and misalignment-compensating displacements in the coupling have to be separated by using an intermediate compensating member. Frequently, torsionally rigid "misalignment-compensating" couplings, such as gear couplings, are referred to in the trade literature as "flexible" couplings. 3. Torsionally Flexible Couplings. Such couplings are used to change the dynamic characteristics of a transmission system, such as natural frequency, damping and character/degree of nonlinearity. The change is desirable or necessary when severe torsional vibrations are likely to develop in the transmission system, leading to dynamic overloads in power- transmission systems. Torsionally flexible couplings usually demonstrate high torsional compliance to enhance their influence on transmission dynamics. 4. Combination Purpose Couplings are required to possess both compensating ability and torsional flexibility. The majority of the commercially available connecting couplings belong to this group.

3.1 Rigid Couplings Typical rigid couplings are shown in Figure 3. Usually, such a coupling comprises a sleeve fitting snugly on the connected shafts and positively connected with each shaft by pins, Figure 3a, or by keys, Figure 3b. Sometimes two sleeves are used, each positively attached to one of the shafts and connected between themselves using flanges, Figure 3c. Yet another popular embodiment is the design in Figure 3d wherein the sleeve is split longitudinally and "cradles" the connected shafts.

(a) (b)

T2 T e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T2

Figure 3 Examples of Rigid Couplings

T2-4 3.2 Misalignment-Compensating Couplings Misalignment-compensating couplings have to reduce forces caused by an FLOATING MEMBER imperfect alignment of connected rotating members (shafts). Since components which are designed to transmit higher payloads can usually tolerate higher mis- 90° alignment-caused loads, a ratio between the load generated in the basic misalignment direction (radial or angular) to the payload (rated torque or tangential force) seems to be a natural design criterion for purely misalignment-compensating couplings. All known designs of misalignment-compensating (torsionally rigid) cou- Figure 4 Oldham Coupling plings are characterized by the presence of an intermediate (floating) member located between the hubs attached to the shafts being connected. The floating member has mobility relative to both hubs. The compensating member can be solid or composed of several links. There are two basic design subclasses: (2a) Couplings in which the displacements between the hubs and the compensating member have a frictional character (examples: Oldham coupling, Fig- TRUNNION ure 4; universal Cardan Joint, Figure 5; gear coupling, Figure 6.) SPIDER YOKE (2b) Couplings in which the displacements are due to elastic deformations in special elastic connectors (e.g., "K" Type Flexible Coupling, Figure 7).

a 3.2.1 Selection Criterion for Frictional Misalignment-Compensating Couplings For Subclass (2a) couplings designed for compensating the offset misalign- YOKE ment, the radial force Fcom acting from one hub to another and caused by misalignment, is a friction force equal to the product of friction coefficient ƒ and Figure 5 Universal Cardan Joint tangential force Ft at an effective radius Ref, Ft = T/Ref, where T is transmitted torque,

____ƒT Fcom = ƒFt = (1) Ref

Since motions between the hubs and the compensating member are of a "stick- slip" character, with very short displacements alternating with stoppages and reversals, ƒ might be assumed to be the static friction coefficient. When the rated torque Tr is transmitted, then the selection criterion is

F ƒ ____ com = ____ (2) Tr Ref or the ratio representing the selection criterion does not depend on the amount of misalignment; lower friction and/or larger effective radius would lead to lower forces on bearings of the connected shafts. Figure 6 Gear Coupling Similar conclusion stands for couplings compensating angular misalignments (Cardan joints or universal, or simply, U-joints). While U-joints with rolling friction (usually, needle) bearings have low friction coefficient, ƒ for U-joints with sliding friction can be significant if the lubrication system is not properly de- e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T2 signed and maintained.

3.2.1a Oldham Couplings Oldham couplings consist of three members. A floating member is trapped by 90° displaced grooves between the two outer members which connect to the drive shafts, as shown in Figure 4. Oldham couplings can accommodate lateral shaft misalignments up to 10% of nominal shaft diameters and up to 3° angular misalignments. Figure 7 K-Type Elastomeric Coupling/Joint

T2-5 Lubrication is a problem but can, in most applications, be overcome by choosing a coupling that uses a wear-resistant plastic in place of steel or bronze floating members. Some advantages of Oldham couplings: • High torsional stiffness; • No velocity variation as with universal joints; • Substantial lateral misalignments possible; • High torque capacity for a given size; • Ease of disassembly. Shortcomings of Oldham couplings: • Limited angular misalignment of shafts; • Need for lubrication due to relative sliding motion with stoppages, unless wear-resistant plastic is employed; • Nylon coupling has reduced torque capacity; • Significant backlash due to initial clearances for thermal expansion and inevitable wear; • Are not suitable for small misalignments; • Suitable only for relatively slow-speed transmissions; • Possible loss of loose members during disassembly. Oldham couplings with rubber-metal laminated bearings [1] have all the advantages of the generic Oldham couplings without their shortcomings.

3.2.1b Universal or U-joints [2]

3.2.1b.1 General A universal joint, Figure 5, is a positive, mechanical connection between rotating shafts, which are not parallel, but intersecting. It is used to transmit motion, power, or both. It is also called the Cardan joint or Hooke joint. It consists of two yokes, one on each shaft, connected by a cross-shaped intermediate member called the spider having four trunnions providing for rotatable connections with the yokes. The angle between the two shafts is called the operating angle. It is generally, but not always, constant during operation. Good design practice calls for low operating angles, often less than 25°, depending on the application. Independent of this guideline, mechanical interference in the U-joint designs often limits the operating angle to a maximum (usually about 37.5°), depending on its proportions. Typical applications of U-joints include aircraft, appliances, control mechanisms, electronics, instrumentation, medical and optical devices, ordnance, radio, sewing machines, textile machinery and tool drives. U-joints are available with steel or plastic major components. Steel U-joints have maximum load-carrying capacity for a given size. U-joints with plastic body members are used in light industrial applications in which their self-lubricating feature, light weight, negligible backlash, corrosion resistance and capability for high-speed operation are significant advantages. Recently developed U-joint designs with rubber-metal laminated bearings [1, 3] have even higher torque capacity and/or smaller sizes allowing for higher-speed operation, and can be preloaded without increasing friction losses, thus completely eliminating backlash. These designs do not require lubrication and sealing against contamination. Constant velocity or ball-jointed universals are also available. These are used for high-speed operation and for carrying large torques. They are available in both miniature and standard sizes. Motion transmitted through a U-joint becomes nonuniform. The angular velocity ratio between input and output shafts varies cyclically (two cycles per one revolution of the input shaft). This fluctuation, creating angular accelerations and increasing with the increasing angular misalignment, can be as much as ±15% at 30° misalignment. Effects of such fluctuations on static torque, inertia torque, and overall system performance should be kept in mind during the transmission design. This nonuniformity can be eliminated (canceled) by using two connected in series and appropriately phased U-joints, Figure 8. While the output velocity becomes uniform, angular velocity fluctuation of the intermediate shaft cannot be avoided.

T2 T e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T2

INTERMEDIATE SHAFT

∠ ∠'

∠ = ∠' INPUT SHAFT OUTPUT SHAFT Figure 8 Two U-Joints in Series

Two U-joints in series can be used for coupling two laterally displaced (misaligned) shafts, while the single joint can only connect the angularly-misaligned shafts.

T2-6 Advantages of a single U-joint: • Low side thrust on bearings; • Large angular misalignments are possible; • High torsional stiffness; • High torque capacity. Shortcomings of a single U-joint: • Velocity and acceleration fluctuations, especially for large misalignments; • Lubrication is required to reduce friction and wear; • Protection from contamination (sealing) is required; • Shafts must be precisely located in one plane; • Backlash is difficult to control; • Static friction is increasing at very low misalignment (freezing), thus sometimes requiring an artificial misalignment in the assembly.

3.2.1b.2 Kinematics

Due to the velocity fluctuations, the angular displacements of the +15 output shaft do not precisely follow those of the input shaft, but lead or = 20° +10 lag, also with two cycles per revolution. The angular velocity variation is = 30° shown in Figure 9 for several operating (misalignment) angles . The +5 peak values of the displacement lead/lag, of input/output angular veloc- 0 ity ratio, and of angular acceleration ratio for different are given in -5 = 10° Table 1 [2]. As a qualitative guideline, for small , up to ~10°, the devia-

of Driven Shaft, % -10 tions (errors) for maximum lead/lag angular displacements, for maxi- -15 mum deviations of angular velocity ratios from unity, and for maximum Angular Velocity of Variation 04590135180 angular acceleration ratios are nearly proportional to the square of . Angular Rotation of Driving Shaft, deg The static torque transmitted by the output shaft is equal to the Figure 9 Angular Velocity product of the input torque and the angular velocity ratio. Variations in U-Joint The angular acceleration generates inertia torque and vibrations. The total transmitted torque is a sum of inertia torque (the product of the angular acceleration and the mass moment of inertia of the output shaft and masses associated with it) and the nominal output torque. The inertia torque often determines the ultimate speed limit of the joint. The recommended speed limits vary depending on , on transmitted power, and on the nature of the transmission system. Recommended peak angular accelerations of the driven shaft vary from 300 rad/sec2 to over 2000 rad/sec2 in power drives. In light instrument drives, the allowable angular accelerations may be higher. For an accurate determination of the allowable speed, a stress analysis is necessary.

Example 1: Determining the Maximum Inertia Torque A U-joint operates at 250 rpm with an operating angle = 10°. Find the maximum angular displacement lead (or lag), maximum and minimum angular velocity of output shaft and maximum angular acceleration of output shaft. If the system drives an inertial load so that the total inertial load seen by the output shaft (its own inertia and inertia of associated massive rotating bodies) can be represented by a steel circular disc attached to the output shaft (radius r = 3 in., thickness t = 1/4 in.), find the maximum inertia torque of the drive. From Table 1 at = 10°, the maximum displacement lead/lag = 0.439° = 26.3'. The maximum and minimum angular velocity ratios are given as 1.0154 and 0.9848, respectively. Hence, the corresponding output shaft speeds are:

max = (250)(1.0154) = 254 rpm;

T2 T e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T2

min (250)(0.9848) = 246 rpm;

According to Table 1, the maximum angular acceleration ratio is

2 max/ = 0.0306 for = 10°.

= [(250) (2)] / (60) rad/sec = 26.18 rad/sec.

Hence, max = (0.0306)(26.18)2 = 21.0 rad/sec2. The weight, W, of the disc is given by W = r2 t , where denotes the density of steel and is equal to 0.283 lb/in3.

T2-7 TABLE 1 THE EFFECT OF SHAFT ANGLE () ON SINGLE UNIVERSAL JOINT PERFORMANCE FOR CONSTANT INPUT SPEED* Maximum Angular Acceleration Ratio = Maximum Load or Lag _____ max , where = Operating Angle of Output Shaft Maximum Angular Minimum Angular r max Between Shafts Displacement (ε), Deg. Velocity Ratio Velocity Ratio Maximum Angular () Deg. Relative to Input ( ) ( ) max min Acceleration of Output Shaft Displacement Shaft; = Angular Velocity of Input Shaft, rad/sec. 0 0.000 1.0000 1.0000 0.0000 1 0.004 1.0002 0.9998 0.0003 2 0.017 1.0006 0.9994 0.0012 3 0.039 1.0014 0.9986 0.0027 4 0.070 1.0024 0.9976 0.0049 5 0.109 1.0038 0.9962 0.0076 6 0.157 1.0055 0.9945 0.0110 7 0.214 1.0075 0.9925 0.0150 8 0.280 1.0098 0.9903 0.0196 9 0.355 1.0125 0.9877 0.0248 10 0.439 1.0154 0.9848 0.0306 11 0.531 1.0187 0.9816 0.0371 12 0.633 1.0223 0.9781 0.0442 13 0.744 1.0263 0.9744 0.0520 14 0.864 1.0306 0.9703 0.0604 15 0.993 1.0353 0.9859 0.0694 16 1.132 1.0403 0.9613 0.0792 17 1.280 1.0457 0.9563 0.0896 18 1.437 1.0515 0.9511 0.1007 19 1.605 1.0576 0.9455 0.1125 20 1.782 1.0642 0.9397 0.1250 21 1.969 1.0711 0.9336 0.1382 22 2.165 1.0785 0.9272 0.1522 23 3.372 1.0864 0.9205 0.1670 24 2.590 1.0946 0.9135 0.1826 25 2.817 1.1034 0.9063 0.1990 26 3.055 1.1126 0.8988 0.2162 27 3.304 1.1223 0.8910 0.2344 28 3.564 1.1326 0.8829 0.2535 29 3.835 1.1434 0.8746 0.2735 30 4.117 1.1547 0.8660 0.2946 31 4.411 1.1666 0.8572 0.3167 32 4.716 1.1792 0.8480 0.3400 33 5.034 1.1924 0.8387 0.3644 34 5.363 1.2062 0.8290 0.3902 35 5.705 1.2208 0.8192 0.4172 36 6.060 1.2361 0.8090 0.4457 37 6.428 1.2521 0.7986 0.4758 38 6.809 1.2690 0.7880 0.5074 39 7.204 1.2868 0.7771 0.5409 40 7.613 1.3054 0.7660 0.5762 *Reproduced with the permission of Design News from "The Analytical Design of Universal Joints" by S.J. Baranyi, Design News, Sept. 1, 1969

W = (3)2 (0.25) (0.283) = 2 lb.

2 Inertia torque = Imax, where I = polar mass moment of inertia of disc (lb. in. sec ),

I = Wr2 / 2g,

T2 T e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T2 where g = gravitational constant = 386 in/sec2.

Hence, I = [(2) (3)2] / [(2)(386)] = 0.0233 lb. in. sec2.

Inertia torque = (21.0) (0.0233) = 0.489 lb. in. This inertia torque is a momentary maximum. The inertia torque fluctuates cyclically at two cycles per shaft revolution, oscillating between plus and minus 0.489 lb. in. When system vibrations and resonances are important, it may be required to determine the harmonic content (Fourier series development) of the output shaft displacement as a function of the displacement of the input shaft. The amplitude of the mth harmonic (m > 1) vanishes for odd values of m, while for even values of m it is equal to (2/m) (tan 1/2)m, where denotes the operating angle.

T2-8 3.2.1b.3 Joint Selection (Torque Rating) The torque capacity of the universal joint is a function of speed, operating angle and service conditions. Table 2 shows use factors based on speed and operating angle for two service conditions: intermittent operation (say, operation for less than 15 minutes, usually governed by necessity for heat dissipation) and continuous operation.

TABLE 2 USE FACTORS FOR THE TORQUE RATING OF UNIVERSAL JOINTS

Intermittant Running Conditions Continuous Running Conditions Speed Speed Angle of Operation - Degrees Angle of Operation - Degrees rpm rpm 0 3 5 7 1015202530 0 3 5 7 10 15 20 25 30 1800 9 20 34 45 — — — — — 1800 18 40 68 90 — — — — — 1500 8 16 28 39 — — — — — 1500 16 32 55 78 — — — — — 1200 7 13 22 32 40 — — — — 1200 14 26 44 64 80 — — — — 900 6 11 16 23 34 — — — — 900 12 21 32 46 68 — — — — 600 5 8 11 15 22 34 40 — — 600 10 15 22 30 44 68 80 — — 300 4 5 7 8 11 16 22 28 34 300 8 10 14 16 22 32 44 55 68 100 3 4 4 5 6 8 9 11 12 100 6 7 8 10 12 15 18 22 24

The torque capacity of a single Cardan joint of standard steel construction is determined as follows: i. From the required speed (rpm), operating angle in degrees, and service condition (intermittent or continuous), find the corresponding use factor from Table 2. ii. Multiply the required torque, which is to be transmitted by the input shaft, by the use factor. If the application involves a significant amount of shock loading, multiply by an additional dynamic factor of 2. The result must be less than the static breaking torque of the joint. iii. Refer to the torque capacity column in the product catalog and select a suitable joint having a torque capacity not less than the figure computed in (ii) above. If a significant amount of power is to be transmitted and/or the speed is high, it is desirable to keep the shaft operating angle below 15°. For manual operation, operating angles up to 30° may be permissible.

Example 2: Universal Joint Selection for Continuous Operation A single universal joint is to transmit a continuously acting torque of 15 lb. in., while operating at an angle of 15° and at a speed of 600 rpm. Select a suitable joint. From Table 2 for continuous operation, the use factor is given as 68. Note that there are blank spaces in the Table. If the combination of operating angle and speed results in a blank entry in the Table, this combination should be avoided. The required torque is (68) (15) = 1020 lb. in. There is no shock load and the dynamic factor of 2 does not apply in this case. From the SDP/SI catalog, it is seen that there are two joints meeting this specification: A 5Q 8-D500 and A 5Q 8-D516, both with a torque capacity of 1176 lb. in. The first has a solid-shaft construction and the second a bored construction. The choice depends on the application.

Example 3: Universal Joint Selection for Intermittent Operation with Shock Loading A single universal joint is to transmit 1/8 horsepower at 300 rpm at an operating angle of 15°. Select a suitable joint for intermittent operation with shock loading. Here we make use of the equation:

Torque = Horsepower x 63,025/300 lb. in.

T2 T e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T2 Hence, operating torque = (0.125)(63,025)/300 = 26.3 lb. in. From Table 2, for intermittent loads (300 rpm, 15°), the use factor is 16. Due to shock loading, there should be an additional dynamic factor of 2. Therefore, the rated torque = (26.3) (16) (2) = 842 lb. in. Thus, the same joints found in the previous example are usable in this case.

Example 4: Determining the Maximum Speed of an Input Shaft A universal joint is rated at 250 lb. in., and operates at an angle of 12°, driving a rotating mass, which can be represented (together with the inertia of the driven shaft) by a steel, circular disc, radius r = 6", thickness t = 1/2", attached to the driven shaft. How fast can the input shaft turn if the inertia torque is not to exceed 50% of rated torque? 2 2 From Table 1, for = 12°, we have max/ = 0.0442. The weight, W, of the disc is W = r t , where denotes the density of steel which is 0.283 lb. in3.

T2-9 Thus W = (6)2(0.5) (0.283) = 16 lb. The polar mass moment of inertia, I, of the disc is given by

I = Wr2 / 2g = (16)(6)2 / (2)(386) = 0.746 lb. in. sec2.

2 2 2 2 The inertia torque = Imax = 50% of 250 lb. in. = 125 lb. in. Since Imax = (max / ) • ( I) = (0.0442)(0.746) = 125, = 125 / 0.03297 = 3790.96 or = 61.6 rad/sec = (61.6)(60) / 2 = 588 rpm. Hence, if the inertia torque is not to exceed its limit, the maximum speed of the input shaft is 588 rpm. For joints made with thermoplastic material, consult the SDP/SI catalog, which contains design charts for the torque rating of such joints.

3.2.1b.4 Secondary Couples In designing support bearings for the shafts of a U-joint and in determining vibrational characteristics of the driven system, it is useful to keep in mind the so-called secondary couples or rocking torques, which occur in universal joints. These are rocking couples in the planes of the yokes, which tend to bend the two shafts and rock them about their bearings. The bearings are thus cyclically loaded at the rate of two cycles per shaft revolution. The maximum values of the rocking torques are as follows:

Maximum rocking torque on input shaft = Tintan; Maximum rocking torque on output shaft = Tinsin, where Tin denotes the torque transmitted by the input shaft and the operating angle. These couples are always 180° out of phase. The bearing force induced by these couples is equal to magnitude of the rocking couple divided by the distance between shaft bearings. For example, if the input torque, Tin is 1000 lb. in. and the operating angle is 20°, while the distance between support bearings on each shaft is 6 in., the maximum secondary couple acting on the input shaft is (1000) (tan 20°) = 364 lb. in. and on the output shaft it is (1000) (sin 20°) = 342 lb. in. The radial bearing load on each bearing of the input shaft is 364/6 = 60.7 lb. and it is 342/6 = 57 lb. for each bearing of the output shaft. The bearings should be selected accordingly. It has been observed also that due to the double frequency of these torques, the critical speeds associated with universal drives may be reduced by up to 50% of the value calculated by the standard formulas for the critical speeds of rotating shafts. The exact percentage is a complex function of system design and operating conditions.

3.2.1b.5 Joints in Series As mentioned in paragraph 3.2.1b.1, universal joints can be used in series in order to eliminate velocity fluctuations, to connect offset (nonintersecting) shafts, or both. Figure 8 shows a schematic of such an arrangement. In order to obtain a constant angular-velocity ratio (1:1) between input and output shafts, a proper phasing of the joints is required. This phasing can be described as follows: two Cardan joints in series will transmit a constant angular velocity ratio (1:1) between two intersecting or nonintersecting shafts (see Figure 8), provided that the angle between the connected shafts and the intermediate shaft are equal ( = '), and that when yoke 1 lies in the plane of the input and intermediate shafts, yoke 2 lies in the plane of the intermediate shaft and the output shaft. If shafts 1 and 3 intersect, yokes 1 and 2 are coplanar. When the above phasing has been realized, torsional and inertial excitation is reduced to minimum. However, inertia excitation will inevitably remain in the intermediate shaft, because this shaft has the angular acceleration of the output shaft of a single U-joint (the first of the two joints in series). It is for this reason that guidelines exist limiting the maximum angular accelerations of the intermediate shaft. Depending on the application, values between 300 rad/sec2 and values in excess of 1000 rad/sec2 have been advocated. In light industrial drives, the allowable speed may be higher. For an accurate determination of allowable speed, a stress analysis is necessary.

Example 5: Determining the Maximum Speed of an Input Shaft in a Series e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T2 In a drive consisting ot two universal joints in series, phased so as to produce a constant (1:1) angular velocity ratio between input and output shafts, the angle between the intermediate shaft and input (and output) shaft is 20°. If the maximum angular acceleration of the intermediate shaft is not to exceed 1000 rad/sec2, what is the upper limit of the speed of the input shaft?

2 From Table 1, with = 20°, we find max/ = 0.1250.

2 Since max = 1000 rad/sec ,

2 2 = (max) / (0.1250) = (1000) / 0.1250) = 8000 rad/sec .

Hence, = 8000 = 89.4 rad/sec = (89.4)(60) / 2 = 854 rpm.

T2-10 Hence, the speed of the input shaft should not exceed 854 rpm. When the joint angle is less than or equal to 10°, Figure 10 can be used to compute the maximum speed or the maximum angular acceleration for a given input speed.

4500

4000

3500 2000 rad/sec

3000 1400 1000 2 2500 700 500

N, rpm 2000 300

1500 100

1000 25

500 MAXIMUM ANGULAR ACCELERATION 0510 - Joint Angle, deg

Figure 10 Maximum Angular Acceleration (rad/sec2) of Output Shaft of Single U-Joint vs. Input Speed (rpm) and Operating Angle (degrees)

Example 6 Same as problem 5, except operating angle is 10°. Here we can use Figure 10. The intersection of = 10° and the 1000 rad/sec2 curve yields N 1800 rpm. Hence, the speed of the input shaft should not exceed 1800 rpm. A more exact calculation, as in Example 5, yields N = 1726 rpm. For practical purposes, however, the value obtained from Figure 10 is entirely satisfactory.

3.2.2 Selection Criterion for Misalignment-Compensating Couplings with Elastic Connectors For this class of couplings, assuming linearity of the elastic connectors,

Fcom = kcome, (3) where e is misalignment value, kcom = combined stiffness of the elastic connectors in the direction of compensation. In this case, F k _____ com = _____ com e. (4) Tr Tr Unlike couplings from Subclass (2a), Subclass (2b) (see p. T2-5) couplings develop the same radial force for a given misalignment regardless of transmitted torque, thus they are more effective for larger Tr. Of course, lower stiffness of the elastic connectors would lead to lower radial forces.

3.2.2.1 Designs of Elastic Misalignment-Compensating Couplings Designs of Oldham couplings and U-joints with elastic connectors using high-performance thin-layered rubber-metal e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T2 laminates are described in [1, 3]. K-Type flexible coupling, Figure 7, is kinematically similar to both Oldham coupling and to U-joint. By substituting an elastomeric member in place of the conventional spider and yoke of U-joint or the floating member of Oldham coupling, in construction such as in the design shown in Figure 7, backlash is eliminated. Lubrication is no longer a consideration because there are no moving parts and a fairly large amount of lateral misalignment can be accommodated. The illustrated coupling is available in the product section of this catalog. Please refer to Figure 11 for specific design data for four sizes of this type coupling. Figure 11b indicates that this coupling has high durability even with a combination of large lateral (offset) and large angular misalignments.

T2-11 3 A 5Z 7-10606 A 5Z 7-20808 thru 11212 thru 21616 A 5Z 7-31212 A 5Z 7-41616 thru 31616

2 40 With Combined 35 15° Angular & 1/8 Parallel Offset Misalignment 30

2500 rpm 25 Horsepower With Combined With Combined 3600 rpm 15° Angular & 1/8 1 1800 rpm 20 15° Angular & 3/16 Parallel Offset Misalignment Parallel Offset Misalignment

Torque, lb. in. Torque, 15

1/2 10 With Combined 1/3 10° Angular & 3/32 1/4 5 Parallel Offset Misalignment 0 0 4 12 25 28 40 50 012 34567 Torque, lb. in. Hours Life in Thousands (a) Rated Horsepower/ (b) Service Life as a Function of Angular and Offset Torque for Various rpm Misalignments for K-Type Couplings

Figure 11

3.3 Torsionally Flexible Couplings and Combination Purpose Couplings [3] These two classes of couplings are usually represented by the same designs. However, in some cases only torsional properties are required, in other cases both torsional and compensation properties are important and, most frequently, these coupling designs are used as the cheapest available and users cannot determine what is important for their applications. Accordingly, it is of interest to look at what design parameters are important for various applications.

3.3.1 Torsionally Flexible Couplings Torsionally flexible couplings are used in transmission systems when there is a danger of developing resonance conditions and/or transient dynamic overloads. Their influence on transmission dynamics can be due to one or more of the following factors:

Reduction of Torsional Stiffness and, Consequently, Shift of Natural Frequencies. If resonance condition occurs before installation (or change) of the coupling, then shifting of the natural frequency can eliminate resonance; thus dynamic loads and torsional vibrations will be substantially reduced.

Increasing Effective Damping Capacity of a Transmission by Using Coupling Material with High Internal Damping or Special Dampers. When the damping of a system is increased without changing its torsional stiffness, the amplitudes of torsional vibrations are reduced at resonance and in the near-resonance zone. Increased damping is especially advisable when there is a wide frequency spectrum of disturbances acting on a drive; more specifically, for the drives of universal machines.

Introducing Nonlinearity into the Transmission System. If the coupling has a nonlinear "torque-angular deformation" characteristic and its stiffness is much lower then stiffness

T2 T e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T2 of the transmission into which it is installed, then the whole transmission acquires a nonlinear torque-angular deflection characteristic. A nonlinear dynamic system becomes automatically detuned away from resonance at a fixed-frequency excitation, the more so the greater the relative change of the overall stiffness of the system on the torsional deflection equal to the vibration amplitude.

Introducing Additional Rotational Inertia in the Transmission System. This is a secondary effect since couplings are not conventionally used as flywheels. However, when a large coupling is used, this effect has to be considered.

Realizing the above listed effects of a properly selected torsionally-flexible coupling requires a thorough dynamic analysis of the transmission system.

T2-12 3.3.2 Combination Purpose Couplings Combination purpose couplings do not have a special compensating (floating) member. As a result, compensation of misalignment is accomplished, at least partially, by the same mode(s) of deformation of the flexible element which are called forth by the transmitted payload. The ratio of radial (compensating) stiffness kcom and torsional stiffness ktor of a combination purpose flexible coupling can be represented as [1,3] (a) Jaw (Spider) Coupling k A _____ com = _____ , (5) 2 ktor Rex where Rex is external radius of the coupling. The "Coupling De- sign Index" A (Figure 13f) allows one to select a coupling design better suited to a specific application. If the main purpose is to reduce misalignment-caused loading of the connected shafts and their bearings, for a given value of torsional stiffness, then the lowest value of A is the best, together with large external radius. If the main purpose is to modify the dynamic characteristics of (b) Modified Spider Coupling the transmission, then minimization of ktor is important. ( - lip providing bulging Some combination purpose couplings are shown in Figure space for the rubber element) 12. The "modified spider" coupling (Figure 12b) is different from the conventional spider (jaw) coupling shown schematically in Figure 12a by four features: legs of the rubber spider are ta- pered, instead of staight; legs are made thicker even in the small- est cross section, at the expense of reduced thickness of bosses on the hubs; lips on the edges provide additional space for bulging of the rubber when legs are compressed, thus reducing stiffness; the spider is made from a very soft rubber. All these features lead to substantially reduced torsional and radial stiffnesses while retaining small size, which is characteristic for spider couplings. Plots in Figure 13 (a-d) give data for some widely used cou- (c) Toroid Shell Coupling plings on such basic parameters as torsional stiffness ktor, radial 2 stiffness kcom, external diameter Dex, and flywheel moment WD (W is weight of the coupling). Plots in Figure 13 (e-f) give deriva- tive information: ratio kcom / ktor, and design index A. All these parameters are plotted as functions of the rated torque. Data for "toroid shell" couplings in Figure 13 are for the coupling as shown in Figure 12 (c) (there are many design modifica- tions of toroid shell couplings). The "jaw coupling" for T = 7 Nm in Figure 13 (f) (lowest torque point on jaw coupling line) has a four- legged spider (z = 4), while all larger sizes have z = 6 or 8. This explains differences in A (A 1.9 for z = 4, but A = 1.0 ~ 1.3 for z (d) Sleeve Coupling (Geargrip) = 6,8). Values of A are quite consistent for a given type of coupling. The variations can be explained by differences in design proportions and rubber blends between the sizes. e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T2 Using plots in Figure 13, one can more easily select a coupling type whose stiffnesses, inertia, and diameter are best suited for a particular application. These plots, however, do not address issues of damping and nonlinearity. Damping can be easily modified by the coupling manufacturer by a proper selection of the TAP elastomer. As shown previously, high damping is very beneficial (e) Uniflex Coupling for transmission dynamics, and may even reduce thermal exposure of the coupling, as shown in [1,3]. More complex is the issue of nonlinear characteristics; a highly nonlinear (and very com- Figure 12 Combination Purpose Couplings pact) coupling based on radial compression of cylindrical rubber elements is described in [1]. Couplings represented in Figure 13 are linear or only slightly nonlinear.

T2-13 + 8 4 104 3 2 +x 8 + 10 x 8 + 2 x 5 WD 4 + 4 + Nm2 3 2 3 x+ 2 x 10-1 + + 8 x x 4 103 3 8 2 x x 10-3 5 8 x k tor 4 4 Nm 3 45 810 203040 50 80 100 200300 400 rad 2 x Rated Torque, Nm (d) Flywheel Moment x 102 8 x 5 4 5 x 3 4 3 4 5 81.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 8.0 100 200 300 500 2 x x Rated Torque, Nm x x (a) Torsional Stiffness 103 + 3 + 8 + 2 + 5 x + + kcom 4 ktor 3 103 8 1 x m2 2 x 5 k com 4 102 N x 3 8 mm x x x 2 5 x 4 102 3 x 80 45 810 203040 5080100 200300 500 x 50 Rated Torque, Nm 40 (e) Ratio Radial-to-Torsional Stiffness 30 4 5 810 20 30 50 80 200 400 40 100 300 Rated Torque, Nm (b) Radial Stiffness

+ 2 x 200 x x x + + x x + x x + x x 100 A 1 Dex x+ e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T2 mm 80 x + 0.8 x 50 0.5 40 0.4 4 5 8 10 20 30 50 80100 200 400 4 5 8 10 20 30 50 80100 200 400 Rated Torque, Nm Rated Torque, Nm (c) External Diameter (f) Coupling Design Index A

Figure 13 Basic Characteristics of Frequently Used Torsionally Flexible/Combination Purpose Couplings

Δ - Jaw Coupling with Rubber Spider Figure 12 (a) ˿ - Rubber Disk Coupling Not Shown ̆ - Modified Spider Coupling Figure 12 (b) b - Uniflex Coupling Figure 12 (e) ć - Toroid Shell Coupling Figure 12 (c) + - Finger Sleeve Coupling Figure 12 (d)

T2-14 3.3.2.1 Miscellaneous Combination Purpose Couplings

3.3.2.1a Flexible Shafts Flexible shafts are relatively stiff in torsion but very compliant in bending and lateral misalignments. A good example of this is in their use on automotive speedometer drives. A flexible shaft consists of:

FLEXIBLE SHAFT DIA.

END SOCKET HEAD SET SCREW END FITTING FITTING

Figure 14 Flexible Shaft

a. Shaft - the rotating element comprising a center wire with several wire layers wrapped around it in alternating directions.

b. Casing - the sleeve made from metal or nonmetals to guide and protect the shaft and retain lubricants. Flexible shafts can be supplied without casing when used for hand-operated controls or intermittent-powered applications.

c. Case End Fitting - connects the casing to the housing of the driver and driven equipment.

d. Shaft End Fitting - connects the shaft to the driving and driven members. Flexible shafts as shown in the SDP/SI catalogs [4] are often substituted in place of more expensive gear trains and universal joints in applications where the load must be moved in many directions. They are extremely useful where the load is located in a remote position requiring many gear and shafting combinations.

The basic design considerations are torque capacity, speed, direction of rotation, bend radii and service conditions. Torque capacity is a function of the shaft size. Operating conditions must be considered in power drive applications such as starting torque, reversing shocks, and fluctuating loads. These conditions constitute overloads on the shaft. If they are substantially greater than the normal torque load, a larger shaft must be selected. Since, in power applications, torque is inversely proportional to speed, it is beneficial to keep the torque down, thereby reducing shaft size and cost. Ordinarily, speeds of 1750 to 3600 rpm are recommended. However, there are applications in which shafts are operating successfully from 600 to 12,000 rpm. The general formula for determining maximum shaft speed is:

N = (7200) / d, where N = rpm, d = shaft diameter in inches. (6)

Flexible shafting for power transmission is wound for maximum efficiency when rotating in only one direction - the direction which tends to tighten the outer layer of wires on the shaft. Direction of rotation is identified from the power source end of the shaft. Torque capacity in the opposite direction is approximately 60% of the "wind" direction. Therefore, if the power drive shaft must be operated in both directions, the reduced torque capacity will require a larger shaft than would normally be selected for operation in the wind direction. Because flexible shafts were developed primarily as a means of transmitting power where solid shafts cannot be used, most applications involve curves. Each shaft has a recommended minimum operating radius which is determined by the shaft diameter and type. As the radius of curvature is decreased, the torque capacity also decreases and tends to shorten shaft life. e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T2 Lastly, service conditions such as temperature present no special problems to flexible shafts when operating in the -65°F to +250°F range. Plastic casing coverings are able to cover this temperature range and provide additional protection from physical abrasion as well as being oil and watertight.

3.3.2.1b Uniflex Couplings Sometimes it is desirable if not essential that a flexible shaft coupling be as short as possible and still retain most of the features previously described. Figure 12e illustrates such a coupling, available in the SDP/SI catalog [4]. The "flexible shaft" center section consists of three separately wound square wire springs. Individual spring layers are opposingly wound to provide maximum absorption of vibration, load shock, and backlash. The hubs are brazed to the springs for maximum strength. Design data is available in Table 3 as well as in the Uniflex catalog page of the SDP/SI catalog. The maximum torque and/or H.P. Capacity from Table 3 must be divided by the Service Factor (S.F.) dependent on the load character as follows:

T2-15 a. Light, even load - S.F. = 1.0; b. Irregular load without shock, rare reversals of direction - S.F. = 1.5 c. Shock loads, frequent reversals - S.F. = 2.0

TABLE 3 UNIFLEX COUPLINGS SELECTION DATA

Max. Horsepower Capacity* At Varying Speeds (rpm) Series Torque Number lb. in. 100 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2400 3000 3600

18 18 .03 .09 .18 .27 .36 .45 .5 .7 .9 1 25 34 .05 .15 .30 .45 .60 .75 .9 1.2 1.5 1.8 37 39 .06 .18 .36 .54 .70 .90 1 2.4 1.8 2 50 82 .13 .39 .78 1.2 1.5 2 2.3 3 3.9 4.6 *Based on service factor of one only

Uniflex Selection Procedure:

a. Select the service factor according to the application. b. Multiply the horsepower or torque to be transmitted by the service factor to obtain rating. c. Select the coupling with an equivalent or slightly greater horsepower or torque than shown in Table 3.

3.3.2.1c Jaw and Spider Couplings Jaw type couplings, Figures 12a, 12b consist of two metal hubs which are fastened to the input and output shafts (see product pages in this catalog). Trapped between the hubs is a rubber or Urethane "spider" whose legs are confined between alternating metal projections from the adjacent hubs. The spider is the wearing member and can be readily replaced without dismantling adjacent equipment. The coupling is capable of operating without lubrication and is unaffected by oil, grease, dirt or moisture. Select the proper size for your application from Table 4 and the selection instructions. The Service Factors are, essentially, the same as for the Uniflex coupling.

Jaw and Spider Type Coupling Selection Procedure:

a. Select the Service Factor according to the application. b. Multiply the horsepower or torque to be transmitted by the service factor to obtain rating. c. Select the coupling series from Table 4 with an equivalent or slighlty greater horsepower or torque than the calculated value in b. d. Turn to the product section page illustrating the same coupling and make your specific selection in that number series.

TABLE 4 JAW TYPE COUPLINGS SELECTION DATA

Coupling Rated Horsepower Capacity at Varying Speeds (rpm) Service Series Torque Factor Number lb. in. 100 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2400 3000 3600

1.0 .0056 .017 .034 .05 .067 .084 .13 .10 .17 .2 035 3.5 1.5 .0037 .011 .023 .033 .045 .056 .087 .067 .113 .13 2.0 .0028 .009 .017 .025 .033 .043 .065 .05 .025 .10 1.0 .04 .12 .24 .36 .48 .60 .72 .96 1.2 1.44 050 25.2 1.5 .03 .08 .16 .24 .32 .40 .48 .64 .80 .96

2.0 .02 .06 .12 .18 .24 .30 .36 .42 .60 .70 e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T2 1.0 .06 .18 .36 .54 .72 .90 1.08 1.44 1.8 2.16 070 37.8 1.5 .04 .12 .24 .36 .48 .60 .72 .96 1.2 1.44 2.0 .03 .09 .12 .27 .36 .45 .54 .72 .90 1.08 1.0 .12 .36 .72 1.08 1.44 1.80 2.16 2.88 3.6 4.34 075 75.6 1.5 .08 .24 .48 .72 .96 1.20 1.44 1.92 2.4 2.88 2.0 .06 .18 .36 .54 .72 .90 1.08 1.44 1.8 2.10 1.0 .20 .60 1.2 1.8 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.8 6.0 7.2 090 126 1.5 .13 .40 .20 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.2 4.0 4.8 2.0 .10 .30 .60 .90 1.2 1.5 1.8 2.4 3.0 3.6 Service Factors 1.0 ____ Even Load, No Shock, Infrequent Reversing with Low Starting Torque 1.5 ____ Uneven Load, Moderate Shock, Frequent Reversing with Low Start Torque 2.0 ____ Uneven Load, Heavy Shock, Hi Peak Loads, Frequent Reversals with High Start Torque

T2-16 3.3.2.1d Sleeve Type Coupling (Geargrip) A sleeve type coupling consists of two splined hubs with a mating intermediate member of molded neoprene. Because of its construction features, it is capable of normal operation with angular shaft misalignments up to 2°. Lubrication is not required. All parts are replaceable without disturbing adjacent equipment provided sufficient shaft length is allowed by sliding coupling hubs clear of the sleeve member during disassembly. Select the proper size for your application from Table 5 and follow the selection instructions.

Sleeve Type Coupling Selection Procedure

a. Determine motor characteristics. b. Determine service conditions. c. Select the coupling model with an equivalent or slightly greater horsepower than the calculated value in b in Table 5. d. Turn to Geargrip couplings in the product section and select the specific assembly or individual components in that model number.

TABLE 5 SLEEVE TYPE COUPLINGS SELECTION DATA Motor Torque Motor: Normal Torque Motor: High Torque Service Normal Duty Severe Duty Normal Duty Severe Duty

Speed, rpm 3500 1750 1160 870 3500 1750 1160 870 3500 1750 1160 870 3500 1750 1160 870 1/12 11 11 11 18 11 11 18 18 11 11 18 18 11 18 18 21 1/8 11 11 18 18 11 18 18 21 11 18 18 21 11 18 21 31 1/6 11 18 18 21 11 18 21 21 11 18 21 21 18 21 31 31 1/4 11 18 21 31 18 21 31 31 18 21 31 31 18 31 31 31 H.P. 1/3 18 21 31 31 18 31 31 31 18 31 31 31 21 31 31 31 1/2 18 31 31 31 21 31 31 31 21 31 31 31 31 31 31 3/4 21 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 1 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 Service Conditions

Normal Duty Severe Duty • speed not exceeding 3600 rpm • speeds from 3600 to 5000 rpm • operation less than 10 hours per day • operation runs more than 10 hours per day • infrequent stops and starts • frequent starts and stops • no heavy, pulsating load • heavy, pulsating load • no mechanical or electrical clutch • mechanical or electrical clutch

Other types of couplings are also available and are fully described along with technical specifications in the SDP/SI catalogs dealing with couplings [4].

T2 T e c h n i c a l S e c t i o n T T2 References

[1] Rivin, E.I., Stiffness and Damping in Mechanical Design, 1999, Marcel Dekker Inc.

[2] Baranyi, S.J., "The Analytical Design of Universal Joints", Design News, 1969, Sept. 1

[3] Rivin, E.I., "Design and Application Criteria for Connecting Couplings", 1986, ASME Journal of Mechanisms, Transmissions, and Automation in Design, vol. 108, pp. 96-105 (this article is fully reprinted in [1])

[4] Stock Drive Products/Sterling Instrument, Catalog D790, Handbook of Inch Drive Components and Catalog D785, Handbook of Metric Drive Components or their current catalogs.

T2-17 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Alphabetical Index

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

A (Couplings, cont'd) Accessories, Shock Absorber, Metric ...... 6-14 "K" Type ...... 9-12 Axial Type Bumpers, (See Bumpers) Neo-Flex, B Long ...... 9-4 Short ...... 9-2 Bantam Flexible Couplings, Inch ...... 9-14 One-Piece ...... 9-14 Base Mounts, Spider Type ...... 9-8 Cylindrical Type, Rubber, Metric ...... 2-12 Spline Type ...... 9-6 Diamond Base, Neoprene, Inch...... 2-15 Metric, Dome Type, Rubber, Metric ...... 2-14 "K" Type ...... 9-13 Flange Type, Neo-Flex, Rubber, Metric ...... 2-2 Long ...... 9-5 Silicone Gel, Metric ...... 2-3 Short ...... 9-3 Rectangular Base, Neoprene, Inch ...... 2-16 Spider Type ...... 9-9 Technical Information, Neoprene ...... 2-17 Spline Type ...... 9-7 Bolt Mounts, Cup Mounts, Rubber, Inch ...... 2-11 Ring and Bushing Type, Rubber, Inch ...... 7-10 Cylindrical Mounts, Silicone Gel Type, Metric ...... 7-15 Female-Blank, Silicone vs. Rubber Technical Information ...... 7-17 Sorbothane®, Solo Unitized, Rubber, Inch ...... 7-8 Inch ...... 1-31 Tandem Unitized, Rubber, Inch ...... 7-9 Metric ...... 1-32 Washer Type, Silicone Rubber & Steel, Inch ...... 7-16 Urethane, Inch ...... 1-29 Washers and Installation, Steel, Inch ...... 7-13 Female-Female, Rubber, Inch ...... 1-28 Bumpers, Male-Blank, Axial Type, Elastomer-Polyester, Inch Sorbothane®, High-Load ...... 6-5 Inch ...... 1-31 Low-Load ...... 6-7 Metric ...... 1-32 Conical, Rubber Urethane, Inch ...... 1-30 Inch ...... 6-8 Male-Female, Metric ...... 6-9 Neoprene, Inch ...... 1-24 Radial Type, Elastomer-Polyester, Inch ...... 6-6 Rubber, Rectangular, Steel & Rubber, Inch ...... 6-11 Inch ...... 1-26 Technical Information (English Units) ...... 6-2 Metric ...... 1-27 C Sorbothane®, Inch ...... 1-31 Cable Isolators, Inch Metric ...... 1-32 1/16" & 3/32" Cable Dia...... 5-24 Urethane, Inch ...... 1-29 1/8" & 5/32" Cable Dia...... 5-25 Male-Male, 3/16" Cable Dia., Rubber, Large O.D., Light Duty ...... 5-27 Inch ...... 1-5 Small O.D., Standard Duty ...... 5-26 Metric ...... 1-17 1/4" Cable Dia...... 5-28 Sorbothane®, 3/8" Cable Dia...... 5-29 Inch ...... 1-31 1/2" Cable Dia...... 5-30 Metric ...... 1-32 Technical Information ...... 5-23 Urethane, Inch ...... 1-30 Carry Leveling Mounts, Cylindrical Type Base Mounts, Rubber, Metric...... 2-12 Rubber & Steel Ball, Metric...... 3-7 D Channel Mounts, Steel & Rubber, Inch ...... 6-10 Chips, Silicone Gel, Metric ...... 8-10 Damped Type Spring Mounts, Inch Conical Bumpers, (See Bumpers) Stainless Steel Mesh, Conical Type Leveling Mounts, Rubber, Metric ...... 3-6 To 10 lbs...... 5-15 Couplings, Flexible, To 132 lbs...... 5-16 Inch, To 200 lbs...... 5-9 Bantam ...... 9-14 To 750 lbs...... 5-10 Geargrip...... 9-11 To 1235 lbs...... 5-12 Jaw Type ...... 9-10 To 2469 lbs...... 5-13 A-0 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Alphabetical Index

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

Dome Type Base Mounts, Rubber, Metric ...... 2-14 Leveling Mounts, E Carry, Rubber and Steel Ball, Metric ...... 3-7 Conical Type, Rubber, Metric...... 3-6 Elliptic Leaf Type, Spring Mounts, Inch Iso-Pad Type, Inch ...... 3-5 Polymer Damped...... 5-3 Neoprene, to 2500 lbs., Inch...... 3-2 Stainless Steel Mesh Damped ...... 5-5 to 12000 lbs., Inch...... 3-4 Technical Information ...... 5-2 Stainless Steel Mesh, to 10000 lbs., Inch ...... 3-3 F M Finger-Flex Assemblies, Rubber, Inch ...... 2-9 Mounts, Finger-Flex Mounts, Rubber, Inch Base, To 12 lbs...... 7-3 Cylindrical Type, Rubber, Metric ...... 2-12 To 25 lbs...... 7-4 Diamond Base, Neoprene, Inch ...... 2-15 To 37 lbs...... 7-5 Dome Type, Rubber, Metric ...... 2-14 To 80 lbs...... 7-6 Flange Type, To 350 lbs...... 7-7 Rubber ...... 2-2 Technical Information ...... 7-2 Silicone Gel ...... 2-3 Flange Type Base Mounts, Metric Rectangular Base, Neoprene, Inch ...... 2-16 Rubber...... 2-2 Bolt, Silicone Gel ...... 2-3 Ring and Bushing Type, Rubber, Inch ...... 7-10 Foam Pads, Silicone, Metric ...... 8-8 Silicone Gel Type, Metric ...... 7-15 Foam Type Spring Mounts, Metric Silicone vs. Rubber Technical Information ... 7-17 To 1250 N ...... 5-7 Solo Unitized, Rubber, Inch ...... 7-8 To 4500 N ...... 5-8 Tandem Unitized, Rubber, Inch ...... 7-9 G Washer Type, Silicone Rubber & Steel, Inch.7-16 Channel, Steel & Rubber, Inch ...... 6-10 Geargrip Flexible Couplings, Inch ...... 9-11 Cup Type, Rubber, Inch ...... 2-11 Gel, Silicone (See Silicone Gel Mounts, Pads, Tape & Chips) Cylindrical, Grommets, Vinyl Elastomer, Inch ...... 7-14 Female-Blank, I Sorbothane®, Inch...... 1-31 Isolators, Cable, Inch Metric ...... 1-32 1/16" & 3/32" Cable Dia...... 5-24 Urethane, Inch...... 1-29 1/8" & 5/32" Cable Dia...... 5-25 Female-Female, 3/16" Cable Dia., Rubber, Inch ...... 1-28 Large O.D., Light Duty ...... 5-27 Male-Blank, Small O.D., Standard Duty ...... 5-26 Sorbothane®, 1/4" Cable Dia...... 5-28 Inch...... 1-31 3/8" Cable Dia...... 5-29 Metric ...... 1-32 1/2" Cable Dia...... 5-30 Urethane, Inch...... 1-30 Technical Information ...... 5-23 Male-Female, Iso-Pad Sheets, Neoprene, Inch...... 1-24 Vinyl Chloride Elastomeric Resin, Inch ...... 8-3 Rubber, Iso-Pad Type Leveling Mounts, Inch ...... 3-5 Inch...... 1-26 Iso-Pads, Metric ...... 1-27 Vinyl Chloride Elastomeric Resin, Patterned, Inch. 8-2 Sorbothane®, J Inch...... 1-31 Metric ...... 1-32 Jaw Type Flexible Couplings, Inch ...... 9-10 Urethane, Inch...... 1-29 Male-Male, K Rubber, “K” Type Flexible Couplings Inch...... 1-5 Inch ...... 9-12 Metric ...... 1-17 Metric...... 9-13 Sorbothane®, L Inch...... 1-31 Metric ...... 1-32 A-1 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Alphabetical Index

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

(Mounts, cont'd) (Mounts, cont'd) Urethane...... 1-30 Stainless Steel Mesh, Inch Finger-Flex Type, Rubber, Inch ...... 2-9 To 1000 lbs...... 5-17 Finger-Flex, To 1600 lbs...... 5-18 Rubber, Inch To 16000 lbs. & 20000 lbs...... 5-19 To 12 lbs...... 7-3 Suspension, Metric To 25 lbs...... 7-4 Rubber Type ...... 4-3 To 37 lbs...... 7-5 Spring and Rubber Type ...... 4-2 To 80 lbs...... 7-6 V-Style, Rubber, Metric ...... 2-19 To 350 lbs...... 7-7 V10Z32 Selection Criteria Technical Information ... 5-11 Leveling, M-Style Mounts, Rubber, Metric ...... 2-18 Carry, Steel Ball and Rubber, Metric...... 3-7 N Conical Type, Rubber, Metric ...... 3-6 Iso-Pad Type, Inch ...... 3-5 Neo-Flex Couplings, Neoprene, to 2500 lbs., Inch ...... 3-2 Long, to 12000 lbs., Inch ...... 3-4 Inch ...... 9-4 Stainless Steel Mesh, to 10000 lbs., Inch.... 3-3 Metric ...... 9-5 M-Style, Rubber, Metric ...... 2-18 Short, Plate Type, Rubber, Inch ...... 2-4 Inch ...... 9-2 Rectangular, Rubber, Inch ...... 2-21 Metric ...... 9-3 Ring, Neoprene Base Mounts, Inch Male-Male, Rubber, Inch ...... 1-37 Diamond Base...... 2-15 Modular, Heavy-Duty, Rubber, Metric ...... 1-38 Rectangular Base ...... 2-16 Silicone Gel, Metric Neoprene Mounts, Cylindrical, Male-Female, Inch .. 1-24 Base Type...... 2-3 O Bolt Type...... 7-15 Spring Type, Miniature ...... 5-14 One-Piece Flexible Couplings, Inch ...... 9-14 Stud Type, Male-Male ...... 1-36 Spring, P Elliptic Leaf Type, Inch Pads, Polymer Damped ...... 5-3 Iso-, Vinyl Chloride Elastomeric Resin, Inch Stainless Steel Mesh Damped ...... 5-5 Patterned ...... 8-2 Technical information ...... 5-6 Sheets, ...... 8-3 Technical Information, (Naval “X”Type) .. 5-2 Silicone Foam, Metric ...... 8-8 Foam Type, Metric Silicone Gel, Metric ...... 8-9 To 1250 N ...... 5-7 Pads-Paired Ribbed, Rubber, Metric ...... 8-7 To 4500 N ...... 5-8 Pads-Single Ribbed, Rubber, Metric ...... 8-6 Pedestal Type, Inch ...... 5-21 Pedestal Type Spring Mounts, Inch ...... 5-21 Silicone Gel Type, Miniature, Metric ...... 5-14 Platemounts, Rubber, Inch ...... 2-4 Single Hole Type, Inch ...... 5-22 R Stainless Steel Mesh Damped, Inch To 10 lbs...... 5-15 Radial Type Bumpers, Elastomer-Polyester, Inch ... 6-6 To 132 lbs...... 5-16 Rectangular Bumpers, Steel & Rubber, Inch...... 6-11 Double Spring, Inch Rectangular Mounts, Rubber, Inch ...... 2-21 To 2469 lbs...... 5-13 Ribbed Paired Pads, Rubber, Metric ...... 8-7 Quad Springs, Inch Ribbed Single Pads, Rubber, Metric ...... 8-6 To 750 lbs...... 5-10 Ring and Bushing Type Bolt Mounts, Rubber, Inch.7-10 Single Spring, Ring Mounts, To 200 lbs...... 5-9 Male-Male, Rubber, Inch ...... 1-37 To 1235 lbs...... 5-12 Modular, Heavy-Duty, Rubber, Metric ...... 1-38 Suspension Type ...... 5-20 Rubber Mounts, Square, Metric ...... 8-5 Square, Rubber Type Suspension Mounts, Metric ...... 4-3 Rubber, S Metric ...... 8-5 Male-Male, Inch...... 1-2 Shaft Couplings Technical Section ...... T2-1

A-2 ANTIV ED IB C R N A T A I V O

D N A Alphabetical Index

C O TS M P O N E N www.vibrationmounts.comvibrationmounts.com Phone: Phone: 516.328.3662 516.328.3662 Fax: Fax: 516.328.3365 516.328.3365

Sheets, Iso-Pad, (Spring Mounts, cont'd) Vinyl Chloride Elastomeric Resin, Inch ...... 8-3 Double Spring, To 2469 lbs...... 5-13 Shock Absorbers, Metric ...... 6-14 Quad Springs, To 750 lbs...... 5-10 Features ...... 6-12 Single Spring, Technical Information ...... 6-22 To 200 lbs...... 5-9 Silicone Foam Pads, Metric ...... 8-8 To 1235 lbs...... 5-12 Silicone Gel Mounts, Metric Suspension Type, Inch ...... 5-20 Applications ...... 1-35 Square Mounts, Male-Male, Rubber, Inch ...... 1-2 Base Type ...... 2-3 Square Rubber Mounts, Metric ...... 8-5 Bolt Type ...... 7-15 Stainless Steel Mesh Mounts, Inch Spring Type, Miniature ...... 5-14 To 1000 lbs...... 5-17 Stud Type, Male-Male ...... 1-36 To 1600 lbs...... 5-18 Technical Information ...... 1-34 To 16000 lbs. & 20000 lbs...... 5-19 Silicone Gel Pads, Metric ...... 8-9 Suspension Mounts, Silicone Tape & Chips, Metric ...... 8-10 Spring and Rubber Type, Metric ...... 4-2 Single Hole Type Spring Mounts, Inch ...... 5-22 Suspension Type Spring Mounts, Inch ...... 5-20 Solo Unitized Bolt Mounts, Rubber, Inch ...... 7-8 Sorbothane® Mounts, T Cylindrical, Tandem Unitized Bolt Mounts, Rubber, Inch ...... 7-9 Female-Blank, Tape, Silicone Gel, Metric ...... 8-10 Inch ...... 1-31 Technical Information, Metric ...... 1-32 Base Mounts, Neoprene ...... 2-17 Male-Blank, Bolt Mount Silicone vs. Rubber ...... 7-17 Inch ...... 1-31 Bumper (English Units) ...... 6-2 Metric ...... 1-32 Cable Isolators ...... 5-23 Male-Female Elliptic Leaf Type Spring Mounts ...... 5-6 Inch ...... 1-31 Finger-Flex Mounts ...... 7-2 Metric ...... 1-32 Proper Application of Silicone Gel Mounts ...... 1-35 Male-Male Shock Absorber Features ...... 6-12 Inch ...... 1-31 Shock Absorber Stroke Control ...... 6-13 Metric ...... 1-32 Shock Absorbers (Metric Units) ...... 6-22 Technical Information ...... 1-33 Silicone Gel Mounts ...... 1-34 Spider Type Flexible Couplings, Sorbothane® ...... 1-33 Inch ...... 9-8 Spring Mounts, Elliptic Leaf Type (Naval “X” Type). 5-2 Metric ...... 9-9 V10Z32 Mounts Selection Criteria ...... 5-11 Spline Type Flexible Couplings, Technical Section, Shaft Couplings ...... T2-1 Inch ...... 9-6 Vibration Mounts ...... T1-1 Metric ...... 9-7 Spring and Rubber Type Suspension Mounts, U Metric ...... 4-2 Urethane Mounts, Spring Mounts, Cylindrical, Inch Damped Type, Inch Female-Blank ...... 1-29 Stainless Steel Mesh Damped, To 132 lbs. . 5-16 Male-Blank ...... 1-30 Elliptic Leaf Type, Inch Male-Female ...... 1-29 Polymer Damped...... 5-3 Male-Male ...... 1-30 Stainless Steel Mesh Damped ...... 5-5 Technical information ...... 5-6 V Technical Information (Naval “X” Type) ...... 5-2 Vibration Mounts, Technical Section ...... T1-1 Foam Type, Metric Vibration Transmissibilty Charts ...... 2-24 To 1250 N ...... 5-7 Vinyl Elastomer Grommets, Inch...... 7-14 To 4500 N ...... 5-8 V-Style Mounts, Rubber, Metric ...... 2-19 Pedestal Type, Inch ...... 5-21 Silicone Gel Type, Miniature, Metric ...... 5-14 W Single Hole Type, Inch ...... 5-22 Washer Type Bolt Mounts, Stainless Steel Mesh Damped, Inch Silicone Rubber & Steel, Inch ...... 7-16 To 10 lbs...... 5-15 Washers for Bolt Mounts, Steel, Inch ...... 7-13 Advanced Antivibration Components

vibrationmounts.com Phone: 516.328.3662 Fax: 516.328.3365